JP7396799B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines and spinning drum gaming machines .

For example, various gaming machines are widely known, such as pinball gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, and reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines.

Note that the following Patent Document 1 can be cited as a related prior art.

Patent No. 5956529

Modern gaming machines are equipped with display means for displaying information related to gaming results and display devices for displaying various performance images. Since the above-mentioned display means mainly displays information aimed at hall personnel, it is important to display accurate information. On the other hand, since the above-mentioned display devices primarily display information aimed at players, it is important to display highly complex and rich performance images.
In this way, appropriate display control operations should be performed for various display devices such as display means and display devices installed in gaming machines, depending on their characteristics. Improvement is desired.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to further improve display control operations according to the characteristics of various display devices (display means and display devices) provided in gaming machines .

A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a control means for performing control processing related to a game, a storage means from which information can be read and written by the control means, and a clearing process for clearing information in the storage means. Specifying display content to be displayed on a storage information clearing means, a display means for displaying predetermined information calculated based on gaming results, a display control means for controlling the display of the display means, and a display device for displaying an image. image control means for issuing a display list issued by the image control means; image generation means for causing a drawing circuit to complete predetermined image data in a predetermined first memory based on the display list issued by the image control means; a second memory for storing various types of compressed data serving as basic data of image data; the first memory has a configurable expansion space for expanding compressed data for moving images; The expansion destination of the compressed data can be designated as the expansion space by a predetermined instruction command listed in the list, and the expansion space necessary for expansion of the compressed data is automatically generated as necessary. The image generation means includes a data transfer circuit that transfers the configuration data of the display list received from the image control means in units of predetermined acquired bits to the drawing circuit in units of predetermined transfer bits. , the bit length of all instruction commands listed in the display list is configured to be an integer N (N≧1) times the acquired bit unit, and the display control means, after the clearing process is completed, The operation confirmation display of the display means is executed for a predetermined period of time.

According to the above configuration , since the operation confirmation display is not performed during execution of the clearing process for the display means that displays the predetermined information calculated based on the gaming results, the display control operation of the display means can be optimized. . Furthermore, for a display device that displays an image, the display control operation can be optimized by adopting the compressed data expansion method as described above.

According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the display control operation according to the characteristics of various display devices (display means and display devices) provided in the gaming machine .

FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of a gaming machine as an embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a game board of a game machine as an embodiment. It is a block diagram showing a control configuration of a gaming machine as an embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a prefetch preview performance in the embodiment. It is a flow chart showing main processing on the main control side of the embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process in FIG. 5. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing power abnormality check processing according to the embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the operational judgment conditions for transitioning to setting change processing, RAM clearing processing, setting confirmation processing, and backup restoration processing and the values of the W register. 6 is a flowchart showing main loop processing in FIG. 5. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the setting change process in FIG. 5. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the output management process in FIG. 10. It is a figure showing an example of a 7 segment decoding table. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a segment configuration and a segment display pattern on a setting value display. 6 is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing in FIG. 5. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process in FIG. 5. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a set value offset conversion table. 6 is a flowchart showing main loop pre-processing in FIG. 5. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing main control side timer interrupt processing according to the embodiment. 19 is a flowchart showing the power check/backup process in FIG. 18. 19 is a flowchart showing the setting abnormality check process in FIG. 18. 19 is a flowchart showing special symbol management processing in FIG. 18. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 1 start opening check process in FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 21. 24 is a flowchart showing the variation management process in FIG. 23. 25 is a flowchart showing the jackpot random number determination process in FIG. 24. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot random number determination method of the embodiment. It is a diagram illustrating a random number determination table for jackpot determination used in the jackpot random number determination process. 25 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern lottery process in FIG. 24. FIG. It is a figure showing an example of an outlier fluctuation pattern table of an embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a hit fluctuation pattern table of an embodiment. It is a figure showing other examples of a hit fluctuation pattern table of an embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a common fluctuation pattern table at the time of a setting error according to the embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating another example of the common fluctuation pattern table at the time of a setting error according to the embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of storage of a first data table and a second data table in an embodiment. It is a figure showing other examples of storage of a first data table and a second data table in an embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a storage area structure in a ROM of a main control unit. It is an explanatory diagram of scenario registration information, lamp data registration information, and motor data registration information of an embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram of sound data registration information of an embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram of a main scenario table of an embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a sub-scenario table according to the embodiment. It is a flowchart of production control main processing of an embodiment. It is a flowchart of command analysis processing in production control of an embodiment. It is a flowchart of command correspondence processing in production control of an embodiment. It is a flowchart of production control timer interruption processing of an embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram of display control timing of an embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating one display mode of a setting operation history. It is a figure showing an example of a screen during setting confirmation. It is a figure showing an example of history display information in an embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of backup operation of history display information as an embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of addition processing of individual history information in information for history display. It is a flowchart of power-on history information initialization processing of an embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a process for updating history information in response to the occurrence of a target event for history display. It is a flowchart of history information update processing of an embodiment. It is a flowchart of history display processing of an embodiment. It is a flowchart of history information screen creation processing of an embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating numerical values of setting values that can be expressed in the embodiment. It is a flowchart of the left symbol lottery process of the embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a left symbol lottery table. It is a diagram showing an example of an offset table for left symbol lottery. It is a flowchart showing another example of the left symbol lottery process. 61 is a diagram showing an example of an offset table for left symbol lottery used in the process shown in FIG. 60. FIG. It is a flowchart of the mini-character preview lottery process of the embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a first mini-character preview lottery table. It is a figure showing an example of an offset table for first notice. It is a diagram showing an example of a second mini-character preview lottery table. It is a figure showing an example of a second notice offset table. It is a flowchart of the jackpot effect lottery process of the embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot end INT suggestion element table. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a first offset table for referring to the table of FIG. 68. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a second offset table for referring to the table of FIG. 68. FIG. It is a flowchart of SU preview lottery processing of an embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of an SU effect table. It is a figure showing an example of an offset table for SU stage lottery. It is a figure showing an example of an SU3 replacement table. It is a figure showing an example of an offset table for SU3 replacement. It is a flowchart which shows another example of SU preview lottery processing. 77 is a diagram showing an example of a first offset table for SU3 replacement and a second offset table for SU3 replacement used in the process of FIG. 76. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram about an example of a lottery mode of SU notice performance in an embodiment. It is a flowchart of setting related command processing (S2130e) as a first modification. It is a flowchart of setting related command processing (S2130e) as a second modification. It is a figure showing an example of a setting value conversion table used by an effect control part in a modification. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing types of suggestion effects according to the embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating the timing at which the suggestion effect according to the embodiment is executed. It is a figure showing the relationship between the type of suggestion production and timing of an embodiment. It is a flowchart for executing the suggestive effect (effect 01) of the embodiment. It is a flowchart for executing the suggestive effect (effect 02) of the embodiment. It is a flowchart of command response processing when a customer waiting demonstration command is received in production control of the embodiment. It is a flowchart of command response processing when receiving a decorative design designation command in production control of the embodiment. It is a flowchart for executing the suggestion effect (effect 05) of the embodiment. It is a flowchart for executing the suggestive effect (effect 06) of the embodiment. It is a flowchart of command response processing when receiving a decorative design designation command in production control of the embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a table used when executing the suggestive effect (effect 09) of the embodiment. It is a flowchart for executing the suggestive performance (performance 10) of the embodiment. It is a table and a flowchart for executing the suggestion performance (performance 11) of the embodiment. It is a flowchart for executing the suggestive performance (performance 12) of the embodiment. This is an example of a table used in the re-lottery process according to the embodiment. This is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the suggestive effect (effect 13) of the embodiment. This is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the suggestive effect (effect 13) of the embodiment. This is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the suggestive effect (effect 13) of the embodiment. It is a flowchart for executing the suggestion effect (effect 13) of the embodiment. It is a flowchart for executing the suggestive effect (presentation 14) of the embodiment. This is a table used in the suggestive performance (performance 14) of the embodiment. It is a flowchart of command response processing and a table to be used when receiving a big winning opening winning command in the production control unit of the embodiment. It is a flowchart of command response processing when receiving a jackpot end command in the production control unit of the embodiment. This is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the suggestive effect (effect 16) of the embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a suggestive effect (presentation 17) according to the embodiment. It is a figure for explaining the suggestion production (production 18) of an embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a suggestive effect (presentation 19) according to the embodiment. It is a figure for performing the suggestion performance (performance 20) of embodiment. It is a flowchart for executing the suggestion effect (effect 21) of the embodiment. It is a flowchart for explaining the other production example of embodiment. It is a flowchart for explaining the other production example of embodiment. It is a flowchart for explaining setting value change suggestion production 2 of an embodiment. It is a figure for explaining setting value change suggestion production 3 of an embodiment. It is a figure for explaining the setting value suggestion production 1 of embodiment. It is a figure for explaining the setting value suggestion production 1 of embodiment. It is a figure for explaining the setting value suggestion production 1 of embodiment. It is a figure for explaining the setting value suggestion production 1 of embodiment. It is a figure showing the relationship between the type of suggestion production and execution timing of an embodiment. It is a diagram showing types of jackpot suggestion effects according to the embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the timing at which the jackpot suggestion performance according to the embodiment is executed. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining an example of selective implementation of effects on the gaming machine according to the embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of the relationship between a customer waiting state and an image displayed on a liquid crystal display device according to the embodiment. It is a figure for explaining production 02 of an embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining types and execution timings of effects according to the embodiment. It is a figure for explaining another example of suggestion production 16 of an embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a control configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment (another embodiment) having a 1-CPU configuration. It is a block diagram of production control means of another embodiment. 129 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of main parts of the configuration shown in FIG. 128. FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a display circuit and an LCD interface in another embodiment. It is a functional block diagram schematically representing each functional configuration of a production control section and a liquid crystal control board in the case of a 2-CPU configuration. It is a functional block diagram schematically representing the functional configuration of the production control section of the embodiment having a 1-CPU configuration. It is a flowchart of production control main processing of another embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing various timings within a frame period of display data. It is a diagram illustrating the correspondence between production control commands and liquid crystal control commands. It is a diagram schematically representing an example of scenario data for each performance element determined in response to a performance control command. It is a figure for explaining the flow of processing which a production control part of another embodiment performs in response to reception of a production control command. It is a time chart for explaining the flow of operation in an example in which the preloader does not function. It is a time chart for explaining the flow of operation in an example in which the preloader functions. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating the internal configuration of a data transfer circuit in another embodiment together with related circuit configurations. It is a figure showing an example of an index table in another embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of dividing the VRAM into areas in another embodiment. 7 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between a virtual drawing area that can be arbitrarily set in a virtual drawing space in a VRAM and an actual drawing area (drawing area Ad) in a frame buffer. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the relationship between the entire frame buffer and an effective data area in another embodiment. It is a flowchart of various initial setting processing in another embodiment. It is a flowchart of the drawing update process (when a preloader is not made to function) in another embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a configuration example of a display list. 12 is a flowchart showing a display list issuance process (when DMAC is not used). FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of the CPU issuing a display list to the drawing circuit via the data transfer circuit in the VDP circuit. 12 is a flowchart showing display list issuance processing (when DMAC is involved); 151 is a flowchart showing the DMA start setting process in FIG. 150. 151 is a flowchart showing processing subsequent to FIG. 150. FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of how a display list is transferred to a drawing circuit by DMAC. It is a flowchart of the drawing update process (when making a preloader function) in another embodiment. 155 is a flowchart showing part of the processing in FIG. 154. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a manner of transferring a rewrite list to a drawing circuit in another embodiment. 155 is a flowchart showing another part of the processing in FIG. 154. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a manner in which a display list is issued to a preloader (in a case where DMAC is not used); FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a manner in which a display list is issued to a preloader (when DMAC is involved); FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a modification example in which the drawing start timing is delayed (in which case the preloader is not made to function); FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a modification example (in which a preloader is made to function) of delaying the drawing start timing. It is a block diagram showing the structure of a modification using a CPU that performs only image production control. FIG. 163 is an explanatory diagram of an operation in a modified example based on the configuration of FIG. 162 (when the preloader is not made to function). FIG. 163 is an explanatory diagram of an operation in a modified example based on the configuration of FIG. 162 (when a preloader is made to function); 163 is a flowchart showing normal operation confirmation processing in a modified example based on the configuration of FIG. 162. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a drawing method as a modified example. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of another drawing method as a modified example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the accompanying drawings.

<1. Structure of gaming machine＞
<2. Control configuration of gaming machine>
[2-1. Main control section]
(About changing settings)
(About performance display)
(Production control command)
[2-2. Performance control section]
<3. Overview of operation>
[3-1. Symbol fluctuation display game]
(Special symbol fluctuation display game)
(Decorative pattern variable display game)
(Normal symbol fluctuation display game)
(About suspension)
[3-2. Game state]
[3-3. About the hit]
[3-4. About the production]
(Production mode)
(Preview performance)
(Direction means)
<4. Main control unit processing>
[4-1. Main control side main processing]
(Initial setting process)
(Processing after initial settings)
(main loop processing)
(Setting change processing)
(RAM clear processing)
(Setting confirmation process)
(main loop preprocessing)
(Advantages of the setting value display data table and setting value conversion table as an embodiment)
[4-2. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
(Power check/backup processing)
(Processing for error management and game progress, etc.)
[4-3. Processing related to special symbol fluctuation display game]
(Special design management process)
(Special figure 1 starting gate check process)
(Special symbol variation start processing)
(Variation management processing)
(Jackpot random number determination process)
(Fluctuation pattern lottery processing)
(Advantages of setting value related data table as an embodiment)
<5. Processing of the production control section>
[5-1. Outline of processing]
[5-2. Display of setting history confirmation screen]
[5-3. Regarding data types of setting values in the embodiment]
[5-4. Setting value suggestion]
(Suggestion by the left pattern)
(Suggestion by mini character preview)
(Suggestion performance based on jackpot end performance)
(Suggestion based on SU preview)
[5-5. Regarding the difference in the setting value ranges supported by the main control section and the production control section]
<6. Modified examples of settings-related command processing and setting value conversion>
<7. Other variations related to setting values>
<8. Summary so far>
<9. Suggestions regarding setting values＞
[9-1. Type of performance]
[9-2. Performance timing]
[9-3. Example of production]
(Direction 01) ~ (Direction 21)
(Summary of each performance)
[9-4. Other production examples]
(Set value change suggestion effect 1)
(Setting value change suggestion effect 2)
(Setting value change suggestion effect 3)
(Set value suggestion effect 1)
<10. Suggestive performance regarding jackpot＞
[10-1. Type of performance]
[10-2. Performance timing]
[10-3. Example of production]
<11. Other performances>
<12. Regarding effects that have different appearance probabilities depending on the setting value>
[12-1. 1st example]
[12-2. Second example]
<13. Example of selective implementation in gaming machines>
[13-1. Regarding the appearance timing of the production]
[13-2. Regarding waiting for customers]
[13-3. About prefetching]
[13-4. Regarding fluctuation (first half)]
[13-5. Regarding fluctuation (second half)]
[13-6. About hitting the jackpot]
[13-7. About changing (overall)]
[13-8. Setting value suggestion effect and appearance timing]
[13-9. Jackpot suggestion performance and appearance timing]
[13-10. Production buttons and each production]
<14. Example 2 of selective implementation on gaming machines>
<15. About definitions＞
<16.1 About CPU configuration>
[16-1. Control configuration of pachinko machine]
[16-2. Configuration of production control section]
[16-3. Comparison of functions of production control section]
[16-4. Production control unit processing]
[16-5. Operation example of production control]
[16-6.1 Summary and modifications of CPU configuration]
<17. About image production control>
[17-1. Comparison with and without preload]
[17-2. About the data transfer circuit]
[17-3. About preload data cache]
[17-4. About drawing]
[17-5. CPU processing related to image production control]
(Example of not making the preloader work)
(Example of making the preloader work)
[17-5. Modifications related to image production control and other modifications]

<1. Structure of gaming machine＞

The structure of a pachinko gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the front side showing the external appearance of the pachinko game machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the game board 3 included in the pachinko game machine 1.

A pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "gaming machine 1") shown in FIG. A game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is installed in an attached game board storage frame (not shown), and a game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 is exposed to the opening of the front frame 2. have A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of this gaming area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling game operations are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6, and by inserting a key into this key cylinder and operating it to one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 can be changed. , by operating the front frame 2 to the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 relative to the outer frame 4 can be released and opened to the front side.

A front operation panel 7 is disposed below the glass door 6 and is pivotally supported to the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) so as to be openable and closable. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing ejected game balls.

The upper tray unit 8 also includes a ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 below the gaming machine 1, and a ball removal button 14 for discharging game balls to a game ball lending device (not shown). A ball lending button 11 for making a request and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable medium inserted into the game ball lending device are provided. Further, the upper tray unit 8 is provided with a performance button 13 (operating means) configured to be operable by the player. This production button 13 becomes operable (input accepted) when the built-in lamp (button LED 75) is lit during a predetermined input reception period, and a predetermined operation (pressing, repeated pressing, long pressing, etc.) is performed while the built-in lamp is lit. By doing this, it is possible to bring about changes in the performance.
Although not shown in FIG. 1, the front operation panel 7 is provided with a cross key 16 for users such as players and hall staff to select various items and give directions. There is.

Further, on the right end side of the front operation panel 7, a firing operation handle 15 is provided for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3).

Further, on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and above the firing operation handle 15, speakers 46 are provided to produce a sound production effect (sound effect) by sound. In addition, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 (for example, full-color LEDs for light production, etc.) are provided at appropriate locations on the glass door 6 to provide a light production effect through light decoration. A plurality of full-color LEDs (LEDs for light production) serving as the decorative lamps 45 are provided around the pachinko game machine, that is, around the front frame of the glass door 6 in the circumferential direction.

The configuration of the game board 3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 2. On the illustrated game board 3, a ball guide rail 5 that guides the launched game balls is attached in an annular manner as a board partitioning member, and a generally circular area surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is a game area 3a, The four corners are non-gaming areas.

Approximately in the center of the gaming area 3a, for example, three (left, middle, right) display areas (symbol variation display areas) independently display a plurality of types of decorative patterns (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.). A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 is equipped with a liquid crystal display device (LCD) 36 that is capable of variable display operation (fluctuating display and stop display) of left symbols (compatible with the left display area), middle symbols (compatible with the middle display area), and right symbols (compatible with the right display area). It is provided. In the following description, a plurality of types of decorative patterns that are variably displayed on the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern may be respectively referred to as a "symbol group." That is, for example, the symbol stopped and displayed in the left display area is one of the symbol groups that constitute the left symbol.
The liquid crystal display device 36 displays various effects in the form of images in addition to the variable display operation of decorative symbols under the control of the effect control section 24 to be described later.

In addition, a center decoration 48 is provided in the game area 3a in a form that extends far around the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36. The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3, and protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls. It acts as a channel distribution means that allows channels to be divided into left and right. In this embodiment, the center decoration 48 is arranged approximately at the center of the game area 3a so that the presence of the center decoration 48 forms a flow path for the game ball on both upper sides (left and right sides) of the game area 3a. ing. The game ball shot into the upper side of the game area 3a by the firing device 32 is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame 48b, and is divided into the left downstream path 3b on the left side of the center decoration 48 and the right downstream path 3c on the right side. flow down either.

In addition, the non-gaming area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 serves as a display area for various functions, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is connected to the upper starting port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower starting port 34 (for the first special symbol). A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) are arranged side by side in correspondence with the mouth 35 (for the second special symbol). is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a special symbol variable display game is executed by a variable display operation of a "special symbol" expressed by a 7-segment display. Then, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays a decorative pattern in the form of an image in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of special symbols by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and displays the decorative pattern along with various preview effects (effect images). Symbol variation display games are to be executed (details regarding these symbol variation display games will be explained later).

Further, in the various function display sections, a composite display device (LED display for pending composite display) 38c consisting of a 7-segment display (with dots) is arranged next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. What is called "compound" is the five functions: special symbols 1 and 2, display of the number of pending balls for normal symbol operation, and status notification when the variable time reduction function is activated (time saving mode) and high probability state (high accuracy mode). This is because it is a holding/time-saving/high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as a "compound display device") having a display function.

Further, in the various function display section, a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) formed by arranging a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs is provided next to the composite display device 38c. In this normal symbol display device 39a, a normal symbol variable display game is executed by a variable display operation of normal symbols expressed by two LEDs. For example, as a fluctuating display operation, the normal symbols by LEDs alternately turn on and off like a seesaw, and by stopping with either side lit, it becomes clear whether the normal symbol fluctuating display game is correct or not. There is. Further, a round number display device 39b is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a, which is formed by arranging three LEDs (first to third round display LEDs). This round number display device 39b notifies the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the jackpot based on the combination of the lighting and non-lighting states of the three LEDs.

Below the center decoration 48, an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means) are provided. A normal variable prize winning device 41 is provided above and below, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper starting hole sensor 34a, lower starting hole sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting passage of a game ball are formed inside each. ing.

The upper starting opening 34, which is the first special symbol starting opening, is the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 38a (hereinafter, the first special symbol will be referred to as "special symbol 1", and in some cases may be referred to as "special symbol 1"). This is a winning opening related to the starting conditions for the variable display operation of the ``starting hole'' (hereinafter referred to as ``starting hole opening/closing means''), and is configured as a winning rate fixed type winning device that does not have a starting opening/closing means (means that allows the starting opening to be opened or enlarged). In this embodiment, due to the action of a game ball fall direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, the left flow downward path 3b is caused to reach the upper starting port 34. The game ball that has flown down the right flow path 3c has a configuration that allows the ball to enter (win) easily, whereas the game ball that has flown down the right flow path 3c has a configuration that makes it difficult or impossible for the ball to enter.

The normal variable winning device 41 is configured as a winning rate variable winning device in which the winning rate of game balls in the starting hole can be varied by the starting hole opening/closing means. In this embodiment, the starting opening/closing means includes a pair of left and right movable wings (movable members) 47 that enable the lower starting opening 35, which is the second special symbol starting opening, to be opened or expanded. It is configured as a "type" winning device.

The lower starting port 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is connected to the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 38b (hereinafter, the second special symbol will be referred to as "special symbol 2", and may be abbreviated as "special symbol 2" in some cases). ), and the winning area of the lower starting port 35 is in the open state ( It is converted into a closed state (difficult to win state) which makes it more difficult or impossible to win than the open state. In this embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inactive, it maintains a closed state (a winning impossible state) in which winning to the lower starting port 35 is impossible.

In addition, on both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, there are four general winning holes 43, three on the left side and one on the right side, and inside each one is a general winning hole that detects the passing of a game ball. A mouth sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed. Furthermore, within the area of the game board, a movable accessory (not shown) that provides a visual presentation effect is arranged at a position that does not obstruct the flow of the game balls.

Further, on the diagonally upper right side of the normal variable winning device 41, that is, on the upper side of the middle part of the right downstream path 3c, there is a normal symbol starting port 37 (third starting port) consisting of a passing gate (specific passing area) through which a game ball can pass. means) are provided. This normal symbol starting opening 37 is a winning opening related to the normal symbol fluctuating display operation in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside thereof is a normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) that detects a passing game ball. is formed. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbol starting port 37 is formed only on the right downstream path 3c side, and is not formed on the left downstream path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be formed only in the left downstream path 3b, or may be formed in both downstream paths, respectively.

In the middle of the route from the normal symbol start opening 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right downstream route 3c, there is a special variable winning hole configured to allow the large winning hole 50 to be opened or enlarged by a retractable opening door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a big winning hole sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that enters the big winning hole 50 is formed inside the device 52 (special electric accessory).

The area around the big prize opening 50 is a bulge (decorative member) 55 that bulges out from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of this bulge 55 forms the downstream guide part of the right downstream path 3c. There is. When the big winning opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (big winning opening closed state), by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of this bulging part 55, the downstream guide part of the right downstream path 3c ( It forms part of the upper side 55a). In addition, in the downstream area of the right downstream path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging part 55, or more precisely, in the gaming area above the big prize opening 50, there is a flow path correction plate approximately parallel to the downstream direction of the game ball. 51d is provided in a protruding manner, and serves to draw the game balls flowing down toward the big prize opening 50.

The process of entering the game ball into the grand prize opening 50 is as follows.
The game ball that has passed through the floating area between the top surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guiding rail 5 is placed on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulge portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. It flows down along the river. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the surface of the game board 3, whereby the flowing direction of the game ball is corrected in the direction of the big prize opening 50 (downward). At this time, if the grand prize opening 50 is covered by the push-in type open door 52b (grand prize opening closed state), the game ball rolls on this, and a predetermined array (not shown) is formed. The game nail guides the player in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting port 35). At this time, if the lower starting port 35 is in a winning state (starting port open state), a game ball can be won in the lower starting port 35. On the other hand, if the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the grand prize opening 50 is open (grand prize opening state), the game ball is guided into the grand prize opening 50.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the player aims the firing position toward the special variable prize winning device 52 side (when the player aims so that the game ball passes through the right downstream path 3c), the upper starting port The game ball is configured to be difficult or not guided to the 34 side. Therefore, in the "big winning opening closed state", unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is operated, it is difficult or impossible to win a prize at each starting opening 34, 35. The movable wing pieces 47 are designed to operate in an opening/closing pattern that is more advantageous than in the normal state when the game state is brought about with the electric support state described later.

In the case of this embodiment, the way the player plays to create an advantageous situation changes depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in a gaming state that involves the "state without electric support" described below, it is considered advantageous to "hit to the left" in which the game ball is aimed so that it passes through the left downstream path 3b; If the game state is accompanied by a "presence state", it is considered advantageous to "hit right" in which the game ball is aimed so that it passes through the right downstream path 3c.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when there is a winning in a winning opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37 among the various winning openings provided in the gaming area 3a, a promise is made for each winning opening. The number of prize balls per winning ball (for example, 3 for the upper starting hole 34 or lower starting hole 35, 13 for the big winning hole 50, and 10 for the general winning hole 43) is determined by the game ball payout device 19 (FIG. 3). (see). The game balls that do not enter into each of the above-mentioned winning holes are discharged from the gaming area 3a through the out hole 49.
Here, "winning" refers to a winning opening that takes a game ball into its interior, or a winning opening that is not a structure that takes a gaming ball inside but is a pass-through type gate (for example, the normal symbol starting opening 37). If it is, it means that a game ball passes through that gate, and in reality, if a game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning hole, a "winning" will occur in that winning hole. be treated as such. The game balls related to this winning are also referred to as "winning balls." In addition, if a game ball enters the winning hole, that game ball will be detected by the winning detection switch, so unless otherwise specified in this specification, it does not matter whether the gaming ball is detected by the winning detection switch or not. Regardless, the term "winning" may include the case where a game ball enters the winning opening.

<2. Control configuration of gaming machine>

A configuration (control configuration) for realizing gaming operation control of the gaming machine 1 will be explained with reference to the block diagram in FIG. 3.
The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter referred to as "main control section 20") that controls overall control of gaming operations (gaming operation control), and a main control section. A production control board (production control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as "production control unit 24") which receives production control commands from the production means 20 and centrally controls production execution control (appearance control) by production means, and a prize ball. a payout control board (payout control means) 29 that performs payout control; a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)) that generates and supplies the necessary power to the gaming machine 1 from an external power supply (not shown); It is composed of:
The effect control section 24 is connected to a liquid crystal control section 40 that performs display driving on a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device. The liquid crystal control unit 40 is, for example, a microcontroller mounted on a separate board from various boards such as the main control board (main control unit) 20, production control board (production control unit) 24, payout control board 29, and power supply board. It is configured with a computer.
Note that in FIG. 3, power supply routes to each part are omitted.

[2-1. Main control section]

The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor with a built-in CPU (Central Processing Unit) 201 (main control CPU), and in addition to a control program that describes gaming operation control procedures, it also stores various data necessary for controlling gaming operations. It is equipped with a ROM (Read Only Memory) 202 (main control ROM) for storage and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 203 (main control RAM) that functions as a work area and buffer memory, and constitutes a microcomputer as a whole. .

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 includes a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) and a CPU 201 for realizing periodic interrupts, constant period pulse output generation functions (bit rate generator), and time measurement functions. An interrupt controller circuit that provides an interrupt enable/disable function such as a timer interrupt that provides an interrupt signal, and can output a system reset signal to reset the CPU 201 by detecting power-on, power-off, power abnormality, etc. a reset circuit, a watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors abnormal operation of the control program, and a travel prohibition outside designated area (IAT) circuit that monitors whether the program is being executed correctly within a preset address range. , and a counter circuit for generating random numbers within a certain range using hardware.

The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates random numbers and a sampling circuit that samples random numbers from the random number generation circuit at predetermined timing, and works as a 16-bit counter as a whole. The CPU 201 acquires the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number (random number for jackpot determination (random number size: 65536)) by sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state. , and use that random number for the jackpot lottery. Note that the internal lottery random number is obtained by adding a soft random number generated by appropriate software processing and a hard random number in order to prevent cheating such as trying to win.

The main control unit 20 includes an upper starting hole sensor 34a that detects winning (ball entering) into the upper starting hole 34, a lower starting hole sensor 35a that detects winning into the lower starting hole 35, and a normal symbol starting hole 37. A normal symbol starting hole sensor 37a that detects the passage of the symbol, a big winning hole sensor 52a that detects winning to the big winning hole 50, a general winning hole sensor 43a that detects winning to the general winning hole 43, and an out hole 49. An OUT monitoring switch 49a is connected to detect game balls (out balls) ejected from the main controller 20, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals output from these. The main control unit 20 is able to grasp which winning hole the game ball has entered based on the detection signals from each sensor.

In addition, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling opening and closing of the opening door 52b of the large winning opening 50. are connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit control signals for controlling these.

Further, a special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control section 20, and the main control section 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for controlling the display of the special symbols 1 and 2. . Furthermore, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected to the main control unit 20, and is capable of transmitting a control signal for displaying and controlling the normal symbols.

Further, a composite display device 38c and a round number display device 39b are connected to the main controller 20, and the main controller 20 outputs control signals for display-controlling various information displayed on the composite display device 38c, round number display device 39b, etc. It is possible to transmit a control signal for controlling the display of the prescribed round number of jackpots displayed on the number display device 39b.

Further, an external centralized terminal board 21 for the frame is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 controls the hall computer HC provided outside the gaming machine via the external centralized terminal board 21 for the frame. It is possible to transmit game information (for example, jackpot information, prize ball number information, symbol variation execution information, etc.).
The hall computer HC is an information processing device (computer device) for monitoring gaming information from the main control unit 20 and comprehensively managing the operating status of the gaming machines in the pachinko hall.

Furthermore, a payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and when it is necessary to pay out prize balls, a control command regarding payout (number of prize balls) is sent to the payout control board 29. It is possible to send a payout control command that specifies a payout control command.

A launch control board (launch control unit) 28 that controls the launch device 32 and a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 that pays out game balls are connected to the payout control board 29. The main roles of this payout control board 29 include receiving payout control commands from the main control unit 20, controlling the prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control commands, and transmitting status signals to the main control unit 20. It is.

The game ball payout device 19 is provided with an out-of-supply detection sensor 19a that detects a lack of supply of game balls, and a ball count sensor 19b that detects the game balls (prize balls) to be paid out. It is possible to receive each detection signal. Further, the game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 19c that drives a ball payout mechanism (not shown) for paying out game balls, and a payout control board 29 is configured to control the payout motor 19c. control signals can be transmitted.

Further, the payout control board 29 includes a full detection sensor 60 that detects when the upper tray 9 is full of game balls (in this embodiment, a detection sensor that detects the stored state of game balls stored in the upper tray 9). , a front door open sensor 61 (in this embodiment, a detection sensor that detects at least the open state of the front frame 2) is connected.

The payout control board 29 is capable of transmitting various status signals to the main control unit 20 based on detection signals from the full detection sensor 60, the front door open sensor 61, the out-of-supply detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b. It becomes. The status signals include a ball jam signal indicating a full state, a door open signal indicating that at least the front frame 2 is open, an out-of-supply signal indicating an insufficient supply of game balls from the game ball payout device 19, and a prize ball signal. It is configured to be able to transmit various status signals, including a counting error signal indicating insufficient dispensing of balls or an abnormality occurring in the ball counting sensor 19b, and a dispensing completion signal indicating that dispensing operation has been completed. Based on these status signals, the main control unit 20 determines the open state of the front frame 2 (door open error), whether the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal (out of supply error), and whether the upper tray 9 is open or not. Monitor the full state (ball clogging error), etc.

Furthermore, a firing control board 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and is capable of transmitting a permission signal for permitting firing to the firing control board 28. The firing control board 28 controls the energization of a firing solenoid (not shown) provided in the firing device 32 based on the output of the permission signal from the dispensing control board 29, and controls the operation of the firing operation handle 15. This realizes the firing action of the game ball. Specifically, the payout control board 29 outputs a firing permission signal (fire permission signal ON state), and a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 allows the player to touch the handle. The firing operation of the game ball is permitted on the condition that the firing operation handle 15 is detected to be in the position of the ball, and that the firing stop switch (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 is not operated. Therefore, when the firing permission signal is not output (firing permission signal OFF state), no firing operation is performed even if the firing operation handle 15 is operated, and the game ball is not fired. Further, the strength with which the game ball is launched can be changed according to the amount of operation of the firing operation handle 15.
Note that when the payout control board 29 detects the ball clogging error, it transmits a ball clogging signal to the main control unit 20 and stops outputting the firing permission signal to the firing control board 28 (firing permission signal OFF), and the upper tray 9 Control is performed to stop the launch operation until the full state is resolved.
Further, the payout control board 29 outputs a firing permission signal to the firing control board 28 on the condition that firing permission is instructed by the main control unit 20.

Here, the main control section 20 is connected to a setting key switch 94 and a RAM clear switch 98, and is capable of receiving detection signals from these switches.

The RAM clear switch 98 is, for example, a push button type switch for inputting an instruction to initialize a predetermined area of the RAM 203.
The setting key switch 94 is a key switch for switching to a setting change mode (when an ON operation is performed) by inserting a setting key owned by a hall staff and operating the ON/OFF operation when the power is turned on.
Here, the setting change mode is a mode in which the setting value Ve can be changed. The set value Ve is a value representing the level of probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player.

The RAM clear switch 98 is turned on/off in response to the operation of a RAM clear button that is operable with the front frame 2 open. Further, the setting key switch 98 is provided with a corresponding key cylinder into which the above-mentioned setting key can be inserted and removed, and is turned on and off when the setting key inserted into the key cylinder is rotated in the forward direction. It is turned OFF by being rotated in the opposite direction from the ON state. The key cylinder is provided so that it can be operated by inserting a setting key when the front frame 2 is open. Note that the key cylinder functions as an operator that can be operated by inserting a setting key.

In this example, the above-mentioned RAM clear button is also used for changing the set value Ve. Specifically, the RAM clear button also functions as an operator for sequentially advancing the set value Ve.

The RAM clear switch 98 and the setting key switch 94 are provided at appropriate locations inside the gaming machine 1. For example, it is placed on the main control board 20.

Further, a setting/performance display device 97 is connected to the main control section 20 .
The setting/performance display 97 includes, for example, a 7-segment display, and functions as a display means capable of displaying a setting value Ve and performance information (described later). The setting/performance display 97 is mounted, for example, on the main control unit (main control board) 20 at a position where it can be easily recognized.
The main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for displaying the setting value Ve and performance information to the setting/performance display 97.

Here, the setting value Ve mainly defines the lottery probability (winning probability) of at least a jackpot (a winning type that causes a condition device described below to operate) in stages (for example, six stages of settings 1 to 6). The higher the setting value Ve, the higher the winning probability (setting 1 is the lowest winning probability, and from then on, the winning probability increases in ascending order of the setting value), which works in the player's favor. There is. In other words, the higher the set value Ve is, the higher the so-called "machine discount (ball payout rate, payout rate)" becomes, which is advantageous to the player.
In this way, the set value Ve is a value that defines the probability of winning a jackpot, a machine discount, etc., and it means a value for a grade related to the likelihood of occurrence of a specific event such as a profit state that affects the player. , in this embodiment, the advantage of the game is defined according to each set value Ve.

In this example, it is assumed that there are six stages (stages of advantageousness) of the setting value Ve that can be used according to the rules. Specifically, it is assumed that the legally usable range of the set value Ve (hereinafter referred to as "usable range Re") is in the range of "1" to "6".
Under this premise, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example uses only some of the setting values Ve that can be used according to the regulations. Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 of this example uses only three values, for example, "1", "2", and "6" among the set values Ve within the usable range Re, "1" to "6". do. In other words, the specification limits the probability of winning to three stages instead of six, which is the maximum according to the rules.
Hereinafter, the range of the setting value Ve actually used in the pachinko game machine 1, specifically the range of the setting value Ve actually used among the setting values Ve within the usable range Re (in the above example, "1 ”, “2”, and “6”) is expressed as “usage range Ru”.

The set value Ve is set exclusively by hall staff such as hall clerks based on the business strategy of the hall (gaming parlor). In addition, when there are multiple types of jackpots, the winning probability of which jackpot is changed according to the set value Ve, and the type of jackpot to be targeted can be determined as appropriate. For example, if there are three types of jackpots, jackpots 1 to 3, the higher the set value Ve is, the higher the winning probability for all jackpots 1 to 3 may be. The total winning probability may be increased. Furthermore, the probability of winning some jackpots may be increased. For example, only the probability of winning for jackpots 1 and 2 may be increased, and the probability of winning for jackpot 3 may be set to a constant value with all set values Ve.

(About changing settings)

In order to change the set value Ve, in this example, with the power of the gaming machine 1 turned off and the front frame 2 released, the setting key switch 94 is turned ON (operated to the setting change mode side), and While the RAM clear button is pressed (RAM clear switch 98 is ON), power is turned on to the gaming machine 1. Then, the current set value Ve is displayed on the setting/performance display 97, and a transition is made to a "setting change mode" in which the set value Ve (1, 2, 6 in this example) can be changed.

In this example, the determination as to whether or not to shift to the setting change mode is made in the main control side main processing described later (see step S104 in FIG. 5). When the above operating conditions for transitioning to the setting change mode are satisfied, processing for changing the settings is executed accordingly.

After transitioning to the setting change mode, when the RAM clear button that functions as a change operator for the setting value Ve is turned on, the current display value of the setting/performance display 97 changes from 1→2→6→1→ 2→6→...'' within the usage range Ru. When the setting key switch 94 is turned off when the desired setting value Ve is reached, the setting value Ve is determined, and information about the determined setting value Ve is stored (memorized) in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.
Furthermore, when the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the setting change mode is ended and the display on the setting/performance display 97 is cleared.
When the setting change mode ends, the state shifts to a state where game progress is allowed.

(About performance display)

The main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for displaying predetermined performance information on the setting/performance display 97.
Performance information is information that pachinko halls and related agencies want to confirm, and typical examples include information regarding the presence or absence of fraudulent prize balls such as excessive prize balls for gaming machine 1, and the original ball output performance of gaming machine 1. It is. Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the progress of the game itself when the player plays the game, unlike preview effects and the like.

Therefore, the settings/performance display 97 is connected to the inside of the gaming machine 1, for example, the main control section (main control board) 20, the payout control board 29, the firing control board 28, the relay board, the production control section (production control board (liquid crystal The display information is provided at a position where the display information can be viewed when the front frame 2 is in an open state, such as on the control board (including the control board) 24 or the board case (a protective cover that protects the board).

Here, the following information can be specifically adopted as the performance information.

(1) The total number of balls paid out due to winnings during a specific state (total number of prize balls during a specific state: Information (specific ratio information) based on the value (α/β) divided by the number of pieces (β pieces) can be employed as the performance information.
The above-mentioned "total number of paid out balls" refers to the total value of game balls (prize balls) that are paid out when winning in the winning openings (upper starting opening 34, lower opening opening 35, general winning opening 43, big winning opening 50). It is. In the case of this embodiment, there are three upper starting holes 34 or lower starting holes 35, 13 big winning holes 50, and 10 general winning holes 43.
Further, which state to adopt as the specific state can be determined as appropriate depending on the state under which performance information is desired to be grasped. In the case of this embodiment, any state among the normal state, potential state, time saving state, variable probability state, and jackpot game can be adopted. Furthermore, multiple types of states may be measured. For example, the normal state, variable probability state, all gaming states except during winning games, etc., and the types to be measured can be determined as appropriate.
Further, as the period in the specific state, a period in which the jackpot lottery probability is either low probability state or high probability state may be adopted.
Alternatively, the total number of payouts may be determined by excluding one or more specific winning holes from the measurement target (total number of payouts excluding specific winning holes). For example, the total number of payouts may be determined by excluding the big winning hole 50 from the measurement target among the winning holes.

(2) Alternatively, only one of the total number of paid out balls, the total number of paid out balls excluding specific winning holes, and the total number of out pitches may be measured, and the measurement result may be used as performance information.

In this embodiment, the total number of pitches put out during the normal state (number of pitches put out at normal time) and the total number of out pitches during the normal state (number of pitches out at normal time) are measured in real time, and the number of pitches put out at normal time is calculated as the number of pitches out at normal time. The value obtained by multiplying the value divided by 100 by 100 (the value calculated as the number of pieces paid out during normal times÷ the number of pieces out during normal times×100) is displayed as performance information (hereinafter referred to as "normal time ratio information"). Note that the displayed value at this time is a value rounded off to the first decimal place.
Therefore, each data of the number of balls paid out during normal time, the number of out balls during normal time, and the normal time ratio information is stored in the corresponding areas of the RAM 203 (the storage area for the total number of prize balls during the specified period, the storage area for the number of out balls during the specified period, and the storage area for the specified ratio information), respectively. It is designed to be stored (memorized). However, rather than simply permanently measuring and displaying performance information, the measurement is temporarily terminated when the total number of out pitches reaches a predetermined prescribed number (for example, 60,000). This prescribed number is not the total number of out pitches in the normal state, but the total number of out pitches during all game states (including during winning games) (hereinafter referred to as "all state out number"). This total state out number is also measured in real time and stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 203 (all state out number storage area). Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the storage area for the total number of awarded pitches during the specific period, the storage area for the number of outs during the specific period, the specific ratio information storage area, and the storage area for the number of outs in all states will be abbreviated as the "measurement information storage area."

Then, the normal time ratio information at the time of completion is stored in a predetermined area (performance display storage area) of the RAM 203 (the current normal time ratio information is stored), and then the measurement information storage area (normal time payout number, normal time out number and the number of out pitches in all states), then start counting again (start measuring the number of pitches paid out in normal times, the number of out pitches in normal times, the normal time ratio information, and the number of out pitches in all states). The setting/performance display 97 displays the previous normal time ratio information (measurement history information) and the normal time ratio information currently being measured. In addition, it is possible to display not only the previous information but also the history of the time before the last time or the time before that (three times ago), and it is possible to appropriately determine how many times before the information is to be displayed.

Here, in the case of this example, the setting value Ve and performance information are alternatively displayed on the setting/performance display 97. Specifically, in this example, setting changes and setting confirmation are performed only at startup when the power is turned on, so settings and settings are changed in response to the transition to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. The setting value Ve is displayed on the performance display 97, and after setting changes and setting confirmations are completed, performance information is displayed.
Note that the configuration is not limited to displaying the setting value Ve and the performance information on a common display, but a configuration in which the set value Ve and performance information are displayed on separate displays may also be adopted. In that case, the setting value Ve and performance information may be displayed in parallel.

(Production control command)

The main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting various performance control commands including information regarding the special symbol variation display game, information regarding errors, etc. to the performance control unit 24 depending on the processing state. However, in order to prevent fraud such as cheating, the main control section 20 only transmits signals to the production control section 24, and has a one-way communication configuration in which it is not possible to receive signals from the production control section 24. It has become.

Here, the production control command defines the function with a 2-byte structure consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT), and in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit 7 is ON, and Bit 7 of EVENT is OFF. When transmitting this information as valid information, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be sent, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for sending the command to the production control unit 24, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from this setting, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sends the command for the first time. The strobe signal is transmitted. Further, event information is set and output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the strobe signal was transmitted, and a second strobe signal is transmitted after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be active by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period to ensure that the CPU 241 (performance control CPU) can receive commands.

[2-2. Performance control section]

The production control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor with a built-in CPU 241 (production control CPU), a ROM 242 (production control ROM) that stores production data required for production control processing, and a RAM 243 (which functions as a work area and buffer memory). It is mainly composed of a microcomputer equipped with a production control RAM), and is also equipped with an audio control section (sound source IC), an RTC (Real Time Clock) function section, a counter circuit, an interrupt controller circuit, a reset circuit, a WDT circuit, etc. and controls the overall production operations.
The effect control unit 24 of this example includes a memory 244 in addition to the RAM 243 described above as a memory from which information can be read and written. The memory 244 is composed of, for example, SRAM (Static RAM), and the speed at which information is read by the CPU 241 is slower than that of the RAM 243. The RAM 243 is not connected to a backup power supply and is unable to retain stored information when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, whereas the memory 244 is connected to a backup power supply and is unable to hold stored information when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. It is possible to retain stored information even if the
Note that the purpose of the memory 244 will be described later.

The main roles of the production control unit 24 are to receive production control commands from the main control unit 20, to select and decide production based on the production control commands, and to control the liquid crystal control unit 40 to cause the liquid crystal display device 36 to display images. , sound control of the speaker 46, light emission control of the decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs (button LED 75, other performance LEDs (not shown)), operation control of movable objects (accessory objects), and the like.

The liquid crystal control unit 40 is configured as a computer device including a CPU and various types of memory devices, and controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36. The liquid crystal control unit 40 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, and an image that stores image data (effect image data) on which the VDP performs image development processing. A ROM, a VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores the image data developed by the VDP, and a CPU (CPU) that controls the operation of the VDP based on various instructions (such as "liquid crystal control commands" to be described later) from the production control section 24. ROM (liquid crystal control ROM), which stores programs that describe the display control operation procedures of the liquid crystal control CPU and various data necessary for display control, and RAM (liquid crystal control ROM), which functions as a work area and buffer memory. control RAM).
The above-mentioned liquid crystal control CPU controls the operation of the VDP (display driving operation of the liquid crystal display device 36) based on instructions from the production control unit 24, so that images are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 according to instructions from the production control unit 24. will be held.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment shown in FIG. 3 has a CPU for liquid crystal display (CPU of the liquid crystal control section 40) on a separate board from the CPU 241 of the performance control section 24. Such a configuration is generally referred to as a "2 CPU" configuration. On the other hand, a configuration in which a CPU that performs the same function as the CPU of the liquid crystal control unit 40 is mounted in the production control unit 24, that is, a configuration in which the production control unit 24 also functions as the liquid crystal control unit 40 is a “1 CPU” configuration. It is called.

The production control section 24 has a sound control section (sound controller: sound source IC) for a sound generation device 46a including a speaker 46, and the sound signal outputted by the sound control section is amplified by an amplifier section 46d and sent to the speaker 46. Supplied.
The production control unit 24 also includes a lamp driver unit 45d that functions as a light display control unit for a light display device 45a including a decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs, and a movable object motor that operates a movable body (not shown). A motor driver section 80d (motor drive circuit) functioning as a drive control section for 80c is connected. The effect control section 24 instructs the lamp driver section 45d and the motor driver section 80d to control the light display operation by the optical display device 45a and the operation of the movable object motor 80c.

A position detection sensor 82a that monitors the movement of the movable accessory is also connected to the performance control unit 24, and the performance control unit 24 detects the current movement of the movable accessory based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a. The operation mode is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). Further, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, a malfunction in the operation of the movable accessory is monitored, and if a malfunction occurs, it is detected as an error.

Further, the production control unit 24 is connected to the production button 13 and the cross key 16 switches shown as the operation unit 17 in the figure, that is, the operation detection switches of the production button 13 and the cross key 16. 13, and can receive operation detection signals from the cross key 16.

Based on the performance control command sent from the main control unit 20, the performance control unit 24 selects (determines) a performance pattern by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of performance patterns prepared in advance, and Various presentation means are controlled at the right timing to bring out the desired presentation. As a result, it is possible to display a performance image on the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the performance pattern, play sound from the speaker 46, and drive the decorative lamps 45 and LEDs to turn on and off. A ``performance scenario'' in a broad sense is realized by chronologically unfolding the preview performances, etc.).

Here, regarding the production control command, the production control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt process based on the input of the above-mentioned strobe signal transmitted by the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), and receives and analyzes the command. Specifically, the CPU 241 executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing based on the input of the strobe signal described above, and in the interrupt processing realized thereby, acquires a production control command and analyzes the command contents. conduct.
At this time, if an interrupt occurs based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 performs the processing even if an interrupt process based on another interrupt (timer interrupt process that is executed periodically) is being executed. The command reception interrupt processing is performed by interrupting the command reception interrupt, and even if other interrupts occur at the same time, the command reception interrupt processing is performed with priority.

<3. Overview of operation>
[3-1. Symbol fluctuation display game]

Next, an overview of the gaming operation of the gaming machine 1 realized by the control configuration as described above (FIG. 3) will be explained.
First, the symbol variation display game will be explained.

(Special symbol fluctuation display game)

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control unit 2 A "jackpot lottery" will be held by random number lottery. The main control unit 20 causes the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to variably display the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 based on the lottery result to start a special symbol variable display game, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, The symbols are derived and displayed on the symbol display device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

Here, in this embodiment, the jackpot lottery based on winnings in the upper starting slot 34 and the jackpot lottery based on winnings in the lower starting slot 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the jackpot lottery result regarding the upper starting opening 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result regarding the lower starting opening 35 is derived on the special symbol displaying device 38b side. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, on the condition that a game ball enters the upper starting port 34, a first special symbol variable display game is started by displaying the special symbol 1 in a variable manner, On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, on the condition that the game ball enters the lower starting port 35, the special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner and a second special symbol variable display game is started. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time has elapsed, if the jackpot lottery result is "jackpot", a predetermined "jackpot" is displayed. In other cases, the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in a predetermined "miss" manner, thereby deriving the game result (jackpot lottery result).

In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol fluctuation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol fluctuation display game 1", and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 38b side is referred to as "special symbol fluctuation display game 1". The variable display game will be referred to as "special symbol variable display game 2." In addition, unless otherwise necessary, "Special Symbol 1" and "Special Symbol 2" will simply be referred to as "Special Symbol" (sometimes abbreviated as "Special Symbol"), and "Special Symbol Variation Display Game 1" and ""Special symbol variation display game 2" is simply referred to as "special symbol variation display game."

(Decorative pattern variable display game)

Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variable display game is started, the decorative symbol variable display game is started by variably displaying decorative symbols (actual game symbols) on the liquid crystal display device 36. A variety of performances will accompany the event. When the special symbol variable display game ends, the decorative symbol variable display game also ends, a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result is displayed on the special symbol display device, and the jackpot lottery result is reflected on the liquid crystal display device 36. Decorative patterns are derived and displayed. That is, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by a decorative symbol variation display game that includes a decorative symbol variation display operation.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is a "jackpot" (when the jackpot lottery result is a "jackpot"), an effect that reflects the result is developed in the decorative symbol variation display game. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (for example, 7 segments is displayed as “7”), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays “left,” “middle,” and “right.” In each display area of ``, the decorative pattern reflects the ``jackpot'' (for example, in each display area of ``left'', ``middle'', and ``right'', 3 decorative patterns are ``7'', ``7'', ``7''). ” display state).

When this "jackpot" occurs, specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the "jackpot" symbol mode is derived and displayed. After that, the big winning hole solenoid 52c of the special variable winning device 52 is activated and the opening door 52b opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, thereby opening and closing the big winning hole 50, which is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state. A special game state (jackpot game) occurs. In this jackpot game, the opening door 52b allows the jackpot to be opened until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 29.8 seconds) has elapsed or the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot (big jack 50 winning balls) is a predetermined number (maximum number of winning balls: the upper limit of the number of winning balls allowed for a winning opening whose entrance is opened or expanded by one activation of the accessory: for example, 9) A "round game" in which the winning area is opened or expanded until the winning area is reached, and the big winning opening is closed when any of these conditions is met, is played for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, up to 16 rounds). round) repeated.

When the jackpot game starts, an opening performance is first performed to notify that the jackpot has started, and after the opening performance ends, a round game is performed a plurality of times up to a predetermined number of rounds as an upper limit. After the specified number of rounds is completed, an ending effect is performed to notify that the jackpot has ended, thereby ending the jackpot game.

Regarding the information necessary to execute the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 specifically determines the information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the upper starting hole 34 or the lower starting hole 35 (winning). , on the condition that the game ball is detected by the upper starting port sensor 34a or the lower starting port sensor 35a and the starting condition (starting condition regarding special symbols) is met, a lottery is performed to determine whether it is a "jackpot" or "miss". 'Win/Low Lottery (Win Type Lottery)' and 'Symbol Lottery (Win Type (Win Type) Lottery)' where the jackpot type is drawn if it is a 'jackpot', and the losing type if it is a 'loss'. )' (If there is only one type of loss, it is not necessary to perform a type lottery for the loss, so that lottery may be omitted), and based on the lottery result information, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol Also, a special symbol to be finally stopped and displayed (hereinafter referred to as "special stop symbol") is determined according to the winning type.
Then, the main control unit 20 sends a "variation pattern designation command" that includes at least special symbol variation pattern information (for example, information regarding the jackpot lottery result and special symbol variation time, etc.) as a performance control command that specifies the processing state. It is transmitted to the production control section 24 side. As a result, basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the performance control section 24. In this embodiment, in order to provide a rich variety of performances, a "decorative symbol designation command" including information on special stop symbols (symbol lottery result information (information regarding hit type)) is also transmitted to the production control unit 24. It looks like this.

The above-mentioned special symbol variation pattern information can include information specifying whether or not a specific advance notice effect (for example, a "reach effect" or a "pseudo-continuous effect" to be described later) will occur. To be more specific, the special symbol variation patterns are roughly divided into a "winning variation pattern" in the case of a hit and a "loss variation pattern" in the case of a loss, depending on the jackpot lottery result. These fluctuation patterns include, for example, a 'reach fluctuation pattern' that specifies the occurrence of a reach effect, which will be described later, a 'normal fluctuation pattern' that does not specify the occurrence of a reach effect, and the occurrence (overlapping occurrence) of a pseudo-continuous effect and a reach effect. A plurality of types of variation patterns are included, such as a ``reach variation pattern with pseudo-coupling'' that specifies, and a ``normal variation pattern with pseudo-coupling'' that specifies the occurrence of a pseudo-coupling effect but not specifying the occurrence of a reach effect. In addition, in order to secure the production time for the ready-to-reach effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the variation time is usually set longer for the variation pattern that specifies the ready-to-reach effect or the pseudo-continuous effect than for the normal variation pattern.

The production control unit 24 performs time-series display during the decorative pattern variation display game based on information included in the production control commands (here, the variation pattern specification command and the decorative pattern specification command) sent from the main control unit 20. The content of the performance to be developed (performance scenario such as a preview performance) and the decorative pattern to be finally displayed (decorative stop pattern) are determined, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner according to the time schedule based on the variation pattern of the special symbol. A symbol variation display game is executed. As a result, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display device 36 in time synchronization with the variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and during the period of the special symbol variable display game and during the decorative symbol variable display game. The period has substantially the same time width. Furthermore, the performance control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the optical display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a, respectively, in accordance with the performance scenario, and develops various performances in the decorative symbol variation display game. Thereby, the reproduction of images (image production) on the liquid crystal display device 36, the reproduction of sound effects (sound production), and the lighting and blinking driving of the decorative lamps 45, LEDs, etc. (light production) are realized.

In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display results of the special symbol variation display game are reflected in the decorative symbol variation display game. , these two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In this specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games" unless otherwise necessary.

(Normal symbol fluctuation display game)

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 37 (winning), the main control unit 20 performs an "assistance winning lottery" by random number lottery. Based on this lottery result, a normal symbol fluctuation display game is started by displaying the normal symbols represented by the LEDs in a variable manner on the normal symbol display device 39a, and after a certain period of time has elapsed, the result is changed to a combination of LED lighting and non-lighting. It is designed to stop and display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "assistance hit", the display section of the normal symbol display device 39a is set to a specific lighting state (for example, all two LEDs 39 are lit, or "○" and " Among the LEDs representing "×", the LED on the "○" side is displayed in a stopped state (in a lit state).

When this "assistance hit" occurs, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see Fig. 3) is activated, which causes the movable blade 47 to open in an inverted "C" shape and the lower starting port 35 to open. Alternatively, the game ball is enlarged and enters a state where it is easy to enter (starting mouth open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "normal power open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this normal power open game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 is used to open the lower starting port 35 until a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses, or the game in which the lower starting port 35 wins The winning area is opened or expanded until the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4 balls), and when any of these conditions is met, the lower starting port 35 is closed. (twice) is repeated.

(About suspension)

Here, in this embodiment, during the special/decorative symbol variation display game, the normal symbol variation display game, the jackpot game, the normal power release game, etc., the upper starting port 34, the lower starting port 35, or the normal symbol starting port 37 is used. When a winning occurs, that is, when a detection signal is input from the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, or the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, and the corresponding starting condition (symbol game starting condition) is satisfied, This data is stored as data related to the right to start the variable display game, except for data related to the variable display, up to a predetermined upper limit, which is the maximum number of pending memories (for example, a maximum of 4). The pending pending data that has not been subjected to this symbol variation display operation, or the game ball related to the pending data, is also referred to as an "operation pending ball." In order to make the number of activated and reserved balls clear to the player, a dedicated reservation display (not shown) provided at an appropriate location of the gaming machine 1 or a reservation display provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is used. Display the device by lighting it.

Further, in this embodiment, up to four operation holding balls related to the special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol are each stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are reserved as the number of confirmed fluctuations of the special symbol or the normal symbol. In addition, the maximum number of stored balls (maximum number of reserved balls) regarding the special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol is not particularly limited. In addition, all or part of the maximum number of reserved storage numbers for each symbol may be different, and the number can be determined as appropriate depending on the gaming nature.

[3-2. Game state]

The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot, which is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate understanding of this embodiment, various game states will first be explained.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to be able to execute and control at least four types of gaming states: a normal state, a time saving state, a potential state, and a variable probability state. These game states are distinguished by the jackpot lottery probability state (low probability state, high probability state), the presence or absence of the electric chew support state (bonus game) (with electric support, without electric support), etc.

"Electric Chew Support State" means that the opening operation period of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 in the normal electricity open game (at least one of the opening time of the movable wing piece 47 and the number of openings thereof) is in the normal state. Refers to the ``open extension state'' that is extended beyond the . When the open extension state occurs, the opening operation period of the movable blade 47 is extended from, for example, 0.2 seconds in the normal time (under the non-open extension state) to 1.7 seconds, and the number of opening and closing operations is increased, for example, This will be extended from the usual one time to two or three times.
In the case of this embodiment, under the electric chew support state, the lottery probability of winning the support changes from a low probability (for example, 1/256) to a high probability (for example, 255/256) of the predetermined probability (normal probability). At the same time, a 'normal symbol time reduction state' occurs that shortens the average time required for one normal symbol variable display game (normal symbol variable display operation time) (for example, from 10 seconds (reduced to 1 second). Therefore, when the electric chew support state occurs, the normal power release game occurs frequently, resulting in an operation rate improved state (high base state) in which the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is higher than in the normal state. Hereinafter, the state under electric support support will be abbreviated as "with electric support", and the case without electric support will be abbreviated as "without electric support".

In this embodiment, the "normal state" means that the jackpot lottery probability is a low probability (for example, 1/399) of the predetermined probability (normal probability), and the gaming state without electric support (low probability + no electric support). To tell.

"Time-saving state" means that the jackpot lottery probability is as low as in the normal state, but the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (special symbol fluctuation display operation time) is longer than the normal state. It refers to a gaming state in which a 'special symbol time saving state' in which the time is shortened also occurs and the electric chew support state occurs. In other words, during the time saving state, it becomes "low probability + electric support available + special symbol time saving state".

"Potential probability state" is a 'special symbol probability variable state' in which the jackpot lottery probability has changed to a high probability (for example, 1 in 39.9) that is higher than the low probability mentioned above, and a gaming state without electric support (high probability state). probability + no electric support).

The "variable probability state" refers to a gaming state in which the jackpot lottery probability is as high as the probability state, but a special symbol time saving state and an electric chew support state occur. In other words, during the probability change state, it becomes "high probability + electric support available + special symbol time saving state".

Regarding the gaming state, if we focus on the jackpot lottery probability, if the gaming state is "normal state" or "time saving state", at least the jackpot lottery probability will be "low probability state", and if the gaming state is "potential state" or "probable variable state" If the state is 'state', at least the jackpot lottery probability is 'high probability state'. During the jackpot, a jackpot game in which the jackpot is opened and closed occurs, but the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support are the same as the normal state, with a low probability and no electric support.

[3-3. About the hit]

Next, "winning" in the gaming machine 1 will be explained.
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a jackpot lottery (win lottery) is performed for a plurality of types of wins. In the case of this example, the winning types include each jackpot belonging to the jackpot types, such as "normal 4R", "normal 6R", "probable variable 6R", and "probable variable 10R".
Note that the above notation "R" means the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds).

The jackpot type is a hit that triggers the operation of the conditional device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for playing a round game, and a specific combination of special symbols is displayed or a game ball is displayed. This refers to something that activates when passing through a specific area within the grand prize opening.

The above probability variable state ends the high probability state and shifts to a low probability state when the special symbol variation display game has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times: the specified ST number) without winning the jackpot type. This is a so-called "time-limiting definite change machine (ST machine)", and when the specified ST number ends, the game returns to the normal state from the next game. However, it may also be a "general probability changing machine" that continues until the next jackpot is won.
The number of executions of the special symbol variation display game may be the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display game 1 and the special symbol variation display game 2 (the total number of variations of the special symbol 1 and special symbol 2), It may be the number of executions of either one (for example, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game 2). Furthermore, the number of time-saving states is not limited to 60 or 100, but can be determined as appropriate depending on the gameplay. Furthermore, there is no particular restriction on what kind of hit to provide, and it can be determined as appropriate.

Here, in this example, there are a plurality of types of "losses" as well as jackpot types. Specifically, three types of deviations are provided: "missing 1", "missing 2", and "missing 3".
As described above, if the result of the winning lottery is "losing", a lottery of the losing type is performed in the symbol lottery.

[3-4. About the production]
(Production mode)

Next, the performance mode (performance state) will be explained. The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of performance modes for presenting performances related to the gaming state, and is configured to be able to switch between the performance modes. Specifically, a normal performance mode, a time-saving performance mode, a probability performance mode, and a probability variable performance mode are provided, each corresponding to a normal state, a time-saving state, a probability state, and a probability-variable state. In each production mode, the background display as the background of the fluctuating display screen of decorative symbols is displayed with a different background effect, so that the player can understand what kind of gaming state he or she is currently in. It has become.

The performance control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a functional unit (performance state transition control means) that controls transition between multiple types of performance modes. The production control unit 24 (CPU 241) responds to a specific production control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifically, a production control command that includes gaming state information managed on the main control unit 20 side. Based on this, the current gaming state is grasped in a manner that maintains consistency with the gaming state managed by the main control unit 20 side, and the system is configured to be able to control transition between a plurality of types of performance modes. Examples of the above-mentioned specific performance control commands include a variation pattern designation command, a decorative symbol designation command, and a game state designation command sent when a change occurs in the game state.

(Preview performance)

Next, the preview performance will be explained. The performance control unit 24 performs various operations related to the current performance mode and the jackpot lottery result based on the content of the performance control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, at least the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern designation command. It is configured to be able to control the appearance of "notice effects". This kind of preview performance is used as a "stimulation performance" to suggest (notice) the level of expectation as to whether or not the winning type has been won (hereinafter referred to as "win expectation level"), and to arouse the player's expectation of winning. work. Typical preview performances include "reach performance,""pseudo-continuationperformance," and even "pre-read preview performance." The performance control unit 24 functions as a preview performance control means that can control the execution (appearance) of these performances.

"Reach effect" refers to a performance mode that involves a reach state (fluctuating display mode that involves a reach state: reach variation pattern), and specifically, a method that derives and displays the final game result via a reach state. It refers to the style of production. The reach effects include multiple types of reach effects associated with the degree of expectation of winning. For example, there are cases where the expectation of winning is relatively higher than when a normal reach effect appears. This kind of reach performance is called ``super reach performance.'' Many of these "super reaches" have a relatively longer production time (fluctuating time) than normal reaches in order to stimulate expectations of winning. In addition, normal reach and super reach include multiple types of reach effects. In this example, Super Reach includes multiple types of reach effects such as Super Reach 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the winning expectation of Super Reach 1 to 4 is expressed as "Super Reach 1 < Super Reach 2 < Super Reach". The relationship is “Reach 3 < Super Reach 4”.

"Pseudo-continuous performance" refers to a performance mode that involves a pseudo continuous variation display state (pseudo-continuous variation) of decorative symbols. It refers to a variable display mode in which a display operation is repeated one or more times, in which a part or all of a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and then the decorative pattern is re-variably displayed from the temporarily stopped state. In this respect, it is different from the later-described "pre-read preview performance (continuous preview performance)" which is developed over multiple symbol change display games. Basically, the occurrence rate (appearance rate) of such "pseudo-links" is determined so that the higher the number of pseudo fluctuations, the higher the expectation of winning.For example, depending on the number of pseudo fluctuations, It is made easier to select performances to arouse expectations such as reach.

"Pre-reading notice effect" (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "pre-reading notice" or "pre-reading effect") is, based on the result of pre-reading judgment, before the fluctuation display of the target symbol is performed. It means an effect that alerts you to the possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state. Note that "advantageous state" means a state advantageous to the player.
Specifically, the look-ahead performance in this example mainly displays pending balls (unexploited pending balls) that have not yet been used for the execution of the symbol variation display game (variable display operation of special symbols). It is performed in a presentation manner that can notify the winning expectation in advance before the operation pending ball is used in the symbol variation display game, using the pattern and background effects of the symbol variation display game to be executed first. . In addition, in the symbol variation display game, in addition to the above-mentioned "reach effect", there are various effects such as the so-called "SU (step up) notice effect", "timer notice effect", "resurrection effect", and "premier notice effect". This occurs and is designed to liven up the game content.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the "suspended change notice performance" as an example of the above-mentioned pre-read notice performance will be described.
In the case of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper display area of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 includes a display area for displaying a decorative symbol variable display game (a display area for displaying a decorative symbol variable display effect and a preview effect). In addition, the lower display area in the screen includes a hold display area 76 (hold display areas a1 to d1) that displays the number of active hold balls on the special symbol 1 side, and a special symbol A holding display area 77 (holding display parts a2 to d2) for displaying the number of active holding balls on the second side is provided. Regarding the presence or absence of an operation pending ball, this fact is notified by a predetermined pending display mode. In Fig. 4, the presence or absence of an operation-holding bulb is shown in a lit state (with an operation-retaining bulb: "○ (white circle mark)" in the figure) or in an off state (without an operation-retaining bulb: a broken-line circle in the illustration). An example is shown in which information regarding the number of pending pitches is reported.

Displays regarding the presence or absence of pending action balls (pending display) are displayed in order of occurrence (order of winning), and in each pending display area 76, 77, the leftmost action pending ball indicates that all actions in the pending display are displayed. It is displayed as the activated suspended ball that occurred first (that is, the oldest) among the suspended balls on the time axis. Further, on the left side of the holding display areas 76 and 77, a fluctuating display area 78 is provided to show the activated holding balls that are currently being used in the special symbol changing display game. In the case of the present embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which an icon of a game currently being played pending K is displayed on top of the icon of the catch J. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the icon (icon image) of the oldest pending a1 or a2 displayed in the pending display areas 76 and 77 is changed to the icon (icon image) of the oldest pending K during game execution. As an icon, it moves onto the icon of the catch J in the changing display area 78, and this state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

When a pending ball occurs, the main control unit 20 sends the pre-read judgment information related to the jackpot lottery result and the number of pending balls at the time of the pre-read judgment (the number of pending balls that currently exist, including the currently-occurred pending ball). A "pending addition command" specifying this is sent to the production control unit 24 (see steps S1309 to S1312 in FIG. 22).
In the case of this embodiment, the pending addition command is composed of 2 bytes, and the pending addition command includes data on the upper byte side that makes it possible to specify the number of active pending balls at the time of look-ahead judgment, and the look-ahead judgment information. It consists of lower byte side data.

Here, as understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, based on the occurrence of a winning in the upper starting hole 34 or the lower starting hole 35 and a new held ball, a pre-reading of the held ball is performed. As a determination, a jackpot lottery is performed for the symbol variation display game related to the reserved ball. As will be described later, the main control unit 20 holds and stores information representing the result of the jackpot lottery conducted as such a pre-read determination in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203.
The information on the jackpot lottery result obtained during the pre-reading determination is used to select (lottery) a symbol variation pattern in the symbol variation display game, and can be referred to as "variation pattern selection information". Therefore, it can be said that the main control unit 20 performs a pre-read determination and stores the resulting "variation pattern selection information" in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

When the effect control unit 24 receives the above-mentioned pending addition command transmitted by the main control unit 20, based on the pre-read determination information included therein, the effect control unit 24 performs a “pre-read preview effect” as part of the display control process related to the above-mentioned pending display. Performs production control processing related to. Specifically, a "pre-read preview lottery" is held to determine whether or not the pre-read preview performance can be executed, and if the lottery is won, the pre-read preview performance is made to appear.

Here, the look-ahead determination information specifically refers to the jackpot lottery result (the jackpot lottery result at the start of fluctuation) executed when the operation-reserved ball is used in the symbol fluctuation display game in the main control unit 20; This is game information obtained by pre-reading and determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation. In other words, this information includes at least information that pre-reads and determines the winning/losing lottery results at the start of fluctuation (pre-read winning/losing information), and also includes information that pre-reads and determines the symbol lottery results (pre-read symbol information) and fluctuations at the start of fluctuation. It is possible to include information on which a pattern has been pre-read and determined (pre-read variation pattern information). What kind of information to send the pending addition command to the production control unit 24 can be determined as appropriate depending on the content to be notified in the pre-read notice.
In this example, it is assumed that the pending addition command includes pre-read win/loss information, pre-read symbol information, and pre-read variation pattern information.

In addition, the "pre-read fluctuation pattern" obtained by the pre-read judgment when the action-holding ball occurs does not necessarily have to be the "fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation" obtained when the action-holding ball is actually subjected to the fluctuation display operation. There isn't. For example, to describe a typical case where the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that specifies "Super Reach 1", in this case, the content specified by the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is "Super Reach 1". Rather than specifying the type of reach performance itself, it is possible to specify the essential "super reach type".

In the case of the present embodiment, if you win the pre-read preview lottery, the pending icon that is the target of the pre-read preview among the pending icons in the pending display areas a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 will be displayed as a normal hold display, for example. "Pending display change" that can change from white (normal pending display mode) to a pending display (special pending display mode) with blue, green, red, and danger patterns (or special colors and patterns such as rainbow colors) for advance notice. A pre-read preview performance (also referred to as a "pending change notice") of "Kei" will be performed.
FIG. 4 shows an example in which the hatched operation reservation sphere of the reservation display section b1 has changed to a special reservation display. Here, the display of the pending icon in blue, green, red, and danger pattern means that the expectation of winning is high in this order.In particular, the display of the pending icon with the danger pattern indicates that the expectation of winning the jackpot is extremely high. It is said to be a premium hold icon that will be displayed.

(Direction means)

Various effects on the game machine 1 are produced by effect means provided in the game machine 1. This presentation means may be any stimulus transmission means that can produce a presentation effect by appealing to human senses such as visual, auditory, and tactile senses, and may be a light generating means such as a decorative lamp 45 or an LED device (light display device 45a: (light production means), a sound generation device such as the speaker 46 (sound production device 46a: sound production means), a production display device (display means) such as the liquid crystal display device 36, a pressure device that transmits contact pressure to the operator's body, Typical examples include wind pressure devices that apply wind pressure to the player's body, and movable accessories that produce visual effects through their movements. Here, the effect display device is a visually appealing display device like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it also includes devices that do not rely on images (for example, a 7-segment display). When referred to as an image display device, it mainly refers to a type that displays effects by displaying images, and devices that express effects by other than images, such as a 7-segment display, are included in the concept of effect display device.

<4. Main control unit processing>

Next, the processing performed by the main control unit 20 of this embodiment will be explained. The main control unit 20 processes mainly a predetermined main process (main process on the main control side: FIG. 5) and a timer interrupt process activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (timer interrupt process on the main control side: FIG. 18). It consists of:

[4-1. Main control side main processing]

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control side.
Main processing on the main control side is started when a system reset occurs due to a system reset signal from the power supply board when recovering from a power outage or power failure, or when the watchdog timer function is activated due to a control program running out of control. WDT) is activated and the CPU 201 is forcibly reset (WDT reset). In either case, when the main processing is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) first executes the initial setting processing necessary for starting the gaming operation, such as initializing the values of the registers of each part including the CPU 201. (Step S101).

(Initial setting process)

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process in step S101.
In FIG. 6, when the above system reset or WDT reset occurs, the CPU 201 sets itself to an interrupt disabled state in step S201, and then stores the value of the stack pointer in the RAM 203 in the stack area as a stack pointer setting process in step S202. Execute the process to set corresponding to the final address of . Then, in the subsequent step S203, processing is performed to invalidate the RAM protection and invalidate the prohibited area in the function of prohibiting running outside the specified area of the RAM 203.

Next, in step S204, the CPU 201 executes processing for turning off the security signal, setting value display, and firing permission signal. Here, the security signal is a signal output to the hall computer HC through the frame external centralized terminal board 21, and functions as a signal for notifying the hall computer HC of a status such as a setting change. Setting value display OFF means turning off the display of the setting value Ve on the setting/performance display 97.
The firing permission signal is a signal output from the payout control board 29 to the firing control board 28 as described above, and the CPU 201 instructs the payout control board 29 to turn off the firing permission signal.
Here, turning off the security signal and turning off the setting value display are countermeasures against turning on and off the power while changing settings. That is, since there is a possibility that the power was turned off while displaying the set value Ve in the setting change process, the set value display and the security signal are temporarily turned off.

In step S205 following step S204, the CPU 201 executes a power abnormality check process.
As shown in FIG. 7, in the power abnormality check process, the WDT timer is cleared (step S11), and it is determined whether the power abnormality signal is ON (step S12). The power abnormality signal is a signal output from the power supply board, and represents that the power abnormality signal OFF is at a normal level, and represents that the power abnormality signal ON is not at a normal level (that is, abnormal). If the power abnormality signal is ON, the CPU 201 returns to step S101 shown in FIG. 5, and starts the main control side main processing from the beginning. That is, if an abnormality is found in the power supply, the main control side main processing is reset.
If the power supply abnormality signal is not ON, no abnormality is recognized in the power supply, and the CPU 201 ends the power supply abnormality check process.

Returning to FIG. 6, in response to the completion of the power abnormality check process in step S205, the CPU 201 performs various setting processes at the time of startup in step S206. In the setting process in step S206, for example, an interrupt mode setting process for setting a predetermined interrupt mode, an internal hardware random number setting process for activating an internal hardware random number circuit, etc. are executed.

In step S207 following step S206, the CPU 201 sets the activation waiting time of the sub-control board (effect control unit 24). Then, through the processing of steps S208 to S210, it waits for the set activation waiting time to elapse. Specifically, the set startup wait time is subtracted by 1 (step S208), the power supply abnormality check process (step S209) is executed, and if the startup wait time is not zero (step S210:≠0), step S208 Return to processing. The activation of the effect control section 24 is completed by the standby process based on such activation waiting time.

In step S210, if the above-mentioned startup waiting time has elapsed (waiting time = 0), the CPU 201 proceeds to step S211 and transmits a standby screen display command to the effect control section 24.
Upon receiving this standby screen display command, the production control unit 24 displays a predetermined screen display on the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the startup, such as a screen on which characters such as "Please Wait..." are displayed. Performs control for execution.

In response to executing the transmission process in step S211, the CPU 201 advances the process to step S212, and through the processes in step S212 and step S213, performs payout control while executing the power supply abnormality check process (S212: see FIG. 7). It waits for a power-on signal to be sent from the board 29. This power-on signal is a signal that is output when the payout control board 29 starts up normally, and the CPU 201 waits until the payout control board 29 starts up normally. As a result, if the payout control board 29 is not functioning properly due to some trouble, the processing of steps S212 and S213 is simply repeated and no gaming operation is started. Therefore, payout abnormalities such as prize balls not being paid out do not occur, and it is possible to prevent players from feeling distrustful.
If the CPU 201 receives the above-mentioned power-on signal (step S213: ON), it finishes the initialization process of step S101.

(Processing after initial settings)

Upon completion of the above initial setting process, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S102 shown in FIG. 5.
In step S102, the CPU 201 acquires information on input port n (ie, a predetermined input port) and copies it to the W register.
Here, input port n is a 1-byte (8-bit) port, and in this example, the following signals are input. Note that "b0" to "b7" shown below represent bit positions.

b0: Setting key (input signal from setting key switch 94)
b1: Out of supply detection signal b2: Counting error signal b3: Disconnection detection signal 1
b4: Disconnection detection signal 2
b5: Door open signal (detection signal of front door open sensor 61)
b6: RAM clear button (input signal from RAM clear switch 98)
b7: Power-on signal and payout communication confirmation signal

Here, for the setting key b0, "0" means that the setting key switch 94 is OFF, and "1" means that the setting key switch 94 is ON. Regarding the door open signal b5, "0" means the door is closed (front frame 2 is closed), and "1" means the door is open. Furthermore, regarding the RAM clear button b6, "0" means the RAM clear switch 98 = OFF (button non-operation state), and "1" means RAM clear switch 98 = ON (button operation state).

In step S103 following step S102, the CPU 201 masks the value of the W register. Specifically, the values required to perform the transition determination of the setting change processing (S115), RAM clear processing (at least S117 and S118), setting confirmation processing (S109), and backup restoration processing (S111) described below. A process is performed to mask values other than the setting key (b0), RAM clear button (b6), and door open signal (b5).
As can be understood from the above explanation, the condition for transitioning to the setting change process is that both the setting key and the RAM clear button are in the operating state with the front frame 2 open at the time of startup. ing.
Furthermore, in this example, the conditions for transitioning to the RAM clearing process are that, in terms of operation, the setting key is in an inoperable state and the RAM clear button is in an operating state at the time of startup.
In terms of operation, the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation process are that the front frame 2 is open, the setting key is in an operating state, and the RAM clear button is in an inoperable state.
Furthermore, in terms of operation, the condition for transitioning to the backup restoration process is that both the setting key and the RAM clear button are in a non-operating state at the time of startup.

FIG. 8 shows the correspondence between the operational judgment conditions for transitioning to the setting change process, RAM clear process, setting confirmation process, and backup recovery process and the value of the W register.
FIG. 8 shows the order of setting change processing, RAM clearing processing, setting confirmation processing, and determination of transition to backup restoration processing.
As shown in the figure, the judgment conditions for transition to the first setting change process are set key: ON (setting key switch 94: ON), door open: ON (front door open sensor 61: ON), and RAM clear switch 98. : ON, and therefore, the values of the W register must be 0th bit: 1, 5th bit: 1, and 6th bit: 1.
The determination condition for transition to the second RAM clearing process is that the RAM clear switch 98 is ON, and it is determined whether the value of the W register is 6th bit: 1 or not. Here, in this example, the determination to proceed to the RAM clearing process is executed when the transition condition for the setting change process is not satisfied. In addition, the RAM clear switch 98 must be OFF before proceeding to the setting confirmation process and backup recovery process. From these points, if the conditions for transition to the setting change process are not satisfied and the RAM clear switch 98 is ON, it can be estimated that the transition to the RAM clear process is being performed. Therefore, in this example, in the determination of transition to RAM clear processing as described above, in terms of operation, only whether the RAM clear switch 98 is ON or not (6th bit: 1 or not) is determined. It is said that

The judgment conditions for moving to the third setting confirmation process are set key: ON, door open: ON, and RAM clear switch 98: OFF. Therefore, the value of the W register is 0 bit: 1, 5 bit. :1st and 6th bits: 0 is the condition.
Furthermore, the judgment conditions for transition to the fourth backup recovery process are set key: OFF and RAM clear switch 98: OFF, so the values of the W register are 0 bit: 0, 6th bit: 0. It is considered a condition.

Here, regarding the backup restoration process, the transition conditions for only performing the backup restoration process without going through the setting confirmation process are written as setting key: OFF and RAM clear switch 98: OFF on the operation surface as described above. However, regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process is executed, the condition for simply transitioning to the state in which the backup restoration process is performed is that the backup flag described later is ON (step S106). ).

The explanation returns to FIG. 5.
In response to performing the masking process in step S103, the CPU 201 executes a setting change condition satisfaction determination process in step S104. Specifically, in order to determine whether to shift to the setting change mode, it is determined whether the value (3 bits) after masking in step S103 is "111".
If the value after masking is "111" and a positive result is obtained that the setting change condition is met, the CPU 201 executes the setting change process in step S115. That is, processing for newly setting the setting value Ve is performed in response to the operation of the RAM clear button or setting key.
Note that details of the setting change process in step S115 will be explained later.

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the setting key switch 94, the front door open sensor 61, and the RAM clear switch 98, in other words, each detection signal used in determining the transition to the setting change mode. The signals are input to the same input port of the main control unit 20, and it is determined all at once whether the values of each input detection signal satisfy a predetermined condition.
As a result, the number of determination processes can be reduced compared to the case where it is determined individually whether or not the value of each detection signal satisfies a predetermined condition regarding the determination of transition to the setting change mode.

In response to executing the setting change process in step S115, the CPU 201 executes RAM clearing process in step S116. This RAM clearing process includes a process for initializing values in a predetermined area (used area) including a work area in the RAM 203, and a setting for notifying the production control unit 24 side of the end of the setting change process executed in step S115. This includes a process for sending a change end command, the details of which will be described later.

Subsequently, in the previous step S104, if the value after masking in step S103 is not "111" and a negative result is obtained that the setting change condition is not satisfied, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S105 and detects the RAM abnormality. Determine whether or not. Specifically, it is at least determined whether the "setting value" stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is a value outside the usage range Ru (in this example, outside the range of "1", "2", and "6"). do.
Here, the value handled by the CPU 201 regarding the setting value Ve is the setting value Vd. The setting value Vd is a value corresponding to the setting value Ve, and in this example, it is a 1-byte value, and is set to 00H so that at least three stages corresponding to the above-mentioned usage range Ru can be expressed. Values from (0) to 02H(3) are determined. Note that "H" means a hexadecimal number (the same applies hereinafter). In this example, the set value Vd = 00H represents the set value Ve = "1", the set value Vd = 01H represents the set value Ve = "2", and the set value Vd = 02H represents the set value Ve = "6". be taken as a thing. In the main control unit 20, the setting value Vd is mainly handled as the “setting value”, and this setting value Vd is stored in the “setting value” storage area in the work area of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 20. .
In the determination process of step S105, it is determined whether the set value Vd stored in the work area is a value in the range of 00H to 02H.

In step S105, if it is determined that the set value is outside the above usage range Ru (that is, outside the normal range) and that the RAM is abnormal, the CPU 201 performs processing to wait for the power to be turned on again following step S112. From then on.
Specifically, in step S112, the CPU 201 sends an effect control command (setting A process of transmitting a change waiting command) to the production control unit 24 is performed. If a RAM abnormality is detected at startup, the system is forced to enter a setting change mode and accepts changes (settings) to the setting value Ve. For this reason, first, in step S112, the CPU 201 notifies the production control unit 24 side of the transition to the setting change mode by a setting change wait command.
Upon receiving the setting change wait command, the production control unit 24 causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display a screen to prompt a setting change operation, such as a screen containing text such as "Please open the door and change the settings". let At this time, the effect control section 24 may perform control to display a corresponding light effect (for example, lighting all the LEDs in the light display device 45a) and sound effect together with the screen display.

In step S113 following step S112, the CPU 201 sets the backup flag to 00H (that is, OFF), and then repeats the error display process in step S114. In the error display process of step S114, a process for causing the setting/performance display 97 to display an error is performed. This error display process is repeated until the power to the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off, and when the power is turned on again, the processes from step S101 onwards are executed again as the main control side main process. At this time, if an operation to shift to the setting change mode has been performed in accordance with the screen display, etc., the shift to the setting change mode is performed, and the abnormal state of the RAM is resolved.

In step S105 described above, if it is determined that the set value is not outside the usage range Ru and that there is no RAM abnormality, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S106 and checks whether the backup flag is in the ON state (in this example, the backup flag = 5AH is ON).
In the gaming machine 1, when the power is cut off, processing for backing up the information stored in the RAM 203 is performed by power check/backup processing (step S901, see FIG. 19), which will be described later, in the main control side timer interrupt processing. If the backup process is properly performed when the power is cut off, the backup flag is turned on (see step S1010 in FIG. 19). Therefore, in step S106 described above, the backup flag is checked to determine whether or not backup recovery is possible. Specifically, in step S106, it is determined whether the backup flag stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is in the ON state (5AH).

If it is determined in step S106 that the backup flag is not ON, the CPU 201 advances the process to step S112 described above. As a result, if the backup restoration conditions are not met, the transition to the setting change mode is forcibly performed, similar to the case where the RAM abnormality described above is recognized.

Here, as described above, the determination process in step S106 corresponds to the process of determining whether or not the transition to the state in which the backup restoration process is performed is possible, regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S106 that the backup flag is ON, the CPU 201 determines in step S107 whether a RAM clear condition (condition for transition to RAM clear processing) is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the 6th bit of the W register is "1".
If the value of the 6th bit of the W register is "1" and an affirmative result is obtained that the RAM clear condition is satisfied, the CPU 201 advances the process to step S116 described above. As a result, the RAM clearing process described above is executed.

Here, as can be seen by referring to the route from step S107 to step S116 described above, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to clear the RAM without changing settings. This makes it possible to deal with the case where it is desired to clear data other than the data related to the set value Ve, such as data related to payout in the RAM 203.

Further, in step S107, if the value of the 6th bit of the W register is not "1" and a negative result is obtained that the RAM clear condition is not satisfied, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S108 and the setting confirmation condition ( It is determined whether the following conditions (conditions for transition to setting confirmation processing) are satisfied. That is, it is determined whether the value of the W register after masking in step S103 is "110".
If a positive result is obtained that the value of the W register after masking is "110" and the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the CPU 201 executes the setting confirmation process in step S109, and advances the process to step S110. That is, the process shifts to backup restoration processing.
Note that details of the setting confirmation process in step S109 will be explained later.

On the other hand, if the value of the W register after masking is not "110" and a negative result is obtained that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied, the CPU 201 passes the setting confirmation process in step S109 and proceeds to step S110. .

In step S110, the CPU 201 performs a process of transmitting a predetermined production control command corresponding to the backup recovery to the production control unit 24 as a command transmission process at the backup recovery.

In step S111 following step S110, the CPU 201 performs backup restoration processing.
The backup restoration process is a process of restoring the operation before the power is turned off after the power is turned on, based on the storage contents of the RAM 203 that were backed up at the time of the power cut. Specifically, the CPU 201 performs processing for restoring the stack pointer before the power was shut off and starting the gaming operation from the processing state at the time of the power shutoff.
In addition, in the backup recovery process, a power failure recovery display command (OB03H) for instructing information display corresponding to the case of backup recovery is sent to the production control unit 24 in the main loop preprocessing of step S119, which will be described later. Therefore, a process is executed to store the lower byte data of the power failure recovery display command in a register.

When the backup restoration process in step S111 is executed, or when the RAM clear process in step S116 described above is executed (that is, when both the setting change process and the RAM clear process are executed, or when only the RAM clear process is executed) , the CPU 201 proceeds to step S117.

In step S117, the CPU 201 sets the CTC to periodically generate a timer interrupt every predetermined time, such as 4 ms, for example.
By performing the setting process in step S117, an interrupt request signal is periodically outputted to the interrupt controller from then on, and the main control side timer interrupt process is executed.

In the following step S118, the CPU 201 performs a process of transmitting a production control command for instructing the start of the game to the production control unit 24, and then advances the process to step S119 to execute main loop preprocessing, and then executes a process in step S120. Execute the main loop processing.
Note that the main loop preprocessing in step S119 will be explained later.

(main loop processing)

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main loop processing of step S120.
In the main loop process of FIG. 9, the CPU 201 sets itself to an interrupt disabled state in step S601, and executes random number update processing in the subsequent step S602. In this random number update process, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game and normal symbol variation display game (random numbers related to the jackpot lottery that circulate within a predetermined numerical range by increment processing (special symbol determination used in the symbol lottery) Random numbers used to change the initial value (start value) of random numbers related to the auxiliary winning lottery (random numbers for auxiliary winning determination used in the auxiliary winning lottery)) (initial value random numbers for special symbol determination) , the initial value random number for assistance hit determination) and the random number for the variation pattern used for selecting the variation pattern.

The RAM 203 of this embodiment includes a counter for generating the initial value of a random number counter for special symbol determination, a counter for generating a special symbol determination random number counter, and a counter for generating the initial value of a random number counter for special symbol determination, as various random number counters used for symbol lottery related to jackpot lottery, auxiliary hit lottery, variable pattern lottery, etc. A random number counter for generating an initial value of a random number counter for determining an auxiliary hit, a random number counter for determining an auxiliary hit, a random number counter for a fluctuating pattern, and the like are provided. These counters serve as a random number generation means that generates random numbers using software. In the random number update process in step S602, the two initial value generation counters that generate the initial values of the special symbol determination random number counter and the supplementary hit determination random number counter, the fluctuation pattern random number counter, etc. are updated, and the various Generate soft random numbers. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as a random number counter for a variation pattern is "0 to 238", a value is obtained from the count value storage area for generating a random number value for a variation pattern in the RAM 203, and the obtained value is After adding "1", the count value is stored in the original count value storage area. At this time, if the result of adding "1" to the obtained value is "239", "0" is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters are updated in the same way.

After completing the random number update processing in step S602, the CPU 201 performs processing to save the values of all registers in step S603, and then performs performance display monitor total division processing in step S604.
This performance display monitor total division process is a process for calculating the value as the performance information described above (here, for example, the value as the "normal duty ratio information" described above). As mentioned above, the value of the normal time ratio information is calculated using the total number of balls to be paid out and the total number of out balls. It is calculated based on the result of counting the number of game balls that entered the lower starting hole 35, the general winning hole 43, and the big winning hole 50.The total number of out balls is calculated by counting the number of game balls ejected from the out hole 49. Find it by counting.
Counting the number of winning pitches and counting the number of out pitches is performed in the input management process (see step S904 in FIG. 18), which will be described later, in the main control side timer interrupt process. The CPU 201 calculates a value as the normal time ratio information in step S604 based on the count values obtained by counting the number of winning pitches and counting the number of out pitches performed on the timer interrupt processing side in this way. As described above, the calculated value as the normal duty ratio information is stored in a predetermined area (measurement information storage area) of the RAM 203.
The value of the normal duty ratio information calculated in this way is displayed on the setting/performance display 97 by performance display monitor display processing (see step S916 in FIG. 18), which will be described later, in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

In step S605 following step S604, the CPU 201 performs all register restoration processing, and in step S606 that follows, sets itself to an interrupt enabled state, and then returns to step S601.

In this way, in the main loop process of step S123, the processes of steps S601 to S606 are repeated in an infinite loop. The CPU 201 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S601 to S606, except while performing the timer interrupt process, which is executed intermittently.

(Setting change processing)

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the setting change process in step S115.
In this setting change process, a process for setting the setting value Ve based on the operation, and a production control command to notify the production control unit 24 that the setting is being changed or that the setting change has been completed (completed). Processing for sending is performed.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first executes a process of transmitting a setting changing command (BA76H) to the production control unit 24 in step S401.
Upon receiving this settings changing command, the production control unit 24 displays a screen display on the liquid crystal display device 36 to notify that the settings are being changed, such as a screen displaying text such as "Settings are being changed." Processing is performed so that the corresponding sound is output from the speaker 46 during the setting change. Furthermore, at this time, the effect control section 24 may cause predetermined LEDs (for example, all LEDs) in the light generating means (light display device 45a) described above to light up in a predetermined lighting pattern.
Note that the processing executed by the production control unit 24 in response to various production control commands transmitted by the CPU 201 regarding setting changes, including the setting change command, will be described later (FIG. 52A etc.).

In the following step S402, the CPU 201 sets the backup flag to 00H (ie, OFF state), and then sets the system operation status=2 in step S403. This system operation status is information for at least identifying whether or not the setting change process of step S115 has been passed at the time of startup, and "2" indicates that the setting change process has been passed; A value (for example, "0") indicates that the setting change process has not been performed.
As can be seen with reference to FIG. 5, in this example, the RAM Although the clear processing (program) is assumed to be shared, by using the above system operation status, it is possible to share the RAM clear processing program and execute the processing differently in the former case and the latter case. .

In step S404 following step S403, the CPU 201 executes processing to obtain a setting value. Specifically, the setting value Vd (any one of 00H to 02H in this example) stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is obtained.

The processing from step S405 following step S404 is to update the displayed value on the setting/performance display 97 in response to the sequential advance operation of the setting value Ve (operation of the RAM clear button), or the operation to complete the setting change (operation of the setting key). This is a process for setting the setting value Ve in accordance with the operation).
First, in step S405, the CPU 201 decrements the acquired setting value Vd by 1 ("setting value - 1"), and in the following step S406, determines whether the setting value Vd is equal to or greater than "2" (maximum number of stages - 1). (Set value ≧2"). In this example, the maximum value of the set value Vd is 02H (the maximum number of stages is "3"), so it will not be determined that the set value ≧2 in step S406, which is executed for the first time after the start of the setting change process. .
In step S406, if the set value Vd is not 2 or more, the CPU 201 sets the carry flag in step S407 (turns it ON), and increments the set value Vd by 1 (“set value + 1”) in step S408. Then, in step S409, it is determined whether the carry flag is ON. If the carry flag is ON, the CPU 201 executes a setting change command acquisition process in step S411, and transmits the setting change command to the effect control unit 24 through command processing in the subsequent step S412.
Note that the setting change command will be described later.
Then, in response to executing the command transmission process in step S412, the CPU 201 executes the output management process in step S413. Through this output management process, the setting value Ve corresponding to the current setting value Vd is displayed on the setting/performance display 97. Note that details of the output management process in step S413 will be described later.

In step S414 following step S413, the CPU 201 determines whether the setting key is OFF, that is, whether the setting key switch 94 is OFF. It is determined whether the RAM clear switch 98 is ON. If the RAM clear switch 98 is not ON, the CPU 201 re-executes the output management process in step S413.
Through the processing in steps S413 to S415, the CPU 201 waits until either the setting key or the change switch is turned on, and during the standby, displays the current setting value Ve on the setting/performance display 97 through the processing in step S413. Repeat the process for

If the change switch is ON in step S415, the CPU 201 returns to step S406.
Here, if the setting value Vd acquired at the start of the setting change process in step S115 (the setting value Vd that was being set until then) is 02H, the change switch is determined to be ON in step S415. In the process of step S406 that is executed accordingly, a determination result is obtained that "set value≧2" (because it is incremented by -1 in step S405 but +1 in step S408). In response to a change operation (forward operation) performed when the set value Vd is 02H, the set value Vd should be returned to 00H. Therefore, if it is determined in step S406 that "set value≧2", the carry flag setting process in step S407 is passed and the process proceeds to step S408. As a result, the carry flag is determined to be OFF in step S409, so the process proceeds to step S410, and the set value Vd is returned to 00H ("set value←0").
In response to returning the set value Vd to 00H in step S410, the CPU 201 advances the process to step S413 via the processes of steps S411 and S412. That is, in this case, the setting value Ve (“1” in this example) corresponding to the setting value Vd=00H is displayed on the setting/performance display 97.
Note that the carry flag is turned OFF in response to, for example, being determined to be ON in step S409.

Through the above processing, during the setting change, the setting value Vd is changed in a cyclical manner within the range of 00H to 02H (within the usage range Ru) according to the changing operation, and the setting value Vd corresponding to the changed setting value Vd is changed. The set value Ve is displayed on the setting/performance display 97.

Here, according to the processing in steps S405 to S410 described above, the upper limit value when returning the set value Vd to "00H" can be changed depending on the magnitude of the value to be compared with the set value Vd in step S406 . I understand. That is, in the above example, by setting the comparison target value in step S406 to "2 (02H)", if the operation of the change switch is detected in step S415 when the set value Vd=2, the set value Vd is returned to "00H". If the comparison target value in step S406 is "1" or "0", the set value Vd is set when the change switch operation is detected when the set value Vd=1 and when the set value Vd=0, respectively. is returned to "00H".
Regarding the pachinko game machine 1, it is conceivable to create different models, one that allows setting changes and another that does not, but if the processes of steps S405 to S410 described above are adopted, then the comparison target in step S406 It can be seen that by setting the value to "0", it is possible to easily create a model whose settings cannot be changed. This means that the settings can be changed for the machines that can be changed by simply changing the stored value of the comparison target value referred to in the process of step S406 , while keeping the same program for making the pachinko game machine 1 execute the process. This means that it is possible to make different models from those that cannot. In other words, in this respect, it is considered a highly versatile program.
Further, according to the process shown in FIG. 10, even if the comparison target value in step S406 is set to "0" and setting change is disabled, the setting change operation is effectively processed (S415). Then, in accordance with the setting change operation effectively processed in this way, the value of the setting value information stored in the register also changes in the process of FIG. 10 (S40 8 ). However, if the comparison target value in step S405 is set to "0", the program is such that the set value Vd is not ultimately changed even if a setting change operation is performed.

Further, the setting change command transmitted in step S412 is a command for notifying the production control unit 24 of the setting value Ve corresponding to the currently selected setting value Vd during the setting change process, and is a command for notifying the production control unit 24 of the setting value Ve corresponding to the currently selected setting value Vd. This is a command in which information representing Ve is stored.
Through the series of processes from steps S406 to S415 described above, each time the currently selected setting value Ve is switched by the setting value forwarding operation, a setting change command that reflects the switched setting value Ve is sent to the effect control unit 24. That will happen.
In addition, although the explanation by illustration is omitted in FIG. 10, when acquiring the setting value Ve corresponding to the setting value Vd, the CPU 201 uses a setting value offset conversion table to be described later (see FIG. 16).

If it is determined in step S415 that the setting key is OFF, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S416 and executes processing to save the setting value Vd. That is, a process of storing the set value Vd in a predetermined area in the work area of the RAM 203 is executed.
The CPU 201 finishes the setting change process in step S115 in response to executing the save process in step S416.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the output management process in step S413.
First, in step S501, the CPU 201 executes security signal output processing. Specifically, processing is performed to output a security signal to the hall computer HC through the frame external centralized terminal board 21.
In the following step S502, the CPU 201 executes a process of outputting 0 to the LED common port, that is, the common port of the LED as the setting/performance indicator 97, and then acquires display data from the 7-segment decoding table in step S503. Execute processing. That is, this is a process of acquiring display data of the set value Ve (“1”, “2”, “6”) based on the set value Vd.
Note that when 0 is output to the LED common port in step S502, the setting/performance display 97 enters a display OFF state (no display state), the significance of which will be described later.

FIG. 12 shows an example of a 7-segment decoding table, and FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the segment configuration and the segment display pattern on the setting/performance display 97.
The 7-segment decoding table is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20.

In this example, the seven segments on the setting/performance display 97 are numbered from 0 to 6 as shown in FIG. 13A. In addition to these seven segments 0 to 6, the setting/performance display 97 is also provided with a DP (dot point) display section (light emitting section), and the DP display section is numbered "7". ing.
A total of 10 7-segment display data are prepared, from display data "SEG_0" representing the numerical value "0" to display data "SEG_9" representing the numerical value "9". The display data is 1 byte (8 bits) data, and if the lowest bit position is the 1st bit position, the 1st bit position is the display/non-display (light emission/non-light emission) of segment "0". represents. Thereafter, similarly, the second bit position is segment "1", the third bit position is segment "2", the fourth bit position is segment "3", the fifth bit position is segment "4", and the sixth bit position is segment "3". The bit position represents display/non-display of segment "5" and the seventh bit position represents segment "6", respectively.
Furthermore, in the display data in this example, the eighth bit position represents display/non-display of DP ("7").

The 7-segment decoding table shown in FIG. 12 is configured so that the corresponding display data, specifically, the display data of SEG_1, SEG_2, and SEG_6, are obtained from the setting values Vd=00H, 01H, and 02H. It is configured.
Specifically, in the 7-segment decode table of this example, an area is secured to store display data for each setting value Vd at least from 00H to 05H, such as the address area "6203" to "6208" in the figure. The display data SEG_1 ("06" in the figure) corresponding to the setting value Vd=00H is placed in the top layer area (the area with the address with the lowest number) in this area, and the setting value is placed in the second area. Display data SEG_2 ("5B" in the figure) corresponding to Vd=01H is stored in the third area, and display data SEG_6 ("7D" in the figure) corresponding to the set value Vd=02H is stored.
In this example, the fourth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=03H, the fifth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=04H, and the sixth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=05H are used for display purposes. Although "00" is stored as data, its significance will be explained again.
In addition, in the 7-segment decoding table of this example, display data SEG_E ("79") for displaying "E" representing a setting value error is stored in the seventh area. In response to the case where the set value Vd shows an abnormal value such as the set value Vd being outside the usage range Ru, it is possible to notify a set value error through the setting/performance indicator 97. .

The explanation returns to FIG. 11.
The CPU 201 performs a process of outputting the display data acquired from the 7-segment decoding table in the process of step S503 to the setting/performance display 97 in step S504.
The subsequent steps S505 to S508 are for dynamically lighting (intermittent lighting) the LED for displaying the setting value Ve on the setting/performance display 97. Specifically, in step S505, the CPU 201 increments the LED counter by 1, and in the subsequent step S506, determines whether the 0th and 1st bits (lower two bits) of the LED counter are "11". Here, the lower two bits of the LED counter become "11" when the increment process in step S505 is performed a multiple of four times.
In step S506, if the 1st and 0th bits of the LED counter are "11", the CPU 201 proceeds to step S507, outputs data specifying the segment for setting value display to the LED common port, and Execute timer count processing. By executing the output process in step S507, the setting value Ve is displayed on the setting/performance display 97 based on the display data output in step S504. This display state is continued for the time set by the display timer in step S508 (4 ms in this example).

The output management process shown in FIG. 11 ends when the process in step S509 following the timer count process in step S508 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S414 shown in FIG. 10, but at this time, the setting key is turned OFF. If the change switch is ON, the output management process in step S413 is repeated. As described above, in step S502, 0 is output to the LED common port, so the lighting state of the LED for displaying the set value started in the process of step S507 is canceled by executing step S502. Then, in step S505, the LED counter is incremented by 1, so in step S506 it is determined that the 0th and 1st bits of the LED counter are not "11", the output process in step S507 is passed, and the timer count process in step S508 is executed. executed. In other words, after the process of step S507 is executed and the LED for displaying the set value is turned on for at least 4 ms, the period until the 0th and 1st bits of the LED counter becomes "11" again, that is, in this example, The LED is turned off for at least 4ms×3=12ms.
In this way, dynamic lighting is realized in which the LED for displaying the set value is lit intermittently at a predetermined cycle.

In FIG. 11, in response to executing the timer count process in step S508, the CPU 201 executes input data creation process in step S509.
This input data creation process is executed by calling, for example, the same process of step S902 in the main control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). As will be described later, the input data created in the input data creation process includes input data of the RAM clear switch 98 indicating whether or not there is an operation for sequentially advancing the setting value Ve, and setting key switch input data indicating whether or not there is an operation to complete the setting change. It contains 94 input data.
As can be seen with reference to FIG. 10, the determination of the presence or absence of a setting change completion operation (S414) and the determination of the presence or absence of a sequential advance operation of the setting value Ve (S415) are executed after the output management process of step S413. By executing the input data creation process in step S509, the data required for these determination processes can be obtained in advance.

(RAM clear processing)

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the RAM clearing process shown in FIG. 5.
First, in step S601, the CPU 201 executes intra-area RAM initialization processing. The initialization process in step S601 is a process for initializing (clearing) values in a predetermined area (used area) including the work area in the RAM 203. However, in the initialization process of step S601, the storage area of the setting value Vd in the work area is not subject to initialization.

Note that the above-mentioned performance information is stored in an area outside the used area in the RAM 203, and therefore is not cleared in the initialization process of step S601.
What is to be cleared in the RAM clearing process is data in the RAM area (normal data storage area) such as various flags, timers, counters, etc. necessary for normal game progress. Examples of this data include: In other words, data related to gaming state designation (gaming state flag that specifies the current gaming state such as normal state, variable probability state, time saving state, potential state, etc.), a flag specifying whether or not a winning game is in progress (condition device operation flag), various data related to the execution of winning games (current number of rounds, maximum number of rounds, etc.), data related to jackpot lottery results (jackpot determination flag: winning/losing lottery result information, special symbol determination data: symbol lottery result information) , manage pending data regarding pending balls (number of pending balls, various random numbers used for jackpot drawings, various random numbers used for supplementary winning drawings, random numbers for variable patterns), special symbol operation status, and game progress. Timer (special symbol accessory operation timer), input/output data related to switches and sensors, various winning counters that count the number of winning balls in the winning opening, a flag that specifies the presence or absence of electric support status (open extension flag), electric Electric support counter that counts the remaining number of supports, counter that counts the remaining number of high probability states (special pattern probability variable number counter, general pattern probability variable number counter), various error flags (excluding RAM error flag), and payout related data etc. In any case, when the RAM clearing process is executed, all data other than specific data (setting value Vd and performance information) are set to the initial state.

Here, as understood from the previous description of FIG. 5, if the setting change process (S115) is executed, the process advances to step S116 and RAM clear process is executed.
In the setting change process, the setting value Vd may be changed. When the set value Vd is changed, the values stored in the work area of the RAM 203 other than the set value Vd may become inconsistent with the changed set value Vd. For this reason, when the setting change process is performed, the area other than the setting value Vd in the work area is cleared (initialized) by executing the RAM clear process.

In response to executing the initialization process in step S601, the CPU 201 sets the RAM clear notification timer to 30 s in step S602, and executes a process to set a missed mark on this special drawing. The RAM clear notification timer is a timer for setting the time for RAM clear notification executed by the production control unit 24 in response to a RAM clear command transmitted in the process of step S803 in FIG. 17, which will be described later, and is 30 seconds in this example. Set. Moreover, the special map mentioned here means, for example, the above-mentioned special map 1 and special map 2.

In step S603 following step S602, the CPU 201 determines whether the system operation status described above is "2". That is, it is determined whether or not the setting change process of step S115 has been performed after startup.
If the system operation status is "2", the CPU 201 executes processing corresponding to the case where the setting change processing is passed through steps S604 to S612.
If the system operation status is not "2", the CPU 201 advances the process to step S613, stores the lower byte data of the RAM clear command in the register, and ends the RAM clear process in step S116.
Note that the operation of storing the lower byte data of the command in the register as described above functions as an operation of specifying the type of command to be transmitted in step S804 of the main loop pre-processing (FIG. 17), which will be described later.

In the case of going through the setting change process, the CPU 201 first resets the system operation status to "0" in step S604, executes the process of obtaining the setting change end command (BA77H) in step S605, and then executes the command in step S606. A setting change end command is transmitted to the production control section 24 through the transmission process.

The processes in steps S607 to S612 following step S606 are processes related to displaying the set value Ve on the setting/performance display 97.
First, in step S607, the CPU 201 outputs data specifying a segment for setting value display to the LED common port, and in subsequent step S608, the CPU 201 outputs display data corresponding to the setting value Vd from the 7-seg decoding table (see FIG. 13). After executing the process of adding DP to the display data in step S609, that is, the process of setting the value of the 7th bit position of the display data to "1", the display data is output by the output process of step S610. Output to setting/performance display 97.

The processes of steps S612 and S613 following step S611 are processes for continuing the display state of the set values Ve and DP on the setting/performance display 97 for a predetermined period of time (1 s in this example). Specifically, the CPU 201 repeatedly executes the display timer count process in step S612 (for example, the 4 ms cycle timer count process similar to the previous step S508 (see FIG. 11)) until it is determined in step S612 that 1 s has elapsed. do.

If it is determined in step S612 that 1 s has elapsed, the CPU 201 executes the storage process in step S613, and finishes the RAM clear process in step S116.

As can be understood from the above explanation, when the setting change process in step S115 is executed and the setting change completion operation is performed (step S412: Y in FIG. 10), in the RAM clear process in step S116, A setting change end command is sent to the production control unit 24 (S605, S606), and a notification that the setting change has ended is issued.
In the case of this example, the setting change end command notifies the production control unit 24 that the setting change has ended, but does not provide a function to notify the setting value Ve set in the setting change process. .
In this example, the setting value Ve set in the setting change process is notified to the production control unit 24 by a setting value command transmitted in the process of step S808 in FIG. 17 (main loop preprocessing) described later.

(Setting confirmation process)

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process in step S109.
The setting confirmation process is a process for confirming and displaying the setting value Ve that is being set.
In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 first sets a fraud information timer to 30 seconds in step S701. The unauthorized information timer is a timer for managing the output time of the security signal mentioned above to the hall computer HC.
In the following step S702, processing for acquiring current setting value information is performed. That is, the setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM is obtained.

In step S703 following step S702, the CPU 201 executes processing to obtain setting value data from the setting value offset conversion table.

FIG. 16 shows an example of a set value offset conversion table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20.
The set value offset conversion table converts the set value Vd (00H to 02H) into the set value Ve (“1
, ``2,''``6'') into identification data (``SETNUM1'' to ``SETNUM6'').
In this example, the setting value offset conversion table has at least an area for storing identification data of the setting value Ve for each setting value Vd from 00H to 05H, such as the address area "6215" to "6220" in the figure. The identification data of the set value Ve "1"("00" in the figure) corresponding to the set value Vd = 00H is secured in the uppermost region of this region, and the identification data of the set value Ve "1"("00" in the figure) corresponding to the set value Vd = 00H is secured in the second region. The identification data of the corresponding setting value Ve “2” (“01” in the figure) is in the third area, and the identification data of the setting value Ve “6” (“05” in the figure) corresponding to the setting value Vd=02H is in the third area. Stored.
In this example, the fourth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=03H, the fifth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=04H, and the sixth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=05H have the setting value "00" is stored as the identification data of Ve, and its significance will be explained again.

In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 acquires the above identification data as "setting value data" through the acquisition process in step S703.

In response to executing the acquisition process in step S703, the CPU 201 executes the acquisition process for the setting confirmation command (BA6xH) in step S704, and sends the setting confirmation command to the production control unit 24 through the command transmission process in step S705. Send.
In the acquisition process of step S704, the CPU 201 performs a process of including in the setting confirmation command the setting value data acquired in step S703, that is, identification data for identifying the setting value Ve currently being set among the current setting values.
Thereby, by executing the command transmission process of step S705, the effect that the setting is being confirmed and the current setting value Ve are notified to the production control unit 24.

Processing in steps S706 and S707 following step S705 is processing for displaying the current setting value Ve on the setting/performance display 97.
Specifically, in step S706, the CPU 201 first executes a process of acquiring setting values and DP data. That is, a process is executed to obtain the current setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 and the DP data (“1”) on the setting/performance display 97. Then, the output management process of step S707 is executed. The output management process in step S707 is the same as the output management process in step S413 shown in FIG. As a result, the setting/performance display 97 in this case displays a value representing the current setting value Ve and DP.

In step S708 following step S707, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key is OFF (the setting key switch 94 is OFF), that is, whether an operation to instruct the end of the setting confirmation display has been performed, and determines whether the setting key is OFF. For example, the output management process in step S707 is executed again. As a result, after the settings confirmation command is sent in step S705, the process waits until an instruction to end the settings confirmation display is performed in the process of step S708, and during the standby, the settings and performance The process of displaying the current set values Ve and DP on the display 97 is continued.

If it is determined in step S708 that the setting key is OFF, the CPU 201 executes a process to obtain a setting confirmation end command (BA67H) in step S709, and sends a setting confirmation end command to the production control unit 24 through the command transmission process in the subsequent step S710. The setting confirmation process in step S109 is completed.

(main loop preprocessing)

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the main loop preprocessing in step S119.
In the main loop pre-processing, the CPU 201 first executes initialization command acquisition processing in step S801, and then transmits the initialization command to the effect control unit 24 through command transmission processing in step S802. The initialize command is a command for instructing to initialize (return to origin) the movable accessory motor 80c that operates the movable object as an accessory.

In step S803 following step S802, the CPU 201 performs a process of acquiring transmission command data from the acquired lower byte command, and transmits the acquired command data to the effect control unit 24 through the command transmission process of step S804.
Here, in the acquisition process in step S803, data of a command whose lower byte data is stored in a register in the process of processing after startup is acquired. Specifically, when the RAM clear process in step S116 is performed (when both the setting change process and the RAM clear process are performed, or when the setting change process is not performed and only the RAM clear process is performed), The data of the RAM clear command (BA02H) is acquired. On the other hand, if the backup restoration process in step S111 is performed (if both the settings confirmation process and the backup restoration process are performed, or if the settings confirmation process is not performed and only the backup restoration process is performed), the power outage is restored. The data of the display command (OB03H) is acquired.
Thereby, the effect control unit 24 is configured to execute different processes depending on whether the RAM clear process is performed or the backup restoration process is performed.

In step S805 following step S804, the CPU 201 executes processing for transmitting the number of reserved pieces of special figures 1 and 2. Here, in the process of step S805, when the backup restoration process of step S111 is performed, the pending numbers of special figures 1 and 2 are sent to the production control unit 24, and the RAM clear process of step S116 is performed. In this case, the pending number is not transmitted (because the information on the pending number has been cleared).

The processing of steps S806 to S808 following step S805 is processing for notifying the current setting value Ve to the production control unit 24 by a setting value command.
First, in step S806, the CPU 201 performs processing to obtain the setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 as processing to obtain current setting value information, and in subsequent step S807, the CPU 201 performs processing to obtain the setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203. The process of acquiring setting value data from FIG. 16) is executed. Specifically, the identification data of the setting value Ve (“1”, “2”, “5”) corresponding to the setting value Vd (00H to 02H) obtained in step S806 is obtained.
Then, the CPU 201 performs the acquisition process of the set value command (F6xxH) in the subsequent step S808, and transmits the set value command to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process of step S809.
In the acquisition process in step S808, a setting value command including the identification data acquired in step S807 is acquired. With such a setting value command, the current setting value Ve can be notified to the production control unit 24.

In response to executing the command transmission process in step S809, the CPU 201 executes internal function register setting process in step S810, that is, register setting process for initializing various functions such as a hardware random number counting function, and In S811, processing is executed to set the performance display monitor lighting timer to 5 seconds. The performance display monitor lighting timer is a timer for managing the operation time of the operation confirmation lighting operation (flashing operation for 5 seconds in this example) when the setting/performance display 97 is activated.

Further, in step S812 following step S811, the CPU 201 resets the system operation status to "0", and in step S813 turns ON the firing permission signal to the payout control board 29. In response, the payout control board 29 determines that the firing is permitted, outputs the permission signal to the firing control board 28, and allows the firing device 32 to fire the game ball. This allows the game ball to be fired using the firing operation handle 15.
Here, the configuration is such that the payout control board 29 receives a firing permission signal from the main control unit 20 and allows the firing operation, that is, the instruction information for firing permission from the main control unit 20 is indirectly transmitted through the payout control board 29. Although the configuration in which the launch permission signal is sent to the launch control board 28 is illustrated as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the launch permission signal from the main control unit 20 may be configured to be output directly to the launch control board 28. .
In response to executing the process in step S813, the CPU 201 finishes the main loop preprocessing in step S119.

(Advantages of the setting value display data table and setting value conversion table as an embodiment)

Here, in this embodiment, like the setting value offset conversion table shown in FIG. is stored.
This data table contains setting value related information that is selected when the main control unit 20 refers to settable setting values Vd (“00H” to “02H”) through the setting change process (see FIG. 10). It includes certain first setting value related information and second setting value related information that is setting value related information selected when the main control unit 20 refers to a setting value that cannot be set by the setting change process. Specifically, the first set value related information corresponds to "00", "01", and "05" stored in addresses "6215", "6216", and "6217", respectively, in the set value offset conversion table shown in FIG. , the second setting value related information corresponds to "00", "00", and "00" stored in addresses "6218", "6219", and "6220", respectively.
Further, in the data table, at least specific information regarding the setting value Ve representing the stage with the lowest winning probability (that is, "00" at the address "6215") is stored as the first setting value related information, and the second setting value related information is stored as the first setting value related information. The same information as the specific information is stored as the value-related information.

When the setting value Vd is a value that cannot be set, it is possible to rewrite the setting value Vd stored in the RAM 203 to a value representing the lowest level.
However, if it is tampered with after being rewritten, there is a risk that the corresponding information will be acquired from the data table based on the unsettable setting value Vd, and an operation according to the unsettable setting value will be realized.
According to the above configuration, since it is impossible to obtain information corresponding to the setting value Vd that cannot be set from the data table, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being established, and to ensure the fairness of the game. can be increased.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, 0 is stored as the above-mentioned specific information.
This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts due to falsification of setting values by a simple method of writing specific information=0 in setting value related information. That is, the fairness of the game can be improved by a simple method.

In addition, in this embodiment, regarding the 7-segment decoding table shown in FIG. Setting value related information (addresses “6203” to “6205”) and second setting value related information, which is setting value related information selected when the main control unit 20 refers to a setting value that cannot be set by the setting change process. (addresses "6206" to "6208") are included. In the 7-segment decoding table, 0 is stored as the second setting value related information.
As a result, even if the data table is referenced by a setting value Vd that cannot be set in the setting change process due to fraudulent activity or some kind of malfunction, the setting value display means (in this example, the setting/performance display 97) will be set. It is possible to prevent the value from being displayed. Specifically, in this example, data of "00", that is, "00000000" is acquired as display data, so all segments "0" to "6" in the 7 segments for displaying setting values are hidden. As a result, numerical values will not be displayed.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent incorrect display of setting values.

[4-2. Main control side timer interrupt processing]

The main control side timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
The main control side timer interrupt process is activated by an interrupt from the CTC at fixed time intervals (approximately 4 ms), and is executed by interrupting the execution of the main control side main process.

In FIG. 18, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 first executes a power check/backup process in step S901. This power check/backup process mainly monitors the power level supplied from the power supply board, and if an abnormality such as a power outage occurs, the Backup processing and the like are performed to store predetermined gaming information in the RAM 203.

(Power check/backup processing)

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the power check/backup process in step S901.
In the power check/backup process, the CPU 201 reads the power abnormality signal output from the power supply board twice in step S1001, and determines whether the two read values match in the subsequent step S1002. If both values do not match, the process returns to step S1001 and the power supply abnormality signal is read twice again.

If both values match in step S1002, the CPU 201 determines in step S1003 whether the power abnormality signal is at a normal level (the power abnormality signal is OFF=normal level, ON=not normal level).
If the power abnormality signal is at a normal level (step S1003: OFF), the CPU 201 turns off the backup flag in step S1004, clears the power abnormality confirmation counter in the subsequent step S1005, and ends the power abnormality check process in step S901. That is, if it is confirmed that the power supply abnormality signal is at a normal level, the backup process described below is not performed and the timer interrupt process continues.

On the other hand, if the power abnormality signal is not at the normal level in step S1003 (step S1003: ON), the CPU 201 increments the value of the power abnormality confirmation counter by 1 in step S1006, and then increments the value of the power abnormality confirmation counter in step S1007. It is determined whether or not the value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value (threshold value = a natural number greater than or equal to 2: for example, "2").
If the value of the power abnormality confirmation counter is not equal to or greater than the threshold value, the CPU 201 ends the power abnormality check process in step S901. That is, if a state in which the power supply abnormality signal is not at the normal level is detected but is not continuously detected, the backup process is not performed and the timer interrupt process continues.

On the other hand, if the value of the power abnormality confirmation counter is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the CPU 201 performs backup processing shown as steps S1008 to S1011.
Specifically, the CPU 201 first clears the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter (S1108), turns off the launch permission signal (S1009), and turns on the backup flag (S1010).
Furthermore, the CPU 201 transmits a power-off command to the production control unit 24 (S1011), and advances the process to step S1012.

In step S1012, the CPU 201 performs processing to enable RAM protection and disable the prohibited area.
RAM protect is a function that prevents rewriting of the RAM 203 due to malfunction or operation. By enabling RAM protection, only data reading from the RAM 203 is possible, and data writing is disabled.
Further, the prohibited area is an area corresponding to a designated area in the IAT (travel prohibition outside designated area) function, and by setting the prohibited area to be invalid, IAT reset will not occur thereafter.

In step S1013 following step S1012, the CPU 201 clears the value of the output port, and in the subsequent step S1014, stops the timer interrupt processing, sets itself to an interrupt disabled state, and shifts to infinite loop processing.
During this infinite loop, the CPU 201 is reset by the WDT and transitions to an operation stop state due to loss of operating power.

The explanation returns to FIG. 18.
In FIG. 18, after completing the power check/backup process in step S901, the CPU 201 executes input data creation process in step S902. Specifically, input data is created based on input information (ON/OFF signals, rising states (ON edge, OFF edge)) from various sensors and switches.
The input information here is, for example, from the winning detection switches such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the big winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the OUT monitoring switch 49a. ON/OFF information (win detection information) of the output switch signal, ON/OFF information (operation detection information) of the switch signal output from switches related to the setting operation of the setting value Ve, such as the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98. information), and status signals from the payout control board 29 (ON/OFF information of the front door open sensor 61 and full detection sensor 60). Thereby, whether or not a game ball is detected in the out hole or each winning hole is monitored for each interruption.

After completing the input data creation process in step S902, the CPU 201 executes timer management process in step S903 to manage a timer used for controlling gaming operations. Here, the values of various timers used to control the gaming operations of the gaming machine 1 are updated (subtracted).

Next, the CPU 201 performs input management processing in step S904. In this input management process, the values of the winning counter, the OUT ball monitoring counter, etc. are updated based on the input data created in the input data creation process (S902). The "winning counter" is a counter that is provided corresponding to each winning hole and counts the number of winning game balls (number of winning balls). The OUT ball monitoring counter is a counter that counts game balls (out balls) discharged from the out port 49.
The input management process in step S904 functions as an input management means that manages input signals (detection signals) from various winning hole sensors.

In step S905 following step S904, the CPU 201 executes a setting abnormality check process.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the setting abnormality check process in step S905.
In FIG. 20, the CPU 201 checks the set value error flag in step S1101. The set value error flag is a flag that is set (turned ON) by the process of step S1103 described below when an abnormality in the set value Vd is recognized, and in this example, "5AH" means the ON state. .

If the setting value error flag is "5AH" (ON state) in step S1101, the CPU 201 ends the setting abnormality check process in step S905. That is, the fact that the setting value error flag is determined to be ON in step S1101 means that the transmission of the setting value abnormality command (command that instructs the production control unit 24 to execute the setting error notification) has already been executed in step S1104, which will be described later. Therefore, the setting abnormality check process ends without transmitting the setting value error flag again.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S1101 that the set value error flag is not "5AH" (OFF), the CPU 201 determines whether the set value Vd is within the normal range (within the range of 0 to 2) in step S1102. Determine whether or not. Specifically, the setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is obtained, and it is determined whether the value is within the range of "00H" to "02H".

If the setting value Vd is within the normal range, the CPU 201 ends the setting abnormality check process in step S905.
If the set value Vd is not within the normal range, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1103 and sets a set value error flag (ON state), and in the subsequent step S1104 sets a value to indicate that an abnormality has occurred in the set value Vd. A value abnormality command is sent to the production control section 24, and the setting abnormality check process is completed.
Here, the setting value error flag is used in step S1308 of FIG. 22 (setting error determination at the time of winning), step S1501 in FIG. 24 (setting error determination when performing jackpot random number determination at the start of fluctuation, It is used in step S1701 in FIG. 28 (setting error determination when performing fluctuation pattern lottery at the start of fluctuation).

Here, upon receiving the above setting value abnormality command, the effect control unit 24 performs a process for notifying the data abnormality of the setting value Ve. For example, processing is performed to display on the liquid crystal display device 36 an image including a message such as "RAM abnormality. Please call the attendant."
In the gaming machine 1, a setting error (setting value error) can be canceled by performing a setting change operation.

The explanation returns to FIG. 18.
After completing the setting abnormality check process in step S905, the CPU 201 executes error management process in step S906. In this error management process, the presence or absence of an error is monitored based on input data related to various sensors and status signals from the payout control board 29.
When an error occurs, the CPU 201 performs error processing, and if the type of error requires transmission of an error command, the CPU 201 transmits the corresponding command to the effect control section 24. When the production control unit 24 receives this error command, it executes error notification according to the error type. Further, when the error that is occurring is resolved, the CPU 201 transmits an error cancellation command to the production control section 24. When the production control unit 24 receives this error cancellation command, it terminates the error notification that is being executed.

Next, in step S907, the CPU 201 executes a timer interrupt random number management process that periodically updates the random numbers related to each variable display game. Here, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, we update the random number (+1 is added for each interrupt) for the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for assistance hit determination, etc., and every time the random number counter goes around. Next, a process is performed to change the start value of the random number counter. Note that the internal lottery random numbers (jackpot determination random numbers) are generated by the random number generation circuit, so they are not updated here.

In step S908 following step S907, the CPU 201 executes prize ball management processing. In this prize ball management process, the above-mentioned prize winning counter is checked, and if there is a prize winning, a payout control command specifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When receiving the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included in the payout control command, and causes the game ball payout device 19 to perform a payout operation for the specified number of prize balls.

Next, the CPU 201 executes normal symbol management processing in step S909. In this normal symbol management process, necessary processing is performed to execute the normal symbol variation display game. Here, it is monitored whether or not a game ball is detected by the normal symbol starting hole sensor 37a, and when a game ball is detected, predetermined game information (such as a random number for determining a support hit) necessary for the support win lottery is sent. The game information is acquired (random number acquisition processing), and the game information is stored as pending data (operation pending balls related to normal symbols) up to the maximum number of pending balls (suspended storage processing). Then, when a predetermined variable display start condition regarding the ordinary symbol is established, a supplementary winning lottery is performed based on the activated reserved balls, and a variation pattern of the ordinary symbol is selected based on the supplementary winning lottery result, and a stop display mode of the ordinary symbol (normal symbol) is selected. Determine the stop symbol). In addition, here, in order to display the normal symbols in a variable manner, if the symbol is changing, LED display data for the variable display is created, and if it is not changing, LED display data for the stop display is created.

Furthermore, the CPU 201 executes normal electric accessory management processing in step S910. In this normal electric accessory management process, processing necessary for executing the normal electric power open game is performed. Specifically, when the lottery result of the auxiliary winning lottery is a win, a process of setting solenoid control data for the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c is performed. Based on the solenoid control data set here, an excitation signal is output to the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c, thereby controlling the opening/closing operation pattern of the movable blade 47.

Next, the CPU 201 executes special symbol management processing in step S911. In this special symbol management process, a jackpot lottery is mainly performed in the special symbol fluctuation display game, and based on the lottery results, the special symbol fluctuation pattern (pre-read fluctuation pattern and fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation) and special stop symbol Processing necessary for the special symbol variation display game, such as determination of , is executed.
In addition, the details of the special symbol management process of step S911 will be explained again.

Next, the CPU 201 executes special electric accessory management processing in step S912. In this special electric accessory management process, a setting process necessary for controlling the execution of the winning game is performed. Specifically, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, a winning game (jackpot game) corresponding to the winning type is executed and controlled.
Specifically, it sets solenoid control data for the big winning hole solenoid 52c, counts the number of rounds (in the case of a jackpot), monitors the maximum number of wins to the big winning hole 50, and the opening time, etc. Further, when the winning game ends, the game state transition setting is performed based on the game state at the time of winning and the winning type.

Also, here, a plurality of performance control commands are transmitted depending on the progress of the winning game. At the start of the jackpot, the start of a round game, the end of a round game, the maximum number of rounds, etc., the time has come to send the jackpot start command, round start command, round end command, big prize opening command, and jackpot end command, respectively. Send accordingly. The jackpot start command includes the current winning type information, and is used by the performance control section 24 to determine a series of winning performance scenarios to be developed during the winning game. In addition, the jackpot end command includes information regarding the current winning type and the gaming state at the time of winning the winning, that is, information that can specify the gaming state after the winning game ends. It is used when deciding the production mode after the game. Therefore, since this "jackpot end command" can specify the gaming state after the end of the winning game, it plays a role as a gaming state designation command that designates the gaming state.

After completing the processing for proceeding with the game up to step S912, the CPU 201 performs external terminal management processing in step S913. In this external terminal management process, the operating state information of the gaming machine 1 is outputted to external devices such as the hall computer HC and the island lamp through the frame external centralized terminal board 21. The operating state information includes, for example, game information such as winning game occurrence information, symbol variation display game execution start information, number of winnings/prize balls information, and error information.

Next, the CPU 201 executes LED management processing in step S914. In this LED management process, output control of control signals (dynamic lighting data) to LED displays such as the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the setting/performance display device 97 is performed. Control signals based on display data created in the normal symbol management process (step S909), special symbol management process (step S911), etc. are output to the corresponding display device or display device in this LED management process, and display control is performed. It will be done. As a result, a series of variable display operations (variable display and stop display) of special symbols on the special symbol display devices 38a, 38b and normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 39a are realized.

In step S915 following step S914, the CPU 201 saves the values of all registers, and then performs performance display monitor display processing in step S916. That is, this is a process for displaying the value as the normal duty ratio information mentioned above on the setting/performance display 97.
As mentioned earlier, in this example, the value of the normal pitch ratio information is recalculated every time the number of pitches out in all conditions reaches a predetermined value, and the setting/performance indicator 97 shows the current normal pitch ratio information. It is possible to display the working ratio information and the previous normal working ratio information (normal working ratio information whose calculation was completed at the most recent recalculation timing). Therefore, in the display process of step S916 in this case, a process is performed to display these two types of values as normal duty ratio information on the setting/performance display 97.
Note that the current value of the normal duty ratio information is the value calculated in step S604 in the main loop processing (FIG. 11) described above, and the previous value of the normal duty ratio information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Then, the CPU 201 reads out the stored value and displays it on the setting/performance display 97.

Next, the CPU 201 restores the values of all registers in step S917, clears the count value of the WDT in step S918, and ends the main control side timer interrupt processing.

When the above timer interrupt processing is completed, the CPU 201 executes the main loop processing (S123) until the next timer interrupt occurs.

[4-3. Processing related to special symbol fluctuation display game]
(Special design management process)

Next, the processing of the main control unit 20 related to the special symbol variation display game will be explained.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol management process (step S911) described above. As mentioned above, the special symbol management process is executed as a part of the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Based on this, the special symbol variation pattern (pre-read variation pattern and variation pattern at the start of variation), special stop symbol, etc. are determined.

In FIG. 21, the CPU 201 first performs special symbol 1 starting port check processing for the special symbol 1 side (upper starting port 34 side) in step S1201, and then performs special symbol 1 starting port check processing for the special symbol 2 side (lower starting port 35 side) in subsequent step S1202. Perform the special figure 2 starting gate check process.
Note that the details of these starting port check processes will be explained again with reference to FIG. 22.

After completing the starting port check processing in steps S1201 and S1202, the CPU 201 determines the state of the conditioner activation flag in step S1203. This "conditional device activation flag" is a flag for specifying whether or not a jackpot game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (for example, 5AH), it indicates that a jackpot game is in progress. When the flag is in an OFF state (for example, 00H), it indicates that a jackpot game is not in progress.

If the conditional device operation flag is in the OFF state (≠5AH), that is, if the jackpot game is not in progress, the CPU 201 proceeds to the special symbol operation status branch processing in step S1204, and selects the special symbol according to the special symbol operation status (00H to 03H). Processing related to the variable display operation is performed (steps S1205, S1206, S1207).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1203 that a jackpot game is in progress (=5AH), the CPU 201 directly proceeds to the special symbol display data update process in step S1208 without performing the processing related to the special symbol variable display operation in steps S1205 to S1207. That is, during a jackpot game, the special symbol variable display operation is not performed (the display state of the special symbol on the special symbol display device remains fixedly displayed after the jackpot). The "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol, and the status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

In the special symbol operation status branching process in step S1204, the special symbol operation status is determined depending on whether the status value is "waiting (00H, 01H)," "changing (02H)," or "confirming (03H)." , execute the corresponding processing.

Specifically, the CPU 201 executes the special symbol fluctuation start process (step S1205) when the special symbol operation status is "on standby (00H, 01H)" and when the special symbol operation status is "fluctuation (02H)". The process during symbol variation (step S1206) is executed, and when it is "confirming (03H)", the process during special symbol confirmation time (step S1207) is executed. Here, the above "waiting" means that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next change, and the above "changing" means that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (fluctuation display). The above-mentioned "confirming" means that the special symbol has finished changing and is now stopped (confirmed) and being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time).

In addition, in the special symbol fluctuation processing in step S1206, it is monitored whether the special symbol is fluctuating, that is, whether the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the performance control command is issued. As a result, a process of transmitting a "variation stop command" to the production control unit 24, storing a fixed display time (for example, 500 ms) in a special symbol accessory motion timer, and switching the special symbol motion status to "Confirming (03H)" Processes such as storing 03H in the special symbol operation status are performed. The above-mentioned "variation stop command" is a command indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended, and this variation stop command causes the performance control unit 24 to terminate the special symbol variation display game after the special symbol variation time has elapsed. This (terminus) is grasped, and the decorative pattern currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed. As a result, when the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends. Moreover, the above-mentioned "confirmed display time" is the time (stop display time) for which the stop display is maintained when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special symbol ends.

In addition, in the process during the special symbol confirmation time in step S1207, it is monitored whether or not the above-mentioned confirmed display time has elapsed, and if the confirmed display time has elapsed, it is assumed that the current special symbol fluctuation display game has ended, and the special Switch the symbol operation status to "Waiting (01H)" (store 01H in the special symbol operation status), and if this special symbol fluctuation display game is a jackpot, the process required to start the jackpot game (stop the jackpot symbol) various setting processes). In the various setting processes when the jackpot symbol stops, various settings such as clearing the jackpot determination flag, turning on the conditional device activation flag, and setting the gaming state to the same gaming state as the normal state are performed as pre-processing to move on to the jackpot game. Perform processing.
In addition, in the special symbol confirmation time processing of step S1207, when the gaming state is updated, a process of transmitting a "gaming state designation command" including gaming state transition information to the production control unit 24 is performed. The production control unit 24 can grasp that the gaming state has changed by the gaming state designation command.

Through the processing of steps S1205, S1206, and S1207 described above, a variable display operation is realized in which one set of a special symbol variation start and variation stop is performed.
The details of the special symbol variation start process in step S1205 will be explained again with reference to FIG. 23.

After completing any of the processes in steps S1205 to S1207, the CPU 201 executes the special symbol display data update process in step S1208. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating, and if it is fluctuating, 7-segment display data for the special symbol fluctuating is created, and if the special symbol is not fluctuating, it is created. For example, data for 7-segment display during special symbol stop display is created. The special symbol display data created here is output to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b by the LED management process (step S914) in FIG. 18.

In response to executing the update process in step S1208, the CPU 201 finishes the special symbol management process in step S911, and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process in step S912 shown in FIG.

(Special figure 1 starting gate check process)

With reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22, the special figure 1 starting opening check process (step S1201) will be explained.
This special figure 1 starting opening check process serves as a winning process that is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. In the special figure 1 starting opening check process in this example, as a pre-start process for executing the special symbol variation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side (processing at the time of winning on the special figure 1 side), a winning occurrence of the upper starting opening 34 is performed. Addition processing of the number of operation pending balls on the special figure 1 side due to this, storage processing of various random numbers (retention storage processing), transmission processing of a reservation addition command, etc. are executed.
Note that the special drawing 2 starting opening check process (step S1202) also plays a role as a winning process that is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, just like the special drawing 1 starting opening checking process, and the special drawing 2 side As a pre-start process for executing the special symbol variation display game 2 (processing at the time of winning on the special symbol 2 side), an addition process of the number of balls on hold on the special symbol 2 side due to the winning occurrence of the lower starting opening 35; Storage processing of various random numbers, transmission processing of pending addition commands, etc. are executed. Therefore, the special figure 1 starting opening check process and the special figure 2 starting opening checking process have substantially the same processing content. Below, the special figure 1 starting opening check process will be mainly explained, and the details of the special figure 2 starting opening checking process will be omitted to avoid duplicate description.

In FIG. 22, the CPU 201 first determines in step S1301 whether or not a winning ball (winning ball) entering the upper starting port 34 has been detected.
When the winning to the upper start opening 34 is detected, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1302 and determines whether the number of special symbol 1 operation pending balls (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 1 operation pending balls") is 4 or more. judge. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 action reserved balls is equal to or greater than the maximum number of reserved balls (in this case, the upper limit is 4). However, when there is no winning detection of the upper starting opening 34 (step S1301: N), the special symbol 1 starting opening check process of step S1201 is finished without doing anything.

In step S1302, if the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 operation is 4 or more, that is, if the winning of the upper starting port 34 is detected but the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 operation is 4 or more, the CPU 201 returns to step S1311, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the number of special figure 1 action pending balls is not 4 or more (less than 4), 1 is added to the number of special figure 1 action pending balls (step S1303), and the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, the CPU 201 obtains various random numbers to be used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special symbol 1 action pending ball that has occurred this time. Specifically, the current values of random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for special symbol determination, and random numbers for fluctuation patterns are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random values are stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203. This reservation storage area is an area where predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game is stored as operation reservation balls (retention data), and in this reservation storage area, the above various random values as reservation data are specially Until the symbol 1 is used for the variable display operation (until the execution of the special symbol variable display game 1), the symbols are held and stored in the order in which the starting conditions are satisfied (in the winning order). The reservation storage area is provided with a reservation storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side, that is, a special symbol 1 reservation storage area and a special symbol 2 reservation storage area. These pending storage areas are provided with pending 1 storage area to pending n storage area (n is the maximum number of pending memories; in this embodiment, n=4), and each can store pending data for the maximum number of pending memories. It becomes.

In step S1305 following step S1304, the CPU 201 uses prefetching prohibition data (EVENT: "01H") is acquired.
Next, in step S1306, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the "special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition" is satisfied. The special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is a condition that prohibits the look-ahead determination targeting the special figure 1 action reserved ball.

When the special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is satisfied, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1311 without executing the pre-reading determination process (step S1309) regarding the pre-reading determination. In this case, the pending addition command with the pre-reading prohibition data (EVENT: "01H") specifies the pre-reading prohibition, and the pre-reading judgment for the current special figure 1 operation pending ball is prohibited, and as a result, the pre-reading notice The performance will also not be carried out. In other words, the prefetching prohibition data can be said to specify that the prefetching determination process (step S1309) is not being executed.

In this example, instead of pre-reading the special symbols 1 and 2 regardless of the gaming state, it is determined whether or not pre-reading is prohibited based on the current gaming state. The reason is as follows.
If you are in a gaming state with 'electric support available' which gives an advantage to right-handed players (time saving state, variable probability state), winnings to the lower starting opening 35 will occur frequently, but it will give an advantage to left-handed players. When in a gaming state with 'no electric support' (normal state, potential state), winnings to the lower starting opening 35 almost never occur and winnings to the upper starting opening 34 frequently occur. In consideration of this, we do not blindly perform the pre-reading judgment of the special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 regardless of the game state, but instead of making the pre-reading judgment of the special drawing 1 side in the time-saving state with 'electricity support available' or the variable probability state. is prohibited and the look-ahead judgment on the special figure 2 side is allowed, and in the normal state or potential state with 'no electric support', the look-ahead judgment on the special figure 2 side is prohibited and the look-ahead judgment on the special figure 1 side is prohibited. is now allowed.

In step S1306, if the special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is not satisfied, the CPU 201 refers to the setting value error flag (the flag set in the setting abnormality check process in step S905) in step S1307, and in the following step S1308, the CPU 201 refers to the setting value error flag (Whether the set value error flag is ON: 5AH) is determined.
If there is a setting error, the CPU 201 determines that an abnormality (setting value data abnormality) has occurred, and proceeds to step S1311 without executing the prefetch determination process (step S1309). The details will be described later, but if an abnormality in the set value Vd is recognized in the process at the time of winning a prize, a pending addition command containing pre-reading prohibition data (01H) is sent without determining it as a RAM error, and the starting gate check is performed in step S1201. This will leave the process.

On the other hand, if there is no setting error, the CPU 201 executes the prefetch determination process in step S1309. In this pre-reading determination process, the jackpot lottery result executed at the start of variation is pre-read and determined. Therefore, a series of processes related to 'pre-reading win/loss judgment' for pre-reading the winning/losing lottery results, 'pre-reading symbol judgment' for pre-reading and judging the symbol lottery results, and 'pre-reading fluctuation pattern judgment' for pre-reading and judging the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation. Includes processing.

Specifically, in step S1309, the CPU 201 first acquires the random number value for jackpot determination stored in the RAM 203 (random number storage area for determination), and uses the random number value for jackpot determination and a "random number determination table for jackpot determination" to be described later. Based on this, a winning/losing lottery (at least a look-ahead winning/losing determination to determine whether it is a jackpot or a miss) is performed for the current operation-pending balls, and the result (referred to as a "read-ahead winning/losing result") is obtained.

In this embodiment, the set value Vd is used for the win/lose determination (win/lose lottery), but a specific method of win/lose determination as this embodiment based on such a set value Vd will be explained later. Since the winning/losing determination is performed in the same way in the process at the start of the variation of the special symbol (FIG. 23), the specific method of winning/losing determination will be explained again when the process at the start of the variation is explained.

Here, in this embodiment, the pre-read win/fail result is not stored in the RAM 203 while being taken into a predetermined general-purpose register built into the CPU 201 . This is because the pre-read win/loss determination result is immediately used in the subsequent pre-read symbol determination process, and this data is not required and does not need to be stored in the RAM 203.

In addition, in step S1309, the CPU 201 creates a symbol table (not shown) according to the pre-read win/loss result (at least hit or miss) and the special symbol type (special symbol 1, 2) as the above-described pre-read symbol determination process. A lottery will be held for the symbols used. Specifically, the CPU 201 performs a symbol lottery (winning type lottery) for the current operation pending ball based on the random number value for special symbol determination and the symbol table acquired in the previous step S1304, and draws the result (“ (referred to as "pre-read symbol result"). In the "symbol table" of this embodiment, a determination value (winning area) for determining the symbol type is defined, and the random value for special symbol determination is displayed as a stop symbol depending on which determination value it belongs to. The type of special symbol to be used is determined.
In addition, when there are multiple types of losers as in this example, a loser symbol table for determining the loser types is provided. If there is only one type of miss, there is no need for a miss symbol table.
Here, in this example, in response to the fact that there are multiple types of misses such as "miss 1,""miss2," and "miss 3," a miss symbol table for drawing the miss type is used in symbol determination. do.
In addition, in this example, as mentioned above, there are at least four types of winnings: "Normal 4R", "Normal 6R", "Probable Variable 6R", and "Probable Variable 10R", which are provided separately from the above-mentioned winning symbol table. Based on the winning pattern table, the type of special symbol corresponding to the winning type according to the random number value for special symbol determination among these four types of winning is determined.

Here, for some or all of the above-described symbol tables, a symbol table may be provided in which different symbol selection rates are determined depending on the set value Ve. For example, regarding the jackpot symbol table, a table with different jackpot type selection rates can be provided for each setting 1 to 6 (for example, six types of jackpot symbol tables corresponding to six settings). For example, it is conceivable to determine the contents of the table so that the higher the setting, the more advantageous the ball payout performance is to the player. Of course, a common jackpot symbol table may be used for each setting. Further, the symbol table used in step S1309 is also used in the process at the start of variation (FIG. 23).

The CPU 201 does not store the pre-read symbol result in the RAM 203 while taking it into a predetermined general-purpose register built into the CPU 201, as in the case of the above-described pre-read win/loss determination. This is because the pre-read symbol result is immediately used in the subsequent pre-read variation pattern determination, and this data is not required and does not need to be stored in the RAM 203.

After completing the above pre-read symbol determination, the CPU 201 executes the pre-read variation pattern determination. In this look-ahead variation pattern judgment, the above-mentioned look-ahead symbol result (in this example, it represents one of "normal 4R", "normal 6R", "probability change 6R", "probability change 10R", "miss 1", "miss 2", "miss 3") Then, a variation pattern lottery is performed using a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern according to the pre-read symbol result and the random number for variation pattern acquired in step S1304, and a pre-read variation pattern is determined. That is, the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation) to be executed when the current operation-suspended ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation is pre-read and determined.

In this example, the above fluctuation pattern table is also used in the fluctuation pattern lottery performed in the processing at the start of fluctuation (FIG. 23).
A specific example of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table and the fluctuation pattern lottery process using the table will be explained again when the processing at the start of fluctuation is explained.

Note that the prefetch variation pattern determination result (winning command data (EVENT)) is immediately used in the pending addition command creation process of step S1310, which will be described below, and this data is not needed thereafter. Therefore, the CPU 201 finishes the process of step S1309 while taking in the result of the pre-read variation pattern determination into the register without storing it in the RAM 203.

In response to executing the prefetch determination process in step S1309, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1310 and creates data on the lower byte side of the suspended addition command according to the prefetch determination result. Specifically, data representing the type of prefetch variation pattern is created as winning command data (EVENT) on the lower byte side of the pending addition command.
Note that for the EVENT data, "01H" set in step S1305 is updated to a value corresponding to the look-ahead variation pattern (value obtained in the look-ahead variation pattern determination process) in this process.

After completing the creation process in step S1310, the CPU 201 creates data on the upper byte side of the reservation addition command according to the number of active reservation balls in step S1311. That is, data representing the current number of active pending balls and the above-mentioned pre-read symbol result (special symbol type) is created as winning command data (MODE) on the upper byte side of the pending addition command.
The MODE data is set to be able to identify 1 reserved special figure 1 to 4 reserved special figures 1, and 1 reserved special figure 2 to 4 reserved special figures 2.

In response to executing the creation process in step S1311, the CPU 201 performs a process for transmitting a pending addition command in step S1312. That is, a pending addition command including the winning command data created in steps S1310 and S1311 as EVENT and MODE, respectively, is created and transmitted to the effect control section 24.

Here, if the pre-reading prohibition condition is met (Y in S1306) or if an abnormality in the set value Vd is recognized in the determination process in step S1308, the CPU 201 outputs the above-mentioned pre-reading prohibited data (lower byte = 01H). is maintained as is without updating, and a pending addition command with prefetch-inhibited data is sent.
In addition, in the event of an overflow (when a new winning occurs when the maximum number of pending memories has been reached), a pending addition command with an overflow specification is transmitted (see the processing route of Y in step S1302). ).

In addition, after the hold addition command is sent from the main control unit 20 to the performance control unit 24, it is used on the side of the performance control unit 24 to display the “pre-read preview performance” related to the current operation hold ball. 23, and is not particularly used in the special symbol variation start process shown in FIG. Therefore, the CPU 201 exits the special figure 1 start opening check process in step S1301 without storing the pending addition command in the RAM 203, and subsequently performs the special figure 2 start opening check process in step S1302.

Here, as mentioned above, in this example, even if an abnormality occurs in the data of the set value Vd at the time of winning (when an activated pending ball occurs), the pending addition command is sent. , because it is a command that has data that prohibits pre-reading, even if it is configured to be able to display a pre-reading notice effect based on the setting value Ve or a pre-reading notice effect not based on the setting value Ve, the effect related to the pre-reading notice. Since the control itself is prohibited, a pre-read notice due to a malfunction will not appear, and the player will not be disadvantaged, so no particular problem will occur. If the prefetched preview performance is not prohibited, and a highly anticipated pending display appears in the prefetched preview performance of the pending display system even though the set value Ve is abnormal, subsequent RAM error processing will be required. If the game progress is stopped due to (error processing due to an abnormal setting value), the player's expectation of winning disappears all at once, leading to a great sense of distrust in the gaming machine. However, in the case of this example, as described above, since the pre-read notice itself is prohibited, such a problem does not occur and it is possible to prevent players from feeling distrustful.

(Special symbol fluctuation start processing)

Next, special symbol fluctuation start processing (step S1205), which is the processing at the start of fluctuation, will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.
In FIG. 23, the CPU 201 first determines in step S1401 whether or not the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 operation is zero. If the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 operation is not zero, the process proceeds to step S1403, and the current Processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S1403 to S1412) is performed for the special figure 2 action reserved balls to be subjected to fluctuation display.
On the other hand, if the number of special figure 2 activated reserved balls is zero, the CPU 201 determines whether the number of special figure 1 activated reserved balls is zero in step S1402, and if the number of special figure 1 activated reserved balls is not zero, Proceeding to the process of step S1403, the process (steps S1403 to S1412) related to the start of variation of the special symbol targeted at the special symbol 1 action reserved ball used for the current variation display is performed.
By the processing of steps S1401 and S1402 above, which of the special figure 1 action reserved ball and the special figure 2 action reserved ball is to be subjected to the variable display operation preferentially (which action reserved ball is to be consumed preferentially? ) is determined. In this embodiment, when there are operation reservation balls in both the special figure 1 operation reservation sphere and the special figure 2 operation reservation sphere, the special figure 2 operation reservation sphere is preferentially extinguished. In other words, the special symbol variation display game 2 is executed with priority over the special symbol variation display game 1. In addition, the structure is not limited to the above-mentioned priority variation type, and a structure may be adopted in which the action-reserved balls are consumed in the order in which they are won.

In addition, when both the number of active reserved balls of the special figure 2 active reserved ball number and the special figure 1 active held ball number are zero, it will be in the state of "no active reserved balls". This state of "no action pending ball" is when the special symbol is on standby and there is no pending memory, and the production control unit 24 is notified that this state has entered, and the liquid crystal display The device 36 is controlled to switch to a demonstration screen display for waiting for customers (customer waiting demonstration screen). Therefore, if it becomes "no balls pending operation", the process proceeds to step S1413, and it is determined whether the special symbol operation status is "standby (00H)" indicating the state of "no balls pending operation". .

In step S1413, when the special symbol operation status is "on standby (01H)", the special symbol operation status is switched to "on standby (00H)" (00H is stored in the special symbol operation status). Then, as a production control command, a "demonstration display command" for displaying a customer waiting demonstration screen is transmitted to the production control unit 24 (step S1415), and the special symbol variation start process of step S1205 is completed.
Thereafter, if it is "on standby (00H)" when the determination process in step S1413 is executed, the special symbol variation start process is finished without transmitting the demonstration display command again. The reason for doing this is that if you send a demo display command without any conditions when the number of pending balls is zero, the demo display command will be repeated at a cycle of 4ms while the number of pending balls is zero. This is to prevent this, taking into account that unnecessary transmissions will occur and the control burden will increase unnecessarily.

If the number of special figure 2 activated reserved balls is not zero in step S1401, and if the number of special figure 1 activated reserved balls is not zero in step S1402 (while the number of special figure 2 activated reserved balls is zero, the number of special figure 1 activated reserved balls is In each case (when the number is not zero), the CPU 201 performs processing (steps S1403 to S1412) related to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol targeting the operation pending ball used for the current fluctuation display.
Here, regarding the processing in steps S1403 to S1412 described below, if the determination in step S1401 above is 'NO', the processing is targeted at the special figure 2 action reserved ball, and in the determination in step S1402 above, If it is 'NO', the process will target the special symbol 1 activation reserved ball, but since the processing method is the same, unless there is a special need to avoid duplicate description, the activation on the special symbol 1 side will be processed. The explanation will be made without distinguishing whether the process targets the reserved ball or the process targets the activated reserved ball on the special symbol 2 side.

In step S1403, the CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the number of pending balls by 1 (the number of pending balls related to the special symbol used in the current variable display operation - 1), and in the subsequent step S1404, the CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the number of pending balls by 1, and in the subsequent step S1404, the CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the number of pending balls by 1 (the number of pending balls related to the special symbol side used for the current variable display operation - 1), and in the subsequent step S1404, the CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the number of pending balls by 1 (the number of pending balls related to the special symbol side used for the current variable display operation - 1), and in the subsequent step S1404, the CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the number of pending balls by 1. A pending subtraction command" is transmitted to the production control section 24. By this hold subtraction command, the production control unit 24 side grasps the remaining number of active pending balls after the current number of active pending balls has been used up, and shifts and displays the currently displayed pending display.

Next, the CPU 201 sets special symbol operation confirmation data in step S1405. This special symbol operation confirmation data is information that specifies the special symbol type of the current variation start side. For example, if special symbol 1 is the variation start side, "00H (special symbol 1 variation start designation)", If the special symbol 2 is on the variation start side, "01H (special symbol 2 variation start designation)" is stored in a predetermined area (special symbol operation confirmation data storage area) of the RAM 203.

Next, in step S1406, the CPU 201 shifts the pending data stored in the pending storage area of the RAM 203, and in the subsequent step S1407, clears the pending 4 storage area. In the processing of steps S1406 to S1407, the pending data (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for special symbol determination, and fluctuation pattern Random numbers) are read out and stored in the determination random number storage area of the RAM 203, and the pending storage areas (pending 2 storage area, pending 3 storage area, pending 4 storage area) corresponding to the pending n storage area (n=2, 3, 4) are The pending data stored in area) is stored in the pending storage area corresponding to 'n-1' (step S1406), and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to provide a free area (step S1407). As a result, the starting order of the special symbol fluctuation display game matches the order of the number of pending balls n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and the pending ball acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is in which pending memory. It is specified whether the ball corresponds to the area, and it becomes possible to store a new operation-suspended ball.

Next, in step S1408, the CPU 201 performs a process of transmitting a variable number remaining designation command and a gaming status command. In this step S1408, it is determined whether or not the "electric support number counter" that counts the remaining number of times in the state where electric support is available is zero, and if there is a remaining time reduction number, the "variable time reduction number counter" that includes the remaining time reduction number information is determined. A command for specifying remaining number of times is sent to the effect control section 24. This "fluctuation number remaining designation command" enables the performance control unit 24 to execute a process of grasping the remaining time reduction number and notifying the remaining time reduction number information.
Further, in step S1408, a process of transmitting a gaming state command specifying the current gaming state to the production control unit 24 is also performed.

Next, the CPU 201 executes variation management processing in step S1409.
In this fluctuation management process, a jackpot lottery corresponding to the start of fluctuation, a symbol lottery for stopped symbols, and a fluctuation pattern lottery are performed. In addition, in the fluctuation management process, abnormality determination of the set value Vd is performed, and if an abnormality is found in the data of the set value Vd, a production control command (RAM abnormal command) is issued to notify the production control unit 24 of a setting error. ) is performed.
Note that details of the variation management process in step S1409 will be explained again with reference to FIGS. 24 to 33.

After finishing the variation management process in step S1409, the CPU 201 stores 5AH (ON state) in the special symbol N variation flag (N=1, 2) that specifies that the variation display is in progress in step S1410. "Special symbol N fluctuating flag" is a flag that indicates which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is fluctuating, and when the flag is in the ON state (=5AH) indicates that the target special symbol is changing, and when the flag is in the OFF state (=00H), it indicates that the target special symbol is stopped.
The special symbol 1 fluctuating flag (N=1) corresponds to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2 fluctuating flag (N=2) corresponds to the special symbol 2 side.

Next, in step S1411, the CPU 201 executes a command transmission process at the start of fluctuation. In this command transmission process, in order to notify the production control unit 24 side of the content of the variation pattern selected in the variation management process of step S1409, a "variation A "pattern designation command" is created and sent to the production control section 24.
In addition, in the command transmission process, a decorative symbol designation command is created based on the symbol lottery result in step S1409, and is transmitted to the production control section 24. The decorative symbol designation command is composed of two bytes: an upper byte (MODE) that designates the special symbol type on the fluctuation side and a lower byte (EVENT) that designates the winning type. Therefore, this decorative symbol designation command includes information regarding the special symbol type on the fluctuation side and the winning type (symbol lottery result). Since this decorative symbol designation command includes information regarding the winning type, the production control unit 24 mainly controls the combination of decorative symbols (design types that include the ready-to-reach symbol) when forming a ready-to-reach state, It is used to determine the combination of decorative symbols (decorative stop symbols) to be finally displayed in a stopped state, and the preview performance corresponding to the winning type in the symbol variation display game.
Furthermore, in the command transmission process, a setting value command for notifying the current setting value Ve to the effect control section 24 side is also performed. With this set value command, the effect control section 24 side can make different types of effects appear or change the appearance rate of a predetermined effect according to the current set value Ve.

Then, in the following step S1412, the CPU 201 switches the special symbol operation status to "Fluctuating (02H)" (stores 02H in the special symbol operation status) as a fluctuation start setting process, and sets the random number storage area for determination and the random number for fluctuation pattern. Performs processing to clear the storage area.

In response to executing the variation start time setting process in step S1412, the CPU 201 finishes the special symbol variation start process in step S1205. After finishing the special symbol variation start process, the CPU 201 performs the special symbol display data update process (step S1208) of FIG. 21, thereby starting the variable display of the special symbol.

(Variation management processing)

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the variation management process in step S1409.
In FIG. 24, the CPU 201 first determines whether there is a setting error in step S1501. That is, it is determined whether the set value error flag is in the ON state (5AH).

If it is determined in step S1501 that the setting error flag is OFF and there is no setting error, the CPU 201 executes the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502, and then proceeds to the symbol lottery process in step S1503.
The jackpot random number determination process in step S1502 is to select (determine) the type of jackpot/loss by lottery based on the jackpot determination random number (internal lottery random number), the jackpot determination random number determination table, and the set value Vd. be.
The details of the jackpot random number determination process as an embodiment will be explained again with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26.

If the CPU 201 determines in step S1501 that there is a setting error, it passes the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502 and proceeds to the symbol lottery process in step S1503.

Here, in this embodiment, if a setting error occurs (if a determination result of Y is obtained in step S1501), the jackpot random number determination process is not performed unless the setting error is resolved.
As explained above, a setting error can be cleared by performing a setting change operation. That is, when the setting error state occurs, by performing a setting change operation to cancel the setting error state, the state is returned to the state where the jackpot random number determination process is performed.
Note that, as described above, a setting value abnormality command for performing a setting change operation is transmitted in the setting abnormality check process (FIG. 20).

In the symbol lottery process in step S1503, the CPU 201 performs processing to determine the type of hit/loss (type of stop symbol) based on at least the winning/losing lottery result (jackpot determination flag), the random number for special symbol determination, and the symbol table. conduct. Then, the result (special symbol determination data) is stored in a predetermined area (special symbol determination data storage area) of the RAM 203. As a result, the winning type (win/loss type) for the current special symbol variation display game is determined.
In addition, similar to the symbol lottery process at the time of pre-reading determination, the symbol lottery can also be performed according to the set value Vd.

In step S1504 following step S1503, the CPU 201 performs the current variable display operation as a variable pattern lottery process based on at least the symbol lottery result (the above-mentioned special symbol determination data), the random number for the variable pattern, and the variable pattern table. A process is performed to determine by lottery a fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation for balls on hold.
Specifically, in the variable pattern lottery process in this embodiment, a variable pattern lottery is performed using the set value Vd and the number of active pending balls (the active pending ball number after subtracting the current consumption amount).
The details of the variable pattern lottery process in this embodiment will be explained again with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33.

In response to executing the variation pattern lottery process in step S1504, the CPU 201 ends the variation management process in step S1409. That is, after this, the process proceeds to step S1410 shown in FIG. 23.

Here, as explained above, in this example, the lottery results of the winning lottery and symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation are stored in the RAM 203, but the reason is that these lottery results are stored in the fluctuation management process of step S1409. This is data that is used not only in the special symbol management process to which it belongs (step S911: see FIGS. 18 and 21), but also in the later special electric accessory management process (step S912: see FIG. 18), etc. It is.
In this point, the process is different from the process at the time of prefetch determination in which the lottery result is not stored in the RAM 203.

Although explanations with illustrations are omitted, in the fluctuation management process of step S1409, when the winning lottery result is a win, as a setting process for shifting the gaming state, a process for specifying the gaming state after the winning game is performed. Perform necessary setting processing (gaming state transition preparation processing).

(Jackpot random number determination process)

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502, and FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot random number determination method of the embodiment.
Prior to detailed explanation of the jackpot random number determination process in FIG. 25, the jackpot random number determination method employed in the embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

First, as a premise, in this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number can take on 65,536 values from 0 to 65,535. In the jackpot random number determination in this embodiment, a determination reference value TH is determined within the range of values that such a jackpot determination random number can take, and based on the result of comparing the magnitude relationship between the jackpot determination random number and the determination reference value TH, Determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As an example, in this example, a method is adopted in which a jackpot judgment result is obtained when the value of the random number for jackpot judgment is within the range of "0 to judgment reference value TH", and a loss judgment result is obtained in other cases. There is.

In this embodiment, jackpot random number determination corresponds to low probability (normal state: hereinafter referred to as "low probability") and high probability (variable probability state: hereinafter referred to as "high probability"). Two types of judgments are made, one corresponding to the following. Therefore, two types of determination reference value TH are set: a determination reference value TH1 used for determination when the accuracy is low, and a determination reference value TH2 used for determination when the accuracy is high.
As illustrated in FIG. 26, the judgment reference value TH2 for high accuracy is set to be larger than the judgment reference value TH1 for low accuracy, thereby increasing the probability of winning the jackpot in judgments for high accuracy. ing.

In this example, since the jackpot random number determination is performed according to the set value Ve, different values are prepared as the determination reference value TH for each set value Ve. As a specific example, regarding the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy, there are a value corresponding to the set value Ve "1" (BIGLMAX1), a value corresponding to the set value Ve "2" (BIGLMAX2), and a value corresponding to the set value Ve "6". A value (BIGLMAX6) corresponding to the setting value Ve is prepared, and for the judgment reference value TH2 at high accuracy, a value corresponding to the setting value Ve "1" (BIGHMAX1), a value corresponding to the setting value Ve "2" (BIGHMAX2), and A value (BIGHMAX6) corresponding to the set value Ve "6" is prepared. The judgment reference value TH1 (=842) for low accuracy and the judgment reference value TH2 (=8429) for high accuracy shown in FIG. 26 are examples of values (BIGLMAX1, BIGHMAX1) corresponding to the setting value Ve "1", respectively. are doing.
In this example, the judgment reference value TH1 for low accuracy is BIGLMAX1<BIGLMAX2<BIGLMAX6, and the judgment reference value TH2 for high accuracy is BIGHMAX1<BIGHMAX2<BIGHMAX6. The higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning.

In this example, in the actual determination process, a "determination lower limit value" (corresponding to "BIGMINI-1" described later) is also used as a threshold value for the random number value. First, it is determined whether the random number value is larger than the "determination lower limit value", and if the random number value is not greater than the "determination lower limit value", an unsuccessful determination result is obtained. When the random number value is larger than the "determination lower limit value", a jackpot determination is performed using the above-described determination reference value TH1 and determination reference value TH2.
Note that when the "determination lower limit value" is set to "0", the condition for determining a jackpot is that the random number value is within the range of "0" to "determination reference value TH". On the other hand, if the "judgment lower limit value" is set to a value larger than "0" (X), then the condition for determining a jackpot is that the random number is within the range of "X" to "judgment reference value TH". Become.

Based on the above premise, the jackpot random number determination process shown in FIG. 25 will be explained.
In FIG. 25, the CPU 201 first obtains setting difference information from the random number determination table for jackpot determination in step S1601.

FIG. 27 shows an example of a random number determination table for jackpot determination used in the jackpot random number determination process, FIG. 27A is a random number determination table for jackpot determination for special figure 1, and FIG. 27B is a random number determination table for jackpot determination for special figure 1. A random number determination table is illustrated.
As the jackpot random number determination process, the determination process for special figure 1 using the table shown in FIG. 27A and the determination process for special figure 2 using the table shown in FIG. 27B are performed, but these determination processes are Since it is performed in the same way by the common process shown in FIG. 25, only the determination process for special figure 1 using the table shown in FIG. 27A as a representative will be explained below.

In step S1601, the setting difference information means a variable stored in the current reference destination address in the table shown in FIG. 27A, and the reference destination address at the start of the jackpot random number determination process shown in FIG. Since this is the starting address of the table, the CPU 201 acquires the variable represented by "000H" stored at the starting address as setting difference information.
In subsequent step S1602, the CPU 201 determines whether the setting difference information is other than "000H". If the setting difference information is "000H" and a negative result is obtained in step S1602, the CPU 201 advances to step S1603 and obtains a determination reference value. That is, the variable stored at the address next to the first address in the table shown in FIG. 27A (the variable represented by "BIGMIN-1") is acquired as the determination reference value. This process corresponds to the process of acquiring the above-mentioned "determination lower limit value."
Next, in step S1604, the CPU 201 performs a process of shifting to a specified address. Specifically, processing is performed to shift the reference destination address described above from the current reference destination address ("4093" in FIG. 27A) to an address four addresses ahead ("4097" in FIG. 27A).
Then, in step S1610, the CPU 201 determines whether the random number value (the value of the random number for jackpot determination) is larger than the determination reference value.
The series of processes of steps S1601→S1602→S1603→S1604→S1610 described above corresponds to the process of determining whether the random value is larger than the determination lower limit value described above.

In step S1610, if the random number value is not greater than the determination reference value, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1611 and acquires small hit information.
Here, in the table shown in FIG. 27A, as a variable representing the hit information corresponding to the judgment lower limit value ("BIGMIN-1"), a variable represented by "000H, 000H, 000H" is placed at the next address of the judgment lower limit value. is stored. The variables correspond to "low probability medium jackpot information", "high probability medium jackpot information" and "small win information" in order from the left side.
In the process of step S1611, which is executed in response to the determination that the random value is not larger than the determination lower limit value ("BIGMIN-1") in step S1610, the CPU 201 stores the random number stored at the address next to the determination lower limit value ("BIGMIN-1"). The rightmost "000H" among the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" of the winning information is acquired.
In addition, in the hit information, "05AH" represents a "win" and "000H" represents a "miss."

In step S1612 following step S1611, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the probability is changing. If the probability is not changing, the CPU 201 acquires low probability medium jackpot information in step S1613, finishes the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502, and if the probability is not changing. If so, high-accuracy medium jackpot information is acquired in step S1614, and the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502 is ended.
Here, when the low probability medium jackpot information acquisition process in step S1613 is executed in response to the random value being determined not to be larger than the determination lower limit value ("BIGMIN-1") in step S1610, In step S1613, the CPU 201 obtains the leftmost "000H" among the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" of the winning information stored at the address next to the determination lower limit value ("BIGMIN-1").
Further, regarding the high-accuracy medium jackpot information acquisition process in step S1614, the process in step S1614 is executed in response to the fact that it is determined in step S1610 that the random number value is not larger than the lower limit value for determination ("BIGMIN-1"). If so, the CPU 201 acquires the middle "000H" among the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" of the winning information stored at the address next to the lower limit value ("BIGMIN-1").

Through the above-described series of processes, if the random number value is less than or equal to the lower limit value for determination, information on failure is acquired.

Subsequently, if it is determined in step S1610 that the random number value is larger than the determination reference value, the CPU 201 returns to step S1601 and acquires setting difference information from the random number determination table for jackpot determination.
When the process of step S1601 is executed in response to the random value being determined to be larger than the lower limit determination value in step S1610, the reference destination address mentioned above is "4097" shown in FIG. 27A. , "001H" stored in the reference destination address is acquired as the setting difference information.
Therefore, in this case, a determination result that the setting difference information is other than "000H" is obtained in the subsequent step S1602, and the CPU 201 advances the process to step S1605.

The processing in steps S1605 to S1609 is processing related to obtaining the determination reference value TH according to the set value Ve. First, processing related to the low accuracy determination reference value TH1 is performed.
Specifically, in step S1605, the CPU 201 acquires the setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 as setting value information acquisition processing, and performs 2-byte correction on the acquired setting value information in the subsequent step S1606. That is, in this example, the setting value Vd, which is 1 byte, is corrected to 2 bytes.
Next, in step S1607, the CPU 201 obtains a determination reference value corresponding to the setting value Ve based on the correction information, that is, the setting value Vd corrected by 2 bytes.
When step S1607 is executed for the first time after the start of the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502, the reference destination address is "4097" shown in FIG. 27A. In the process of step S1607, the determination reference values stored at addresses shifted from the reference address by the amount corresponding to the above correction information (in other words, in this case, "BIGLMAX1" of address "4098", "BIGLMAX2" of address "4099") ”) of “BIGLMAX6” of address “4100”). Specifically, in this case, if the above correction information corresponds to the setting value Ve "1" (setting value Vd = "00H"), obtain "BIGLMAX1" at the next address of the reference destination address, If the correction information corresponds to the setting value Ve "2" (setting value Vd = "01H"), "BIGLMAX2" at the address two ahead of the reference destination address is obtained, and the correction information corresponds to the setting value Ve. If it corresponds to "3" (setting value Vd="02H"), "BIGLMAX6" at the address three points ahead of the reference destination address is acquired.

In response to acquiring the determination reference value in step S1607, the CPU 201 determines whether the random value is larger than the determination reference value in step S1610 through the processes of steps S1608→S1609 (these processes will be described later). judge. As a result, a jackpot determination is performed using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy.

In step S1610, a jackpot determination is performed using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy, and if it is determined that the random number is not larger than the determination reference value TH1 (that is, a jackpot), the steps from step S1611 described above are performed. Processing is executed to obtain winning information.
In the table shown in FIG. 27A, the judgment reference value TH1 (“BIGLMAX1”, “BIGLMAX2”, “BIGLMAX6”) at the time of low accuracy is stored as a variable representing the hit information corresponding to the case where the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is used. Variables represented by "05AH, 05AH, 000H" are stored in the next address of the area ("4098" to "4100") (from the left side, "low probability medium jackpot information""high probability medium jackpot information""Jackpotinformation" and "Small win information").
In the process of step S1611 that is executed in response to the determination that the random value is not larger than the determination reference value TH1 in step S1610, the CPU 201 stores the random value at the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH1 as described above. The rightmost "000H" of the variables "05AH, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information is acquired.
In this case, if the probability is not changing, in the process of step S1613, the CPU 201 selects one of the winning information variables "05AH, 05AH, 000H" stored in the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH1 as described above. The leftmost "05AH" is acquired, and if the probability is changing, the central "05AH" among the variables "05AH, 05AH, 000H" of the applicable information is acquired in the process of step S1614.

Here, in step S1610, a jackpot determination is performed using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy, and the random number value was larger than the determination reference value TH1 (that is, it was a "miss" as a determination at the time of low accuracy). In this case, a jackpot determination will be made using the high accuracy determination reference value TH2 (“BIGHMAX1”, “BIGHMAX2”, “BIGHMAX6”). At this time, the reference address is the address "4097" shown in FIG. 27A, that is, the start address of the information storage area ("4097" to "4101") for jackpot determination using the low probability determination reference value TH1. Therefore, it should be shifted to the address "4103", that is, the first address of the information storage area ("4103" to "4107") for jackpot determination using the high accuracy determination reference value TH2.
If the setting value Ve is in 3 steps, the address shift amount will be 6 addresses from "4097" to "4103", but if the setting value Ve is in 6 steps, In the information storage area for jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH1, not only "BIGLMAX1", "BIGLMAX2", and "BIGLMAX6" but also "BIGLMAX3", "BIGLMAX4", and "BIGLMAX5" are stored. In other words, in this case, the address shift amount should be 9 addresses corresponding to the increase in the determination reference value TH1 by three.

In this way, when transitioning the reference destination from the information storage area corresponding to low accuracy in the table to the information storage area corresponding to high accuracy, the amount of shift of the reference destination address is determined by the number of stages of the setting value Ve (the number of stages of the setting value Ve to be used). number). Therefore, in this example, setting stage information is acquired in step S1608, and processing for shifting to a specified address based on the setting stage information is performed in the following step S1609. Specifically, in this example, setting stage information representing "3 stages" is acquired, and the reference destination address is shifted to an address six addresses ahead based on the setting stage information.

By executing the processing in steps S1608 and S1609, a jackpot determination is performed in step S1610 using the low probability determination reference value TH1, and if it is determined that the random number value is greater than the determination reference value TH1, , in the process of step S1601, setting difference information "001H" of address "4103" shown in FIG. 27A is acquired.
Therefore, in this case, it is determined in the determination process of step S1602 that the setting difference information is other than "000H", and the processes from step S1605 onwards are executed again.
Then, in the acquisition process of step S1607 in this case, the determination reference value TH2 corresponding to the set value Ve is acquired from among the determination reference values TH2 of "BIGHMAX1", "BIGHMAX2", and "BIGHMAX6", and the determination reference value TH2 is acquired through steps S1608 and S1609. In the determination process of step S1610, it is determined whether the random number value is larger than the acquired determination reference value TH2. That is, a jackpot determination is performed using the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy.

In this way, in step S1610, a jackpot determination is performed using the high accuracy determination reference value TH2, and if it is determined that the random number is not larger than the determination reference value TH2 (a jackpot), the steps from step S1611 onward are performed. Through the process, winning information is acquired.
In the table shown in FIG. 27A, the storage area (“4104” to “4106”) for the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is used as a variable representing the hit information corresponding to the case where the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is used. Variables represented by "000H, 05AH, 000H" are stored in the next address (these variables also represent "low probability medium jackpot information", "high probability medium jackpot information", and "small win information" in order from the left) .
In the process of step S1611, which is executed in response to the determination that the random value is not larger than the determination reference value TH2 in step S1610, the CPU 201 stores the random value at the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH2 as described above. The rightmost "000H" among the variables "000H, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information is acquired.
In this case, if the probability is not changing, in the process of step S1613, the CPU 201 selects one of the winning information variables "000H, 05AH, 000H" stored in the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH2 as described above. The leftmost "000H" is acquired, and if the probability is changing, the central "05AH" among the variables "000H, 05AH, 000H" of the applicable information is acquired in the process of step S1614. In other words, if the probability is changing, the information is "miss", and if the probability is changing, the information is "win".

In step S1610, a jackpot determination is performed using the high accuracy determination reference value TH2, and the random value is determined to be larger than the determination reference value TH2 (that is, it is a loss with respect to both determination reference values TH1 and TH2). In this example, processing is performed based on the information stored in the area of addresses “4109” to “4111” in the table shown in FIG. 27A, that is, the failure response information for obtaining the failure information.
Here, depending on the processing in steps S1608 and S1609 that is executed when the high accuracy judgment reference value TH2 is acquired in step S1607, the reference destination address may be 6 addresses ahead from the previous address "4103". It will be shifted to "4109". Therefore, in the process of step S1601 executed in response to the determination that the random value is larger than the determination reference value TH2 in step S1610, "000H" stored at the address "4109" is acquired as the setting difference information. be done. In other words, in this case, the process proceeds from steps S1601 to S1602 to S1603.

Here, in the table shown in FIG. 27A, in the storage area ("4109" to "4111") of the failure response information, "65535" is set as the determination reference value at the next address ("4110") of the setting difference information. Stored. In other words, a "missing judgment reference value" is stored for reliably obtaining a passing judgment for a random value that can take a value from 0 to 65535. Further, variables "000H, 000H, 000H" representing deviation information are stored in the address next to the judgment reference value for deviation ("4111"). The variables are also information corresponding to low-accuracy medium, high-accuracy medium, and small hit in order from the left side.

In this case, in the acquisition process of step S1603, "65535" as the "decision criterion value for failure" stored in the address next to the reference destination address is acquired as the criterion value. Then, in the determination process of step S1610 that is executed via the process of step S1604, it is determined whether the random number value is larger than the "determination reference value for failure"=65535, and as a result of the determination, the random number value is A determination result is obtained that the value is not larger than the "determination reference value for failure."

In this way, in step S1610, a determination is made using the "determination reference value for failure", and if it is determined that the random value is not larger than the "determination reference value for failure", the failure information is determined by the processing from step S1611 onward. The acquisition process is performed.
Specifically, in the process of step S1611 that is executed in response to it being determined in step S1610 that the random value is not larger than the "determination reference value for failure", the CPU 201 selects the "determination reference value for failure" in the table. The rightmost "000H" of the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" stored at the next address is acquired.
In addition, in this case, if the probability is not changing, the CPU 201 selects the leftmost "000H" of the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" stored at the address next to the "decision criterion value" in the process of step S1613. If the variable is acquired, and the probability is changing, in the process of step S1614, the central "000H" among the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" is acquired.
In this way, when it is determined that the result is a loss with respect to both the judgment standard values TH1 and TH2, each "win information" (small hit information, low probability medium/big hit information, high probability Information representing a "miss" is acquired as (medium jackpot information).

(Fluctuation pattern lottery processing)

The variable pattern lottery process will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern lottery process in step S1504.
First, in step S1701, the CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a setting error based on the setting error flag. If there is no setting error, the CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a hit in step S1702. That is, based on the jackpot determination flag, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot (=5AH).

If it is determined in step S1702 that there is no hit (miss), the CPU 201 selects a loss variation pattern table in step S1703, and then proceeds to variation pattern selection processing in step S1706. That is, this is a process of selecting a variation pattern based on a table and random numbers for variation patterns.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1702 that there is a win, the CPU 201 selects a winning variation pattern table in step S1704, and then proceeds to variation pattern selection processing in step S1706.

FIG. 29 shows an example of a losing variation pattern table, and FIG. 30 shows an example of a winning variation pattern table.
First, as a premise, a variation pattern table for special figure 1 and a variation pattern table for special figure 2 are prepared as a loss variation pattern table and a hit variation pattern table, respectively.

In the fluctuation pattern lottery at the time of a loss, which is performed using the loss fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. There are nine types: 8s, normal variation 12s, normal reach, super reach 1, super reach 2, super reach 3, and super reach 4.
In addition, in the winning fluctuation pattern lottery performed using the winning fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 30, the fluctuation patterns of the lottery candidates are "normal fluctuation winning,""super reach 1,""super reach 2," and "super reach 3." It is said to be one of the 5 types of "Super Reach 4".
In addition, regarding "normal fluctuation", the numerical value written together represents the fluctuation time, and "s" after the numerical value means "second".

Here, among the above fluctuation patterns, "normal fluctuation 4s", "normal fluctuation 6s", "normal fluctuation 8s", and "normal fluctuation 12s" in particular belong to fluctuation patterns corresponding to "misses" that are not selected at the time of winning (hereinafter referred to as (Sometimes referred to as the "outlier fluctuation pattern").

In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern lottery at the time of a loss is performed using a different fluctuation pattern table for each loss type (loss 1, 2, 3), regardless of whether it is a special drawing 1 or 2 (see FIG. 29).
Here, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the selection rate (the rate at which the corresponding type is selected) by the symbol lottery is different for each of the loss types of "miss 1,""miss2," and "miss 3," and "miss 1" is assumed to be different. ” has the highest selection rate, and “miss 2” and “miss 3” have lower selection rates than “miss 1”. Specifically, in this example, the selection rate for "missing 1" is "190/200", and the selection rates for "missing 2" and "missing 3" are each "5/200". In this case, if the jackpot determination result is a "lose", in most cases, "lose 1" will be selected as the type of win.

As for the variable pattern lottery for special drawing 1, when the losing type is "missing 1", the lottery is not based on the set value Ve, but is based on the number of reserved balls. Therefore, among the variation pattern tables for special figure 1, the variation pattern table used when the miss type is "miss 1" is common among the setting values Ve, but it is a different table depending on the number of reserved pitches. is available.

In the variation pattern lottery of special figure 1 in the case of "miss 1", there are five variation patterns of lottery candidates: "normal variation 4s", "normal variation 6s", "normal variation 8s", "normal variation 12s", and "normal reach". In this example, the variation pattern to be drawn is different depending on the number of reserved pitches.
Specifically, when the number of balls held = 0, "Normal variation 12s" and "Normal reach", when the number of balls held = 1, "Normal variation 8s" and "Normal reach", and when the number of balls held = 2, "Normal variation" The variation patterns to be drawn are 6s variation and normal reach, and when the number of pending pitches is 3, 4s normal variation and normal reach are respectively selected as variation patterns to be drawn.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern table, the numerical values stored for each fluctuation pattern to be drawn are the distribution of the winning probability on the assumption that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern can take 200 different values from 0 to 199. Represents the value (value representing the distribution). For example, in the variation pattern table for special figure 1, in the table with "miss 1" and "number of reserved balls = 0", the stored value for "normal variation 12s" = "160", and the stored value for "normal reach" = "40" This means that the winning probability for "Normal Variation 12s" is "160/200" and the winning probability for "Normal Reach" is "40/200".
The above distribution value is shown as the stored value in the table for the convenience of explanation, and the actual fluctuation pattern table stores the judgment reference value used in the jackpot random number judgment described above. become. For example, regarding the above table with "missing 1" and "number of pending pitches = 0", for example, "159" is stored as the actual stored value (judgment reference value), and in that case, the random number for fluctuation pattern is 159 or less If so, "Normal variation 12s" is selected, and if the random number for variation pattern is greater than 159, "Normal reach" is selected.

As can be seen by referring to the distribution values shown in Figure 29, in the fluctuation pattern lottery of special symbol 1 corresponding to the case of "missing 1", "normal fluctuation" is more likely to be selected than "normal reach". (I try to increase the appearance rate).
In addition, in the variation pattern lottery of special figure 1 corresponding to the case of "miss 1", the larger the number of reserved balls, the more a normal variation pattern with a shorter variation time is selected.

Next, as for the variable pattern lottery of special map 1, for the variable pattern lottery in the case where the losing type is "missing 2" and "missing 3", the lottery will be based on the set value Ve, and the lottery will be based on the number of reserved balls. It will not be a lottery. For this reason, the fluctuation pattern table for special figure 1 used in the cases of "missing 2" and "missing 3" is common between the number of reserved balls, but a different table is prepared for each set value Ve. There is.

In the variation pattern lottery of special map 1 that corresponds to the cases of "miss 2" and "miss 3", the variation patterns of lottery candidates are "Super Reach 1", "Super Reach 2", "Super Reach 3", and "Super Reach 4". It is considered a seed.
In this example, regarding the variation pattern lottery of special drawing 1 corresponding to the case of "missing 3", the variation pattern to be drawn is varied depending on the set value Ve.
Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery for special map 1, the variation patterns to be drawn for each combination of "miss 2", "miss 3", and settings 1, 2, and 6 are as follows.
Setting 1 and “missing 2” = super reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 1 and “missing 3” = super reach 1
Setting 2 and “missing 2” = super reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 2 and “missing 3” = super reach 2, 3
Setting 6 and “missing 2” = super reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 6 and “missing 3” = super reach 4

Based on the distribution values illustrated in the figure, in this example, the variation pattern lottery for special map 1 corresponding to the case of "missing 2" will vary in the order of super reach 4, 3, 2, 1 in the case of setting 1. The patterns are made easy to select, and in the case of setting 2, the variation patterns are selected in the order of super reach 1, 2, 3, 4, and in the case of setting 3, the variation patterns are selected in the order of super reach 1, 3, 2, 4. I'm making it easy.
In addition, in this example, regarding the variable pattern lottery of special map 1 corresponding to the case of "missing 3", the higher the setting (the larger the setting value Ve), the more the super reach with high expectation of winning tends to be selected. That's what I do.

Note that, like the variation pattern lottery corresponding to the above-mentioned case of "missing 2", the variation pattern table used in the lottery where the variation patterns of the lottery candidates are three or more types may contain multiple values ( A value expressed as "number of fluctuation patterns of lottery candidates - 1" is stored. For example, in the table corresponding to the case of setting 1 and "missing 2" in the figure, for example, the first value = 9, the second value = 39, and the third value = 99 are the criteria values. In that case, if the random number for the fluctuation pattern is less than or equal to the first value, "Super Reach 1" will be used, and if it is greater than the first value and less than or equal to the second value, "Super Reach 2" will be used, and the second value will be used. If the value is greater than the third value and less than or equal to the third value, "Super Reach 3" is selected, and if the value is greater than the third value, "Super Reach 4" is selected.

Next, as for the variation pattern lottery of special drawing 2, when the losing type is "missing 1", unlike the case of special drawing 1, the variation pattern of the lottery candidates is only "normal variation 12s". There is. Therefore, in the fluctuation pattern table for special figure 2, "miss 1" and "number of reserved balls = 0", "miss 1" and "number of reserved balls = 1", "miss 1" and "number of reserved balls = 2,""missing1," and "number of reserved pitches = 3," all the distribution values corresponding to "normal fluctuation 12 seconds" are set to "200."
In this case, since the lottery result is the same even if the number of reserved balls is different, the variation pattern table may be a common table for the number of reserved balls.

In addition, as for the variable pattern lottery of special map 2, when the losing type is "missing 2" or "missing 3", the lottery will be based on the set value Ve as in the case of special drawing 1. There will not be a lottery based on the number of pending pitches. For this reason, regarding the fluctuation pattern table for special figure 2, the fluctuation pattern table used in the cases of "missing 2" and "missing 3" is common among the number of reserved balls, but differs depending on the set value Ve. Tables are available.

In the variation pattern lottery of special map 2 that corresponds to the cases of "missing 2" and "missing 3", there are two variation patterns of lottery candidates: "normal variation 12s" and "super reach 4", and depending on the setting value Ve. , one of these "normal variation 12s" and "super reach 4" variation patterns is selected.
Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery of special figure 2 corresponding to the cases of "miss 2" and "miss 3" in this example, "normal variation 12s" is always selected when either setting 1 or 2 is selected. In the case of setting 6, "Super Reach 4" is selected.

Next, the winning variation pattern table shown in FIG. 25 will be explained.
In this embodiment, in the variable pattern lottery at the time of winning, different tables are used for each winning type for both special figures 1 and 2.
In this embodiment, the variation pattern of lottery targets is set as follows for each winning type. In other words, when the winning type is "Normal 4R", the variation patterns for both special drawings 1 and 2 are "Normal Variation Hit", "Super Reach 1", "Super Reach 2", "Super Reach 3" and "Super Reach 4". There are five types.
In addition, when the winning type is "Normal 6R", in special map 1, the variation patterns to be drawn are "Normal Variation Hit", "Super Reach 1", "Super Reach 2", "Super Reach 3", and "Super Reach 4". In special map 2, there are four types, ``Super Reach 1'', ``Super Reach 2'', ``Super Reach 3'', and ``Super Reach 4'', excluding ``Normal Variation Hit''.
Furthermore, if the winning type is "Probable Variable 6R" or "Probable Variable 10R", the variation patterns to be drawn for both special drawings 1 and 2 are "Super Reach 1", "Super Reach 2", "Super Reach 3", and "Super Reach 4". There are said to be 4 types.

In the fluctuating pattern lottery at the time of winning in this embodiment, the fluctuating pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only for a specific winning type. Specifically, for the variable pattern lottery of special map 1, a variable pattern lottery is performed according to the set value Ve only for the winning types of "normal 4R" and "probable variable 10R", and for the variable pattern lottery of special map 2, "normal" Variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only for the winning types of 4R, 6R with probability, and 10R with probability.

Regarding the variable pattern lottery in the case of "Normal 4R", the variable pattern of the lottery target is varied in both special drawings 1 and 2 depending on the set value Ve. Specifically, in the fluctuation pattern lottery corresponding to "Normal 4R" in this example, if setting 1 is set, five types from "normal fluctuation hit" to "super reach 4" are selected, and if setting 2 or setting 6, "super reach" is selected. Each of the four types, ``Reach 1'' to ``Super Reach 4,'' is a variable pattern to be drawn.
Regarding the fluctuating pattern lottery in the case of "Normal R6", "Probable Variable 6R", and "Probable Variable 10R" which are winning types other than "Normal 4R", the variable pattern for lottery is set to the set value Ve in both special drawings 1 and 2. It is said to remain unchanged.

In this embodiment, in the variation pattern lottery when the special drawing 1 wins, the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only in the case of "normal 4R" and "probable variation 10R". For this reason, in the winning variation pattern table of special drawing 1, different tables are prepared for each set value Ve as the variation pattern table used in these "normal 4R" and "probable variation 10R" cases.
As can be seen with reference to FIG. 30, in this example, in the variation pattern table of special drawing 1, the distribution value for "Super reach 4" is changed as the setting value Ve becomes larger in each table of "Normal 4R" and "Probability variation 10R". It's getting bigger. As a result, when winning each of "Normal 4R" and "Probable Variable 10R", the higher the current setting is, the easier it is to select the variation pattern with the highest expected winning value as the variation pattern of the special drawing 1.

In addition, in this example, in the variation pattern lottery when the special drawing 2 wins, the variation pattern lottery is performed for "normal 4R", "probability variation 10R", and "probability variation 6R" according to the set value Ve. For this reason, in the winning variation pattern table of special drawing 2, a different table is prepared for each set value Ve as a variation pattern table used in the case of "normal 4R", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R". In this example, in the variation pattern table of special figure 2, the distribution value for "Super Reach 4" is increased as the setting value Ve becomes larger in all of these "Normal 4R", "Probable Variable 6R", and "Probable Variable 10R" tables. .

Here, as can be seen by referring to the distribution values in the figure, in this example, the distribution value for "Super Reach 4" is set to be the largest in each table, regardless of the winning type or setting value Ve. That is, in this example, in the variation pattern lottery when a jackpot is determined, the variation pattern with the highest probability of winning is most likely to be selected.

The explanation returns to FIG. 28.
In the selection process of step S1706 described above, a variation pattern is selected based on the above-mentioned miss or hit variation pattern table.
Specifically, when a loss fluctuation pattern table is selected in response to the determination that the ball is a loss in step S1702, the CPU 201 selects a table corresponding to the loss type, the number of held pitches, and the set value Ve from the fluctuation pattern table. Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the selected table and the random number for variation pattern. In addition, if the winning variation pattern table is selected in response to the determination of a win in step S1702, the CPU 201 selects a table corresponding to the winning type and set value Ve from the applicable variation pattern table, and A variation pattern is selected based on the table and random numbers for variation patterns. At this time, it goes without saying that the tables for special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 are selected depending on whether the pattern to be processed is special pattern 1 or 2.
As can be understood from the above explanation, in each hit/loss fluctuation pattern table, one or more judgment reference values (number of fluctuation patterns of lottery candidates - 1) corresponding to fluctuation patterns of lottery targets are determined. In the selection process of step S1706, a variation pattern is selected based on the result of comparing the magnitude relationship between the determination reference value stored in the table selected as described above and the value of the random number for variation pattern.

Note that, in the above example, the variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern is divided into tables for each set value Ve, but a common table may be used for some of the set values Ve.
FIG. 31 shows an example.
Here, a modified example of the winning variation pattern table is shown on the premise that the setting value Ve can take on six values corresponding to settings 1 to 6.
In the example shown in Fig. 31, the table corresponding to "Normal 4R" and "Probability Variable 10R" for Special Figure 1, and the table corresponding to "Normal 4R", "Probability Variation 6R", and "Probability Variation 10R" for Special Figure 2 are set respectively. An example is shown in which tables are divided into groups 1 to 3 and settings 4 to 6.
As shown in the example of FIG. 31, when performing a variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve, it is not limited to separate tables for each set value Ve, but is common between some set values Ve. may be used.

Next, a process to be performed when a setting error is detected during variable pattern lottery will be described.
If it is determined in step S1701 of FIG. 28 that there is a setting error, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1705, selects the common fluctuation pattern table at the time of setting error, and executes the selection process of step S1706.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram of the common fluctuation pattern table at the time of a setting error.
In this embodiment, in the setting error variation pattern lottery performed using the setting error common variation pattern table, the winning variation pattern is forcibly selected for both special symbols 1 and 2, regardless of whether it is a hit or a loss. so that That is, in this example, one of the outlier fluctuation patterns of "normal fluctuation 4s", "normal fluctuation 6s", "normal fluctuation 8s", and "normal fluctuation 12s" is forcibly selected.

In this example, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of a setting error, different variation patterns are selected for the special figure 1 side depending on the number of reserved balls, and for the special figure 2 side, a specific variation pattern is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls. Specifically, only "normal fluctuation 12 seconds" is selected.
Regarding the special figure 1 side, the larger the number of reserved balls, the longer the normal variation pattern is selected which has a longer variation time.

For convenience of explanation, the table structure shown in FIG. 32 is a structure in which distribution values corresponding to the case where the random number for fluctuating pattern lottery can take values from 0 to 199 are stored, but the actual table structure is As a table for each number (0 to 3), a structure is adopted in which at least a fluctuation pattern of lottery candidates is associated with a determination reference value.
For the special map 2 side, if a specific fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls as in this example, there is no need to separate the table for each number of reserved balls (0 to 3). Needless to say.

In FIG. 28, in the selection process in step S1706, if the setting error common variation pattern table is selected in step S1705, a variation pattern is selected based on the table and the random number for variation pattern. Specifically, in this example, a table corresponding to the current number of reserved pitches is selected in the common fluctuation pattern table at the time of a setting error, and the magnitude relationship between the judgment reference value stored in the selected table and the random number for the fluctuation pattern is determined. Select a variation pattern based on the compared results.

The CPU 201 finishes the variable pattern lottery process in step S1508 in response to executing the selection process in step S1706. With the end of the lottery process in step S1504, the fluctuation management process in step S1409 shown in FIG. 24 ends, and the process then proceeds to step S1410 (fluctuation flag ON process) shown in FIG. 23.
As described above, in the command transmission process of step S1411 following step S1410, the "variable pattern designation command" representing the fluctuating pattern lottery result and the "decorative design designation command" representing the symbol lottery result are transmitted to the production control unit 24. Ru.
Based on these commands, the performance control unit 24 side selects a combination of decorative symbols when forming a ready-to-reach state (symbol types that have a ready-to-reach symbol as a constituent element), and a decorative symbol that is finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop symbol). The combinations are determined, and a drawing of a preview performance corresponding to the winning type is performed in the symbol variation display game.

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, if a setting error is recognized at the start of the special pattern variation, the deviation variation pattern (normal variation) will be forcibly selected, but at this time, the decorative pattern In order to confuse the player if extreme heat fluctuation is selected as the side fluctuation, in this example, a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time, such as normal fluctuation 4 seconds to normal fluctuation 12 seconds, is selected as described above. There is.
In this embodiment, the effect control section 24 side is also devised so that the preview effect is not performed in the event of a setting error. Specifically, when the effect control unit 24 receives a setting value abnormality command (see step S1104 in FIG. 20) from the main control unit 20 that notifies a setting error, it is configured not to perform a lottery for the preview effect. Ru.

Here, in this embodiment, if a setting error is recognized based on the above set value abnormality command, the production control unit 24 displays a message such as "RAM abnormality. Please call a staff member" on the liquid crystal display device 36. Notify the occurrence of an abnormality by displaying an image containing the error. The notification is not limited to notification by image display using the liquid crystal display device 36, but also notification by sound or lighting (and/or flashing) of an LED, or a combination of multiple types of presentation means such as images, sounds, and LEDs. It is also possible to make a combined notification.

In addition, in the above, regarding the common fluctuation pattern table at the time of setting error on the special figure 1 side, the normal fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time is selected as the number of held balls increases, but this is just an example. It is also possible to select a normal variation pattern with a longer variation time as the number decreases.
Alternatively, as illustrated in FIG. 33, the same variation pattern may be selected for each number of reserved balls, similar to the special figure 2 side. The example in FIG. 33 shows a case where "normal variation 12s" is commonly selected for each number of reserved pitches.
In this way, in the setting error common variation pattern table, the relationship between the number of reserved pitches and the selected variation pattern can be considered in various ways, and is not limited to a specific relationship.
In addition, for the special figure 2 side as well, the variation pattern selected depending on the number of reserved balls can be made to be different like the special figure 1 side.

(Advantages of setting value related data table as an embodiment)

Here, in this example, in the random number determination table for jackpot determination shown in FIG. 27A, the area below the storage area ("4109" to "4111") of the loss handling information is set as an empty area. Furthermore, in this example, in the random number determination table for jackpot determination shown in FIG. 27B, the area below the storage area of the loss handling information ("4148" to "4150") is set as an empty area. In this example, "0" is stored in these free areas.
In these random number determination tables for jackpot determination, the area other than the free area can be referred to as a usage data storage area in which usage data used to control the progress of gaming operations is stored. Furthermore, the free area can be referred to as an unused data storage area in which unused data that is not used to control the progress of gaming operations is stored.

When such a random number determination table for jackpot determination is made into a first data table including a plurality of set value related information selected with reference to the set value Vd, in this embodiment, the main control unit 20 The ROM 202 stores the first data table and a second data table that is stored in a lower storage area than the first data table and does not include setting value related information.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of storing the first data table and the second data table in the ROM 202 of this embodiment.
As shown in the figure, in the ROM 202 of this embodiment, a special symbol creation address table, that is, second data that does not include setting value related information, is stored in a lower storage area than the first data table (random number determination table for jackpot determination). table is stored.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20, there is a first data table that includes a plurality of setting value related information, and a storage area that is stored in a lower layer than the first data table and that stores setting value related information. The first data table stores a used data storage area in which used data used for controlling the progress of gaming operations is stored, and a second data table that stores unused data that is not used for controlling the progress of gaming operations. It consists of an unused data storage area.

If only the used data storage area is secured in the first data table that includes setting value related information, when attempting to increase the number of setting values Vd (number of stages) to be used, the increased setting value When setting value related information related to Vd is added to the first data table, the data from the second data table onward that should be stored in the lower layer needs to be shifted to the lower layer side. That is, the data after the second data table must be rewritten in order to shift the storage area.
When attempting to increase the number of setting values Vd to be used by securing a storage area for not only used data but also unused data in the first data table containing setting value related information as described above, Setting value related information regarding the increased setting value Vd can be stored in the storage area of the unused data.
Therefore, it becomes unnecessary to rewrite the data after the second data table, and it is possible to reduce the burden of data rewriting work associated with changing the number of set values Vd to be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, the usage data storage area described above stores usage data of a capacity corresponding to the number of setting values Vd that can be set in the setting change process ("3" in this example), and unused data The storage area stores unused data of a capacity corresponding to the number of set values Vd that cannot be set in the setting change process (in this example, "3" corresponding to the set values Ve "3", "4", and "5"). has been done. Specifically, in this example, the capacity is not used according to "3" set values Ve, which is the number of set values Ve that can be set according to the rules = 6 minus the number of set values Ve that are actually used = 3. It is intended to store data.
This makes it possible to secure the storage capacity of the unused data storage area for setting value related information related to the increased setting value Ve when the number of used setting values Ve is increased. .
Therefore, it is possible to prevent data from being rewritten after the second data table.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, "0" is stored as the non-use data as described above, but this means that even if the first data table is referenced by the non-use setting value Vd, the non-use setting This prevents setting value related information corresponding to the value Vd from being acquired. That is, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from occurring, and the fairness of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20, the first data table is stored in a storage area lower than the second data table, and the second data table is stored in a storage area lower than the first data table. It is assumed that the data table is not stored.
Specifically, in the ROM 202 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, the setting value offset conversion table (see FIG. 16) as the first data table is stored in the lowest area of the normal data area. .
Here, as shown in FIG. 36, the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20 is arranged in order from the top layer: "normal program area", "unused area", "normal data area", "unused area", "measurement program area", " An unused area, an unused area, a measurement data area, and an unused area are defined. The "normal program area" is an area where programs related to general games are stored, and the "normal data area" is an area where data tables related to general games that are referenced based on the programs in the "normal program area" are stored. be. For example, the random number determination table for jackpot determination shown in FIG. 27 is stored in this "normal data area."
The "measurement program area" is an area in which programs related to displaying and measuring performance information such as the normal duty ratio information mentioned above are stored, and the "measurement data area" is referenced based on the program in the "measurement program area". This area stores data tables related to performance information display and measurement.

As shown in FIG. 35, by storing the setting value offset conversion table as the first data table in the lowest area of the normal data area, the first data table can be converted into, for example, the above-mentioned "special symbol creation address table" ( (see FIG. 34) etc., and the second data table is not stored in a storage area lower than the first data table.

When increasing the number of setting values Vd to be used by storing the first and second data tables in the ROM 202 in the above manner, the contents of the first data table located at the lowest layer of the data area in the ROM 202 It is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the data part on the lower layer side than the first data table.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden of data rewriting work associated with changing the number of set values Vd to be used.

<5. Processing of the production control section>
[5-1. Outline of processing]

Next, the processing of the production control section 24 will be explained, but first, an example of the structure of scenario data for production control will be described.
The structure of scenario registration information will be explained with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37A shows the structure of scenario registration information as a main scenario and a sub-scenario. This scenario registration information is set using a work area provided in the RAM 243 (eg, built-in CPU work memory) of the production control unit 24.
In this embodiment, the scenario registration information includes 64 scenario channels sCH0 to sCH63. Scenarios registered in each scenario channel sCH can be executed simultaneously.

As shown in the figure, the information that can be registered in each scenario channel sCH includes the sub-scenario timer (scTm) used in the sub-scenario update process, the previous time (scPrevTm), and the sub-scenario execution line indicating the execution line of the sound/motor sub-scenario table. (scIx), sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx) indicating the execution line of the lamp sub-scenario table, main scenario timer (msTm) used for scenario update processing, main scenario execution line (mcIx) indicating the execution line of the main scenario table, There is a main scenario number (mcNo), a main scenario option (mcOpt) which is optional data that can be added to the main scenario, a user option (userFn), a waiting time (delay), and a checksum (checkSum).

When starting a performance by outputting sound from the speaker 46, emitting light from the optical display device 45a, and driving a movable accessory by the movable accessory motor 80c, the waiting time (delay) and main scenario number (mcNo) are input to the scenario channel sCH0. -Register to an empty scenario channel of sCH63.
The waiting time (delay) indicates the time from registration to the scenario channel sCH until the scenario is started. Note that this waiting time (delay) is subtracted by 1 at a predetermined processing timing (for example, step S2004 in FIG. 41, which will be described later). When the waiting time (delay) is 0, processing corresponding to the registered data will be executed.

FIG. 39 shows examples of scenario numbers 1, 2, and 3 as part of the main scenario table. As a scenario for each scenario number, the value of the main scenario timer (msTm) is written as time data in each line of the scenario, and the sub-scenario number (scNo) and option (OPT) can also be written. . That is, in the main scenario table, sub-scenarios (and options in some cases) to be executed are specified as the time determined by the main scenario timer (msTm). Furthermore, the scenario data end code D_SEEND or the scenario data loop code D_SELOP is written in the last line of the scenario.
Note that the value of the main scenario timer (msTm) is incremented by 1 at a predetermined processing timing (for example, step S2004 in FIG. 41, which will be described later) from the start of the main scenario.
In the scenario table of each scenario number, when the main scenario timer (msTm) time in a certain row has elapsed, the table advances to the next row. The time data in each row indicates the timing at which that row ends.
For example, in the case of scenario number 2, the operation of sub-scenario number 2 is specified as the time of the timer value "1500", the operation of sub-scenario number 20 is specified as the time of the next timer value "500", and the operation of sub-scenario number 20 is specified as the time of the next timer value "500". The operation of sub-scenario number 21 is designated as time 2000''. The next line is the scenario data end code D_SEEND. If the scenario data end code is D_SEEND, this scenario is deleted from the scenario registration information (work).

Next, the structure of lamp data registration information will be explained with reference to FIG. 37B. As the lamp data registration information, information indicating the scenario selected from the lamp sub-scenario table, that is, the performance operation (lighting pattern) by the light display device 45a is registered. This lamp data registration information is also set using the work area of the RAM 243.
In this embodiment, the lamp data registration information has 16 lamp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15. A priority is set for each lamp channel dwCH0 to dwCH15, and the priority increases in order from lamp channel dwCH0 to dwCH15. Therefore, the scenario (lamp sub-scenario) registered in the lamp channel dwCH15 is executed with the highest priority. For example, if scenarios are registered in lamp channels dwCH3 and dwCH10, the scenario registered in lamp channel dwCH10 is executed with priority.
The lamp channel dwCH0 is mainly used for lamp effects accompanying BGM (Back Ground Music), the lamp channel dwCH15 is used for error-related lamp effects, and the lamp channels dwCH1 to dwCH14 are used for normal effects.

As shown in the figure, the information that can be registered in each lamp channel dwCH includes the registered lighting number (lmpNew) indicating the number of the registered lighting pattern, the execution lighting number (lmpNo) indicating the number of the lighting pattern to be executed, and the number of lamp sub-scenarios. There is an offset indicating the execution line, an execution time (time), and a checksum (checkSum).

FIG. 40A shows examples of lamp sub-scenario numbers 1, 2, and 3 as part of the lamp sub-scenario table. For each numbered lamp sub-scenario, a value of time data (time) is written in each line of the scenario, and lamp channels and lamp numbers indicating various lighting patterns are also written. In addition, the lamp scenario data end code D_LSEND is written in the last line.

In this ramp sub-scenario table, the time data (time) of each line indicates the time at which the line starts after the sub-scenario starts.
The main scenario timer (msTm) described above is compared with the time data in the table, and if they match, the lamp number of that line is registered in the lamp data registration information in FIG. 37B. The lamp channel dwCH to be registered is the channel indicated on the line.
For example, assume that scenario number 2 shown in FIG. 39 is registered in the above-mentioned certain scenario channel sCH, and sub-scenario number 2 is referenced. In lamp sub-scenario number 2 shown in FIG. 40A, lamp channel 5 (dwCH5) and lamp number 5 are described with time data (time)=0 in the first line. In this case, when the main scenario timer (msTm)=0, the information on the first line is first registered in the lamp channel dwCH5 of the lamp data registration information in FIG. 37B as the registered lighting number (lmpNew)=5. The value of the sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx) of the scenario registration information is updated to the value of the next line (second line). This is a lamp channel dwCH5, which has a relatively low priority, and is registered for executing the lighting pattern operation of lighting number 5.
Regarding the second line, similar processing is performed when the main scenario timer (msTm) reaches "500". That is, the registered lighting number (lmpNew)=6 (that is, the lighting pattern instruction of lighting number 6) is registered in the lamp channel dwCH5 of the lamp data registration information.
Note that if the time data (time) has the same value in two consecutive lines, processing for each line will be started at the same time.
In the lamp drive data creation process described later, lamp drive data is created based on the lamp data registration information updated in this way.

Next, the structure of motor data registration information will be explained with reference to FIG. 37C. As the motor data registration information, information indicating the scenario selected from the motor sub-scenario table is registered. This motor data registration information is also set using the work area of the RAM 243.
In this embodiment, the motor data registration information has, for example, eight motor channels mCH0 to mCH7 corresponding to eight motors.
As shown in the figure, the information that can be registered in each motor channel mCH includes execution operation number (no), registered operation number (noNew), operation count (LCNT), excitation counter (TCNT), execution step (step), and operation line. (offset), parent (migration source)/child (migration destination) attribute (attribute), parent number (retNo), return address (retAddr), loop start point (roopAddr), loop count (roopCnt), error counter (errCnt) ), current input information (currentSw), software switch information (softSw), and software count (softCnt).

FIG. 40C shows an example of motor sub-scenario number 1 as part of the motor sub-scenario table. As the motor sub-scenario for each number, the value of time data (time) is written in each line of the scenario, and information on the motor, solenoid/user option is also written. Furthermore, the scenario data end code D_MSEND is written in the last line.

Regarding this motor sub-scenario table, when the sub-scenario timer (scTm) reaches 0 (initially it is 0), set the value of time data (time) of this motor sub-scenario table to the sub-scenario timer (scTm). do. Note that the time data (time) of each line indicates the timing at which the line ends. Absolute time is written in the sub-scenario timer (scTm), so the time data value to be set is the value of (time data of the current line) - (time data of the previous line).
The motor data (motors 0 to 3, 4 to 7) is configured such that one byte per motor indicates a motor operation pattern number (a motor operation table number to be described later). The number of the motion pattern is set in the registered motion number (noNew) and execution motion number (no) of the motor channel corresponding to the motor number.
In step S2202 in FIG. 44, which will be described later, this motor data registration information is updated, and in step S2203, motor drive data is created based on the update of the motor data registration information.

FIG. 38 shows sound data registration information. As the sound data registration information, information indicating the scenario selected from the sound sub-scenario table is registered. This sound data registration information is also set using the work area of the RAM 243.
In this embodiment, the sound data registration information has 16 sound channels aCH0 to aCH15.
As shown in the figure, the information that can be registered in each sound channel aCH includes volume transition amount (frzVq), volume (frzVl), transition amount change (rsv2), volume change (rsv1), phrase change (rsv0), and stereo (frzSt). ), loop (frzLp), phrase number hi (frzHi), and phrase number low (frzLo).

FIG. 40B shows examples of sound sub-scenario numbers 1 and 2 as part of the sound sub-scenario table. For each numbered sound/motor sub-scenario, the value of time data (time) is written in each line of the scenario, and information on BGM, warning sound, error sound, and sound control is also written. Furthermore, the scenario data end code D_SEEND is written in the last line.
Regarding this sound sub-scenario table, when the sub-scenario timer (scTm) becomes 0 (initially it is 0), set the value of time data (time) of this sound sub-scenario table to the sub-scenario timer (scTm). do. Note that the time data (time) of each line indicates the timing at which the line ends. Absolute time is written in the sub-scenario timer (scTm), so the time data value to be set is the value of (time data of the current line) - (time data of the previous line).
The BGM data for this line consists of information to be registered in the sound data registration information, such as the BGM phrase number and volume value, and is set to the sound channel aCH0 (in addition to aCH1 in the case of stereo) in the sound data registration information. .
The data of the notice sound of the line is composed of information to be registered in the sound data registration information, such as the phrase number and volume value of the notice sound, and is set in an empty part of the sound channels aCH2 to aCH14.
The error sound data of the line is composed of information to be registered in the sound data registration information, such as the phrase number and volume value of the error sound, and is set in the sound channel aCH15.
The sound control data consists of channel information in the lower 6 bytes and control information in the upper 2 bytes.
In step S2033 in FIG. 41, which will be described later, reproduction output control is performed based on the scenario update process and the updated sound data registration information.

Note that the sound sub-scenario table and the motor sub-scenario table may have an integrated table structure for each line of time.

An example of the processing of the production control unit 24, particularly the processing of the CPU 241, which performs production control using the scenario data structure as described above will be explained with reference to FIG.
The CPU 241 starts the process shown in FIG. 41 when the power is turned on to the main body of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

First, in step S2000, the CPU 241 performs necessary initial setting processing before starting the gaming operation. For example, initialization processing includes interface system initialization, interrupt settings, external memory initialization, WDT initialization, movable accessory return processing and control initialization, sound source control initialization, and serial output controller initialization. initializes the scheduler (scenario scheduler, device scheduler, lamp scheduler, sound scheduler), initializes the system timer, initializes the LCD control, etc.
Note that each scheduler refers to the above-mentioned scenario registration information, motor data registration information, lamp data registration information, and sound data registration information, or the progress of scenario control based on these. As the initialization process, a work area for storing the scenario registration information and the like is initialized.

After completing the initial setting process in step S2000, the CPU 241 executes a power-on history information initial setting process in step S2001. The initial setting process is a process for holding in the RAM 243 information necessary for displaying a setting history confirmation screen Gs to be described later, which is performed using the liquid crystal display device 36. Although details will be described later, predetermined history information, such as change history information of the setting value Ve, is displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs (see FIG. 46).
In addition, the processing as an embodiment executed by the CPU 241 when displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs, including the power-on history information initialization processing in step S2001, will be explained again.

In response to the execution of the process in step S2001, the CPU 241 repeatedly performs the processes in and after step S2002.
In particular, in this embodiment, the CPU 241 executes the processing from step S2002 onwards while monitoring the frame timing of the liquid crystal display device 36. In this example, control is performed based on a V blank signal, which is a synchronizing signal used particularly for display control.
Note that in this embodiment, the V blank signal is generated twice during 1/30 second (33.3 ms), which is one frame period of a display image on the liquid crystal display device 36. Since the CPU 241 counts up the V blank interrupt counter in response to the V blank signal, the V blank interrupt counter is counted up every 1/60 seconds (16.6 ms).
Naturally, each process of the CPU 241 is performed based on a processing clock having a frequency much higher than the frequency of the V blank signal. Each process in FIG. 41 is performed while grasping the period from the start to the end of the frame according to the V blank signal. At the start of the frame, steps S2004 to S2006 are performed once, and after that, the V blank signal is Steps S2021 to S2043 are repeated until the end of one frame period is confirmed by the value of the interrupt counter. When the end of one frame period is detected, the processes of steps S2050 to S2052 are performed.

In step S2002, the CPU 241 performs clear control on the WDT circuit included in the production control unit 24.
In the following step S2003, the CPU 241 checks the frame update flag. The frame update flag is a flag for managing scheduler updates and the like in frame periods.
At the start of a certain frame of display data, the frame update flag is turned off (because it is turned off at step S2052, which will be described later), at the end of the frame.
Therefore, at the frame start timing, the CPU 241 advances from step S2003 to S2004.

In step S2004, the CPU 241 updates the frame of the scenario scheduler. Specifically, this is a process of updating the waiting time (delay), main scenario timer (msTm), and sub-scenario timer (scTm) of the scenario registration information in FIG. 37A. In other words, it can be said that the timer of the production scenario is advanced by one timing at the start of the frame.
The CPU 241 then turns on the frame update flag in step S2005. This is information indicating that the scenario timer has been advanced in the current frame.
Further, the CPU 241 turns off the scheduler update flag in step S2006. This is information indicating that the scheduler has not been updated, that is, the scenario contents (scenario registration information, lamp data registration information, sound data registration information) have not yet been updated as the timer progresses.
Then, the process returns to step S2002. After the CPU 241 clears the WDT circuit, the frame update flag is ON in step S2003, so the process proceeds to step S2020. Here, the WDT circuit is sequentially reset if the CPU 241 is in a normal processing state.

Note that, as described above, steps S2004 to S2006 are performed only once after the frame start timing, and in step S2004, the timer update of the scenario registration information is performed. The scenario for presentation progresses every 33.3 ms, which is one frame period. For example, the main scenario timer (msTm) advances every 33.3ms. The time of the main scenario timer (msTm) in one row in the main scenario table of FIG. 39 corresponds to the time of the written value x 33.3 ms. Furthermore, the time in one line indicated by time in the sub-scenario table in FIG. 40 also corresponds to the time of the indicated value x 33.3 ms.

In step S2020, the CPU 241 branches the process depending on the value of the V blank interrupt counter. If the V blank interrupt counter has not reached "2" (that is, if it is "0" or "1"), the process advances to step S2021.
The V blank interrupt counter is cleared at the end of the frame in step S2051, and is incremented twice in one frame. Therefore, V blank interrupt counter=0 indicates the first half period of the frame, and V blank interrupt counter=1 indicates the second half period of the frame. The V blank interrupt counter becomes 2 with the V blank signal at the end of the frame.
During the frame period in which the V blank interrupt counter is "0" or "1", the CPU 241 proceeds from step S2020 to step S2021 so as to repeat steps S2021 to S2043 as many times as possible.

In step S2021, the CPU 241 branches the process depending on whether the V blank interrupt counter is "0" or "1". That is, whether the current time is the first half or the second half of a certain frame period.
If the V blank interrupt counter is currently 0, that is, if it is the first half of the frame, the process advances to step S2022, and the received command from the main control unit 20 is confirmed. That is, it is checked whether one or more received commands are stored in the command reception buffer. If there is no received command, the process advances to step S2030.
If there is one or more received commands, the CPU 241 performs command analysis processing in step S2023.

Then, the CPU 241 turns off the scheduler update flag in step S2024. Note that turning off the scheduler update flag in step S2024 means that even if the scheduler update flag was once turned on in step S2031 during the current frame period, if a command is received, the scheduler update flag is turned off again in the current frame period. It means to turn off.

An example of the command analysis process in step S2023 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43.
As described above, in step S2022 of FIG. 41, the CPU 241 checks whether the production control command supplied from the main control unit 20 is stored in the command reception buffer, and if the production control command is stored, the command will be read out by the process shown in FIG.

In the performance control unit 24, a command reception buffer for receiving the performance control command transmitted from the main control unit 20 is prepared in the RAM 243.
First, in step S2101 of FIG. 42, the CPU 241 checks the read pointer indicating the read address of the command reception buffer and the write pointer indicating the write address.
The light pointer is updated in response to command reception, and the received effect control command is stored in the address indicated by the light pointer accordingly. The read pointer is updated when reading from the command reception buffer (step S2102). Therefore, if the read pointer is not equal to the write pointer, it means that an unread production control command is stored in the command reception buffer. Therefore, if the read pointer=write pointer does not match, the process advances to step S2102, and the CPU 241 loads 1 byte of command data from the address indicated by the read pointer in the command reception buffer. In this case, the read pointer is incremented for the next read (load).

In fact, the determination as to whether there is a received command in step S2022 in FIG. 41 can also be made based on whether the read pointer=write pointer. In an actual program, if the read pointer=write pointer at the time of first proceeding to the command check process, it may be determined that there is no received command in step S2022 of FIG.

As mentioned above, one production control command is formed of two bytes: one byte as a mode and one byte as an event. In step S2103 of FIG. 42, the CPU 241 checks whether the loaded 1-byte command data is a mode or an event. This confirmation is performed using the value of Bit 7 of the 8 bits (Bit 0 to Bit 7).
If it is the mode, the process advances to step S2104 to receive the higher-order data of the command, and the read command data is saved in the register "command HI byte". Also clears the "command LO byte" register. Then, the process returns to step S2101.
Even if it continues, if the read pointer is not the write pointer, it means that the unread production control command is stored in the command reception buffer, so the process advances to step S2102, and the CPU 241 indicates the read pointer in the command reception buffer. Load 1 byte of command data from address. Also increments the read pointer.
If the read command is an event, the process advances from step S2103 to S2105 to receive lower-order data of the command, and the read command data is saved in the register "command LO byte".

By saving the mode and event command data in the registers "command HI byte" and "command LO byte", the CPU 241 has taken in one command.
Therefore, in step S2106, the CPU 241 performs processing according to the fetched command. A specific example will be described later with reference to FIG.

The read pointer becomes the write pointer when there is no production control command that has not yet been taken in by the CPU 241 in the command reception buffer. Since the read pointer=write pointer is confirmed in step S2101, the command analysis process as step S2023 in FIG. 41 is ended.

An example of the command corresponding processing in step S2106 above will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 43A shows basic processing as command-compatible processing. In response to receiving the 2-byte production control command, the CPU 241 first checks in step S2121 of FIG. 43A whether or not it is currently in the test mode. If it is in the test mode, all performance scenarios are cleared, sound output is stopped, and the LED in the optical display device 45a is turned off in step S2122. The test mode is then ended in step S2123.
These processes are not performed unless the test mode is in progress.
The CPU 241 then processes the captured effect control command in step S2130.

Production control commands include, for example, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command, a decorative design designation command, a pending addition command, a game state designation command, a power-on command, a RAM clear command, a setting change command, a setting change end command, and a setting confirmation command. commands, setting confirmation end commands, setting value commands (in this example, the main control unit 20 sends them at least at startup (S808 in FIG. 17) and at the start of symbol fluctuation (S1411 in FIG. 23)), error commands (for various errors). There are various settings such as notification command)... In step S2130, the CPU 241 performs processing specified by the program in response to the received command. Here, four production control commands are listed in FIGS. 43B to 43E to illustrate specific processing.

FIG. 43B shows processing S2130a when a fluctuation pattern designation command is imported as the command processing in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 performs a process of setting a decorative symbol designation command waiting state in step S2131. This is because the CPU 241 controls the variable display of the symbols by sequentially receiving the variable pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command.

FIG. 43C shows processing S2130b when a symbol designation command is taken in as the command processing in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 first checks in step S2132 whether the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received. If it has not been received, the process ends.
When the decorative pattern designation command is received, if the fluctuation pattern designation command has already been received, the process advances to step S2133, and first, a scenario for the accessory origin correction operation is registered. Then, in step S2134, a symbol variation flag is set. The symbol fluctuation flags are provided corresponding to each of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol, and each flag represents a fluctuation state. For example, a 2-bit first special symbol variation flag FZ1, a second special symbol variation flag FZ2, and a normal symbol variation flag FZ3 are prepared, and each indicates whether it is varying, stopped (hit), or stopped (miss). Here, with the start of variation, the corresponding symbol variation flag (one of FZ1, FZ2, FZ3) is set to a value indicating "currently varying".
In addition, in the case of a hit, the symbol fluctuation flag is set to a value indicating "stopping (hit)" for a predetermined period of time when the symbol fluctuation ends, and after that, it is set to a value indicating "stopping (missing)" until the symbol fluctuation starts. is set to
In step S2135, the CPU 241 performs a fluctuation start process. Thereafter, in response to the start of variation, the variation pattern designation command is deleted in step S2136.

FIG. 43D shows processing S2130c when a power-on command is taken in as the command processing in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 clears the RAM 243 in step S2137. For example, storage areas such as the contents of command reception/transmission buffers and various operation input information buffers are cleared.
Then, in step S2138, an error cancellation command is sent, in step S2139, the accessory error information is cleared, in step S2140, the accessory object operation is stopped, in step S2141, a power-on scenario is registered, and in step 2142, the power is turned on to be sent to the liquid crystal control unit 40. Executes a set of commands in sequence.

FIG. 43E shows processing S2130d when a RAM clear command is taken in as the command processing in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 clears the RAM 243 in step S2143. For example, storage areas such as the contents of command reception/transmission buffers and various operation input information buffers are cleared.
Then, in step S2144, an error release command is transmitted, and in step S2145, a RAM clear error set and an error notification timer are set. Further, in step S2146, information regarding the lottery process in the RAM 243 is cleared, and in step S2147, information regarding the scenario is cleared. Then, in step S2148, an initial power-on display (RAM clear) command to be sent to the liquid crystal control unit 40 is set.

An example of processing in response to command reception has been described above.
In this example, the processing in steps 2022 to S2024 in FIG. 41 as processing in response to the above command reception is started only during the period when the V blank interrupt counter=0.

Subsequently, the CPU 241 checks the scheduler update flag in step S2030 of FIG. 41 and branches the process. Here, steps S2031 to S2034 are performed only when the scheduler update flag is off.
Then, in step S2031, the frame update flag is turned on.
Since the scheduler update flag is turned off in step S2006 immediately after the start of the frame, the processes in steps S2031 to S2034 will be performed when the process proceeds to step S2030 for the first time in the current frame period. Furthermore, since the scheduler update flag is turned off in step S2024, the processes in steps S2031 to S2034 are performed even if a command is received.

The CPU 241 performs processing as scenario scheduler execution in step S2032. This is an update process for scenario registration information. For example, for information registered in the scenario channel sCH that has a waiting time (delay) of 0, processing corresponding to the registered data is executed. That is, processing is performed according to the scenario number specified in the main scenario table. The main scenario execution line (mcIx), sub-scenario execution line (scIx), sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx), etc. are also updated.
In step S2033, the CPU 241 performs sound scheduler execution and output processing. This is a process of updating sound data registration information according to the sound sub-scenario specified in the scenario table, and a process of outputting a sound control signal based on the sound data registration information. The CPU 241 causes the sound controller included in the production control unit 24 to output sound in accordance with the progress of the current scenario.

In step S2034, the CPU 241 performs ramp scheduler execution processing.
This is an update process for lamp data registration information according to the lamp sub-scenario specified in the scenario table.
For example, the CPU 241 performs the following processing for each of the lamp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15. First, the main scenario timer (msTm) and the time data (time) of the lamp sub-scenario table are compared. The time data (time) of the ramp sub-scenario table indicates the time when the line (the line indicated by the sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx)) starts. Therefore, if the time of the main scenario timer is greater than or equal to the time data (time), processing for that line is performed.
For example, first, it is determined whether the current line is the line in which the lamp scenario data end code D_LSEND is written. If the line does not include the lamp scenario data end code D_LSEND, the CPU 241 acquires the lamp channel dwCH and lamp number described in the line, and registers the lighting pattern number in the acquired lamp channel dwCH.
Also, a registered lighting number (lmpNew) and an execution lighting number (lmpNo) are set in the area corresponding to the lamp channel dwCH. That is, the lamp number obtained from the relevant line of the lamp sub-scenario table is set to the registered lighting number (lmpNew), and "0" is set to the execution lighting number (lmpNo). Also, the value of the sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx) is increased by 1. As described above, the lamp data registration information is updated to a state in which the lamp effect operation to be executed is registered.

In step S2034, the lamp data registration information is updated as described above, but lamp drive data creation and lamp drive data output based on the updated lamp data registration information are performed in subsequent steps S2041 and S2042.

In step S2040, the CPU 241 branches the process depending on the value of the V blank interrupt counter. If the V blank interrupt counter is "0", the processes in steps S2041 to S2043 are executed, and if it is "1", these processes are not executed.
In step S2041, the CPU 241 creates lamp drive data. That is, lamp drive data to be output to drivers that actually drive various LEDs is generated based on information registered in each lamp channel dwCH of lamp data registration information.
Then, in step S2042, the generated lamp drive data is controlled to be output to the driver.
In step S2043, the CPU 241 performs key event processing. Then, the process returns to step S2002.
The lamp drive data creation and output processing in steps S2041 and S2042 is started only when the V blank interrupt counter=0. That is, these processes are started only during the first half of the frame.

After the V blank interrupt counter becomes 2, that is, when the end of the frame period is detected (S2020:=2), the CPU 241 performs processing corresponding to the end of the frame from step S2050 onwards.

First, the CPU 241 executes history display processing in step S2050. This history display process is a process for displaying the aforementioned setting history confirmation screen Gs on the liquid crystal display device 36. Note that details will be explained later.

In response to execution of the display process in step S2050, the CPU 241 clears the V blank interrupt counter in step S2051, then turns off the frame update flag in step S2052, and returns to step S2002. Then, as explained above, processing for a new frame period is performed.

In addition to the above process shown in FIG. 41, the CPU 241 executes the process shown in FIG. 44 as an interrupt process every 1 ms, for example. That is, the process in FIG. 44 is a process that is executed every 1 ms regardless of the frame timing of display data.
In FIG. 44, the CPU 241 performs WDT pulse generation processing in step S2200. The WDT circuit performs counting every 1 ms using this WDT pulse.
In step S2201, the CPU 241 performs motor sensor update processing. This is a process of detecting information from the position detection sensor 82a described above.

In step S2202, the CPU 241 performs device scheduler execution processing. Specifically, the motor data registration information is updated. Further, in step S2203, output processing of motor drive data to the driver of the movable accessory motor 80c is performed as device scheduler output processing.
That is, the CPU 241 controls the motor operation every 1 ms, which is a time interval of about 1/30 of the frame period.

In the following step S2204, the CPU 241 performs key input processing. That is, signals corresponding to operations of various operators such as the performance button 13 are checked.
In response to executing the process of step S2204, the CPU 241 ends the interrupt process shown in FIG.

Up to this point, processing examples of the CPU 241 have been described. In the above processing examples, the CPU 241 performs various processes in accordance with frames of display data.
FIG. 45 shows various timings for each frame period of display data.
Let each frame of display data be a frame FR0, FR1, FR2, . . . . For example, frame FR0 is displayed between time points T0 and T1, and frame FR1 is displayed between time points T1 and T2.
Since the value of the V blank interrupt counter is cleared in step S2051 of FIG. 41, the value of the V blank interrupt counter becomes "0" at the start of the frame, "1" at the middle of the frame (times T0m, T1m, etc.) as shown in the figure. It is cleared immediately after reaching 2”.

In the figure, "SL" represents a frame period, and "SLs" represents the start timing of the frame period (hereinafter referred to as "frame start timing SLs"). "CA" means the first half period of the frame.

First, as a premise, the liquid crystal control section 40 performs drawing processing of display data (frame image data) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 based on a liquid crystal control command from the effect control section 24 (CPU 241). This drawing process is executed for the display data of the next frame within the frame period SL. For example, drawing of the display data of frame FR1 is executed within time points T0 to T1, which is the display period of frame FR0.
Further, in the liquid crystal control unit 40, preloading of data used for drawing is performed. This preloading is performed in a period one frame before the drawing process in preparation for drawing. For example, preloading for drawing the display data of frame FR2 is executed within time points T0 to T1, which is the display period of frame FR0.
Note that the start timing of these drawing processes and preloading is synchronized with the frame start timing SLs as shown in the figure.

On the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) side, the processes of steps S2021 to S2043 are repeatedly performed during the frame period indicated by SL.
However, the received command processing (S2022 to S2024) is executed only during the first half period CA of the frame. This is because these are executed only when the V blank interrupt counter=0.
The received command analysis process is as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, which requires a relatively heavy processing load, and the number of processes increases depending on the number of received commands. Depending on the type of command, it may be necessary to perform a lottery for presentation. In this embodiment, such processing is performed only in the first half of the frame.
For this reason, regarding the command signal, for example, for a command signal received during the period indicated by the broken line from time T0m to T1m, the command analysis will be performed during the period from time T1 to T1m.

Further, the lamp data creation/output processing (S2241 to S2243) is also executed only during the first half period of the frame CA. This is because these are also executed only when the V blank interrupt counter=0.

[5-2. Display of setting history confirmation screen]

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a function of displaying a history of operations related to the setting value Ve (Vd) as a setting operation history. Specifically, as the setting operation history, a history related to changing the setting value Ve and a history related to confirmation of the setting value Ve (setting confirmation processing) are displayed.

FIG. 46 shows an example of the setting history confirmation screen Gs as one display mode of the setting operation history.
The setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 under the control of the production control unit 24, and in this example, as shown in the figure, for each target event of setting change and setting confirmation, Information representing the content and the time of occurrence (in this example, date and time: date and time in hours and minutes) is included.
For setting changes, the "contents" of the target event include the name information of the type of target event (that is, "setting change") and the set value Ve after the change (corresponding to the set value Vd set by the setting change process). Numerical information of the setting value Ve) is included. Regarding setting confirmation, name information of the type of target event (that is, "setting confirmation") and numerical information of the setting value Ve at the time of setting confirmation (that is, setting value Ve confirmed by the user) are included.

The setting history confirmation screen Gs of this example consists of a plurality of pages, and specifically, five pages can be displayed. In this example, the number of pieces of history information that can be displayed on one page is 10, so a maximum of 50 pieces of history information (10×5 pieces) can be displayed.
In this example, the page switching operation on the setting history confirmation screen Gs is performed by operating the cross key 16 (see FIG. 3). For example, each time one of the direction keys of the cross key 16 is pressed once, the page is turned by one page.

In the setting history confirmation screen Gs, a display number is assigned to each piece of history information. In this example, this display number is assigned "1" to the latest history, and numbers are assigned in ascending order from the latest to the past.
Further, the current page number is also displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs (in the figure, the maximum page number is also written as "1/5").

Although not shown in FIG. 46, events subject to history display in this example include various errors in addition to the above-described setting changes and setting confirmations. Examples of errors here include various errors other than set value errors, such as a door opening error, an out-of-supply error, and a ball clogging error.

The setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed in response to a predetermined operation being performed under a predetermined condition. Specifically, the setting history confirmation screen Gs in this example is displayed in response to the effect button 13 being operated during setting confirmation (during execution of the setting confirmation process in step S109). Here, as understood from the previous explanation, the setting confirmation process is executed in response to the front frame 2 being opened and the setting key being operated when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and therefore the setting history is It is assumed that the confirmation screen Gs is displayed in such a state that the front frame 2 is open at the time of startup.

FIG. 47 shows an example of a setting confirmation screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 during setting confirmation. The display of this setting confirmation screen is started by the production control unit 24 (CPU 241) in response to receiving the setting confirmation command (see S704) from the main control unit 20 side.
In this example, the settings confirmation screen displays information to notify users such as hall staff that settings are being confirmed (in the figure, the words "Settings confirmation in progress"), as well as a settings history confirmation screen Gs. Guidance information (in the figure, the text "setting history list", the icon of the production button 13, and the text "determine" correspond) for the operations required for this is displayed.

Here, in this example, the operation guide for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed on the setting confirmation screen, that is, the notification screen during setting confirmation, as described above, and the user can follow the operation guide. In response to performing a predetermined operation (operation of the effect button 13 in this example), the screen changes to the setting history confirmation screen Gs shown in FIG. 46.
This can be said to mean that the production control unit 24 (CPU 241) accepts an instruction to display the setting history confirmation screen Gs while displaying operation guidance on the notification screen during setting confirmation.
This allows the user to grasp two pieces of information: the timing at which the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed and the operations required to display the setting history confirmation screen Gs, just by displaying the settings confirmation screen. can. In other words, it is possible to reduce the processing load in presenting information that needs to be notified to the user when displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs.

Further, the setting history confirmation screen Gs of this example can be changed to all pages regardless of the number of saved history information. For example, even if the number of history information stored is "8" as shown in FIG. 46, all pages from the second page to the fifth page can be displayed in response to a page switching operation. In other words, it is possible to display all pages, including blank pages for which no history information exists.
This allows the user to intuitively understand the maximum number of histories that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can hold and display.

FIG. 48 shows an example of history display information required for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs.
This history display information is information that is constructed by the CPU 241 of the production control unit 24 accumulating history information corresponding to each occurrence of a history display target event in a predetermined area of the RAM 243.

In the work area of the RAM 243, an area for storing history display information (hereinafter referred to as "history storage area") is defined, and the CPU 241 executes the processing described later (see FIGS. 52 and 53). Then, each time a target event occurs, corresponding history information is added to the history storage area.
Hereinafter, history information that is added one by one each time a target event occurs will be referred to as "individual history information." In this example, since a maximum of 50 histories can be displayed, the history storage area in the RAM 243 is set as an area that can store 50 pieces of individual history information from history 0 to history 49. .

As shown in the figure, the individual history information includes the year, month, hour, and minute information necessary to display the date and time information of the history, as well as the type of history (setting change, setting confirmation, or error). It includes "type" information and "data" information. If "type" is a setting change or setting confirmation, the "data" information stores information representing the setting value Ve after the setting change and the setting value Ve after the setting confirmation, respectively. If it is an "error", information representing the error type is stored.

As the history display information, for example, a checksum area and a storage area for latest history position information are provided in the first area, and an area following these areas is used as a storage area for individual history information.
The checksum area is an area that stores a sum value calculated from information stored in the entire storage area of individual history information. Note that the role of this sum value will be described later.
The latest history location information is information representing the storage location of the last added individual history information on the RAM 243.

Here, since the information reading speed of the RAM 243 is relatively fast, it is desirable to use the history display information held in the work area as described above in order to quickly display the setting history confirmation screen Gs.
However, the RAM 243 is not connected to a backup power source and cannot continue to hold stored information when the power is cut off. The setting operation history displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs is expected to span a relatively long period of time, for example, several weeks or one month. Therefore, only the RAM 243 is used for history display information. If it is used as a storage destination memory, the history information will be lost every time the power is cut off, making it impossible to properly display the history.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the memory 244 shown in FIG. The history display information stored in the work area of the RAM 243 is stored as a backup.

FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining an example of backup operation of history display information as an embodiment.
In this example, the memory 244 is provided with a plurality of areas for backing up and storing history display information. Specifically, two areas are set, a first history storage area and a second history storage area in the figure.
The CPU 241 copies the history display information stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 to each of the first and second history storage areas in the memory 244 .

As mentioned above, the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed only when the settings are being confirmed (in other words, immediately after the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on again). After that. Since the history display information in the RAM 243 is cleared (can no longer be retained) due to power cutoff, the CPU 241 displays the history display backed up in the first history storage area or the second history storage area of the memory 244 when starting itself. information is written back to the history storage area of the RAM 243. Thereby, it is possible to obtain a state in which appropriate history display information is stored in the RAM 243 before the setting history confirmation screen Gs is to be displayed.
Then, the CPU 241 causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display the setting history confirmation screen Gs based on the history display information stored in the RAM 243.
Thereby, it is possible to realize a gaming machine that can properly and quickly display the setting operation history.

In this example, on the premise that the history display information in the RAM 243 is backed up in the memory 244, a plurality of history storage areas such as the above-mentioned first and second history storage areas are provided to take multiple backups. It is said that
By making multiple backups of the history display information in this manner, it is possible to improve the display resistance of the setting history confirmation screen Gs against damage to stored data in the memory 244. In other words, even if data is corrupted in a certain history storage area, the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed using the history display information in other history storage areas. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a situation in which proper history information display becomes impossible.

Here, in this example, the copying (backup) of the history display information to the memory 244 is executed every time new history information (individual history information) is added to the history display information in the RAM 243. That is, in response to the addition of new individual history information to the history display information in the RAM 243 in response to the occurrence of a target event, the added history display information is stored in the first and second history storage areas in the memory 244. Copy each.

For example, it is conceivable that the history display information is copied to the memory 244 at regular intervals, but in that case, an unexpected power shutoff (power shutoff of the pachinko gaming machine 1) occurs immediately after the latest individual history information is added. If this occurs, the power will be cut off without the latest history being reflected in the history display information in the memory 244, and a situation may occur where the latest history will not be displayed when the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed at the next startup. obtain.
On the other hand, if a copy is performed each time the history is added as described above, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the stored contents of the history become inconsistent between the RAM 243 and the memory 244 due to an unexpected power outage. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of display problems in history information.

Note that copying to the memory 244 each time individual history information is added is just an example, and it is also possible to copy at other timings, such as copying each time the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. be.

FIG. 50 shows an example of processing for adding individual history information to history display information.
In this example, the storage area of individual history information in the RAM 243 is a ring buffer area that can hold 50 pieces of individual history information.
Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 50A, in a state where 50 pieces of history t0 to history t49 are stored as individual history information, a state is reached in which individual history information as history t50 should be newly added. Suppose that
In this state, the latest history position indicated by the latest history position information described above is the storage position of the individual history information as history t49 as shown in the figure.

In adding individual history information as history t50, first, as shown in FIG. 50B, the CPU 241 updates the latest history position to the next position, that is, the storage position of history t0. Then, as shown in FIG. 50C, the individual history information of the history t50 to be added is stored in the storage position of the individual history information represented by the latest history position (that is, it is overwritten on the history t0).
As a result, when adding new individual history information while the maximum number of individual history information is retained, the past individual history information is overwritten by the latest individual history information, and as a result, the history display data The storage area for individual history information will hold 50 pieces of individual history information from the latest to the past. That is, the number of pieces of individual history information held is designed not to exceed the upper limit of 50 pieces (required for display).

In this example, the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed based on the history display information in which the individual history information is stored in the ring buffer mode.
When individual history information is stored in a ring buffer format, the latest history position is managed, and the newest or oldest history information can be automatically determined based on the storage position of each piece of history information based on the latest history position. will be done. Therefore, when displaying the history list in the newest or oldest order on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, there is no need to refer to the time information included in each piece of history information to identify the newest or oldest piece of history information. . That is, it is possible to reduce the processing load when displaying a list of histories in chronological order or in chronological order.

Here, in this example, the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is executed only on the condition that the settings are being confirmed, and the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed during the setting change (during the setting change process in step S115). Screen Gs is not displayed.
Since the setting value Ve may be changed during the setting change, it is not desirable to display the history of the setting change while the setting is being changed because it may confuse the user.
By not displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs during the setting change, it is possible to prevent user confusion regarding the history display of the setting value Ve.

Next, the process for realizing the operation related to displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs as the embodiment described above will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 51 to 55.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the power-on history information initialization process (S2001). This process is a process executed by the CPU 241 as a part of the production control main process explained with reference to FIG. The process of S2001 is executed. As described above, the process in step S2001 is a process for retaining information necessary for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs in the RAM 243.

In FIG. 51, in step S2301, the CPU 241 performs a process of transferring the history display information in the first history storage area in the memory 244 to the internal work (RAM 243). Here, if the event to be displayed in the history has occurred before the current activation, the memory 244 is updated with the history information in step S2160, which will be described later (see FIG. 53). In particular, in step S2406), history display information is stored in each of the first and second history storage areas. In the process of step S2301, among the history display information stored in the memory 244 in this way, the history display information in the first history storage area is transferred to the RAM 243 and stored in the history storage area.

In the following step S2302, the CPU 241 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the sum value for the first history storage area (checksum processing). That is, regarding the history display information (hereinafter referred to as "first history display information") stored from the first history storage area to the history storage area of the RAM 243 as described above, the storage value of the entire storage area of individual history information is A sum value is calculated from the sum value, and it is determined whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value stored in the checksum area in the first history display information.
The sum value in the checksum area is calculated from the stored value in the storage area of individual history information by the process of step S2405 in the history information update process of step S2160 (FIG. 53) when backing up the history display information to the memory 244. Therefore, by determining whether the sum values match or do not match in the checksum processing in step S2302, it is possible to determine whether the stored values in the entire storage area of the individual history information match or do not match those at the time of backup. It is. In other words, it is possible to determine whether there is an abnormality in the backed up history information (for example, whether there has been unauthorized rewriting, etc.).

If it is determined in step S2302 that the sum values match, that is, the sum values are normal, the CPU 241 ends the initialization process in step S2001. That is, if the history information backed up in the first history storage area of the memory 244 is normal, the state in which the history information in the first history storage area is held in the RAM 243 continues. That is, the history display process in step 2050 (FIG. 54), which will be described later, is executed based on the history information in the first history storage area held in the RAM 243 in this way.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2302 that the sum values do not match, that is, the sum values are abnormal, the CPU 241 performs a process of transferring the history display information in the second history storage area in the memory 244 to the internal work in step S2303. . That is, the history display information in the second history storage area is transferred to the RAM 243 and stored in the history storage area (that is, the history display information in the first history storage area stored in step S2301 is overwritten).

Next, in step S2304, the CPU 241 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the sum value for the second history storage area. In other words, regarding the history display information (hereinafter referred to as "second history display information") of the second history storage area stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 as described above, the storage value of the entire storage area of individual history information A sum value is calculated from , and it is determined whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value stored in the checksum area in the second history display information. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormality in the history information backed up to the second history storage area.

If it is determined in step S2304 that the sum values match, that is, the sum values are normal, the CPU 241 ends the initialization process in step S2001. In other words, if the history information in the second history storage area stored in the RAM 243 is normal, the state in which the history information in the second history storage area is held in the RAM 243 continues; in this case, the second history storage area The history display process (FIG. 54) is executed based on the history information.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2304 that the sum values do not match, that is, the sum values are abnormal, the CPU 241 advances to step S2305, clears the history display information, and ends the initial setting process of step S2001. In the clearing process in step S2305, the history display information stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 and the history display information stored in the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244 are also cleared.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a process for updating history information in response to the occurrence of a target event for history display.
The target events in this example are setting changes, setting confirmations, and occurrences of errors, and the CPU 241 performs history information update processing in accordance with the occurrence of these events based on production control commands from the main control unit 20 side. It is meant to be executed. Specifically, regarding setting changes and setting confirmations, the history information is updated in response to reception of a setting change end command, a setting value command, and a setting confirmation command from the main control unit 20 (see FIG. 52A). Regarding errors, history information is updated in response to reception of various error commands from the main control unit 20 (see FIG. 52B).
In this example, the processes in FIGS. 52A and 52B are executed as one of the command processes in step S2130 described above (see FIG. 43).

FIG. 52A shows setting-related command processing S2130e corresponding to a setting-related command that is a command related to setting change or setting confirmation.
First, by processing steps S2150 to S2154, the CPU 241 checks whether any of the settings confirmation in progress command, settings confirmation end command, settings change command, settings change in progress command, or settings change end command has been received.
Specifically, in step S2150, it is determined whether a setting confirmation command has been received, and if the setting confirmation command has not been received, it is determined in step S2151 whether a setting confirmation end command has been received. If the settings confirmation end command has not been received, it is determined in step S2152 whether a settings change command has been received, and if the settings change command has not been received, it is determined in step S2153 whether a settings change command has been received. Determine whether If the settings change in progress command has not been received, it is determined in step S2154 whether a settings change end command has been received.

Here, regarding step S2150, the setting confirmation command includes the notification information of the setting value Ve, as explained in FIG. 15, and in step S2150 in this example, the setting value " 1 to 6 is received. In other words, it is determined whether or not a command for notifying a setting value Ve within the usable range Re rather than within the usable range Ru has been received as a setting confirmation command.
Furthermore, in this example, regarding the setting change command in step S2152, a command that similarly notifies any of the setting values Ve (“1” to “6”) within the usable range Re rather than within the usable range Ru is used. Determine whether or not it has been received.
Note that the significance of allowing a command that notifies a value within the usable range Re but not within the usable range Ru with respect to the command that notifies the set value Ve in this way will be described later.

If it is determined in step S2150 that the setting confirmation end command (setting values "1" to "6") has been received, the CPU 241 executes a setting confirmation scenario registration process in step S2155, and proceeds to step S2159.
If it is determined in step S2151 that the setting confirmation end command has been received, the CPU 241 executes the setting confirmation end scenario registration process in step S2156, proceeds to step S2159, and in step S2152, the setting change command (setting value "1") is executed. to "6"), the process directly advances to step S2159.
Furthermore, if it is determined in step S2153 that a settings change in progress command has been received, the CPU 241 executes a settings change start scenario registration process in step S2157, proceeds to step S2159, and determines that a settings change end command has been received in step S2154. If so, a setting change end scenario registration process is executed in step S2158, and the process advances to step S2159.
By executing the scenario registration processing in steps S2155, S2156, S2157, and S2158, performance operations corresponding to settings confirmation in progress, setting confirmation end, setting change start, and setting change end are executed, respectively.

In step S2159, the CPU 241 determines whether a spec specification/setting information command has been received. That is, it is determined whether either a spec specification command or a setting value command has been received. Although explanations using illustrations have been omitted, the spec specification command includes information indicating the specs of the gaming machine 1 that the CPU 201 of the main control unit 20 transmits at startup (for example, the probability of winning a jackpot and the number of stages of the setting value Ve to be used). This is a command for notifying information such as information displayed. Further, the setting value command is a command sent by the CPU 201 in step S808 (FIG. 17) in the main loop preprocessing.
The upper byte of both the spec specification command and the setting value command is a specific value representing the spec information of the gaming machine 1, and in step S2159, it is determined whether a command with the upper byte set to the specific value has been received. Accordingly, it is determined whether either the spec specification command or the setting value command has been received.

If neither the specification specification command nor the setting value command has been received, and it is determined in step S2159 that the specification specification/setting information command has not been received, the CPU 241 ends the setting-related command processing in step S2130e. That is, in this case, the process of storing the set value in the RAM 243 in step S2163, which will be described later, is not executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the spec specification/setting information command has been received, the CPU 241 stores the spec information in the RAM 243. That is, the value of the upper byte of the received spec specification command or setting value command is stored in a predetermined area in the work area of the RAM 243.

In step S2161 following step S2160, the CPU 241 determines whether the setting is undefined. That is, it is determined whether the received spec specification/setting information command is not a setting value command but a spec specification command. Here, in this example, the lower byte of the spec specification command is "0FH", and the lower byte of the setting value command is a value corresponding to the setting value Ve. Therefore, in step S2161, depending on whether the lower byte of the received spec specification/setting information command is "0FH", it is determined whether the spec specification/setting information command is a spec specification command rather than a setting value command. (Whether the setting is undefined or not) is determined.

If it is determined that the lower byte is not "0FH" and the setting is not undefined (that is, it is a setting value command), the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2162 and determines whether the setting information is within the usable range Re. That is, it is determined whether the value indicated by the identification data (see FIG. 16) of the setting value Ve included in the received setting value command is within the range of "00" to "05" corresponding to the usable range Re. judge.
If it is determined that the value indicated by the identification data is within the usable range Re and the setting information is within the usable range Re, the CPU 241 stores the setting value information in the RAM 243 in step S2163. That is, the identification data is stored in a predetermined area in the work area of the RAM 243.
In response to executing the storage process in step S2163, the CPU 241 advances the process to step S2164.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2162 that the setting information is not in the usable range Re, the CPU 241 passes the storage process in step S2163 and advances the process to step S2164.
If it is determined in step S2161 that the settings are undefined (that is, it is a spec specification command), the CPU 241 passes the determination process in step S2162 and the storage process in S2163, and advances the process to step S2164.

Note that the determination process in step S2162 functions as an abnormality determination process for the set value Ve received from the main control unit 20 side, and if it is determined that the set value Ve is abnormal, the set value Ve is not stored in the RAM 243. However, the significance of determining whether the set value Ve is within the usable range Re rather than the actual usage range Ru as an abnormality determination on the production control unit 24 side will be described later.

In step S2164, the CPU 241 determines whether it is time to change or confirm settings. This determination is made, for example, if the command determined to have been received in the current setting value related command processing (S2130e) is the first "setting value command" after receiving the "setting change end command" or is a "settings confirmation command". This can be done as a determination as to whether or not it was.

If it is time to change or confirm settings, the CPU 241 advances to step S2165 and sets the history type. That is, the above-mentioned "type" value and "data" value are set for the individual history information to be newly added. Specifically, when changing settings, the value of "type" is a value representing "setting change", and the value of "data" is a value representing the current setting value Ve (setting value Ve that has been completed). set. In addition, if it is a setting confirmation, the value representing "setting confirmation" is set as the value of "type", and the setting value Ve that has been set and confirmed is set as the value of "data" (setting value Ve notified by the setting confirmation command). Set each.

In response to executing the set process in step S2165, the CPU 241 executes history information update process in step S2166.
Note that the history information update process in step S2166 will be explained again.

In step S2167 following step S2166, the CPU 241 executes a process of transmitting setting value information to the liquid crystal side. That is, a process of transmitting information representing the setting value Ve notified by the setting value command to the liquid crystal control unit 40 is performed. This makes it possible to display the setting value Ve notified by the setting value command, such as the setting value Ve set in the setting change process, on the liquid crystal display device 36.
In response to executing the transmission process in step S2167, the CPU 241 ends the process in step S2130e.

FIG. 52B shows processing S2130f corresponding to the error command.
First, the CPU 241 executes error notification in step S2170. That is, a notification process (a notification process using a predetermined presentation means) according to the error type specified from the received error command is executed.

Next, as history type setting processing in step S2171, the CPU 241 sets the value of "type" to a value representing "error" and the value of "data" to a value representing an error number (a value representing the error type) for the individual history information to be newly added. ), and after executing the history information update process of step S2166, the process of step S2130f ends.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the history information update process in step S2166. The update process is a process of updating the history display information in the RAM 243 so that individual history information is added in accordance with a newly occurring target event.
First, in step S2401, the CPU 241 determines whether the latest history position information is within a specified range (that is, within the range of 0 to 49 in this example). If the latest history position information is not within the specified range (that is, if it is 50 or more), the CPU 241 finishes the update process in step S2160. That is, in this case, since an abnormality has occurred in the latest history position information, the history display information is not updated.

If the latest history position information is a value within the specified range, the CPU 241 advances to step S2402 and updates the latest history position information to the value of the next position. The value of the latest history location information is updated within the range of 0 to 49. As understood from the explanation of FIG. 42 above, if the value is "49", the next location is updated. ``0'' will be set as the value (that is, the value will be cyclically incremented within the range of 0 to 49).

Next, in step S2403, the CPU 241 acquires the time information (year, month, day, hour, and minute) of the RTC function unit, and in step S2404 performs processing to save the history information in the area indicated by the latest history position information. That is, the individual history information including the acquired time information and the "type" and "data" information set in the corresponding process of steps S2165 and S2171 described above in FIG. 52 is stored on the RAM 243 indicated by the latest history location information. is stored in the storage area of

Note that, as individual history information, it is also possible to store (display) the energization time from power-on instead of the time information by RTC. As a result, in a gaming machine that does not have an RTC function section, it becomes possible to display information that can specify the time of occurrence of a target event as history information.

In step S2405 following step S2404, the CPU 241 calculates the sum value of the internal work history information and stores it in the checksum area. That is, for the history display information in the RAM 243, a sum value is calculated from the storage values of the entire storage area of the individual history information including the newly added individual history information in step S2404, and the sum value is used as the history display information. The checksum area is stored in the checksum area.

Furthermore, in the following step S2406, the CPU 241 performs a process of transferring the internal work history display information to the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244, and ends the update process of step S2160.
As a result, new individual history information is added, and history display information including a sum value reflecting the addition of the individual history information is stored in the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244, respectively.

Here, as understood from the above explanation, in this example, when backing up the history information stored in the RAM 243 to the memory 244, a sum value is calculated from the history information stored in the RAM 243, and the sum value and The history information stored in the RAM 243 is stored in the memory 244.
As a method of calculating a sum value for determining whether backup information is abnormal and storing it in the memory 244, first, only the history information stored in the RAM 243 is copied to the memory 244, and then the history information stored in the memory 244 by this copying is It is also conceivable to calculate a sum value from the historical information obtained and store the sum value in the memory 244. However, in that case, if part of the copying of the history information from the RAM 243 to the memory 244 fails, the sum value itself will be the correct value, that is, the checksum processing (S2302 or S2304) will determine that there is no abnormality. In reality, inaccurate historical information may be backed up, which may lead to a display failure of the historical information.
With the above method of copying history information and sum values, if part of the history information copying to the memory 244 fails, the history information will be determined to have an abnormality during checksum processing. Since it is possible to prevent the history information stored in H.244 from being used for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is possible to prevent inaccurate history information from being displayed.

Next, a process for displaying history information based on the history display information held in the RAM 243 will be described with reference to flowcharts in FIGS. 54 and 55.
FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the history display process (S2050). As understood from the description of FIG. 41 above, this history display process is executed once per frame period in this example.

In FIG. 54, the CPU 241 determines in step S2501 whether setting confirmation is in progress. Whether or not the setting is being checked can be determined based on whether or not the setting checking command described above is received.
If the settings are not being checked, the CPU 241 ends the history display process in step S2050. As described above, in this example, the setting history confirmation screen Gs should be displayed only during setting confirmation.

On the other hand, if the settings are being checked, the CPU 241 checks the history displaying flag in step S2502. This history displaying flag is an identifier (initial value is OFF) that is set to ON in step S2504, which will be described later, and ON indicates that the history is being displayed, and OFF indicates that the history is not being displayed.
At the stage where the display start condition for the setting history confirmation screen Gs is not satisfied, the history displaying flag is off, and therefore the CPU 241 advances the process from step S2502 to step S2503.

In step S2503, the CPU 241 determines whether a display instruction operation is being performed. As described above, in this example, the operation for instructing the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is the operation of the effect button 13, and the CPU 241 determines whether or not the effect button 13 has been operated in step S2503.

Note that, as understood from the explanation of steps S2501 to S2503 so far, the CPU 241 accepts an instruction to display the setting history confirmation screen Gs on the condition that the settings are being confirmed.

In step S2503, if there is no display instruction operation, the CPU 241 ends the history display process in step S2050.
On the other hand, if there is a display instruction operation, the CPU 241 sets (turns on) the history displaying flag in step S2504, and sets the display page identifier P to "0" in the subsequent step S2505. The display page identifier P is a value for identifying the display page of the setting history confirmation screen Gs.

In response to executing the process in step S2505, the CPU 241 executes history information screen creation process in step S2508. Then, the history display process of step S2050 is finished.
The history information screen creation process in step S2508 is a process for transmitting information necessary for screen display of the page indicated by the display page identifier P to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side. That is, when step S2508 is executed following step S2505, information necessary for displaying the first page (P=0) on the screen is transmitted.
Details of the history information screen creation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

Further, if it is determined in the previous step S2502 that the history displaying flag is on (that is, the state after the first page has already been displayed), the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2506, and determines whether or not there is a page switching operation. Determine. That is, in this example, it is determined whether any direction indicating key of the cross key 16 has been operated.
If there is a page switching operation, the CPU 241 proceeds to history information screen creation processing in step S2508.

Here, the history information screen creation process in step S2508 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In FIG. 55, first in step S2601, the CPU 241 calculates the start position Idx of the history display. That is, the position of the storage area (position on the RAM 243) of the individual history information to be displayed at the head position of the page to be displayed from now on is calculated as the head position Idx. Specifically, the start position Idx is calculated by "latest history position - P x α" (where α is the number of individual history information displayed per page: "10" in this example). For example, when displaying the first page (P=0), the start position Idx is determined as the "latest history position" from "latest history position - 0×α". Alternatively, when displaying the third page (P=2), the start position Idx is determined as "latest history position - 2α".

In step S2602 following step S2601, the CPU 241 sends a page number command. That is, information on the page number specified from the page identifier P (that is, the page number of the page to be displayed) is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 using a liquid crystal control command.

Next, the CPU 241 sets the display number to "1" in step S2603, and then performs the processing in steps S2604 to S2610 to set the information necessary for displaying the page to be displayed on the screen (specifically, individual history information and its display number). is transmitted to the liquid crystal control section 40.
First, in step S2604 following step S2603, the CPU 241 refers to the history information of the area indicated by the start position Idx. That is, the storage information in the area indicated by the start position Idx in the history storage area (history display information) of the RAM 243 is referred to.

Next, in step S2605, the CPU 241 determines whether or not there is history information, that is, whether or not individual history information is stored in the area indicated by the start position Idx.
If it is determined that individual history information is stored and there is history information, the CPU 241 executes a display number command transmission process in step S2606, and then executes a history information command transmission process in step S2607. That is, the individual history information acquired from the area indicated by the display number and the start position Idx is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 by each liquid crystal control command.

In step S2608 following step S2607, the CPU 241 updates the start position Idx to a value corresponding to the storage area of the past individual history information (Idx←Idx-1). This updating process is executed so that the value of the start position Idx is cyclically updated within the range of 0 to 49 (that is, when the start position Idx is "0", it is updated to "49").

Furthermore, in the following step S2609, the CPU 241 increments the display number by 1, and in step S2610 determines whether the transmission process for one page (transmission of individual history information and display number) has been completed. This determination can be realized, for example, as determining whether the value of the display number is equal to or greater than α.

If the transmission processing for one page has not been completed, the CPU 241 executes the processing of steps S2604 to S2610 again. As a result, if one page of individual history information is stored, the process of transmitting the individual history information and its display number is repeated until the transmission process of one page is completed. If the saved individual history information is less than one page, the individual history information and its display number are transmitted only for the saved individual history information (see S2605).

Note that even if the individual history information is not stored in the area indicated by the start position Idx (that is, even if the stored value is "0"), the individual history information based on "0" is directly transferred to the liquid crystal control unit 40 through the liquid crystal control. It can also be sent by command. In that case, on the liquid crystal control unit 40 side, for the individual history information that received such a liquid crystal control command with "0", a display indicating that there is no history (for example, "-" as illustrated in FIG. 38) is displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs. ---'' display) is performed.
According to this method, the determination process in step S2605 can be made unnecessary.

Furthermore, when transmitting the individual history information to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S2607, it is determined whether the individual history information to be transmitted is history information about setting changes (setting change history information), and then If it is setting change history information, it is also possible to check for an abnormality in the setting value Ve included in the history information. Specifically, it is determined whether the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re (whether it is outside the range of "0" to "5").
If the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re and it is recognized that there is an abnormality in the set value Ve in the individual history information to be transmitted, instruction information to display the abnormality is sent to the liquid crystal control unit 40. Send. Thereby, on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, information indicating that an abnormality has been found in the setting value Ve in the corresponding individual history information can be displayed (for example, an "E" mark indicating an error is displayed). In other words, it is possible to notify that the setting change history is not normal.
Alternatively, if an abnormality is found in the setting value Ve in the individual history information to be transmitted, the information on the setting value Ve included in the individual history information may not be transmitted. As a result, on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, the setting value Ve of the individual history information in which the setting value Ve is found to be abnormal can be prevented from being displayed, and it is possible to notify that the setting change history is not normal.

In response to determining that the transmission process for one page has been completed in step S2610, the CPU 241 ends the history information screen creation process in step S2508.
Note that when the transmission process for one page is completed, a liquid crystal control command indicating that fact can be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side.

Here, in response to receiving the various liquid crystal control commands transmitted through the above processing, the liquid crystal control unit 40 displays one page of the setting history confirmation screen Gs in the manner as illustrated in FIG. The image display operation by the liquid crystal display device 36 is controlled so that screen display is performed.

The explanation returns to FIG. 54.
If it is determined in step S2506 that no page switching operation has been performed, the CPU 241 determines in step S2509 whether there is an operation to instruct termination, that is, whether there is an operation instructing to terminate the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs. In this example, the end instruction operation is an operation of the production button 13, and therefore, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the production button 13 is operated in step S2509.

If it is determined that the production button 13 has not been operated and the end instruction operation has not been performed, the CPU 241 ends the history display process in step S2050. As described above, the history display process in step S2050 is performed once per frame period, and the processes in and after step S2501 are performed again in the next frame period.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2509 that an end instruction operation has been performed, the CPU 241 clears (turns off) the history displaying flag in step S2510, sets a demo screen display command in step S2511, and then returns the history to step S2050. Finish display processing.
Note that the process of step S2511 is a process of setting a liquid crystal control command in the command buffer for instructing the liquid crystal control unit 40 to display the above-described demo screen for waiting for customers.

Here, according to the above process, if there is no individual history information for a certain page, the liquid crystal control unit 40 is only notified of the page number (S2602), and the individual history information and its display number are is not transmitted.
On the liquid crystal control unit 40 side, if the page number is transmitted in this way but the individual history information and display number are not transmitted, the page number information of the page and each display number are displayed as the screen of the corresponding page. A screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 that indicates that the individual history information does not exist (for example, the notation "---" in FIG. 38).
This makes it possible to display all pages, including blank pages for which no history information exists. In other words, it is possible to transition to all pages regardless of the number of saved history information.

Note that pages for which no individual history information exists may not be displayed. In that case, the CPU 241 controls the liquid crystal control unit 40 not to display the current display page P in response to the determination that there is no history information in step S2605 (FIG. 55) when the display number is 1. All you have to do is give instructions.

As can be understood from the processes in FIGS. 54 and 55 described above, in this example, when the individual history information to be displayed is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side, the individual history information is transmitted one by one. There is.
Thereby, individual history information can be transmitted using a command.
Therefore, program design on the liquid crystal control section 40 side can be facilitated.

In addition, in the above example, the history information of the corresponding page is transmitted every time the page is switched, but the history information for all pages is first transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side, and when the page is switched, the history information of the corresponding page is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side. Alternatively, a page switching command may be sent to the terminal to instruct the display page to be switched.

[5-3. Regarding data types of setting values in the embodiment]

Here, in the RAM 243 of the production control unit 24, there is an area (hereinafter referred to as "notified setting value storage area A1") that stores the setting value Ve notified by the setting confirmation command or setting value command from the main control unit 20. ) and a storage area for setting values Ve (hereinafter referred to as "history setting value storage area A2") that constitute a part of the individual history information necessary for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs are provided separately. .
In this embodiment, in the operation program of the CPU 241 of the production control unit 24, the program variable of the setting value Ve (hereinafter referred to as "notification setting value Pv1") stored in the notification setting value storage area A1 and the history setting value The type (data type) of the program variable (hereinafter referred to as "history setting value Pv2") of the setting value Ve stored in the storage area A2 is the same. Specifically, in this example, by setting the types of the notification setting value Pv1 and the history setting value Pv2 to be the same "unsigned 8 bits", the number of bits of the setting value Ve stored in the history setting value storage area A2 is changed according to the notification settings. The number of bits is made to match the number of bits of the setting value Ve stored in the value storage area A1.
This makes it possible to prevent information from being lost when the setting value Ve stored in the notification setting value storage area A1 is stored in the history setting value storage area A2 (see S2163 to S2166 in FIG. 52A). That is, because the number of bits of the history setting value Pv2 is smaller than the number of bits of the notification setting value Pv1, a situation occurs in which the setting value Ve acquired from the notification setting value storage area A1 cannot be properly stored in the history setting value storage area A2. This can be prevented, and accurate information can be displayed as setting history information.

FIG. 56 exemplifies the numerical value of the setting value Ve that can be expressed in “unsigned 8 bits” as described above.
By using 8 bits, six values from "1" to "6" can be expressed as the setting value Ve as shown in the figure, and values larger than "6", in other words, abnormal values outside the usable range Re can be expressed. It is possible to express.
In other words, in this embodiment, it is possible to store abnormal values other than the values in the usable range Re as the set value Ve, so that when an abnormality occurs, the cause can be easily identified. ing.

[5-4. Setting value suggestion]

The performance control unit 24 is configured to be able to execute control for displaying a setting value suggestion performance that suggests the current setting value Ve to the player.
The production control unit 24 of this example provides such setting value suggestion production as described below by the left symbol, the mini character preview, the suggestion at the end of the jackpot, and the SU (step up) notice. Performs control to bring out the effects.

(Suggestion by the left pattern)

First, we will explain the suggestive effect using the left pattern. The left pattern here means the "left" decorative pattern among the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative patterns displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a left symbol lottery process for selecting the contents of the left symbol.
First, the CPU 241 of the performance control unit 24 determines whether or not the special mode 1 is set in step S2701. That is, it is determined whether the game mode is a predetermined mode as "special mode 1".
If the special mode is not 1, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the special mode is 2 in step S2702, and if it is not the special mode 2, in step S2703, the CPU 241 performs continuous reach look-ahead (after look-ahead, display of decorative patterns is predetermined for the fluctuation). It is determined whether or not the player has won the pre-read effect that is controlled according to the appearance.

In step S2703, if the continuous reach look ahead has not been won, the CPU 241 acquires the setting value Ve stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243 (notification setting value storage area A1 described above) as setting value information acquisition processing in step S2705. In step S2706, an offset value is acquired from the offset table based on the set value information, and in the subsequent step S2707, the content of the left symbol is determined based on the lottery value.

Here, FIG. 58 shows an example of the left symbol lottery table used in step S2707, and FIG. 59 shows an example of the left symbol lottery offset table used in step S2706. Note that these tables are stored in predetermined areas of the ROM 242, respectively.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the left symbol lottery table, the winning probability for each symbol content (in this example, 10 types of symbol contents from symbol 0 to symbol 9) to be drawn is from "1" to "6". is determined for each set value Ve. In addition, in the figure, the value representing the probability of winning is expressed as a distribution value based on the premise that the random number for lottery can take 10,000 values from 0 to 9999, but As in the case above, the threshold value for the random number for lottery is actually stored. Note that this point also applies to the tables shown in FIGS. 63, 65, 68, 72, and 74 later.

In the left symbol lottery offset table shown in FIG. 59, a corresponding offset value is stored for each setting value Ve from "1" to "6". Specifically, "0" is set for the set value Ve "1", "1" is set for the set value Ve "2", "2" is set for the set value Ve "3", and "2" is set for the set value Ve "3". "3" is stored for "4", "4" is stored for the set value Ve "5", and "5" is stored for the set value Ve "6".

In step S2706 of FIG. 57, an offset value corresponding to the current setting value Ve obtained in step S2705 is obtained according to the left symbol lottery offset table shown in FIG. Then, in step S2707, the lottery table at the position (address) specified by the offset value acquired in step S2706 is selected from among the lottery tables for each setting value Ve in the left symbol lottery table shown in FIG. Specifically, if the offset value is "0", the lottery table with the setting value "1" located at the top of the left symbol lottery table (that is, stored in the address with the lowest number) is ”, the lottery table with the setting value “2” located second from the top in the left symbol lottery table, and if the offset value is “2”, the lottery table with the setting value “2” located third from the top in the left symbol lottery table. 3, the lottery table stored at the position specified by the offset value is selected.

Through the series of processes described above, if the current state does not correspond to either the first special mode or the second special mode, and if the continuous reach look-ahead is not winning, the winning probability based on the set value Ve will be applied to the left symbol. The contents will be selected by lottery. In other words, the appearance rate of symbols 0 to 9 of the left symbol is different depending on the set value Ve, and this is a setting value that suggests the type of the set value Ve to the player depending on the appearance rate of a specific symbol content of the left symbol. Suggestive performance is realized.

As shown in FIG. 57, if it is determined in step S2701 that the mode is the first special mode, the CPU 241 passes the processing in steps S2702 to S2708 and ends the series of processing. In other words, under the first special mode, the lottery of the symbol contents of the left symbol is not performed.
In addition, in the case where it is determined in step S2702 that the mode is the second special mode, and in the case where it is determined in step S2703 that the continuous reach look-ahead has been won, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2704 and does not refer to the set value Ve. The offset value is acquired from the offset table, and the process advances to table selection processing in step S2707. In other words, in this case, the offset value of "0" in the left symbol lottery offset table is acquired (S2704), and the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve "1" is selected from the left symbol lottery table (S2707). . Therefore, under the second special mode and under the continuous reach look-ahead winning state, the symbol content of the left symbol is drawn by a fixed probability of winning that does not depend on the set value Ve. In other words, the setting value suggestion performance using the left symbol is not performed.

As mentioned above, in this example, the setting value suggestion effect using the left symbol is not performed in the continuous reach look-ahead winning state, but as a result, the symbol content of the left symbol won in the left symbol lottery process is changed to the continuous reach look-ahead winning state. It is possible to prevent the pattern content from becoming inconsistent with the symbol content of the left symbol selected in .

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing another example of the left symbol lottery process.
First, in this other example, a table shown in FIG. 61 is prepared as a left symbol lottery offset table stored in the ROM 242. That is, a table with the same content as that shown in FIG. 59 is stored as the first left symbol lottery offset table (FIG. 61A), and a second left symbol lottery offset table different from the first left symbol lottery offset table is stored. A table is stored (FIG. 61B).
In the second left symbol lottery offset table, the same offset value ("2" in this example) is stored for the set values Ve of "1" to "6".

The left symbol lottery process shown in FIG. 60 executes the processes of steps S2710 and S2711 in place of the process of step S2704 shown in FIG. The difference is that
In this case, the CPU 241 acquires the setting value Ve stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243 by acquiring the setting value information in step S2710, and acquires the offset value from the second offset table based on the setting value information in the subsequent step S2711. , the process advances to lottery table selection processing in step S2707.
Since the offset value acquired in step S2711 is the same value regardless of the set value Ve, in the selection process of step S2707 in this case, the same lottery table is selected regardless of the set value Ve.
In this other example, the first left symbol lottery offset table shown in FIG. 61A is used as the offset table in step S2706.

In this way, in the second special mode, a method for performing the left symbol lottery that does not depend on the set value Ve in response to consecutive reach look-ahead winnings is to obtain a fixed offset value without referring to the set value Ve. The method is not limited, but it is possible to refer to an offset table in which the same offset value is stored for each setting value Ve as shown in FIG. 61B, and adopt a method in which the same lottery table is selected regardless of the setting value Ve. You can also do it.

(Suggestion by mini character preview)

FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the mini character preview lottery process executed by the CPU 241.
First, as a premise, the game machine 1 of this example is capable of displaying two types of mini-character preview performances: a first mini-character preview performance and a second mini-character preview performance. As for the first mini-character preview performance and the second mini-character preview performance, it is assumed that the lottery process to decide whether or not to make the preview performance appear has already been performed in a separate process from the process shown in FIG. 62.
In this example, the first mini-character preview performance is not a performance that suggests the set value Ve, but the second mini-character preview performance is a performance that suggests the set value Ve.

In FIG. 62, in step S2801, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the mini character preview performance has been won. If the mini-character preview performance has not been won, the CPU 241 does not execute the series of processes described below, and ends the mini-character preview lottery process of FIG. 62.

If the mini-character preview presentation has been won, the CPU 241 determines in step S2802 whether the winning content is the first mini-character preview.
When it is determined that the first mini-character preview performance has been won and the winning content is the first mini-character preview, the CPU 241 includes the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 20 as a variation pattern information acquisition process in step S2803. After performing the process of acquiring the fluctuation pattern information that is selected, the offset value is acquired from the offset table based on the winning fluctuation pattern in step S2804, and the process of selecting a lottery table based on the offset value is performed in the subsequent step S2805. .

FIG. 63 shows an example of the first mini-character preview lottery table used in step S2805, and FIG. 64 shows an example of the first preview offset table used in step S2804. Note that these tables are stored in predetermined areas of the ROM 242, respectively.
In the first notice offset table shown in FIG. ”), an offset value is determined for each. In this example, the short fluctuation pattern corresponds to the aforementioned "normal fluctuation 4s", "normal fluctuation 6s", "normal fluctuation 8s", and "normal fluctuation 12s", the reach fluctuation pattern corresponds to the aforementioned "normal reach", and the super reach fluctuation The patterns mentioned above correspond to "Super Reach 1", "Super Reach 2", "Super Reach 3", and "Super Reach 4", and as shown in the figure, 0 for the short fluctuation pattern, 1 for the reach fluctuation pattern, and the super reach fluctuation pattern. An offset value of 2 is determined for each.

In the first mini-character preview lottery table of FIG. 63, a plurality of lottery tables are prepared in which the distribution of winning probabilities is determined for each content of the first mini-character preview. In this example, there are five types of content for the first mini-character preview: "None," "Explanation of pending change," "Explanation of strong preview," "Explanation of fixed change mode," and "Character introduction," and the lottery table uses these. There are three types of tables, Table 1 to Table 3, which determine the distribution of winning probabilities for each content.

In FIG. 62, in the acquisition process of step S2804, an offset value is acquired from the first notice offset table shown in FIG. 64 based on the information of the winning fluctuation pattern specified from the acquired fluctuation pattern information, and In the selection process, a lottery table is selected from the first mini character preview lottery table shown in FIG. 63 based on the offset value. Specifically, in this example, if the winning variation pattern is a short variation pattern and 0 is obtained as the offset value, table 1 is selected. Additionally, if the winning variation pattern is a reach variation pattern and 1 is obtained as the offset value, table 2 is selected, and if the winning variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern and 2 is obtained as the offset value, table 3 is selected. selected.

In step S2806 following step S2805, the CPU 241 determines the content of the first mini-character preview based on the selection value, and ends the mini-character preview lottery process shown in FIG. 62. That is, the content of the first mini-character preview is determined according to the distribution value in the table selected from Tables 1 to 3.
In this way, the first mini-character preview performance is not performed according to the set value Ve, but is performed according to the fluctuation pattern.

Further, if the CPU 241 determines in the previous step S2802 that the winning content is not the first mini-character preview, the CPU 241 acquires setting change information in step S2807, and determines whether the setting has been changed in the subsequent step S2808. That is, the latest individual history information among the individual history information stored for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs mentioned above is acquired, and it is determined whether the information of "type" in the individual history information is "setting change". Determine whether

In step S2808, if the information of the "type" is not "setting change" and a negative result is obtained that the setting has not been changed, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2809 and executes the setting value information acquisition process. In step S2810, an offset value is acquired from the offset table based on the set value information, in the subsequent step S2811, a lottery table is selected based on the offset value, and in step S2820, a second mini-character preview is selected based on the lottery value. Decide on the content.

FIG. 65 shows an example of the second mini-character preview lottery table used in step S2811, and FIG. 66 shows an example of the second preview offset table used in step S2810 (note that these tables can also be stored in the ROM 242 ).
In the second advance notice offset table shown in FIG. 66, an offset value is determined for each setting value Ve. In the second notice offset table of this example, offset values are set not only for the set values Ve "1" to "6" but also for the values "for raising" and "for lowering". However, this will be discussed later.

In the second mini-character preview lottery table of FIG. 65, a plurality of lottery tables are prepared in which the distribution of winning probabilities is determined for each content of the second mini-character preview. In this example, the contents of the second mini-character preview are "None", "Game nature explanation", "Suggested setting explanation 1", "Suggested setting explanation 2", "Suggested setting explanation 3", "Suggested setting explanation 4", "Suggested setting explanation 5" There are 7 types of lottery tables available, and the lottery table that determines the distribution of winning probabilities for these contents is divided into set values Ve "1" to "6" and "increase" and "lower" respectively. A total of 8 types are available.

In FIG. 62, in the acquisition process of step S2810, an offset value corresponding to the setting value Ve acquired in step S2809 is acquired from the second notice offset table shown in FIG. 66, and in the selection process of step S2811, the offset value Based on this, a lottery table is selected from the second mini character preview lottery table shown in FIG.
Then, in the determination process of step S2820 following step S2811, the content of the second mini-character preview is determined according to the selected lottery table.

Further, if the CPU 241 obtains a positive result in the previous step S2808 that the above-mentioned "type" information is "setting change" and that the setting has been changed, the CPU 241 advances to step S2812 to obtain the previous and current setting value information. is acquired, and in the subsequent step S2813 it is determined whether the set value is higher than the previous value.
That is, the information on the setting value Ve included in the individual history information stored at the time of the previous setting change among the individual history information whose "type" information is "setting change" and the "notification setting value storage area A1" of the RAM 243. The information on the setting value Ve stored in the second setting value Ve is obtained, and it is determined whether the latter setting value Ve is larger than the former setting value Ve.

In step S2813, if a negative result is obtained that the latest set value Ve is not larger than the previous set value Ve, and the set value is not higher than the previous set value, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2814 to The selected value is obtained, and in the subsequent step S2815, an offset value is obtained from the offset table based on the first selected value. That is, the offset value is acquired from the second notice offset table shown in FIG. Here, the first selection value is a value for selecting an address corresponding to "for lowering" shown in FIG. An offset value corresponding to "for lowering" is obtained from the offset table.
Then, in step S2816 following step S2815, the CPU 241 selects a lottery table based on the offset value, that is, selects a table corresponding to "lower" from the second mini character preview lottery table in FIG. , the process proceeds to determination processing in step S2820.
As a result, the content of the second mini-character preview performance when a setting change is made to lower the set value Ve is determined based on the "lowering" lottery table.

On the other hand, if an affirmative result is obtained in step S2813 that the set value is higher than the previous value, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2817 to obtain the second selected value, and in subsequent step S2818, the CPU 241 obtains the second selected value. Get the offset value from the offset table. The second selection value is a value for selecting the address corresponding to "for raising" shown in FIG. The offset value corresponding to "for raising" is acquired.
Then, in step S2819 following step S2818, the CPU 241 selects a lottery table based on the offset value, that is, selects a table corresponding to "up" from the second mini character preview lottery table in FIG. , the process proceeds to determination processing in step S2820.
As a result, the content of the second mini-character preview performance when a setting change is made to increase the set value Ve is determined based on the "increase" lottery table.

According to the lottery table in FIG. 65, in this example, the winning probabilities for the preview contents "None", "Game nature explanation", "Setting suggestion explanation 1", "Setting suggestion explanation 2" and "Setting suggestion explanation 3" are "For increasing" and " However, the winning probabilities for "setting suggestion explanation 4" and "setting suggestion explanation 5" are different between "upward" and "downward". Regarding "Setting Suggestion Explanation 4", the winning probabilities for setting values Ve "1" to "6" and "for lowering" are all "0", while the winning probabilities for "for increasing" are other than "0", Specifically, in this example, it is "1000/10000", and therefore "setting suggestion explanation 4" is a preview content that can only appear in the case of "upward use". Regarding "Setting Suggestion Explanation 5", the winning probabilities for setting values Ve "1" to "6" and "for increasing" are all "0", while the winning probability for "for lowering" is "0". (in this example, "1000/10000"), therefore, "setting suggestion explanation 5" is a preview content that can only appear in the case of "lowering".

In FIG. 62, the CPU 241 ends the mini character preview lottery process in response to executing the determination process in step S2820.

Here, in determining whether the setting value is higher than the previous value in step S2813 described above, the setting value Ve stored in the "history setting value storage area A2" in the RAM 243 and the "notification setting value storage area The setting value Ve stored in "A1" is compared, but at this time, the RAM 243 has an area for storing the previous setting value Ve ( A "previous setting value storage area A3") may be provided.
In this case, the memory 244 is configured to store the previous setting value Ve separately from the setting history information. For example, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off, the value of the "notification setting value storage area A1" is stored in the memory 244. It is also possible to configure the value written in the memory 244 to be read out to the "previously set value storage area A3" when writing and turning on the power.
Regarding the performance lottery, raising/lowering is determined by comparing the values of the "previous setting value storage area A3" and the "notification setting value storage area A1".

In addition, in step S2813, if the previous setting value Ve and the current setting value Ve are the same value, the second mini character preview lottery table is referred to using the current setting value Ve stored in the "notification setting value storage area A1" as an offset. It is possible to do so.

(Suggestion performance based on jackpot end performance)

FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the jackpot effect lottery process executed by the CPU 241.
The lottery process shown in FIG. 67 is a process in which the content of the jackpot end INT (interval) performance that appears in response to the round game being executed a specified number of rounds is determined based on the set value Ve. Specifically, a background image is drawn by lottery in the jackpot end INT performance.
For the sake of explanation, here, it is assumed that there are three winning types: "3R probability variation", "9R probability variation", and "3R time saving".

First, in step S2901, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the winning type is "3R probability variation". The type of win is notified by, for example, a decorative design designation command transmitted from the main control unit 20.
If the winning type is not "3R probability variation", the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2902 and determines whether the winning type is "9R probability variation". The jackpot performance lottery process is completed. That is, when the winning type is "3R time saving", no setting suggestion is made by the jackpot end INT effect.

In each of the cases where the winning type is "3R probability variation" in step S2901 and the case where the winning type is "9R probability variation" in step S2902, the CPU 241 advances the process to step S2903 and determines whether the probability variation is in progress. Determine whether or not. This corresponds to determining whether or not the current hit is a consecutive hit (or not a first hit).

If it is determined that the probability is not changing, that is, it is the first hit, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2904, executes the setting value information acquisition process, and then acquires the offset value from the first offset table based on the setting value information in step S2905. Then, in step S2906, a lottery table is selected based on the offset value. Further, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2910, and determines the suggestion element during the jackpot end INT based on the lottery value.

FIG. 68 shows an example of a lottery table (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot end INT suggestion element table") for selecting the jackpot end INT suggestion element used in step S2906, and FIG. An example of an offset table is shown (note that these tables are also stored in predetermined areas of the ROM 242).
In the first offset table shown in FIG. 69, an offset value is determined for each setting value Ve. Specifically, as shown in the figure, offset values of "0" to "5" are determined for the set values Ve of "1" to "6".

In the jackpot end INT suggestion element table of FIG. 68, a plurality of lottery tables are prepared in which the distribution of winning probabilities is determined for each content of the jackpot end INT performance. In this example, the background image in the jackpot end INT performance is used for the setting suggestion, and as shown in the figure, there are a total of 13 types of content, including "None (no predetermined background image)" and "Background 1" to "Background 12". are prepared, and a plurality of lottery tables are prepared that determine the distribution of winning probabilities for these contents.
In the jackpot end INT suggestion element table of this example, six lottery tables are stored in order from the upper layer to each of the set values Ve "1" to "6", and for the lower layer, Furthermore, six values are stored that determine the distribution of each of the set values Ve "1" to "6". The six lottery tables on the upper layer are tables that determine the distribution for each set value Ve corresponding to the first win, and the six lottery tables on the lower layer are tables that determine the distribution for each set value Ve corresponding to the time of consecutive wins. It is said that

In FIG. 67, in the acquisition process in step S2905, an offset value corresponding to the setting value Ve acquired in step S2904 is acquired from the first offset table shown in FIG. 69, and in the selection process in step S2906, based on the offset value Then, a lottery table is selected from the jackpot end INT suggestion element table shown in FIG. At this time, in the first offset table, the offset value for the set value Ve is in the range of "0" to "5", so in the selection process of step S2906, a lottery is selected from among the upper six in the jackpot end INT suggestion element table. A table is selected. That is, as a result, the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve is selected from among the lottery tables corresponding to the first win.
In the determination process of step S2910, which is executed subsequent to step S2906, a process of determining the background as a suggestive element (in some cases, none) in the jackpot end INT is performed according to the selected lottery table.

In addition, if it is determined in the previous step S2903 that the probability is changing, that is, it is the time of consecutive winnings, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2907, executes setting value information acquisition processing, and then proceeds to step S2908 based on the setting value information. Then, in step S2909, a lottery table is selected based on the offset value, and the determination process in step S2910 is executed.

FIG. 70 shows an example of the second offset table (also stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 242) used in step S2908.
As shown in the figure, in the second offset table, offset values "6" to "11" are determined for the set values Ve "1" to "6".
Therefore, in the acquisition process of step S2908, a lottery table is selected from among the lower six in the jackpot end INT suggestion element table, that is, a lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve is selected from among the lottery tables corresponding to the consecutive winnings. is selected.
In the determination process of step S2910, which is executed subsequent to step S2909, a process of determining the background as a suggestive element (in some cases, none) during the jackpot end INT is performed according to the lottery table selected in step S2909.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this example, the lottery table corresponding to the first win stored on the upper layer side has a distribution value of 0 for backgrounds 7 to 12, and the lottery table corresponding to the consecutive winnings on the lower layer side For background 1 to background 6, the distribution value is set to 0. As a result, backgrounds 1 to 6 are not displayed during successive hits (they are not displayed as setting suggestion elements), and backgrounds 7 to 12 are not displayed during the first hit.

The CPU 241 finishes the jackpot effect lottery process shown in FIG. 67 in response to executing the determination process in step S2910.

Here, as mentioned above, offset tables (Figs. 69 and 70) that define different offset values for the common set value Ve are provided, and these offset tables are used depending on the conditions to end the jackpot as shown in Fig. 68. By performing a lottery using the INT suggestion element table, table reference processing can be made a common process when performing different lottery selections for each condition as a lottery for setting suggestion elements, and the program capacity can be reduced. can.

(Suggestion based on SU preview)

Next, the suggestion effect based on the SU notice will be explained with reference to FIGS. 71 to 77.
The SU preview performance is a type of preview performance that notifies the player of the possibility of control to an advantageous state, which is an advantageous state for the player, and is a performance that includes one to a plurality of advance notice steps. In other words, it is a staged preview performance that has stages.
In this example, the contents of the SU preview effect, specifically, the background image can be used to make it possible to display a effect that suggests the set value Ve.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the SU preview lottery process executed by the CPU 241.
First, as a variation pattern information acquisition process in step S3001, the CPU 241 performs a process of acquiring information on a winning variation pattern based on, for example, the above-described decorative symbol designation command. Next, in step S3002, the CPU 241 acquires an offset value from the offset table based on the winning variation pattern, selects a lottery table based on the offset value in step S3003, and selects the SU stage based on the lottery value in step S3004. and performs processing to determine the content.

FIG. 72 shows an example of an SU effect table used in the selection process of step S3003, and FIG. 73 shows an example of an offset table for SU stage lottery used in the acquisition process of step S3002 (these tables can also be (stored in each area).
In the SU stage lottery offset table shown in FIG. 73, similar to the first notice offset table shown in FIG. ), an offset value is determined for each super reach variation pattern ("SP reach P"), and in this example, the offset value is 0 for the short variation pattern, 1 for the reach variation pattern, and 2 for the super reach variation pattern. Each value is determined.

In the SU performance table of FIG. 72, a plurality of lottery tables are prepared in which the distribution of winning probabilities is determined for each lottery target related to the SU preview performance. In this example, the lottery targets as SU preview performance "None" and each lottery as SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), SU4 (Character A), and SU5 (Character B) Three types of lottery tables are prepared ("Table 1", "Table 2", and "Table 3" in the figure) that determine distribution values for each target. Here, the parentheses such as (white frame) added after SU1 to SU5 representing the SU stage mean the content of the SU preview performance, specifically the type of background image. For example, (white frame) (Character A) and (Character B) each mean a background image with a white frame, and (Character A) and (Character B) each include a specific character image.
In the SU effect table, "Table 1", "Table 2", and "Table 3" are stored in order from the top layer.

In FIG. 71, in the acquisition process of step S3002, an offset value is acquired from the table shown in FIG. 73 based on the information of the winning variation pattern, and in the selection process of step S3003, the offset value is acquired from the table shown in FIG. A lottery table is selected from. Specifically, in this example, if the winning variation pattern is a short variation pattern and 0 is obtained as the offset value, table 1 is selected. Additionally, if the winning variation pattern is a reach variation pattern and 1 is obtained as the offset value, table 2 is selected, and if the winning variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern and 2 is obtained as the offset value, table 3 is selected. selected.
Then, in step S3004 following step S3003, the CPU 241 selects the SU preview performance "None" based on the stored value (lottery value) of the table selected from Tables 1 to 3 and the random number for the lottery. , SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), or SU5 (character B) is determined. That is, the stage and contents of the SU are determined.

According to the example of distribution values shown in FIG. 72 (this is also an example in which the random number for lottery can take 10,000 ways from 1 to 9999), in Table 1 corresponding to the short fluctuation pattern, the SU preview effect "None"' has the highest winning probability, followed by SU1 (white frame), and the remaining SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), SU4 (Character A), and SU5 (Character B). ), the probability of winning is 0.
In Table 2, which corresponds to the reach variation pattern, the order is SU5 (Character B), SU4 (Character A), SU preview effect "None", SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame). The chances of winning are gradually increasing.
In Table 3, which corresponds to the super reach variation pattern, the winning probability of SU5 (Character B) is the highest, and after that, the winning probability is gradually increased in the order of SU4 (Character A), SU3 (white frame), and SU preview effect "None". The winning probability is lowered, and the winning probability of SU1 (white frame) and SU2 (white frame) is the lowest.

In response to executing the process in step S3004, the CPU 241 determines in step S3005 whether or not SU3 or higher has been won. That is, it is determined in step S3004 whether SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), or SU5 (character B) has been determined.
If SU3 or higher has not been won, the CPU 241 finishes the SU preview lottery process shown in FIG. 71. That is, in the case of winning SU2 or lower, the process for replacing the contents of the SU preview performance described below is not performed.

On the other hand, if SU3 or higher has been won, the CPU 241 advances to step S3006 and determines whether or not the previous SU3 danger was won. In other words, the SU preview performance that appeared last time is an SU preview performance of SU3 or higher whose background has been replaced with the background of the danger pattern frame by content replacement using the SU3 replacement table described later, and this SU preview performance is the target of the preview. It is determined whether a loss determination result is obtained in the symbol variation display game.

If it is determined in step S3006 that the previous SU3 danger was missed, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S3007, acquires the offset value from the offset table without referring to the set value, and then sets the lottery table based on the offset value in step S3008. Then, in step S3012, the replacement content of SU3 is determined based on the lottery value.

FIG. 74 shows an example of the SU3 replacement table used in the selection process in step S3008, and FIG. 75 shows an example of the SU3 replacement offset table used in the acquisition process in step S3007 (these tables are also stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 242 stored respectively).
In the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. 75, an offset value is determined for each set value Ve, and specifically, as shown in the figure, for set values Ve "1" to "6", offset values "0" to "6" are set. "5" is specified.
In the SU3 replacement table shown in FIG. 74, a lottery table is prepared for each setting value Ve, which determines distribution values for each replacement content of "default", "red", and "danger". Here, "default" means that the frame in the background is not replaced, and "red" and "danger" mean that the frame is replaced with red and a danger pattern, respectively.
As shown in the figure, in the SU3 replacement table, the lottery table with the setting value Ve "1" is stored in the uppermost layer, and thereafter, the lottery table with a larger value of the setting value Ve is stored so as to be located in the lower layer. There is.

In FIG. 71, in the acquisition process of step S3007, the offset value is acquired from the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. 75 without referring to the setting value Ve. That is, the CPU 241 obtains the offset value "0" corresponding to the set value Ve "1" in the offset table. In the selection process of step S3008, a lottery table is selected from the SU3 replacement table based on the offset value "0" thus obtained. Specifically, the lottery table corresponding to the setting value Ve "1" stored in the uppermost layer in the SU3 replacement table is selected.
In the determination process of step S3012, which is executed subsequent to step S3008, the replacement content is determined from among "default", "red", and "danger" based on the lottery table selected in this way.

Here, according to the example of the distribution values shown in FIG. 74, the lottery table with the highest "default" winning probability is selected by performing the processes of steps S3007→S3008→S3012. That is, the lottery table with the lowest possibility of replacement is selected. As a result, if the previous SU3 Danger misses, it becomes difficult to perform the SU notice performance with the SU3 Danger again.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3006 that the previous SU3 was out of danger, the CPU 241 executes setting value information acquisition processing in step S3009, and then acquires an offset value from the offset table based on the setting value information in step S3010. Then, in the subsequent step S3011, a lottery table is selected based on the offset value, and in step S3012, processing is performed to determine the replacement content of SU3 based on the lottery value.

Specifically, in the acquisition process in step S3010, the offset value corresponding to the setting value Ve acquired in step S3009 is acquired from the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. 75, and in the subsequent step S3011, the SU3 replacement table shown in FIG. A lottery table based on the obtained offset value is selected from the replacement table. Specifically, if the offset value is "0", the lottery table with the setting value Ve "1" stored in the top layer position is selected, and if the offset value is "1", it is stored in the next position after the top layer position. The lottery table stored at the position (address) specified by the offset value is selected, such as selecting the lottery table with the set value "2".
In the determination process of step S3012 in this case, the replacement content is determined from among "default", "red", and "danger" based on the lottery table selected in step S3011.

According to the example of distribution values shown in FIG. 74, in the SU3 replacement table in this case, the higher the setting, the lower the winning probability of "default", while for "red", the higher the setting, the higher the winning probability. has been done. Also, regarding "Danger", the winning probability is lower than "Danger" and "Red" regardless of the setting value Ve, and the winning probability is the highest when the setting value Ve is "6", which is the highest setting. is being used. In this example, the winning probability of "Danger" is the same for set values Ve "1" to "5", and the winning probability is increased only for set value Ve "6".

The CPU 241 finishes the SU preview lottery process shown in FIG. 71 in response to executing the determination process in step S3012.

As can be understood from the series of processes described above, in this embodiment, the "stage" of the SU preview performance (staged preview performance) can be determined based on variable information, and the "content" of the SU preview performance is determined by the set value Ve. It is possible to determine based on Specifically, in this example, the "content" of the SU preview performance can be determined by replacement.

Regarding the setting suggestion using staged preview performance, if the stage of staged preview performance is determined based on the set value, it will be difficult to develop the staged preview performance and it will be difficult to enhance the performance effect. Therefore, as described above, the stage of the staged preview performance can be determined according to the fluctuation information, and the preview content of the staged preview performance can be determined based on the set value.
As a result, when realizing the setting value suggestion performance using the staged advance notice performance, it is possible to prevent the staged notice performance from becoming difficult to develop, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Usually, multiple types of preview performances are implemented in gaming machines, but all of the previews that have stages as the content of the preview performance may be configured as described above, or only some of the previews may be configured as described above. It may be configured as follows. Further, in order to increase the interest of the performance, the "stage" of some of the previews may be determined based on the set value Ve, and the "content" may be determined based on the variable information. By doing so, it is possible to provide different characteristics between previews, and it is possible to improve the interest of the production.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing another example of the SU preview lottery process.
First, in this other example, a table shown in FIG. 77 is prepared as an SU3 replacement offset table stored in the ROM 242. That is, a table with the same content as that shown in FIG. 75 is stored as the first offset table for SU3 replacement (FIG. 77A), and a second offset table for SU3 replacement that is different from the first offset table for SU3 replacement is stored. (Figure 77B).
In the second offset table for SU3 replacement, the same offset value ("0" in this example) is stored for the set values Ve of "1" to "6".

The SU preview lottery process shown in FIG. 76 differs in that the process of steps S3020 and S3021 is executed in place of the process of step S3007 shown in FIG. 71 as the process to be executed when the SU3 danger was lost last time.
In this case, the CPU 241 acquires the setting value Ve stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243 by acquiring the setting value information in step S3020, and in the following step S3021, the CPU 241 acquires the offset value from the second offset table for SU3 replacement based on the setting value information. is acquired, and the process proceeds to lottery table selection processing in step S3008.
Since the offset value acquired in step S3021 is the same value regardless of the set value Ve, the same lottery table is selected in the selection process of step S3008 in this case regardless of the set value Ve. Specifically, in this example, since the offset value "0" corresponding to the set value Ve "1" is selected, the lottery table in which content replacement is least likely to occur is selected, as in the case of the processing example of FIG. 71. become.
Note that in the acquisition process of step S3010 in this case, the first offset table for SU3 replacement shown in FIG. 77A is used as the offset table.

As mentioned above, the method for selecting the same lottery table regardless of the set value Ve is not limited to the method of obtaining a fixed offset value without referring to the set value Ve, but also the method shown in FIG. 77B. It is also possible to adopt a method of selecting a lottery table based on an offset value obtained from an offset table in which the same offset value is stored for each set value Ve.

Here, the lottery for the SU preview performance may be conducted in the following manner.
FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a lottery aspect of SU preview performance in the embodiment.
First, expansion M06J-1, expansion M06J-2, and expansion M06J-3 shown at the lower left of the upper table in the figure each mean the following expansions.

M06J-1: Staying in a specific background mode, and not winning the pre-read preview (pre-reading performance), but winning the target SU preview (fireworks SU notice)

M06J-2: The user is staying in a specific background mode, and the pre-read preview is running and the target SU preview has been won.

M06J-3: While staying in a specific background mode, the change in question is the target change of the look-ahead notice and the target SU notice has been selected.

In expansion M06J-1, a lottery for target SU previews is performed based on table TBL1. Furthermore, in expansion M06J-2 and expansion M06J-3, a lottery for target SU previews is performed based on table TBL2 and table TBL3, respectively.

In development M06J-1, cases where SU3 and SU4 are won as a result of the lottery based on table TBL1, and cases where SU5 is won are assumed to be development M06L-1.
Further, in development M06J-2, cases where SU3 and SU4 are won as a result of the lottery based on table TBL2, and cases where SU5 is won are assumed to be development M06L-2.
Further, in development M06J-3, cases where SU3 and SU4 are won as a result of the lottery based on table TBL3, and cases where SU5 is won are set as development M06L-3.
In addition, if SU5 is won in these expansions M06L-1 to M06L-3, a lottery is conducted based on tables TBL4, TBL5, and TBL6, respectively, for the contents of SU5.

The table at the bottom of FIG. 78 exemplifies the lottery method for content replacement (background replacement) of SU3 for each development of M06L-1 to M06L-3.
As shown in the figure, in development M06L-1, it is determined whether or not the previous danger was missed (see step S3006). If it was out of danger last time, there is no branching for each set value Ve, and the replacement content is drawn at random based on table TBL4.
On the other hand, if there is no difference in the previous danger, the lottery method branches for each set value Ve. Specifically, the replacement contents are selected by lottery using different tables (tables TBL5 to TBL10 in the figure) for each set value Ve of "1" to "6".

In addition, in expansion M06L-2 and expansion M06L-3, there is no branch depending on whether or not the previous danger was missed, and there is no branch depending on the set value Ve, and the replacement content is drawn by lottery based on tables TBL11 and TBL12 as shown.

In the above-mentioned lottery method, in the state where the pre-read performance is not won as development M06J-1, it is possible to make a setting suggestion by SU notice.
As a result, the role of SU notice is used to indicate the reliability of the fluctuation in fluctuations where the expectation of winning is low and not enough to be predicted, or in fluctuations in which no look-ahead effect is executed toward the target fluctuation of the look-ahead. It can be used to suggest settings rather than

Further, in the state where the prefetch effect is being executed as expansion M06J-2, setting suggestion by SU notice is not made.
If you are executing a look-ahead effect using multiple fluctuations, and if you win an SU notice during a change that is just in the middle of the look-ahead, the first time that you are performing a look-ahead that indicates your expectation of winning, towards the target change of the look-ahead. Therefore, I try not to use it for the purpose of suggesting the setting as a SU preview. In other words, the look-ahead preview indicates the level of expectation of winning based on the target change, and the player's interest is focused on that, so in such a situation, it is best to avoid including elements that suggest the setting, so that the player can We are trying to prevent confusion.

Further, even in a state where the variation is the target variation of the look-ahead performance as development M06J-3, the setting suggestion by the SU notice is not made.
In this case, the fluctuation in question is a target fluctuation for look-ahead, and it is a fluctuation with high expectation of winning, so the role of SU notice should be used for the purpose of indicating the reliability of the fluctuation, and should not be used for the purpose of suggesting the setting. This is intended to prevent players from becoming confused.

Above, as the lottery method, Deployment M06L-1, Deployment M06L-2, and Deployment M06L-3 were adopted, but any one of them may be adopted, or any combination may be adopted. good.
Regarding Deployment M06L-2, if there are multiple types of look-ahead effects, the configuration is configured so that the setting suggestion by SU notice is not performed only while a specific look-ahead effect (e.g. full-screen look-ahead notice, etc.) is being executed, and other It may be configured such that setting suggestions are made using SU notices during execution of pre-read effects (eg pending change notices, etc.).
Regarding Deployment M06L-3, if there are multiple types of look-ahead notices, settings will not be suggested by SU notices if the change is the target variation of a specific look-ahead effect (e.g. full-screen look-ahead notices, etc.) In a state where the variation is a target variation of other look-ahead effects (eg, pending change notice, etc.), the setting suggestion may be made by SU notice.
In addition, if the fluctuation is a hit fluctuation, setting suggestions are not made by setting suggestion notices that include setting suggestion elements such as the SU notice described above, and if the fluctuations are a losing fluctuation, setting suggestions are not made. It may be configured to do so.

Here, in the SU notice lottery method of this example explained with reference to FIGS. 71 to 77, when setting suggestions are made by SU notice, among the plurality of tables in which SU notice contents are associated with each setting value, If the SU notice content is selected by lottery based on the table corresponding to the current setting value, and the settings are not suggested by the SU notice, a specific table (a table specified not based on the setting value) among the above multiple tables is selected. Based on this, the SU notice content is selected by lottery.
Such a lottery method determines the content of the SU notice based on the set value Ve when setting is suggested by the SU notice, and when the setting is not suggested by the SU notice, the notice content of the SU notice is determined based on the set value Ve. In other words, it is a method of determining without being based on Ve.
Applying this to the above-mentioned developments M06J-1 to M06J-3, it can be said that the gaming machine 1 of this example performs the SU advance notice lottery as follows.
First, the comparison between the expansion M06J-1 and the expansion M06J-2 described above can be rephrased as follows.
In other words, when performing a fluctuating display of a symbol, if a look-ahead effect is executed for a fluctuating display of a symbol that will be performed after the fluctuating display of the symbol (deployment M06J-2), the fluctuating display of the symbol It is possible to determine the content of the SU notice for the SU notice without being based on the set value Ve, and on the other hand, when performing a variable display of a symbol, it is possible to determine the content of the SU notice that is targeted for In other words, if the pre-read effect is not executed (deployment M06J-1), the contents of the SU notice for the variable display of the symbol can be determined based on the set value Ve.

Further, the comparison between the expansion M06J-1 and the expansion M06J-3 described above can be rephrased as follows.
In other words, before the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed, if a pre-reading effect targeting the variable display of the predetermined symbol is executed (deployment M06J-3), the variable display of the predetermined symbol is executed. It is possible to determine the notice contents of the target SU notice without being based on the set value Ve, and on the other hand, before the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed, a pre-reading effect targeting the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed. In other words, if it is not executed (deployment M06J-1), the content of the SU notice for the variable display of the predetermined symbol can be determined based on the set value Ve.

By using the lottery method as described above, it is possible to prevent setting suggestions by SU notice from being made in a state where a look-ahead effect is being executed or when the change is a target change of a look-ahead effect.
Therefore, confusion among players can be prevented.

Here, the setting suggestion using a predetermined preview performance such as an SU notice can also be realized by the following method. That is, a "predetermined effect" that is a preview effect that includes elements that suggest the set value Ve (for example, a specific background such as a danger pattern) is prepared, and whether or not to execute the predetermined effect is determined based on the set value Ve. The decision shall be made based on the Specifically, for example, by holding a lottery using a table configured such that the higher the setting, the more likely the predetermined effect is to appear, it is possible to suggest a setting that is a higher setting.
On the other hand, if the setting is not suggested, it is determined whether or not to execute the predetermined effect without being based on the setting value Ve. Specifically, for example, by deciding not to perform the predetermined effect regardless of the setting value Ve, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion from being made.

In this way, by determining whether or not to perform the predetermined effect based on the setting value Ve, it is possible to make a setting suggestion based on the predetermined effect. On the other hand, by determining whether or not to perform the predetermined effect without being based on the setting value Ve, it is possible to prevent setting suggestions from being made by the predetermined effect.
Applying this to each case of "Suggest setting" and "Do not suggest setting" in the above-mentioned developments M06J-1 to M06J-3, the gaming machine 1 of this example has the following configuration. can do.
First, in the comparison between the development M06J-1 and the development M06J-2 described above, when performing a fluctuating display of a symbol, a pre-reading effect is executed that targets a fluctuating display of a symbol that will be performed after the fluctuating display of the symbol. In this case (deployment M06J-2), it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a predetermined effect for the fluctuating display of the symbol without depending on the set value Ve, and when performing the fluctuating display of the symbol, If the look-ahead effect targeting the variable display of the symbol that will be performed after the variable display of is not executed (deployment M06J-1), set whether or not to execute the predetermined effect targeting the variable display of the symbol. This configuration allows determination based on the value Ve.

In addition, in the comparison between Deployment M06J-1 and Deployment M06J-3 described above, before the fluctuating display of a predetermined symbol is performed, if a pre-reading effect targeting the fluctuating display of the predetermined symbol is executed (deployment In M06J-3), it is possible to decide whether or not to execute a predetermined effect for the fluctuating display of the predetermined symbol without being based on the set value Ve, and before the fluctuating display of the predetermined symbol is performed. , if the pre-read effect targeting the fluctuating display of the predetermined symbol is not executed (deployment M06J-1), set value Ve determines whether or not to execute the predetermined rendering targeting the fluctuating display of the predetermined symbol. The configuration is such that it can be determined based on.

By adopting these configurations, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect from being performed in a state where the prefetch effect is being executed or in a state where the fluctuation is a target variation of the prefetch effect.
Therefore, confusion among players can be prevented.

Here, in the above, regarding the determination of the preview content of the predetermined performance and the determination of whether or not to execute the predetermined performance, if the pre-reading performance is being executed or the fluctuation is the target variation of the pre-reading performance, , an example was given in which these decisions are made without being based on the set value Ve, but in order to prevent player confusion, it is better to When a look-ahead effect is being executed or when the change is a target change of a look-ahead effect, the rate at which setting suggestions are made by a predetermined effect may be reduced.
Therefore, in determining the preview content of a predetermined effect and deciding whether to execute a predetermined effect, it is necessary to determine whether or not a pre-read effect is being executed, and whether or not the change in question is a target change of a pre-read effect. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the rate at which decisions are made based on the set value Ve is varied depending on the set value Ve. Specifically, the configurations are (c1) to (c4) below.

(c1)
The rate at which the preview content of the predetermined performance targeting the fluctuation is determined based on the set value Ve is made different between when the pre-read performance is being executed and when the pre-read performance is not being executed.
(c2)
The rate at which whether or not to execute a predetermined performance targeting the variation is determined based on the set value Ve is made different between when the pre-read performance is being executed and when the pre-read performance is not being executed.

(c3)
The rate at which the preview content of a predetermined performance targeting the variation is determined based on the set value Ve is made different depending on whether the variation is the target variation of the look-ahead performance or when the variation is not the target variation of the look-ahead performance.
(c4)
Based on the set value Ve, determine the ratio of whether or not to execute a predetermined performance targeting the variation in cases where the variation is the target variation of the look-ahead performance and when the variation is not the target variation of the look-ahead performance. Make it different.

In these configurations, when the variation is a target variation of a look-ahead effect or when a look-ahead effect is being executed, the predetermined change is more effective than when the change is not a target change of a look-ahead effect or when a look-ahead effect is not being executed. It is possible to reduce the rate at which settings are suggested by presentation.
Therefore, confusion among players can be prevented.

Note that the "ratio" in the configurations (c1) to (c4) described above includes "0". That is, taking the configuration (c1) as an example, it includes determining the preview content of a predetermined performance without being based on the set value Ve when a pre-read performance is being executed.

In addition, in the non-winning state of pre-read notices, if there are multiple setting suggestion notices, it may be configured such that the notice contents can be determined based on the setting value Ve for all setting suggestion notices, or SU It may be configured such that only some setting suggestion notices such as notices can be determined based on the setting value Ve.
In addition, in the non-winning state of pre-read notices, if there are multiple setting suggestion notices, the configuration may be such that all setting suggestion notices can be executed, or only some setting suggestion notices such as SU notices can be executed. It may be configured to be executable.

In addition, in a state where a look-ahead notice is being executed (e.g., when a lottery for each notice is drawn at the start of a change, a look-ahead notice is executed targeting a change after the relevant change, or when it is being done). , when there are multiple setting suggestion notices, it may be configured such that the notice contents can be determined for all the setting suggestion notices without being based on the setting value Ve, or for some setting suggestion notices such as SU notices. (For example, a setting suggestion notice of a type that can be executed before reach) may be configured so that the contents of the notice can be determined without being based on the setting value Ve.
Furthermore, if there are multiple setting suggestion notices while the look-ahead notice is being executed, the configuration may be such that not all setting suggestion notices are executed, or some setting suggestion notices such as SU notices (e.g. : It may be configured so that only the type of settings suggestion notice that can be executed before reach is not executed.

In addition, in a state where the change is a target change of a look-ahead notice, if there are multiple setting suggestion notices, the structure is configured so that the notice contents can be determined for all setting suggestion notices without being based on the setting value Ve. For some setting suggestion notices such as SU notices (e.g. setting suggestion notices of the type that can be executed before reach), the content of the notice can be determined without being based on the setting value Ve. You may.
Furthermore, in a state where the change is a target change of a look-ahead notice, if there are multiple setting suggestion notices, it may be configured so that all setting suggestion notices are not executed, or some setting suggestions such as SU notices may not be executed. It may be configured such that only the notification (for example, a setting suggestion notification of a type that can be executed before reach) is not executed.

Further, in the case where the preview contents of the setting suggestion preview are determined without being based on the setting value Ve, the preview contents may be determined using a specific lottery table. At that time, it is desirable to determine the contents of the preview from the lottery table based on the fluctuation pattern information of the fluctuation and information regarding wins and losses. In addition, when determining the preview content of the setting suggestion notice without depending on the setting value Ve in a state where the look-ahead notice is being executed or when the target of the look-ahead notice is changing, a specific lottery table common to each can be used. Alternatively, different lottery tables may be used for each. Further, in the case where there are a plurality of setting suggestion notices, the contents of the notice differ depending on the type of setting suggestion notice, so it goes without saying that a lottery table exists for each setting suggestion notice.

[5-5. Regarding the difference in the setting value ranges supported by the main control section and the production control section]

Here, as understood from the various lottery processes of the performance control unit 24 explained above, the performance control unit 24 determines that the set value Ve is within the actual usage range Ru (in this example, "1", "2", and "6"). ), if the value is within the usable range Re (“1” to “6”), the effect lottery is configured to be performed normally without causing an error.

On the other hand, the main control unit 20 cannot execute at least a specific process related to game progress unless the set value Ve is within the actual usage range Ru. For example, in the jackpot random number determination process (S1502) described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27, if the set value Ve (set value Vd) is not within the usage range Ru, the It becomes impossible to obtain an appropriate determination reference value TH and setting difference information from the random number determination table for jackpot determination, and it becomes impossible to appropriately execute jackpot determination.

The difference in response to the setting values between the main control unit 20 and the production control unit 24 as described above can be expressed as follows.
That is, the main control unit 20 can set any one setting value from N types (N is a natural number of 2 or more) through the setting change process (step S115), and can also set the setting value based on the N types of setting values. , it is possible to execute the first process related to the progress of the gaming operation.
On the other hand, the performance control unit 24 can execute a second process regarding the progress of the performance operation based on the setting value information regarding the setting values received from the main control unit 20, based on the setting value information of M types, which is larger than the N types. It is said that

Thereby, in making it possible to change the number of stages of the set value, the performance control unit 24 can execute the second process regarding the progress of the performance operation up to the M stage. That is, it becomes possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the program of the production control section 24 up to the M stage.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of stages of the set value while reducing the burden of program rewriting work.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 24 sends a command (setting value information) for notifying the setting value transmitted by the main control unit 20, specifically, setting confirmation, as described in FIG. 52A. Regarding setting value information as medium commands and setting change commands, it is possible to analyze six types of setting value information corresponding to the usable range Re, instead of the three types of setting value information corresponding to the actual usage range Ru. ing.
Specifically, regarding these setting confirmation commands and setting change commands, it is possible to receive commands that include any identification data from "1" to "6" in steps S2150 and S2152, respectively. It is said that it is possible to analyze the following commands.

In other words, if the three types of setting values Ve corresponding to the usage range Ru are N types of setting values that can be set in the setting change process, the production control unit 24 sets M types of setting values that are larger than N types. It is configured so that the information can be analyzed.

Thereby, in making it possible to change the number of stages of the setting value Ve, the effect control unit 24 can analyze the setting value information up to M stages. That is, it becomes possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the program of the production control section 24 up to the M stage.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of setting values to be used while reducing the burden of program rewriting work.

In addition, in the present embodiment, if the setting value Vd set in the setting change process on the main control unit 20 side and the setting value analysis information based on the analyzed setting value information correspond, For example, even if the set value Ve indicated by the set value Vd and the set value Ve indicated by the set value analysis information match), or even if they do not match, the predetermined process (the various effect lottery processes explained in FIGS. 57 to 77) is executed. Configured to be executable.

As a result, in order to be able to change the number of stages of the set value Ve, the production control unit 24 can execute the process up to the M stage, and there is no need to rewrite the program of the production control unit 24 up to the M stage. It becomes possible to do so.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of stages of the set value Ve while reducing the burden of program rewriting work.

Here, according to the process of FIG. 52A, in this embodiment, if it is determined in step S2154 that the setting change end command has been received, the setting value Ve received from the main control unit 20 is within the appropriate range. The setting change end scenario registration process is executed in step S2158 without checking whether there is a setting change (see step S2162).
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the production control section 24 from reporting an abnormality in the set value when the main control section 20 is about to normally end the setting change process. In other words, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the main control section 20 side proceeds with subsequent gaming operations in response to the normal completion of the setting change process even though the performance control section 24 side has notified the abnormality. This will prevent people from feeling anxious.

Further, according to the process of FIG. 52A, the effect control unit 24 determines whether the setting value Ve received from the main control unit 20 side is within the usable range Re in step S2162, and if it is within the usable range Re. The received setting value Ve (the above-mentioned identification data) is stored in the RAM 243 (specifically, the above-mentioned "notification setting value storage area A1"), and if it is outside the usable range Re, the received setting value Ve is stored in the RAM 243. It is assumed that it will not be done.
When the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, the set value Ve is not stored in the RAM 243, but in this embodiment, the "set value command" is sent at multiple timings other than when changing settings. is also transmitted at least when the power is restored (S808 when the power is restored) and when fluctuation is started (S1411), so that the set value Ve within the usable range Re is received at those timings. An appropriate setting value Ve can be stored in the RAM 243.

In addition to the timings exemplified above, the set value command can also be transmitted during a customer waiting demonstration, at the start or end of a jackpot or small win, at the start of a round game, at the start of INT between rounds, etc.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the set value Ve is a value within the usable range Re, it is stored as is in the RAM 243 even if it is not within the usable range Ru. Like the lottery processing related to various performances (FIGS. 57 to 77, etc.), in this embodiment, the lottery processing corresponds to the set value Ve of the usable range Re, so if the set value Ve is a value within the usable range Ru Even if this is not the case, a bug will not occur in the production lottery process.

Further, according to the process of FIG. 52A, when the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, in the setting history information update process of step S2166, the set value Ve outside the usable range Re is stored in the RAM 243 (specifically, The above-mentioned "history setting value storage area A2") is stored (see step S2404 in FIG. 53).
However, even if the setting value Ve outside the usable range Re is stored in the history setting value storage area A2 in this way, it is necessary to check for an abnormality in the setting value Ve during the transmission process in step S2607 (FIG. 55) described above. This prevents an inappropriate setting value Ve outside the usable range Re from being displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs.
As mentioned above, the abnormality confirmation process in this case involves determining whether the individual history information to be sent is history information about setting changes (setting change history information), and then In such a case, it is determined whether the setting value Ve included in the history information is a value outside the usable range Re, and if the setting value Ve is a value outside the usable range Re, the liquid crystal control The abnormality display instruction information is transmitted to the unit 40. As a result, on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, information indicating that an abnormality has been found in the setting value Ve in the corresponding individual history information can be displayed (for example, an "E" mark indicating an error is displayed).

<6. Modified examples of settings-related command processing and setting value conversion>

Here, in the above, the setting value Ve set in the setting change process (S115) shown in FIG. 10 (the setting value Ve saved in step S416) is set in the main loop preprocessing (S119) shown in FIG. Although an example has been given in which the value command (S808) is sent to the production control unit 24 side, the setting value Ve set by the setting change process can also be sent to the production control unit 24 by a command at the time of setting change completion. Specifically, in the embodiment, a setting change end command is sent (S605, S606) in the RAM clearing process (S116) shown in FIG. 14 as a command at the end of the setting change. Instead, a configuration may be adopted in which a "setting change completion command" including the setting value Ve set in the setting change process is sent to the effect control section 24.

Further, in the process of FIG. 52A described above, the process (S2163) in which the effect control unit 24 stores the setting value Ve in the RAM 243 can be executed every time a setting value command is received from the main control unit 20. However, the process of storing the setting value Ve in the RAM 243 may be performed only when the setting is changed.
If the process of storing the set value Ve in the RAM 243 is performed only when changing the settings, as in the process shown in FIG. 52A, when the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, the set value Ve If it is not stored (route from S2162 to S2164), the setting value Ve will not be set in the RAM 243.
Therefore, in this case, if the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, a value representing the set value Ve "1" (in other words, a value representing the lowest level of the set value Ve) is stored in the RAM 243. While preventing an abnormal setting value Ve from being set in the RAM 243, it is also possible to prevent the setting value Ve from not being set.

FIG. 79 shows a flowchart of setting-related command processing S2130e as a first modification including storage of the lowest stage value as described above.
Setting-related command processing S2130e as the first modification corresponds to a case where the main control unit 20 transmits the setting value Ve set in the setting change processing to the production control unit 24 side by the above-mentioned “setting change completion command”. This is considered to be a process that
The differences from the process shown in FIG. 52A are that the reception determination process of the setting change end command in step S2154 is omitted, the process in steps S2159 to S2161 and the process in step S2164 are omitted, and the process in step S2181 is omitted. The following processing has been added.

In the process shown in FIG. 79, the CPU 241 first performs reception determination process of a "setting change completion command" in step S2180. Specifically, it is determined whether a command including notification information (identification data) of any of the setting values Ve "1" to "6" has been received as the "setting change completion command".
If it is determined in step S2180 that the "setting change completion command" (setting values "1" to "6") has not been received, the CPU 241 advances the process to step S2150. In this case, in response to a negative result obtained in step S2151, the CPU 241 advances the process to step S2153. Further, if a negative result is obtained in step S2153, the CPU 241 ends the series of processing shown in FIG. 79.
Furthermore, in this case, the CPU 241 finishes the series of processes shown in FIG. 79 in response to executing each scenario registration process in steps S2155 to S2157.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2180 that a "settings change completion command" (setting values "1" to "6") has been received, the CPU 241 executes a settings change completion scenario registration process in step S2158.
If the setting value Ve included in the received "setting change completion command" is within the usable range Re of "1" to "6" by the determination process in step S2180 described above, the setting change completion scenario is executed in step S2158. be registered. That is, even when an unused set value Ve within the usable range Re is received, an effect is performed to notify the end of the setting change.

In response to executing the scenario registration process in step S2158, the CPU 241 determines in step S2162 whether the setting information is within the usable range Re.
If the setting information is within the usable range Re, the CPU 241 performs processing to store the setting value information in the RAM in step S2163, and proceeds to history information update processing in step S2166.
On the other hand, if the setting information is not in the usable range Re, the CPU 241 stores the setting value "1" in the RAM 243 in step S2181, and proceeds to the history information update process in step S2166.

According to the process as the first modified example described above, if the setting value Ve is a value outside the usable range Re, a specific value ( In this example, "1") can be stored.

In addition, when storing a specific value ("1") in the setting value storage area of the RAM 243 (the above-mentioned "notification setting value storage area A1") as in the first modification described above, the setting value in the setting history information A specific value ("1") may also be stored in Ve (that is, the "history setting value storage area A2" described above).
Alternatively, abnormal values may be stored in the setting history information.
By storing an abnormal value in the setting history information, it becomes possible to store the fact that the setting value Ve is abnormal as history information while allowing the game lottery to be performed based on a specific value.

Here, when storing the setting value Ve in the RAM 243, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting value Ve is appropriate, instead of determining whether the setting value Ve is within the usable range Ru.
For example, in the case where the set value Ve to be used is "1", "2", or "6" as in this example, it is first determined whether or not the set value Ve is within the usable range Re, and then If the value is within the possible range Re, it is further determined whether the set value Ve is an unused value (any one of "3", "4", and "5").
At this time, if the set value Ve is not an unused value, the set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243 as is. On the other hand, if the setting value Ve is an unused value, it is possible to store a specific value (“1”) in the RAM 243. Alternatively, if the set value Ve is an unused value, the set value Ve may be corrected to a value in the usage range Ru and stored in the RAM 243. For example, when the set value Ve is "3" or "4", it may be corrected to "2", and when it is "5", it may be corrected to "6".

FIG. 80 shows a flowchart of setting-related command processing S2130e as a second modified example, including correction of the setting value Ve as described above.
The difference from the process shown in FIG. 79 is that steps S2182 and S2183 are added.
In this case, in response to determining in step S2162 that the setting information is within the usable range Re, the CPU 241 advances the process to step S2182 and determines whether the setting information is an unused value. Specifically, in this example, it is determined whether the set value Ve is any one of "3", "4", and "5" (any one of "02H", "03H", and "04H").
If it is determined that the setting information is not an unused value, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2163 and stores the setting information in the RAM 243. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting information is an unused value, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2183, refers to the setting value correction table, and stores the correction value in the RAM 243. Specifically, in this example, the set value correction table (stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 242) is referred to, and when the set value Ve is "3" or "4", it is corrected to "2", and when the set value Ve is "5", it is corrected to "2". If so, the setting value Ve is corrected to "6", and the corrected setting value Ve is stored in the "notification setting value storage area A1" of the RAM 243.

Here, in the explanation so far, the main control section 20 uses the setting value offset conversion table shown in FIG. Although we have given an example of converting to the value Ve, the main control unit 20 transmits the information of the setting value Vd to the production control unit 24 without performing conversion using the setting value offset conversion table, and the setting value is set on the production control unit 24 side. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the value Vd is converted.
FIG. 81 shows an example of a setting value conversion table that should be used on the production control section 24 side in this case. Here, it is assumed that the stage of the setting value Ve and the value to be used are uniquely determined by the spec information of the gaming machine 1.

As shown in the figure, the setting value conversion table stores information on the setting value Vd transmitted from the main control unit 20 side, specifically, conversion values for each of "0" to "5". There are four types (spec.1 to spec.4).

In this case, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) selects a corresponding conversion table from the setting conversion table based on the spec information specified by the spec specification command mentioned above, and selects the setting value Vd received from the main control unit 20. information is converted based on the selected conversion table.
Here, "Spec 1" has six settings, and the main control unit 20 in this case uses "0" to "5" as the setting value Vd. "Spec 2" and "Spec 3" have two setting stages and three setting stages, respectively, and the main control unit 20 uses "0", "1", and "0" to "3", respectively, as the setting value Vd. "Spec 4" is "no setting", and in this case, "0" is stored as a converted value for each set value Vd as shown in the figure.

By configuring the setting value conversion on the effect control section 24 side as described above, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main control section 20 side.

<7. Other variations related to setting values>

Here, the information to be displayed on the setting history screen Gs is not limited to the information exemplified in FIG. 46, etc., and can be variously considered. For example, a certain set value may indicate how long the game has been played. Specifically, the date and time from when a certain setting value is set to when it is changed next may be displayed. Further, the date and time from when the power is turned on until the game is played according to a certain setting value until the next time when the power is turned off may be displayed. Furthermore, if the setting value is determined to be an abnormal value, the date and time and time from when the setting value is determined to be abnormal until the normal setting value is set may be displayed. In addition, normally the set values will not be changed during the game or the set values will not change from normal values to abnormal values, but if the set values are changed due to noise or trivia even though the game is in progress. The date and time may be stored and displayed as a history display. Further, the number of times RAM clearing processing and backup restoration processing have been performed and date/time information may also be configured to be displayed in the same manner. Further, the timing for displaying the history display may be other than during the setting confirmation process, for example, while the setting change process is being performed. Furthermore, even during a game, if a predetermined operation input is made, the history may be displayed.

Furthermore, in the above example, history information is saved in the internal work (work area of the RAM 243) in response to the occurrence of a target event for history display, and the history information saved in the internal work is immediately stored in the memory 244. However, the timing for storing the history information of the internal work in the memory 244 is to refer to the elapsed time stored in the internal work, and store (copy) it in the memory 244 when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed. is also possible.

Regarding the setting history confirmation screen Gs, even after the display is terminated in response to the termination instruction operation, if the setting history confirmation screen Gs is in a situation where the predetermined display conditions are met, such as when the settings are being confirmed (or the settings are being changed), the display instruction may be issued again. It can be displayed as many times as you like depending on the operation. Alternatively, if the setting history confirmation screen Gs has already been displayed a predetermined number of times, such as once, under a situation that satisfies the predetermined display conditions, the setting history confirmation screen Gs will not be displayed even if the display instruction operation is performed again. It is also possible to disable it.
Further, while displaying the history information, it is desirable to hide the performance display monitor that displays the base value. Further, the configuration may be such that the volume/light amount adjustment is effective even while the history information is being displayed. At this time, although the adjustment is effective, it is desirable not to display the details of the adjustment on the display means.
Further, the contents and status of the performance display monitor may be displayed on the liquid crystal, and in that case, it is desirable to display it at a position that does not overlap with the history information. Further, the volume/light amount may be configured to be unadjustable, and in this case, there is no possibility that the history information and the display overlap, and the degree of freedom in designing the screen configuration is increased.

Further, it is desirable that at least the initialization operation of the movable body on the board side is not executed while the history information is being displayed. This can prevent the movable body on the panel side from moving to the front side of the display means and obstructing the visibility of the display screen. Furthermore, the initialization operation may be similarly not executed for the movable body on the frame side. However, the movable body on the frame side may be initialized if there is no possibility of interfering with the display screen. In this case, for example, the initializing operation may be performed on the vibration means mounted on the operating means, or on the air ejecting means for ejecting air. As a result, the initialization operation of the movable body on the frame side can be completed first, so that the movable body on the panel side can It is efficient because it only requires initialization of the body. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initialization operation may be performed for all movable bodies after the display of the history information is finished.

In addition, if a setting value change operation is performed while the harness connecting the main control unit 20 and the production control unit 24 is disconnected, the main control unit 20 performs processing based on the changed setting value. However, since the production control unit 24 cannot know this information, it cannot store or display it as historical information. Therefore, by changing the setting value with the harness disconnected, turning off the power, and then reconnecting the harness and turning on the power, the setting can be changed without leaving any trace of the setting value being changed. I can do it. In order to prevent this, when the power is turned on, the main control section 20 transmits setting value information to the production control section 24, and the production control section 24 receives the stored setting value information and the information transmitted from the main control section 20. It may be configured to compare the set value information and, if there is a discrepancy, notify the error using a lamp, speaker, liquid crystal, etc.
Furthermore, in this case, the production control unit 24 may be configured to put the game in a stopped state, and even if a command related to the game is sent from the main control unit 20, it will not perform any processing based on the command. You may. In addition, when the production control unit 24 receives various commands transmitted when executing a setting change process or a RAM clear process, the main control unit 20 side determines that the setting change process has been successfully performed again. The newly determined setting value is memorized, and the error notification is interrupted/cancelled (Conflict occurrence ⇒ Error notification ⇒ Power off ⇒ Settings being changed (non-error notification) ⇒ Setting change completed (non-error notification)) You may also do so. In addition, when the power is turned on for the first time, there is no information regarding the set values on the production control unit 24 side, so if information on the set values is sent from the main control unit 20 in such a case, , it is desirable to configure the system so that error notification is not performed.

Further, as the set value suggestion performance, an operation performance using an operation means that can be operated by the player may be used. Specifically, as operation means that can be operated by the player, a first operation means (e.g. PUSH button) and a second operation means (e.g. Pato button) are provided, (the first operation means and the second operation means are: (It may be a separate operation device or a common operation device that can change between the first mode and the second mode), the first mode in which only the operation of the first mode is effective. It may be configured such that when the first operating means is operated during the valid operation period, a setting suggestion notice indicating the current setting value Ve is executed. Further, the configuration may be such that the setting suggestion notice is not executed if the first operation means is not operated by the player during the first operation validity period. Further, when the setting suggestion notice is not executed, a configuration may be made such that a presentation different from the setting suggestion notice (for example, a presentation suggesting the degree of expectation for a hit of the variation) is executed. In addition, even when a setting suggestion notice is executed, in addition to executing the setting suggestion notice, an effect different from the setting suggestion notice (for example, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the hit of the relevant change, etc.) may be executed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, if the second operation means is operated during the first operation validity period, the operation of the second operation means is not valid, so it is the same as if the first operation means had not been operated. This can be done in response to

The second operating means may also have the same configuration as the first operating means described above.
In addition, if the expectation that the fluctuation will be a hit is higher when the operation effect is executed by the second operation means than when the operation effect is executed by the first operation means, the operation effect by the second operation means is It may be configured such that the setting suggestion preview is executed in the performance, and the setting suggestion preview is not executed in the operation performance by the first operating means. Further, it may be configured such that a setting suggestion notice is executed in the operation performance by the first operation means, and a setting suggestion notice is not executed in the operation performance by the second operation means.

In a specific operation performance in which the operations of both the first operating means and the second operating means are valid, when the first operating means is operated, a setting suggestion notice is executed, and when the second operating means is operated The configuration may be such that the setting suggestion notice is not executed. Alternatively, the configuration may be reversed.
Furthermore, during the operation validity period of the specific operation performance, an image imitating either the first operation means or the second operation means is displayed on the display means, and the player is informed which operation means to operate. In that case, when an image imitating the first operating means is displayed, a setting suggestion notice is executed when the first operating means is operated, and when the second operating means is operated. It may be configured such that the setting suggestion notice is not executed when the setting suggestion is made. Furthermore, when an image imitating the first operating means is displayed, the setting suggestion preview may be executed when the second operating means is operated.
Also, regarding specific operation effects, the relationship between when a setting suggestion notice is executed after an operation and when it is not executed, and the relationship between a setting suggestion notice and an effect different from a setting suggestion notice, are the same as in the case of the above-mentioned operation effects. It may be configured as follows.

Furthermore, the performance mode of the operation performance may be configured to vary depending on the set value Ve. For example, during the operation validity period of the operating means, a presentation means may be used to perform an operation promotion effect using a display, sound, or lamp that prompts the operation, and the content of the operation promotion effect may be varied depending on the set value Ve. It may be configured as follows. Specifically, by executing an operation promotion effect that appears only when the set value Ve is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (e.g., settings 2 to 6), the lowest set value (e.g., setting 1) is denied. It becomes possible to notify the Additionally, by executing an operation promotion effect that appears only when the set value Ve is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (e.g., setting 6), it is possible to notify that the setting value is the highest (e.g., setting 6). .

Further, among the operation performances, the above-described embodiment may be used in the winning/losing operation performance that is performed at the end of the ready-to-win performance and notifying the winning/losing of the fluctuation. In this case, the content of the operation promotion performance may be configured to vary depending on the set value Ve only when the winning result is a win. Further, the content of the operation promotion effect may be configured to vary depending on the set value Ve only in the case of a failure. Further, the content of the operation promotion performance may be configured to vary depending on the set value Ve only in the case of a win that shifts to a variable probability state advantageous to the player after the win.

<8. Summary so far>

As described above, the gaming machine (1) of the embodiment is a gaming machine that displays symbols in a variable manner and is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and it is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state. (step S1502: jackpot random number determination process); a prefetching determination unit (step S1309: prefetching determination process) that determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state before the determination means makes a decision; Based on the result, a look-ahead effect execution means (effect control unit 24 and a liquid crystal display device 36, optical display device 45a, sound generating device 46a, etc.), and a performance execution means (performance control unit) capable of executing a preview performance that notifies the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state while the symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner. 24, and presentation means such as the liquid crystal display device 36, the optical display device 45a, and the sound generator 46a), and a setting that allows setting values (Ve) representing the probability level of whether or not to control to an advantageous state. means (step S115: setting change processing).
The preview performance includes a predetermined performance (for example, SU preview performance), and when performing a variable display of a symbol, a pre-reading performance is executed for a variable display of a symbol that will be performed after the variable display of the symbol. In such a case, it is possible to determine the preview content of a predetermined effect for the fluctuating display of the symbol without being based on the set value, and when the fluctuating display of the symbol is performed, the content of the notice for the predetermined performance that is targeted for the fluctuating display of the symbol can be determined after the fluctuating display of the symbol. When a pre-reading effect targeted at the variable display of a symbol is not executed, the preview contents of a predetermined effect targeted at the variable display of the symbol can be determined based on a set value.

As a result, it is possible to prevent setting suggestions based on the predetermined effect from being made while the prefetch effect is being executed.
Therefore, confusion among players can be prevented.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (1) of the embodiment is a gaming machine that displays symbols in a variable manner and is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes the above-described determining means, pre-reading determination means, and pre-reading effect execution. The preview performance includes a predetermined performance, and when performing a fluctuating display of a symbol, it targets a fluctuating display of a symbol to be performed after the fluctuating display of the symbol. When a pre-read effect is executed, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute a predetermined effect for the fluctuating display of the symbol without depending on the set value, and when performing the fluctuating display of the symbol, If a look-ahead effect that targets the variable display of a symbol that will be performed after the variable display of is not executed, it can be determined based on the set value whether or not to execute a predetermined effect that targets the variable display of the symbol. That is.

As a result, it is possible to prevent setting suggestions based on the predetermined effect from being made while the prefetch effect is being executed.
Therefore, confusion among players can be prevented.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (1) of the embodiment is a gaming machine that displays symbols in a variable manner and is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes the above-described determining means, pre-reading determination means, and pre-reading effect execution. The preview performance includes a predetermined performance, and a pre-read performance that targets the variable display of the predetermined symbol before the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed. is executed, the preview content of a predetermined effect for the fluctuating display of the predetermined symbol can be determined without being based on the set value, and the predetermined predetermined symbol is displayed before the fluctuating display of the predetermined symbol is performed. When the look-ahead performance targeted at the fluctuating display of the symbol is not executed, the preview content of the predetermined performance targeted at the fluctuating display of the predetermined symbol can be determined based on the set value.

Thereby, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect from being performed in a state where the change is a target change of the look-ahead effect.
Therefore, confusion among players can be prevented.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (1) of the embodiment is a gaming machine that displays symbols in a variable manner and is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes the above-described determining means, pre-reading determination means, and pre-reading effect execution. The preview performance includes a predetermined performance, and a pre-read performance that targets the variable display of the predetermined symbol before the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed. is executed, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute a predetermined effect for the fluctuating display of the predetermined symbol without being based on the set value, and before the fluctuating display of the predetermined symbol is performed. , when the look-ahead effect targeting the fluctuating display of the predetermined symbol is not executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the predetermined rendering targeting the fluctuating display of the predetermined symbol based on the set value. It is something.

Thereby, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect from being performed in a state where the change is a target change of the look-ahead effect.
Therefore, confusion among players can be prevented.

<9. Suggestions regarding setting values＞

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, suggestion effects regarding setting values can be performed as appropriate. The suggestive performance regarding the setting value is a performance that allows the player playing the gaming machine 1 to guess the setting value Ve set in the gaming machine 1. In the following explanation, the value (range) of the set value Ve is not the value (0 to 5) used corresponding to the set value inside the gaming machine 1, but the value (range) of the operator or player who sets the set value. Use a value (1 to 6) that can be grasped.

Suggestive performances regarding setting values include, in addition to performances that allow you to guess the set value Ve that has been set (setting value suggestion performances), performances that allow you to guess whether or not the setting value Ve has been changed (setting value change suggestions). (direction) is also included. Specifically, whether the setting value Ve set for a certain game machine 1 on the previous day is unchanged and the same setting value Ve is used on that day, or whether the setting value Ve of the previous day has been changed and a new setting value Ve is used. This is an effect that allows one to guess whether the set value Ve (including the case where the set value 4 is re-entered to the same set value 4) has been set.

When performing a presentation that allows the setting value Ve to be guessed as a suggestion regarding the setting value, in addition to suggesting that the setting value Ve is 6 or 5, there may be a certain range of hints about the setting value Ve. It is possible to suggest possible values.
Specifically, we can think of an effect that suggests that the set value Ve is an even number (any of 2, 4, or 6), or an effect that suggests that the set value Ve is an odd number (any of 1, 3, or 5). It will be done. Alternatively, it may be an effect that suggests that the set value Ve is any one of 4 to 6. As an example that suggests a wider range, there may be an effect that suggests that the set value Ve is other than 1 (that is, any one of 2 to 6).

In the suggestion performance regarding the set value, the CPU 241 of the performance control unit 24 performs a performance using sounds, lights, liquid crystals, movable accessories, buttons, etc. Specifically, sound production using a sound generating device 46a including a speaker 46 included in the gaming machine 1, light production using a light display device 45a including a decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs, a liquid crystal display device 36, etc. These include image production, visual production using movable accessories, and experiential production using production buttons 13, wind pressure devices, and the like.

By using such a suggestion effect regarding the setting value, it is possible for the player to estimate what kind of setting value Ve is applied to the gaming machine 1 that is playing the game, and it is possible for the player to This can be used as a basis for making decisions when selecting. By using such information when selecting a gaming machine, the player can be more advantageous than blindly selecting a gaming machine. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine 1 that is easily selected by players.
Furthermore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of appropriately guessing the settings of the gaming machine 1 and the enjoyment of selecting the gaming machine 1 based on the suggestive presentation regarding the setting values.

FIG. 119 shows the relationship between the types of suggestion effects regarding set values and the execution timings of the suggestion effects. FIG. 82 shows the "type of suggestion effect regarding setting value" portion shown in FIG. 119, and FIG. 83 shows the "type of execution timing" portion shown in FIG. 119. Furthermore, the part "Execution of performance (○/no mark)" in FIG. 119 is shown in FIG.

[9-1. Type of performance]

The types of suggestion effects (hereinafter simply referred to as "suggestion effects") regarding setting values implemented in the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be explained (FIG. 82).
In FIG. 82, 21 types of suggestive effects shown as effects 01 to 21 are described. Each suggestion effect is provided with columns for "type", "relevant/other", and "presentation means".
There are three types of "types": "set value suggestion performance", "set value change suggestion performance", and "jackpot preview performance". The "setting value suggestion performance" and the "setting value change suggestion performance" are as described above. The "jackpot preview performance" is originally a preview performance to notify whether or not it is a jackpot, but by changing the preview mode according to the set value Ve, it has the role of a set value suggestion performance. It is something.

Regarding the difference between "applicable/other", if the suggestion effect is related to the symbol variation display game, it will be "applicable", and if it appears unrelated to the symbol variation display game, it will be "approximate". "Other".

The "presentation means" defines which production means is used to perform the suggestive production. If “Sound” is marked with a circle, a sound production using the sound generating device 46a including the speaker 46 is executed, and if “Light” is marked with a circle, the decorative lamp 45 or If a light effect using the optical display device 45a including various LEDs is executed and a circle mark is written in "liquid crystal", an image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 etc. is executed and a circle mark is written in "movable body". If a mark is written, a visual production using movable objects, etc. will be performed, and if a circle is written in the "button", an experiential production using the production button 13 or a wind pressure device, etc. will be performed. The performance is executed.
Specific examples of each performance will be described later.

[9-2. Performance timing]

Next, the timing at which the suggestive effect can be performed will be explained with reference to FIG. 83.
First, the 42 types of suggestion performance timings indicated by timings 01 to 42 are roughly divided into three types: ``waiting for customers'', ``during fluctuations'', and ``during jackpot''.
Suggestive performances performed while "waiting for customers" are further divided into "initialize,""operationnotification,""demonstration," and "menu screen" types as detailed execution timings, and "initialize" is the initialization of the frame role (timing 01). ) and the initialization of the board accessory (timing 02).

In addition, a frame accessory here is a movable accessory provided in a "frame." The "frame" includes a front frame 2, an outer frame 4, a glass door 6, a front operation panel 7, and the like.
Moreover, the board accessory is a movable accessory provided on the "board". The "board" includes the game board 3.

The execution timing of the suggestion effect performed for "operation notification" is divided into menu notification (timing 03) and volume/light amount notification (timing 04). For example, the menu notification is made on the liquid crystal display device 36 when no prize is entered into the starting port 34 for a predetermined period of time, such as 5 seconds, after the special symbol variable display game ends with the number of reserved balls being 0. This is a notification effect carried out using , and is realized by displaying on the liquid crystal display device 36 an image containing words such as "The menu screen will be displayed when you press the ○○ button!".
In addition, the volume/light intensity notification is a notification effect performed using the liquid crystal display device 36 when no prize is won in the upper start opening 34 for a predetermined period of time such as 10 seconds after the menu notification is executed. This is achieved by displaying on the liquid crystal display device 36 an image containing words such as "You can change the volume and light intensity by pressing the XX button!".

"Demo" is the timing when the above-mentioned demo screen is being displayed, and is further divided into the time when the model introduction is being displayed (timing 05), the company logo is being displayed (timing 06), and the warning for getting hooked is being displayed (timing 07). .

Suggestive effects that are executed while the "menu screen" is displayed are those that are executed while the first layer of the menu screen is displayed (timing 08) and those that are executed while the second layer of the menu screen is displayed. (timing 09).
As shown above, the execution timing of the suggestive performance executed while "waiting for a customer" can be further divided into nine types of timings 01 to 09.

The effect control unit 24 can grasp the initialization start timing (start of timing 01) by receiving a power-on command from the main control unit 20. Regarding timings 02 to 04, since the performance control unit 24 knows the time required to initialize the frame accessory and the time required to initialize the board accessory, it is possible to respond to each timing.
Further, the demonstration start timing (start of timing 05) can be grasped by the production control section 24 by receiving a standby screen display command and a demonstration display command from the main control section 20. Regarding timings 06 and 07, since the presentation control unit 24 knows the time required to produce an image for introducing the model, the time required for producing an image for a company logo, etc., it is possible to respond to each timing.
While the menu screen is being displayed, a signal is received from the menu button as one of the performance buttons in response to the button being pressed. Thereby, processing for displaying the menu screen on the liquid crystal display device 36 is executed by the effect control section 24. Thereby, the timings (timings 08 and 09) during which the first layer and second layer of the menu screen are being displayed can be grasped by the effect control section 24.

Suggestive performances performed during "variation" are further divided into timings of "before reach,""afterreach," and "after end of reach."
"Before reach" includes the winning time (timing 10) that triggers the start of fluctuation, the time of low speed fluctuation (timing 11), the time of high speed fluctuation (timing 12), and one of the decorative symbols, for example, when the left symbol stops. It is further classified into the first symbol stopping time (timing 13), the second pseudo series (timing 14), the third pseudo series (timing 15), and the fourth pseudo series (timing 16). Although the number of pseudo-runs is four times as an example, there may be a fifth or subsequent pseudo-run. In that case, a performance timing at which the suggestive performance can be executed is added as appropriate.

"After reach" means, for example, when the second symbol stops when the left symbol stops and the right symbol stops, that is, the reach occurrence timing (timing 17), and after the normal reach occurs, for example, the middle symbol stops. There is a time (timing 18) during which the winning/losing promotion performance is executed. Furthermore, "after reach" includes during the title display after the first type super reach (timing 19), during the execution of the winning/losing incitement effect (timing 20), and during the incitement effect that informs whether or not the effect will develop (timing 19). Timing 21), title display after the occurrence of the second type super reach (timing 22), and execution of winning/losing effect (timing 23).
In addition, in the 1st type super reach performance, an inciting performance may be executed to notify whether the performance will develop or not, but if you win this lottery and the performance develops, the 2nd type super reach performance will be executed. It's reach. That is, the first type super reach is developed and the second type super reach is executed. Here, the second type Super Reach is said to be a performance with higher expectations of winning than the first type Super Reach. For example, the above-mentioned super reach 4 is a super reach type that has a performance mode that evolves from the first type super reach to the second type super reach.

The timing of "after the end of reach" includes the time of re-lottery performance (timing 24) and the time when all symbols stop (timing 25), which is the timing when the middle symbol stops while the left and right symbols are stopped, for example.

As can be understood from the above, the execution timings of the suggestion effects executed during the "fluctuation" can be further divided into 16 types of timings 10 to 25.

Timing 10 as the winning (variation start) timing before the reach can be grasped by the production control unit 24 receiving the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command. Each of the timings 11 to 25 can be automatically grasped because the performance control unit 24 determines the chronological development (performance content) based on the information included in the fluctuation pattern designation command and the decorative pattern designation command. can.

Next, each timing belonging to "during jackpot" will be explained. During a jackpot game includes a normal jackpot game in which the state changes to a normal state without changing to a variable probability state after a jackpot game, and a variable probability jackpot game in which the state changes to a variable probability state after a jackpot game.
The timings belonging to "during the jackpot" are further divided into four types: "during the opening performance,""during the round,""during the ending of pattern A," and "during the ending of pattern B."

"During the opening presentation" can be divided into a jackpot notification presentation (timing 26) and a right hit instruction (notification) (timing 27).
“In the round” is divided into each round (1 to 7R). As an example, during a 1R game, a battle performance using the liquid crystal display device 36 is being performed (timing 28), during a 2R game, a battle performance is being performed (timing 29), and during a 3R game, a battle performance is being performed (timing 29). Timing 30) and when an over-win occurs (timing 31), during 4R gaming, during the victory/defeat presentation (timing 32), during 5R gaming, during the short-time open V round (timing 33), during 6R gaming: The character introduction performance (timing 34) and the 7R game can also be divided into character introduction performance (timing 35).

Over winning means that more game balls enter the big winning hole 50 than the specified number of winnings, which is predefined as the number of winnings that can be won in the big winning hole 50 during one round. . For example, if the specified number of winning balls in one round is 10 balls, and 9 balls have won and the 10th and 11th balls reach the jackpot 50 at almost the same time, it will be an over-win. It's possible.
That is, timing 31 is the timing triggered by the occurrence of over winning.

The victory/defeat performance is, for example, a performance in which characters face off against each other on the liquid crystal display device 36, and it is conceivable that a defeat performance is executed in the case of a normal jackpot, and a victory performance is executed in the case of a probability-variable jackpot. Furthermore, if the game is pretending to be a normal jackpot, but it is internally determined to be a probability-variable jackpot, the player may be informed that the player is playing a probability-variable jackpot game by executing a victory effect.

The V round is a specific round among 1 to 7R, and is a round in which a specific prize opening is opened for a predetermined time in order to change the gaming state after a jackpot game to a certain variable state by winning a game ball. . That is, by placing a game ball in a specific winning hole that is opened for a predetermined time during the V round, it is possible to transition to a variable probability state after a jackpot game.

"During the ending of pattern A" is when the transition mode after the jackpot is displayed (timing 36), when a warning about forgetting to remove the IC is displayed (timing 37), and when the company logo is displayed (timing 38). Can be divided.

In addition, "during the ending of pattern B" includes the mode display effect where the transition mode after winning the jackpot is displayed (timing 39), the time when a warning for forgetting to remove the IC is displayed (timing 40), and the time when the warning for getting addicted is displayed (timing 40). It can be divided into timing 41) and company logo display time (timing 42).
As shown above, each of the previous suggested effects 01 to 21 can be executed at 42 different timings indicated by timings 01 to 42. Hereinafter, specific presentation modes will be illustrated and explained.
Note that the battle performance and victory/defeat performance performed in each round are just examples, and the performance does not necessarily have to be performed exactly as shown. Further, the number of rounds (1 to 7R) is also an example, and it may be a normal jackpot or a variable probability jackpot that allows a game of 1 to 10R.

The performance control unit 24 can grasp the start timing of the jackpot, that is, the timing 26 as the start timing of the opening performance by receiving the jackpot start command. Regarding timing 27, since the performance control unit 24 knows the time required for the jackpot notification performance, it can naturally know that timing 27 has arrived.
Timings 28 to 35 as the start timings of each of 1R to 7R can be grasped by the production control unit 24 receiving a round start command and a round end command from the main control unit 20.
For each timing (timing 36 to 38) belonging to the ending of pattern A and each timing (timing 39 to 42) belonging to the ending of pattern B, by receiving the jackpot end command from the main control unit 20, The production control unit 24 can understand this.

[9-3. Example of production]

FIG. 84 illustrates the relationship between 19 types of suggestive effects (effects 01 to 19) and 42 types of timing (timings 01 to 42). The circle mark in the figure indicates that a suggestive effect is performed. Specifically, presentation 01 may be executed at each timing from timing 02 to timing 09.

(Direction 01)

As a specific example of presentation 01, a suggestive presentation using a frame accessory may be considered. For example, a setting value suggestion effect is performed in which a frame accessory vibrates. The timing is set to be timings 02 to 09, and is executed in the gaming machine 1 that is in the "waiting for customer" state.
The gaming machine 1 detects that the player touches an operator such as each button on the gaming machine 1 which is set as "waiting for a customer", and performs a lottery as to whether or not performance 01 can be executed. If the lottery is won, a suggestion performance as performance 01 is executed.
Here, the higher the set value Ve is set, the higher the probability of winning regarding whether or not performance 01 can be executed is set, and the player's desire to play on the gaming machine 1 in which performance 01 is executed can be increased.

FIG. 85 shows a flowchart of an example of a specific process flow.
The production control unit 24 (CPU 241) determines whether the current timing is appropriate for execution of production 01 in step S3101. That is, if the current situation is at any of timings 02 to 09 (S3101: Y), the process advances to the subsequent step S3102, and if it is at any other timing (S3101: N), the sequence shown in FIG. The process ends.

In step S3102, the effect control unit 24 executes a process that branches depending on whether the execution flag is 0 or not. As for the execution flag, "0" indicates that the effect 01 is not being executed, and "1" indicates that the effect 01 has already been executed.

Each process for the suggested production 01 shown in FIG. 85 can be executed at an appropriate place, for example, in the production control main process (FIG. 41) or the production control timer interrupt process (FIG. 44). In that case, after executing each process following step S3101 shown in FIG. 85, each process continuing from step S3101 will be executed again several milliseconds later. That is, for example, for the gaming machine 1 that has once transitioned to the customer waiting state, the series of processes shown in FIG. 85 may be executed many times before the game machine 1 transitions from the customer waiting state to another state. Gender arises. If the process shown in FIG. 85 is executed at intervals of several milliseconds, and each time a lottery is won for whether or not performance 01 can be executed, performance 01 will continue to be executed, and the slot for gaming machine 1 will be The accessory continues to vibrate, resulting in suggestive performance 01 that is not appropriate for the player.

Therefore, in this embodiment, it is determined in step S3102 whether or not the execution flag is "0", and if it is "0", the effect control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3103. Perform the process to change. Furthermore, if the execution flag is "1" (S3102: N), the process in FIG. 85 is ended without performing any subsequent processes. Thereby, it is possible to prevent production 01 as a suggestive production from occurring excessively and to make it appear appropriately.

Note that each process shown in FIG. 85 does not include a process for returning the execution flag to "0". The execution flag is returned to 0, for example, when it is determined that the state will transition from the customer waiting state to another state. For example, when a fluctuation pattern designation command is received from the main control unit 20, it is confirmed that the command will exit from the customer waiting state, so the execution flag set for suggestion effect 01 is set at the timing when the command is received. Set "0". As a result, when the state changes to the customer waiting state again, the process shown in FIG. 85 is executed, and the effect 01 as the suggestive effect can be executed as appropriate. In other words, there is a possibility that performance 01 is executed only once each time the state transitions to the customer waiting state.

Note that the execution flag also appears in each suggestion effect described below, and each suggestion effect has a different execution flag. That is, the execution flag used for presentation 01 and the execution flag used for presentation 02 are different flags.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 does not have an execution flag for a suggestive performance that is not implemented in the gaming machine 1. If there is only one suggestion effect implemented in the gaming machine 1 (for example, if the gaming machine 1 is capable of executing only effect 01 as the suggestion effect), it is only necessary to provide one execution flag. It goes without saying that there is no need to consider the fact that each performance has a different execution flag.

The effect control unit 24 that has set the execution flag to 1 determines whether or not the operator that triggers the effect 01 has been operated in the subsequent step S3104. In this embodiment, the operator that triggers the activation is, for example, the effect button 13.

If the operator is not operated (S3104: N), the performance control unit 24 ends the series of processing shown in FIG. 85.
Furthermore, if the operator has been operated (S3104: Y), the production control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve from the RAM 243 in the subsequent step S3105, and performs a lottery according to the set value Ve in step S3106. . The winning probability corresponding to the set value Ve for presentation 01 is stored in the ROM 242 in the form of a table, for example. The respective tables used in the subsequent performances are also stored in the ROM 242 or the like, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Subsequently, in step S3107, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the player has won a lottery as to whether or not the effect 01 can be executed. If the winning bidder has been unsuccessful (S3107: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processing shown in FIG. 85. If the winner has been won (S3107: Y), the production control unit 24 registers a scenario for vibrating the frame accessory in order to execute production 01 in step S3108, and executes suggestion production 01 shown in FIG. 85. Finish the process.

As mentioned above, once the suggestion effect as effect 01 is executed, the lottery will not be performed again until the gaming machine 1 is played and the next time it changes to the "waiting for customer" state, and the effect will be executed. Suggestion performance as 01 is not performed.
Thereby, the processing load on the gaming machine 1 related to the execution of the lottery and performance 01 is reduced.

Note that the effect 01 is not displayed during a period as timing 01 when the initialization process of the frame accessory is being executed. This is because during the initialization process of the frame accessory used in production 01, there is a moment when the variables necessary to drive the frame accessory become inconsistent, and when the frame accessory is used. This is because there is a possibility that the gaming machine 1 may not operate normally by performing the performance. That is, if the effect 01 is a suggestive effect such as vibrating the frame accessory, it is not executed during the initialization period (timing 01) of the frame accessory to prevent the occurrence of problems. .

(Direction 02)

As a specific example of the presentation 02, a suggestive presentation using the liquid crystal display device 36 can be considered. The content of the performance is, for example, a performance in which a certain score is displayed, and the higher the set value Ve is, the higher the score is displayed, such as 100 points (out of 100 points).

The suggestion performance as performance 02 is executed in the gaming machine 1 that is in the "waiting for customer" state or the gaming machine 1 that is in the "before reaching" state.
As an example, in the table shown in FIG. 84, the suggested effects as effect 02 include volume/light intensity notification in the "waiting for customer" state (timing 04), displaying model introduction (timing 05), and displaying the company logo. (timing 06), while the warning for getting addicted is displayed (timing 07), and while the first layer of the menu screen is being displayed (timing 08), while the first layer of the menu screen is being displayed (timing 08), the trigger for the start of fluctuation is It can be executed at each timing of winning a prize (timing 10), slow fluctuation (timing 11), and high speed fluctuation (timing 12).

Note that the menu notification (timing 03) is an effect that is executed when no prize is entered into the starting port 34 for a predetermined period of time, such as 5 seconds, when the number of balls on hold is 0. may be executed while playing the game (that is, while holding the firing operation handle 15). In particular, when playing for a long time, there is a high possibility that the menu notification timing will arrive several times during the game.
The menu notification is a performance that constantly makes the player aware that no game balls have entered the upper starting port 34, and even if the suggestion performance as performance 02 is performed at such timing, the player will not be able to receive the notification. It is unclear whether the performance will be effective or not, and there is a risk that the performance may actually reduce the desire to play. Therefore, at the timing of the menu notification which is timing 03, the main suggestion effect which is effect 02 is not performed.

In addition, the volume/light intensity notification (timing 04) is a performance that is executed when, for example, no winning occurs in the starting port 34 for a relatively long period of time such as 15 seconds with the number of pending balls being 0. Therefore, there is a low possibility that it will be executed while the player is playing the game. That is, it is highly likely that the player is taking a break and taking his hand off the firing operation handle 15. Therefore, by performing the present suggestive performance at such timing, it is possible to expect the effect of drawing the player back to the gaming state.

When performing the suggestion performance as performance 02 while waiting for a customer, it may be performed in response to the player touching the performance button 13 or the like. This assumes that the player accidentally touches the performance button 13 or the like of the gaming machine 1 while walking along the aisle and checking each machine to decide which gaming machine to play.
When performing the suggestion performance as performance 02 at such a timing, the point display on the liquid crystal display device 36 presented to the player by this suggestion performance contains an element of the player trying his or her luck (or taking a chance). There is. That is, the player performs an operation to generate the effect 02 on each gaming machine 1 equipped with the present effect 02, and selects the gaming machine 1 whose point display displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is set to have a high point. It is conceivable to start playing games as a good omen.

Considering such a situation, this suggestion effect is executed while the first layer of the menu screen is displayed (timing 08), since this is a timing that the player can reach with just one operation. It can be said that the timing is appropriate for this.
On the other hand, while the second layer of the menu screen is displayed (timing 09), it is a timing that the player cannot reach unless the player performs two or more operations. There is a possibility that the timing is not suitable for this.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the suggestion effect as effect 02 is not executed at timing 09.

An example of a specific process flow will be described with reference to FIG. 86.
The effect control unit 24 first determines whether or not it is an appropriate timing to execute the effect 02 in step S3111. That is, if the current situation is at timing 04-08 or timing 10-12, the process advances to step S3112, and if it is any other timing, the series of processes shown in FIG. 86 is ended.

If there is no problem with the timing to execute the effect 02, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the execution flag is 0 in step S3112.
The execution flag is set to "1" if the effect 02 has already been executed, and is set to "0" if it has not been executed yet. The execution flags for the subsequent performances have the same meaning, and are set to "1" if they have been executed, and set to "0" if they have not been executed.

When the execution flag is "1", the performance control unit 24 ends the series of processing shown in FIG. 86.
On the other hand, if the execution flag is "0", the production control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3113, acquires the set value Ve in the subsequent step S3114, and sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3115. A lottery will be held. Thereby, it is determined whether or not to execute performance 02. In addition, in this lottery, not only whether or not performance 02 is to be performed, but also the number of points to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 when the performance 02 is to be performed is also determined. Which number of points is more likely to win varies depending on the set value Ve, as described above.
The winning probability and the number of points to be displayed for performance 02 based on the set value Ve are stored in the ROM 242 as a table, for example.

The effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the previous lottery result was won in the subsequent step S3116, and if the lottery result was unsuccessful, the process ends.
If the execution lottery of production 02 has been won, the production control unit 24 transmits a command to the production control unit 40 in step S3117.
As a result, points are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and a suggestive performance as performance 02 is realized in the gaming machine 1.

This will be specifically explained with reference to FIG. 123. 123 is arranged in chronological order from top to bottom on the drawing. The time chart describes the transition of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 from the previous state of waiting for a customer to the state of waiting for a customer. Also, the time required from transitioning to waiting for customers to transitioning to each state is described. For example, when transitioning to waiting for a customer, first, waiting for the start of variation is started, and the liquid crystal display device 36 enters a symbol-stop image state. After the symbol stopped state continues for 15 seconds, control for operation notification is started, and an image showing menu notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. When another 15 seconds have elapsed, an image indicating the volume/light amount notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

FIG. 123 shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in each state. Each image is numbered (a) to (f) to indicate the correspondence with each state.

A specific example will be described in which the effect 02 is executed in the gaming machine 1 in which each image shown in FIG. 123 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. For example, while a symbol static image as shown in image (a) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, or while a menu notification or a volume/light intensity notification as shown in image (b) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. During this time, the setting value suggestion effect will not be performed.
However, when the player presses the effect button 13 to display the menu screen in a state where a menu notification as shown in image (b) is being performed, a setting value suggestion effect is performed.

When the player presses the effect button 13 while the image (b) in FIG. 123 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, the first layer of the menu screen as shown in the image (g) in FIG. It is displayed on the display device 36. That is, the timing at which image (g) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is timing 08 shown in FIG. 83.

In image (g), a score of "72 points" is displayed along with a menu that the player can select using the operator. As described above, the higher the set value Ve is, the higher the score is displayed.

(Direction 03)

As a specific example of the effect 03, a suggestive effect performed using the liquid crystal display device 36 while waiting for a customer and displaying a demo screen can be considered. In this embodiment, timings 05 to 07 are set as times when the demo screen is displayed.
For example, the probability of appearance of a specific image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 during the demonstration screen display increases as the set value Ve increases. Therefore, it is possible to decide whether to play the game machine 1 based on whether or not the specific image effect appears.
In particular, by executing the image production using the liquid crystal display device 36 while displaying the demo screen, it is possible to arouse the player's desire to play even on the gaming machine 1 that is not currently playing a game, so that the game machine 1 can become vacant. It is possible to reduce the number of game machines 1 that are used, and it is possible to increase the operating rate of the game machines 1.

Further, such effects with different settings may be made to appear after the decorative symbol variation display game has been played a predetermined number of times after the gaming machine 1 is powered on. Specifically, until the 500 decorative symbol variation display games are completed, the image production is performed with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve, and after the 500 decorative symbol variation display games are completed, the demo screen display state is It may be configured such that when the image transitions to , the image effects with different appearance rates are executed depending on the set value Ve. Further, the specific image effect may not appear until 500 decorative symbol variation display games are completed.
With such a configuration, even if the gaming machine 1 is left unattended after being played for a certain amount of time (after the decorative symbol variation display game has been executed at least 500 times), the game machine 1 will be able to display the relevant information while the demo screen is being displayed. By executing the image effect, the player's desire to play can be aroused, and the gaming machine 1 can be returned to operation.

An example of a specific processing procedure will be described with reference to FIG. 87.
FIG. 87 is an example (S2130f) of each command process (S2130) in the command corresponding process (S2106) in FIG. It is something that
Specifically, the performance control unit 24 performs a process of setting the execution flag to "1" in step S3121. This execution flag is provided separately from the execution flags for each of the effects described above. The same execution flag is used in each subsequent performance (performance after performance 04), but a different flag is used for each performance.
Although not shown in FIG. 87, the execution flag for effect 03 is written back to "0" at the timing when the demonstration screen display ends. Specifically, the flag is written back to "0" when a decorative symbol variable display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36 as a result of a game ball hitting the upper starting slot 34.

Subsequently, in step S3122, the production control unit 24 determines whether or not the number of special symbol variation display games executed after the power is turned on is 500 times or more. If the number of special symbol variation display games that have been executed after the power is turned on is less than 500 times, the performance control unit 24 sends a command to the liquid crystal control unit 40 to display a normal demonstration screen in step S3127. As a result, a normal demonstration screen, which is not a suggestive effect, is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol variation display game has been played 500 times or more, the performance control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3123, and performs a lottery according to the set value Ve in step S3124. In the lottery process, the higher the set value Ve is, the higher the winning probability is set.

Next, in step S3125, the production control unit 24 determines whether or not the previous lottery was won, and if it has been won, in step S3126, the production control unit 24 instructs the liquid crystal control unit to send a command for displaying a demo screen as production 03. Do this for 40. On the other hand, if the player was unsuccessful in the previous lottery, the effect control unit 24 sends a command for displaying a normal demo screen in step S3127.

By performing the above processing, one of the demo screens is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the player can check the set value Ve by visually checking the type of demo screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. Estimation is possible.

(Direction 04)

A specific example of the performance 04 is a suggestive performance that is generated when a game ball wins (timing 10), a performance that causes a movable accessory to move, and the like. Also, among the winning times, it is executed only at the winning time, which is the first fluctuation start timing after the power is turned on. Furthermore, the performance type is "setting value change suggestion performance."
That is, the player plays the gaming machine 1 on which the decorative symbol variation display game has not been played even once after the opening of the hall, and by checking whether or not the performance 04 occurs, the previous day's setting value Ve is changed. This means that it can be estimated whether the setting value Ve has been changed to a new one or whether the setting value Ve from the previous day has been left unchanged.

By allowing the performance 04 to be executed, it is possible to create a situation where even a gaming machine 1 with a low ball payout rate on the previous day is likely to be selected as a game object. That is, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine 1.

Note that the effect 04 may be configured to always occur at the start of the first decorative symbol variation display game after changing the set value Ve (ie, at the time of the first winning).
Further, for example, when changing from setting value 4 to setting value 4, it may be configured so that effect 04 is executed, or it may be configured such that effect 04 is not executed because the setting value Ve is the same. You can leave it there.
Moreover, as a configuration opposite to the above-described configuration, the effect 04 is configured to occur at the start of the first decorative symbol variation display game after the power is turned on without changing the set value Ve. Good too.
Note that the button may be regarded as a movable accessory that can vibrate, and the effect 04 may be executed by vibrating the button.

An example of a specific process flow will be described with reference to FIG. 88. Although this is just an example, when the effect control unit 24 receives a decorative design designation command from the main control unit 20, processing for making effect 04 appear (S2130b) is executed.
In this example, the process for executing the production 04 is added to the process executed when the production control unit 24 receives the decorative design designation command (FIG. 43C). Therefore, detailed description of the portion explained using FIG. 43C will be omitted to avoid duplication.
By executing steps S2132 to S2136, the production control unit 24 confirms the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command, registers a scenario for correcting the origin of the accessory, sets a symbol fluctuation flag, performs fluctuation start processing, and deletes the fluctuation pattern designation command. I do.

Subsequently, the production control unit 24 determines in step S3131 whether or not the special symbol variation display game is the first variation after the power is turned on.
If it is the first variation after the power is turned on (S3131: Y), the production control unit 24 registers a scenario for executing production 04 in which the movable accessory moves in the subsequent step S3132.
On the other hand, if it is not the first variation after the power is turned on (S3131: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processing shown in FIG.

(Direction 05)

As a specific example of the effect 05, an image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 and a sound effect using the sound generating device 46a are executed. At each timing 10 to 13, which are considered to be before reach, for example, in a conversation between characters that appears in the image production executed on the gaming machine 1, there is a predetermined probability that a specific line for suggestive production will be changed from normal dialogue. The suggested effect changed to is executed. The predetermined probability may be a different probability depending on the setting value Ve (that is, the higher the setting value is, the higher the predetermined probability is), or may be the same probability regardless of the setting value Ve. If the probabilities are the same, the content of the dialogue may be changed depending on the setting value Ve.

Judgment material for appropriately determining whether or not to continue playing the game machine 1 by determining whether or not to perform performance 05 each time the decorative symbol variation display game starts, and appropriately executing the performance according to the determination result. It becomes possible to provide players with the following information.

An example of specific processing contents is shown in FIG. 89.
The effect control unit 24 determines in step S3141 whether or not the timing is appropriate for executing effect 05, that is, whether it corresponds to any of timings 10 to 13.
If it is determined that the timing is not appropriate (S3141: N), the performance control unit 24 ends the series of processing shown in FIG. 89. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing is appropriate (S3141: Y), the effect control unit 24 checks whether the execution flag is "0" in step S3142, and if the execution flag is not "0", the process is finish.
When the execution flag is "0", the effect control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3143, and performs a lottery to determine whether or not to execute effect 05 in the subsequent step S3144. In this example, performance 05 as the suggestive performance will be executed with a constant probability regardless of the set value Ve.

Subsequently, in step S3145, the performance control unit 24 branches the process depending on whether or not the lottery has been won. If the winning result has been lost, the effect control unit 24 ends each process shown in FIG. 89, and if the effect has been won, the effect control unit 24 obtains the set value Ve in step S3146, and changes it to the set value Ve in step S3147. Make conversation selections accordingly. In conversation selection, one conversation is selected from a plurality of conversations with different selection probabilities depending on the set value Ve. For example, three types of conversations, Conversation 1, Conversation 2, and Conversation 3, are prepared, and with setting value 1, Conversations 1 to 3 are selected with a probability of 65%, 30%, and 5%, respectively. With the setting value 6, conversations 1 to 3 are selected with a probability of 10%, 15%, and 75%, respectively.

With this configuration, the player can recognize that if conversation 3 is visible, there is a high possibility that the setting value is 6, and if conversation 1 is visible, the player can see that the setting value is 1. Recognize that the possibility is high.

(Direction 06)

As a specific example of the effect 06, a suggestive effect is performed using a light display device 45a such as a decorative lamp 45 or an LED device at each timing during the fluctuation (timings 10 to 25). Specifically, the effect is performed by lighting up the optical display device 45a for a certain period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the color of the emitted light is changed depending on the set value Ve. The emitted light color may be uniquely determined by the set value Ve, or the emitted light color that is likely to be selected may be different depending on the set value Ve.
Further, when the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a plurality of light sources such as LEDs as the light display device 45a, the light source used for the effect may be changed depending on the set value Ve, or a different light source may be used for the effect depending on the set value Ve. It may be configured to be easy to use.
Further, not only the light source used for the performance may be changed from among the various LEDs provided as the optical display device 45a depending on the set value Ve, but also the emitted light color may be changed.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned fixed time may be changed by the set value Ve. Alternatively, the light emitting effect may be performed at a plurality of timings from timings 10 to 25 during one fluctuation, and the number of effects during one fluctuation may be changed depending on the set value Ve. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the light emission effect is likely to be performed at 1 to 3 timings among timings 10 to 25, and when the setting value is 6, the light emission effect is likely to occur at 6 to 8 timings among timings 10 to 25. The configuration is such that the light emitting effect is easily performed at the timing of. Of course, the effect may be created by further combining the above-mentioned luminous colors and the number of optical display devices 45a used for the effect.

As a result, the more light-emitting effects are performed during one variation, the higher the expectation level, which is a high set value, increases. Therefore, even if a performance with low expectations is being executed during the fluctuation, if a suggestive performance as performance 06 appears, the player can continue playing the game without losing interest.

The specific processing procedure will be explained with reference to FIG. 90. It should be noted that detailed description of processes similar to those in each of the previous production examples will be omitted as the case may be.
The effect control unit 24 determines in step S3151 whether or not it is an appropriate timing to execute effect 06, and in step S3152 determines whether or not the execution flag is "0".
If it is determined that the timing is appropriate and the execution flag is "0", the production control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3153, obtains the set value Ve in step S3154, and sets the set value Ve in step S3155. A lottery will be held according to Ve.

In this lottery, it is determined which light source to use, what display mode (lighting pattern such as one blink or two blinks, etc.) to be adopted, etc., based on the set value Ve.
In this lottery, there may be a lottery result in which none of the light sources is turned on (=failed).

Subsequently, in step S3156, the effect control unit 24 branches based on whether the lottery result is a win or a loss, and in the case of a win, executes scenario registration for performing a light effect in step S3157.
Through such processing, performance 06 as a suggestive performance is executed.
Note that the execution flag changed to "1" in step S3153 is cleared to "0" at the end of the timing. For example, if production 06 is executed at timing 10, which is the timing of winning (starting fluctuation), and the execution flag is changed to "1", the period as timing 10 ends and the next phase (for example, timing 11) When transitioning to , the execution flag is returned to "0". This makes it possible to execute the effect 06 again at timing 11.

(Direction 07)

A specific example of production 07 is the timing at which the first decorative pattern stops among the three decorative patterns on the left, middle, and right that are stopped and displayed in a specific area on the liquid crystal display device 36 (timing 13). , the type of the stopped decorative pattern corresponds to the set value Ve at any of the second and third pseudo consecutive timings (timings 14 and 15), or the timing at which the second decorative pattern stops (timing 16). A suggestive performance will be performed.
For example, if the setting value is 6, the probability that a reach effect (reach variation pattern) in which the first decorative symbol stopped and the second stopped decorative symbol are both 6 will be executed is higher than other It is set higher than the set value (1 to 5).

Also, although the reach effect is not executed (that is, through the normal fluctuation pattern), when all three decorative symbols are stopped, a specific arrangement order (for example, the left symbol is 1, the middle symbol is 2, and the right symbol is 3) is displayed. A suggestive effect may be performed by making the appearance rate of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) different depending on the set value Ve.
Even if the result of the reach performance is off, if the stopping mode is such that a high set value is expected, the player's desire to play can be maintained.

Furthermore, when all the decorative symbols are stopped through the ready-to-win effect and a jackpot is achieved, a difference may be provided in the appearance rate of the decorative symbol that becomes a jackpot depending on the set value Ve. For example, the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability that three decorative symbols imitating the number 6 will be a jackpot.
Even if the winning type is undesirable for the player, if the stopping mode is such that a high set value is expected, the player's desire to play can be maintained.

Specific processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 91. Note that FIG. 91 is an example (S2130b) of each command process (S2130) in the command correspondence process (S2106).
First, the performance control unit 24 executes each process of steps S2132 to S2134. These processes have already been explained, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.
Subsequently, the production control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3161, and executes a fluctuation start process in the subsequent step S3162.

The fluctuation start process in this example is performed based on the set value Ve. That is, it is determined whether or not to perform a lottery for a variation pattern based on the set value Ve (that is, it is determined whether or not to include a set value suggestion in the variation pattern), and when it is determined that a set value suggestion is to be included, a lottery is performed based on the set value Ve. A variation pattern lottery is performed, and processing for starting the variation pattern selected as a result of the lottery (scenario registration, command transmission to the liquid crystal control unit 40, etc.) is performed.
Thereby, for example, when performing a ready-to-reach effect, the decorative symbols according to the set value Ve are increased. Further, when displaying a state in which three decorative symbols are aligned to notify a jackpot, the decorative symbols corresponding to the set value Ve are stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that a variable pattern lottery using the set value Ve is not always performed during the reach performance or the jackpot notification performance. Therefore, a part of the reach performance and the jackpot notification performance is performed by drawing a lottery with a fluctuating pattern that is not based on the set value Ve. In this case, a variation pattern is drawn based on the contents of the variation pattern designation command or decorative pattern designation command received from the main control unit 20 without using the set value Ve.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 deletes the variation pattern designation command in step S2136, and ends the series of processing shown in FIG. 91.

(Direction 08)

As a specific example of production 08, in the "normal variation 4s" which is the shortest production among the deviation variation patterns, by configuring the higher the setting value, the number of the decorative pattern that stops tends to be larger, the " A variation pattern of "normal variation 4s" is used as a mode of suggestive performance.
Further, it is also possible to adopt a mode in which the decorative pattern according to the value of the set value Ve is easily stopped. Specifically, if the setting value is 3, the decorative pattern imitating the number 3 is likely to stop.

Further, in a variation pattern of deviations through normal reach, a similar decorative pattern may be easily stopped.
Examples of the execution timing of the suggestion effect include when the second symbol stops (timing 17) and when a normal reach occurs and the win/loss promotion effect occurs (timing 18).

In production 08, even if the variation pattern is out of place, depending on the mode of the decorative symbols that stop, a feeling of expectation of a high set value can be obtained, and it is possible to prevent a decline in the desire to play.

Specific processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 91. Note that a description of each process in steps S2132 to S2134 will be omitted.
The effect control unit 24 acquires the setting value Ve in step S3161, and performs a fluctuation start process in the subsequent step S3162.
In the fluctuation start process, when the lottery result of the fluctuation pattern is "normal fluctuation 4s" that does not include reach effect, the decorative stop symbol is determined according to the set value Ve, and the scenario registration and liquid crystal control unit 40 are performed accordingly. Commands are sent to.
Thereby, the decorative pattern selected according to the set value Ve is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the player can guess the set value Ve.

(Direction 09)

As a specific example of production 09, when the title of the first type super reach is displayed (timing 19) or the title of the second type super reach is displayed (timing 22), a danger pattern is displayed as one of the title images on the liquid crystal display device 36. When a special image (an image with a high expected value) is displayed, the probability of winning the jackpot varies depending on the set value Ve.
Not only the liquid crystal display device 36, but also a sound generator 46a, an optical display device 45a, and the like are used for this suggestion effect.
For example, the higher the set value Ve is, the lower the probability of winning after the suggestion effect appears may be set.

Further, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same for setting values 2 to 6, but the probability of winning the jackpot may be set to 100% for setting value 1. In other words, even though a special image such as a danger pattern is displayed as a title image, if it is a miss rather than a jackpot, the player may lose interest in playing, but according to this configuration, at least the most Since the possibility that the setting value 1 is disadvantageous to the player disappears, it is possible to prevent a decline in the desire to play and to improve the desire to play. That is, whether the lottery result is a jackpot or a loss, the player's desire to play can be increased.

Specific processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 91. Note that a description of each process in steps S2132 to S2134 and S2136 will be omitted.
After acquiring the set value Ve in step S3161, the production control unit 24 executes a variation start process based on the set value Ve in step S3162.
In the variation start process, a lottery is performed for performance modes according to the set value Ve.
For example, when the set value Ve is 1 and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a "miss", the lottery is performed such that the title is not displayed in a danger pattern, but in another format.
Further, if the set value Ve is 6 and the jackpot lottery result is "lost", a lottery is performed in which there is a possibility that a title display with a danger pattern will be selected.

For example, this can be realized by using a table as shown in FIG. For the first type super reach, for example, three types of title screens are prepared: title 1, title 2, and title 3 (danger pattern). Title 2 has higher reliability than Title 1 (possibility of winning the jackpot lottery), and Title 3 has higher reliability than Title 2.

Figure 92 shows the distribution probabilities of titles 1, 2, and 3 when you lose the jackpot lottery and execute the 1st type super reach (when you win the lottery to decide whether to execute the 1st type super reach). This shows that. Specifically, the numerical value of the numerator when the denominator is 65536 is listed, and the setting value Ve=1 and the 45536 listed in the title 1 column appear with a probability of 45536/65536. It shows. Furthermore, the rightmost column shows the appearance rate of title 3, which is calculated by taking into consideration the respective jackpot winning probabilities and the appearance probabilities of the first type super reach according to the set value Ve. For example, if the setting value Ve=2, the probability of losing the jackpot lottery, winning the first type Super Reach, and then winning Title 3 where the danger pattern appears is 1.5e-6 ( 1.5×10^-6).

As can be understood from FIG. 92, when title 3 including the danger pattern appears on the liquid crystal display device 36 as the first type super reach, the reliability (the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery) is higher than the set value 6. The setting value 1 is set higher.
That is, as described above, when the setting value is 1, when a special image such as a danger pattern is displayed as a title image, it becomes a guaranteed jackpot performance, and when the setting value is 6, a similar performance becomes a performance that does not guarantee a jackpot.

(Direction 10)

As a specific example of the effect 10, the appearance rate of a specific reach (for example, the first type super reach or the second type super reach) is set to be different depending on the value of the set value Ve.
The performance timings are timings related to the first type super reach (timings 19 to 21) and timings related to the second type super reach (timings 22 and 23).
Not only the liquid crystal display device 36, but also a sound generator 46a, an optical display device 45a, and the like are used for this suggestion effect.

For example, at least one of a plurality of reach modes as the first type super reach has a different appearance rate depending on whether the setting value Ve is odd or even. Furthermore, the more the super reaches appear consecutively, the higher the possibility that the set value is high.
Thereby, even if the super reach appears but misses, the expectation level, which is a high set value, increases due to continuous appearance, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the desire to play.

A specific processing example will be described with reference to FIG. 93. Note that FIG. 93 is an example (S2130b) of each command process (S2130) in the command correspondence process (S2106).
The performance control unit 24 executes each process of steps S2132 to S2134. A detailed description of each process will be omitted. Subsequently, in step S3171, the performance control unit 24 determines whether the special symbol variation display game to be played from now on is the first type super reach. This information can be obtained by analyzing the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 20.

If it is the first type super reach (S3171: Y), the production control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3172, and determines whether the set value Ve is an even number in the subsequent step S3173.
If the number is even (S3172: Y), the performance control unit 24 selects a table for even numbers (step S3174). Further, if the number is odd (S3172: N), the effect control unit 24 selects a table for odd numbers (step S3175).

Next, the performance control unit 24 performs a lottery to determine the performance mode (fluctuation mode) based on each table in step S3176, and starts variation in step S3177 based on the performance mode selected as a result of the lottery. Specifically, the processing includes a process of transmitting a command to the liquid crystal control unit 40 for executing the decorative symbol variation display game, a process of registering a scenario for performing various effects using the speaker 46, the optical display device 45a, etc. is executed in step S3177.

In addition, in step S3171, if the special symbol variation display game to be played from now on is not the first type super reach (S3171: N), the production control unit 24, in step S3178, performs processing or lottery according to the variation mode to be executed. Then, in step S3177, variation is started.

After starting the variation, the effect control unit 24 executes a process of deleting the variation pattern designation command in step S2136.

In this way, by selecting different tables depending on whether the set value Ve is even or odd (steps S3174, S3175), it is possible to differentiate the variation mode that tends to appear with even numbers from the variation mode that tends to appear with odd numbers. . This allows the player to estimate the set value Ve based on the behavior of the gaming machine 1.

(Direction 11)

As a specific example of the effect 11, a suggestive effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 and the effect button 13 is performed during execution of the winning/losing effect in the second type super reach. For example, when displaying on the liquid crystal display device 36 an image that instructs to press the performance button 13 as one of the winning/losing promotion effects, the image to be displayed when the promotion effect also serves as a suggestion effect and when it does not. (For example, the wording that instructs the button to be pressed is different.)
The inciting performance as a suggestive performance is configured such that, for example, the probability of a variable jackpot is 100%, and it appears only at a set value of 6.

In this case, the appearance of the inciting effect as a suggestive effect makes it certain that a jackpot such as 10R has been won, and it is also confirmed that the set value Ve is 6, which is the highest set value, so the player This can significantly improve the player's desire to play.
Note that "fixing" the set value here does not mean that something that was previously undefined internally in the gaming machine 1 is fixed at this moment, but rather that it is fixed as an already existing value internally in the gaming machine 1. This means that the set value Ve that has been set becomes clear to the player, and it means that the set value Ve that has been estimated is confirmed for the player. Furthermore, "determined" is written not only when the expected setting value Ve has been narrowed down to one number, but also when it has been narrowed down to a value other than a specific number. Specifically, it is used in expressions such as "definitely an odd number" or "definitely a number greater than or equal to 2." In the following explanation, when the word "determined" is used, it is used with the same meaning.

Note that it is not essential that the setting value be 6. For example, it may be configured that the setting value is any one of 4 to 6, or that the setting value is not 1. It is also possible to do so. In addition, it may be an effect that suggests that a high setting value is likely even if it is not confirmed.

Specifically, an example of executing an effect in which lines are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as a winning/losing effect will be described with reference to FIG. 94.
FIG. 94A is a table showing lines 1 to 4 that can be selected for each setting value Ve. When the set value Ve is 1, either line 1 or line 3 is selected and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. Furthermore, when the set value Ve is 2, dialogue 1 is selected (that is, dialogues 2 to 4 are not displayed).

Since dialogue 1 is selected regardless of the setting value Ve, it does not serve as a suggestive effect. Line 2 can be selected only when the set value Ve is 6, and when this effect is selected, it is confirmed that the set value Ve is 6.
Line 3 can be selected when the set value Ve is 1, 3, or 5, and it is determined that the set value Ve is an odd number. Furthermore, the line 4 can be selected when the set value Ve is 4, 5, or 6, and it is determined that the set value Ve is 4 or more.

A specific processing procedure will be described with reference to FIG. 94B. Note that detailed description of the above-mentioned processing will be omitted as appropriate.
The effect control unit 24 determines whether or not it is an appropriate timing to execute the effect 11 in step S3181, and determines whether the execution flag is "0" in the subsequent step S3182.
If the timing is appropriate to execute performance 11 and the execution flag is "0", the performance control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3183, and sets the set value in step S3184. Ve is acquired, and branch processing according to the set value Ve is performed in the subsequent step S3185.

When the set value Ve is 1 or 3, the production control unit 24 selects one of lines 1 and 3 in step S3186. At this time, the configuration may be such that dialogue 3 is less likely to be selected (that is, the selection probability is lower) than dialogue 1.
If the set value Ve is 2, the performance control unit 24 selects line 1 in step S3187.
If the set value Ve is 4, the effect control unit 24 selects one of lines 1 and 4 in step S3188.
If the set value Ve is 5, the effect control unit 24 selects one of lines 1, 3, and 4 in step S3189.
If the set value Ve is 6, the effect control unit 24 selects one of lines 1, 2, and 4 in step S3190.

Subsequently, the production control section 24 transmits a command to the liquid crystal control section 40 in step S3191.

(Direction 12)

As a specific example of the performance 12, a suggestive performance is performed using the liquid crystal display device 36 during the re-lottery performance after winning the jackpot (timing 24). At this time, the appearance probability of the decorative pattern before the re-lottery, the appearance probability of the decorative pattern after the re-lottery, etc. are configured to vary depending on the set value Ve.
For example, as a re-lottery effect, from a state where decorative symbols (for example, 2, 4, 6, 8) indicating a "normal jackpot" that does not transition to a variable state after the jackpot ends, to a "probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a variable state after the jackpot ends. ” When performing an effect in which the image changes to a decorative pattern (for example, 1, 3, 5, 7, 9), if the setting value Ve of the gaming machine 1 is 1, calculate the probability that the image will change to the decorative pattern 1. If the set value Ve is 6, the probability of changing to a 7 decorative pattern is increased.

In such a gaming machine 1, even when the game is promoted to a "probable jackpot" through the re-lottery effect, the player has different joys and sorrows depending on whether it changes to the 1 decorative symbol or the 7 decorative symbol. Therefore, it is possible to realize a performance with high game interest.

A specific processing example will be described with reference to FIG. 95. Note that FIG. 95 is an example (S2130b) of each command process (S2130) in the command correspondence process (S2106).
After executing each process of steps S2132, S2133, and S2134, the production control unit 24 executes a process of randomly selecting the variation mode of the decorative pattern based on the winning type and variation pattern in step S3201.
By the time the process of step S3201 is executed, the production control unit 24 has received the decorative pattern designation command and the variation pattern designation command from the main control unit 20. Therefore, as described above, the production control unit 24 has already acquired information on the winning type (missing, normal 4R, variable probability 10R, etc.) and fluctuation pattern (normal 4s, super reach 1, etc.). In step S3201, using this information, a lottery is drawn to determine what type of decorative symbol variation display game is to be played on the liquid crystal display device 36.

Subsequently, in step S3202, the performance control unit 24 branches depending on whether the variation mode selected as a result of the previous variation mode lottery includes a re-lottery. If the variation mode is such that the re-lottery is not executed, the effect control unit 24 performs processing to start variation in step S3205, and deletes the variation pattern designation command in step S2136.

On the other hand, if it is a variation mode in which a re-lottery is executed, the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3203, and executes the process according to the set value Ve in the subsequent step S3204. Specifically, according to the set value Ve, a lottery process is performed for decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed to the player before the re-lottery and for decorative symbols to be presented to the player after the re-lottery.

This will be specifically explained with reference to FIG. 96.
FIG. 96 is an example of a table used for lottery of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed to the player via the liquid crystal display device 36. The re-lottery performance includes a performance mode in which the display on the liquid crystal display device 36 is changed from a decorative symbol indicating "normal jackpot" as a promotion success pattern to a decorative symbol indicating "probable strange jackpot", and a "normal" display as a promotion failure pattern. A presentation mode is provided in which the same decorative pattern indicating "normal jackpot" is displayed again from the decorative pattern indicating "jackpot". FIG. 96 is a table that is referred to when executing the promotion success pattern. The numerical values in the figure indicate the selection probability of each decorative pattern, and the unit is %.

As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern is selected according to the set value Ve. For example, when the set value Ve is 1, the probability that "2" will be selected is 60%, the probability that "4" will be selected is 20%, and "6" will be selected as the decorative pattern before re-drawing. The probability is 10%, and the probability that "8" is selected is 10%. Furthermore, when the set value Ve is 1, the probability that "1" will be selected is 70%, the probability that "3" will be selected is 10%, and "5" will be selected as the decorative pattern after re-drawing. The probability is 10%, the probability that "7" is selected is 5%, and the probability that "9" is selected is 5%.
That is, when the set value Ve is 1 and a promotion success pattern is to appear as a re-lottery performance, the performance mode in which the decorative symbol is changed from "2" to "1" is most likely to be selected.
As can be understood from FIG. 96, the decorative symbols that are more likely to be selected before and after the re-lottery differ depending on the set value Ve.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 95.
After completing the drawing of decorative symbols according to the set value Ve, the production control unit 24 performs a process of starting variation in step S3205, and deletes the variation pattern designation command in step S2136. In the process of starting the variation, as described above, there is a process of transmitting a command for executing the decorative symbol variation display game to the liquid crystal control unit 40, and various effects using the speaker 46, the optical display device 45a, etc. Executes processes such as registering scenarios.

(Direction 13)

As a specific example of the effect 13, a suggestion effect for causing the player to operate two operators (for example, two effect buttons including the effect button 13) is performed using the liquid crystal display device 36.
For example, as shown in FIG. 97A, after a phrase such as "W Device Chance!" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (Image 1), two controls for the player to operate are displayed as shown in FIG. 97B. An image (Image 2) containing an icon image and words that induce operations such as "Press at the same time!" is displayed.
Next, the jackpot lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (FIGS. 98A and 98B). If you win the jackpot lottery, the same decorative pattern (decorative pattern 7 in the figure) is aligned as shown in FIG. 98A. will be notified. On the other hand, if the player loses the jackpot lottery, as shown in FIG. 98B, the failure is notified because the decorative symbols do not line up.

After being notified of failure as shown in FIG. 98B, an image shown in FIG. 99A or 99B is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.
The image shown in FIG. 99A is an image displayed with a setting value Ve of 1 to 6, for example, and is an image that is selected with a high probability. On the other hand, the image shown in FIG. 99B is an image that is displayed with low probability when the setting value Ve is 6, for example, and a specific character image (in the figure, a UFO character image) is added to the image shown in FIG. 99A. The image is said to be In other words, the configuration is such that when the set value Ve is 1 to 5, the image shown in FIG. 99A is always displayed, and only when the set value Ve is 6, either the image shown in FIG. 99A or FIG. 99B is displayed. has been done.
When the image shown in FIG. 99B is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, the player can understand that the set value Ve is 6, which is the highest value.

In FIG. 99B, a speaker icon is shown along with an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. This indicates that when the image effect shown in FIG. 99B is executed, the sound effect by the speaker is also performed at the same time. That is, the player can enjoy the performance not only visually, but also aurally.
Even a player who misses the image effect performed on the liquid crystal display device 36 can notice the suggestive effect because the sound effect is performed using the sound generating device 46a such as a speaker.

The image (FIG. 99B) used for the confirmation effect of setting value 6 is presented to the player when the player loses the jackpot lottery (that is, at timing 25 when all symbols are stopped). It is possible to prevent a decline in the desire to play and to improve the desire to play, and it is possible to realize a performance with high game interest.

A specific processing procedure will be explained with reference to FIG. 100.
In step S3211, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not it is an appropriate timing to execute the effect 13. That is, the process branches depending on whether or not all symbols are currently stopped (timing 25).

If the timing is not appropriate to execute the effect 13, the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processing shown in FIG. 100. On the other hand, if the timing is appropriate, the effect control unit 24 determines whether the execution flag is "0" in the subsequent step S3212. When the execution flag is not "0", that is, when it is "1", the effect control section 24 ends the series of processing shown in FIG. 100.
When the execution flag is "0", that is, when the performance 13 is not being executed, the performance control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3213, and obtains the set value Ve in step S3214.

Subsequently, in step S3215, the performance control unit 24 performs a lottery with a performance mode according to the set value Ve and the winning/losing information of the jackpot lottery. In this lottery, it is determined whether or not to execute the decorative symbol variation display game using each of the images shown in FIGS. There will be a lottery as to whether or not it will be allowed.
As a result of the lottery, if the effects shown in FIGS. 97 to 99 are executed without using the images, the liquid crystal display device 36 ends without performing the subsequent processing shown in FIG. 100.

When executing the effects using the images shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, the effect control unit 24 sequentially displays FIG. 97A (image 1) and FIG. 97B (image 2) on the liquid crystal display device 36 in step S3216. The command is sent to the liquid crystal control section 40.

Subsequently, the performance control unit 24 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation based on image 2 in step S3217. That is, the process branches based on whether the player operates the operator displayed as an icon image on the liquid crystal display device 36.
If the operator is operated, the liquid crystal display device 36 advances to step S3219. Further, if the operator is not operated, the effect control unit 24 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed in step S3218. If the predetermined time has not elapsed, the effect control unit 24 executes the process of step S3217 again. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has elapsed, the production control unit 24 proceeds to the process of step S3219.
That is, the performance control unit 24 repeatedly executes the processes of step S3217 and step S3218 until the player operates the operator or a predetermined time period elapses.

In step S3219, the production control unit 24 branches depending on whether or not the jackpot lottery has been won. The winning/losing information can be obtained from the command received from the main control unit 20.
If the jackpot lottery has been won, the effect control unit 24 transmits a command to the liquid crystal control unit 40 to display FIG. 98A (image 3) on the liquid crystal display device 36 in step S3220.

If the jackpot lottery has been unsuccessful, the production control unit 24 sends a command to display the image 4 in FIG. It is determined whether or not (UFO icon image) is to be displayed. Note that whether or not to display the character image has already been determined by the lottery in step S3215.

If the character image is not to be displayed, the effect control unit 24 transmits a command to display the image shown in FIG. 99A (image 5) on the liquid crystal display device 36 to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3223.
On the other hand, when displaying a character image, the effect control unit 24 transmits a command to display the image shown in FIG. 99B (image 6) on the liquid crystal display device 36 to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3224.

The effect of displaying images 5 and 6 on the liquid crystal display device 36 is referred to as a suggestive effect. That is, when the player loses a jackpot lottery, he or she can estimate the set value Ve of the gaming machine 1 from the appearance ratio of images 5 and 6 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

(Direction 14)

As a specific example of the effect 14, a suggestive effect such as flashing the logo of the gaming machine 1 is performed when all the symbols in the decorative symbol variation display game are stopped (timing 25).
To be more specific, after the cumulative number of rotations after the power is turned on (the number of decorative symbol variation display games played after the power is turned on) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2000 times), the rotation is performed in response to a predetermined opportunity. When all symbols of the decorative symbol variable display game are stopped (timing 25) a specific number of times (for example, 20 times), a suggestive effect such as flashing the logo of the gaming machine 1 is performed. Thereafter, the same suggestion performance can be executed periodically (for example, every 100 decorative symbol fluctuation display games) for a predetermined period (for example, during 20 decorative symbol fluctuation display games). A predetermined period (during the 20 decorative symbol variation display games) during which a suggestive effect may be performed is referred to as a suggestive effect period.

As long as it blinks at least once in each suggestion performance period, the effect is to deny that the set value Ve is 1. That is, if a suggestive effect such as flashing a logo or the like never occurs during a certain suggestive effect period, there is a possibility that the set value Ve is 1.
Since the player considers that the set value Ve may not be 1 while the indicator blinks once in each previous suggestion performance period, the purpose of performing the suggestion performance is to encourage the player to continue playing. This could be the reason.

In addition, if the suggestion performance is performed twice in any of the above-mentioned suggestion performance periods (for example, if the suggestion performance is performed twice during the 20 decorative symbol fluctuation display games in a certain suggestion performance period), is configured such that it is determined that the set value Ve is 2 or more. In this case, the player's desire to play can be improved because the suggestion effect appears twice in one suggestion effect period.

Note that the predetermined opportunity may be at the start or end of a predetermined number of decorative symbol variation display games, or after a specific performance is performed.
Furthermore, although an example is shown in which a light display device 45a such as a decorative lamp 45 is used as a presentation means, it may be substituted with a sound presentation using a sound generator 46a, or a presentation using a liquid crystal display device 36. Alternatively, it may be an effect that moves a movable accessory.

Furthermore, the total number of out pitches may be used instead of the cumulative number of rotations after the power is turned on. According to this, in a gaming machine 1 where there are not many game balls entering each prize opening, the number of prize balls is small, and there is a high possibility that the player will stop playing, the player can receive the game ball at an earlier timing than other gaming machines 1. A predetermined opportunity will arrive, and it is possible to increase the possibility of suppressing a decline in the desire to play the gaming machine 1.

Specific processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 101.
The effect control unit 24 determines in step S3231 whether the timing is appropriate to execute the effect 14, and in the subsequent step S3232 determines whether the execution flag is "0".
If the execution timing is inappropriate or if the execution flag is not "0", the effect control unit 24 ends the process shown in FIG. 101.

In step S3233, the performance control unit 24 executes a process of changing the execution flag to "1". This prevents the performance 14 as a suggestive performance from being executed many times at the same timing.

The performance control unit 24 branches depending on whether the cumulative number of rotations is 2000 times or more in step S3234. If the number of times is less than 2000, the performance control unit 24 ends each process shown in FIG. 101. If the total number of rotations is 2000 or more, the production control unit 24 determines whether the last two digits of the total number of rotations are less than 20 in step S3235. "%" in the figure indicates a remainder operator. That is, the formula "total rotational speed % 100" represents a formula for calculating the remainder when the cumulative rotational speed is divided by 100.

If the last two digits are 20 or more, the effect control unit 24 ends the suggestion effect 14 execution process without executing the subsequent process.
If the last two digits are less than 20, the production control unit 24 determines whether the last two digits of the total number of rotations are "00" in step S3236, and if they are "00", the number of productions is set to 0. (Step S3237).
In the effect 14, the suggested effect may be executed at 20 rotations (2000 to 2019 times) after the total number of rotations reaches 2000 times or more. Also, from then on, each time the last two digits become "00", a suggestive effect can be executed during the subsequent 20 rotations. At this time, the number of times the suggestion performance is performed in one set of the suggestive performance executable period of 20 rotations is made to change according to the set value Ve. The number of presentations set to "0" in step S3237 is a variable that indicates how many suggestion presentations have been performed in one set of the suggested presentation executable period, and the last two digits of the cumulative number of rotations are "00". It is reset to "0" every time.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 obtains the set value Ve in step S3238, and in step S3239, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not the effect 14 can be executed based on the number of times of effect and the set value Ve.
An example of a table used for the lottery is shown in FIG. 102.
The unit of numerical value in the figure is "%" and indicates the probability that the presentation 14 as the suggestion presentation will be executed (that is, the winning probability).
For example, if the set value Ve is 1 and the number of performances is "0", that is, if the performance 14 has not been executed yet in the suggested performance executable period, the performance 14 will be executed with a probability of 2%. Further, when the set value Ve is 1 and the number of performances is 1 to 19, the probability of winning is 0%. That is, the performance 14 is executed at most once during one set of suggestive performance execution period. Therefore, if the performance 14 is executed a plurality of times during one set, it is determined that the set value Ve is 2 or more.

As can be understood from FIG. 102, the higher the set value Ve is, the easier it is to perform the effect 14. Therefore, the player can estimate the set value Ve from the appearance frequency of the effect 14, etc.

Return to FIG. 101. In step S3240, the effect control unit 24 branches depending on whether or not to execute the effect 14, that is, whether or not the lottery in step S3239 is won.
If the selection has been unsuccessful, the performance control unit 24 ends the suggestion performance 14 execution process of FIG. 101.
If it has been won, the production control unit 24 adds 1 to the number of productions in step S3241, sends a command for production 14 to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3242, and registers the scenario for production 14 in step S3243. I do.

(Direction 15)

A specific example of the performance 15 is a suggestion performance performed when an over-win occurs during each round game during the jackpot (timings 28 to 35).
For example, when an over-win occurs in each round, a different sound effect than usual is performed. The higher the setting value of the gaming machine 1 is, the higher the probability that different sound effects will be performed. Furthermore, when the different effects are executed in rounds 4 and 5, settings 2 or higher are determined.

By implementing such a performance 15 in the gaming machine 1, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the suggested performance will be executed, even during a normal jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine 1 with high gaming interest.

Note that instead of sound effects, light effects may be performed using the light display device 45a.

Specific processing will be described with reference to FIG. 103A. In addition, FIG. 103A is an example (S2130g) of each command process (S2130) in the command corresponding process (S2106), and is executed in response to the production control unit 24 receiving the big winning opening prize command from the main control unit 20. This is an example of the processing performed. Further, in FIG. 103A, processes other than the process related to performance 15 as the suggestive performance are omitted.
First, the production control unit 24 receives the big winning opening winning command from the main control unit 20, and executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 103A. This command is issued by the main control unit 20 in response to a game ball winning in the jackpot 50 that is opened for a predetermined time in each round game in the jackpot game.
The production control unit 24 that has received the command performs a process of adding 1 to the big prize counter in step S3251. This counter is a variable for counting the number of game balls entered into the big winning hole 50 during each round game, and is cleared to "0" when each round game is started.

Subsequently, in step S3252, the production control unit 24 determines whether or not the big winning counter has a value larger than the upper limit number of winnings. The upper limit number of winning balls is the upper limit number of winning balls allowed during one round, and when the number of winning balls reaches this number, the big winning hole 50 is closed. However, there is a slight difference between the timing when the number of winning balls reaches the upper limit number and the timing when the grand prize opening 50 is closed. For example, when two game balls are short of the upper limit number by one, two game balls may win the grand prize almost at the same time. In some cases, such as when a ball enters the winning hole 50, more winning balls than the upper limit are allowed (so-called over-winning).
In step S3252, it is determined whether the number of winning balls related to the currently received command is larger than the upper limit number.

If the current prize entered into the big prize opening 50 is an over-win (S3252: Y), the production control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3253, and determines whether to execute production 15 in the subsequent step S3254. A lottery will be held.
In this lottery process, the probability of winning is made to vary depending on the set value Ve, and for example, a lottery is performed based on the table shown in FIG. 103B. In this example, as shown in FIG. 103B, in the first round, with a setting value of 1, a special sound effect will occur with a probability of 10%, and with a setting value of 6, a special sound effect will occur with a probability of 60%. .
In addition, in the fourth and fifth rounds, the winning probability for the set value 1 is set to 0%, and if the effect 15 occurs, the set value 2 or higher is determined.

The effect control unit 24 branches depending on whether or not the lottery is won in step S3255. When performing performance 15, the performance control unit 24 registers a scenario for outputting a special sound in step S3256.
On the other hand, if you are unsuccessful (S3255: N), or if the current prize is not an over-win (S3252: N), the production control unit 24 registers a scenario for outputting normal sound in step S3257. .

In addition, in the above example, an example was explained in which the production control unit 24 also manages the number of winning balls during a round, but the main control unit 24 controls the grand prize opening winning command that includes information representing the number of winning balls. The production control unit 24 may be configured to receive the information from the unit 20. In that case, the big winning counter held by the production control unit 24 is not required, and only the value of the upper limit number of winnings needs to be held. Further, so that the production control unit 24 does not need to hold the value of the upper limit number of winnings, a large winning opening winning command that includes information as to whether or not the winning ball corresponds to an over-winning may be received. . In this case, the production control unit 24 does not need to perform the process of step S3251, and instead of step S3252, it may perform a process of determining whether or not the big winning opening winning command is due to an over-winning.

In the above, an example has been described in which a lottery is performed to determine whether a normal sound performance or a special sound performance is to be performed when a player wins an excessive amount of money, but other examples are also possible.
For example, a special sound production may be selected at the timing when the big winning counter reaches a predetermined number in a specific number of rounds. Specifically, in the 4th round, when the big prize counter reaches 5, a lottery is made to determine whether or not to execute a special sound production according to the set value Ve, and if the player wins, the special sound production is executed. , If the selection is unsuccessful, a normal sound production is performed. The presentation 15 may be in this manner.
Moreover, in addition to this, it may be configured to select between no sound production and with sound production according to the lottery result. In other words, when a prize is won in the grand prize opening 50, there is usually no sound effect, but the sound effect may occur only at specific timings (for example, when the grand prize counter reaches 5 in the fourth round). It may be a configuration.

(Direction 16)

As a specific example of the presentation 16, at the start of the ending after all the round games in the jackpot are finished, that is, at the time of the mode display presentation (timings 36 and 39) in which the transition mode after the jackpot is displayed, the liquid crystal display device 36 An image effect is performed in which a specific image different from normal is displayed on top.
The normal image is, for example, an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 according to the current number of consecutive jackpots, and is an image that notifies the game status. On the other hand, the specific image is, for example, an image in which a specific character image is superimposed on the normal image. An image effect as the effect 16 is executed only when a lottery is won to determine whether or not to display a specific image different from the normal image.

The specific image effect is, for example, an effect that suggests that the set value Ve is not 1 (that is, an effect that makes the player recognize that the set value Ve is determined to be 2 or more).

The specific processing contents will be explained with reference to FIG. 104. In addition, FIG. 104 is an example (S2130h) of each command process (S2130) in the command corresponding process (S2106), and is executed in response to the production control unit 24 receiving the jackpot end command from the main control unit 20. This is an example of processing.
The jackpot end command is a command that is issued when all the round games executed during the jackpot game are finished, and upon receiving the command, the production control unit 24 displays an ending message on the liquid crystal display device 36. Each process for outputting an image effect is executed.
Note that in FIG. 104, parts other than those related to the effect 16 are omitted.

In step S3261, the effect control unit 24 obtains the set value Ve, and in the subsequent step S3262, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the effect 16 as a suggested effect can be executed.
Subsequently, in step S3263, the performance control unit 24 performs branch processing according to the lottery result.
If you win the lottery (S3263: Y), the effect control unit 24 transmits a command for displaying a special image to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3264. As a result, an image as shown in FIG. 105B is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, for example.
On the other hand, if the lottery is unsuccessful (S3263: N), the effect control unit 24 transmits a command for normal image display to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3265. As a result, for example, an image as shown in FIG. 105A is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

Note that when displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 36 and performing sound effects and light effects, processing for scenario registration is also performed in addition to steps S3264 and S3265.
For example, in FIG. 105B, a speaker icon is shown along with an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. This indicates that, like FIG. 99B, when the image effect shown in FIG. 105B is executed, the sound effect by the speaker is also performed at the same time.

Furthermore, the same effect (concentrated line effect) as the UFO icon drawn in the image of FIG. 99B is written on the UFO icon drawn in the image of FIG. 105B. Image renderings in which the same effect drawing is added to the same UFO icon may mean that they have the same suggested contents. For example, in the image effect shown in FIG. 99B, the UFO icon wrapped in concentrated lines is used to confirm that the set value Ve is 6. It can give recognition that there is. Furthermore, an image using a UFO icon with the same drawing style (for example, FIG. 105B) is similarly limited to an effect that confirms that the set value Ve is 6, thereby making it possible for the player to misunderstand the suggested content. This makes it possible to provide appropriate notification without any need for notification.

This is not limited to image production. Specifically, FIG. 99B shows that a sound effect is executed simultaneously with the image effect, and similarly, FIG. 105B also shows that a sound effect is executed. It is desirable that the sound effects executed at this time are similar (for example, the same voice and sound effects are output). By adopting a similar presentation mode for the sound presentation, it is possible to notify the correct suggested content without causing any misunderstanding by the player.
Of course, the same applies not only to sound effects but also to light effects using LEDs and the like. That is, by using the same LEDs used for sound production and by making the LEDs emit light in the same manner, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding of the suggested content.
Furthermore, the same suggestion content may be indicated when the combinations are the same. For example, if a UFO icon wearing saturated lines appears, but the sound effect at that time is different, the content may be different. That is, when the UFO icon and the sound performance are both in the same presentation mode, the suggestion presentation may have the same suggestion content.

Another example of the effect 16 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 shows an example of a state transition different from that shown in FIG. 83. Specifically, in FIG. 126, after the final round of the round game (final R release) during the jackpot game, the jackpot end interval effect is executed after the inter-round interval. Furthermore, after that, a warning for getting addicted and a warning for forgetting to take out the IC (similar to timing 40 and timing 41 shown in Figure 83) are executed, and then a company logo (corresponding to timing 42 in Figure 83), high accuracy/normal suggestion is executed. Screen displays (corresponding to timing 39 in FIG. 83) are sequentially executed.
Further, each round game is a second winning game period (accessory object continuous operation period), and the ending period is a third winning game period. Note that the opening period (fanfare period) is the first winning game period.

As a first example of the execution period of the set value suggestion performance, the set value suggestion performance is performed from the start of the jackpot end interval performance until the final phase of the jackpot game, that is, the high-accuracy/normal suggestion screen display ends, that is, on the liquid crystal display device 36. An image effect is executed in which a specific pattern is superimposed on the image.

Further, as a second example of the execution period of the setting value suggestion effect, the image effect is executed from the start of the jackpot end interval effect until the display of the company logo ends.

Furthermore, as a third example of the execution period of the setting value suggestion performance, the image as the setting value suggestion performance is not only during the ending period of the jackpot game, but also from the section before the ending period, that is, during the execution of the final round of the jackpot game. The performance is executed.

In any of the first, second, and third examples of the execution period of the setting value suggestion effect, the setting value suggestion effect appears for a period longer than at least half of the ending period (20 seconds). It is configured to
In this way, it is desirable that the setting value suggestion effect be displayed for a predetermined period or longer. In addition, if the setting value suggestion effect is performed during the ending period (third winning game section) or fanfare period (first winning game section), and those sections end in a relatively short time, As in the third example of the execution period of the set value suggestion performance, the setting value suggestion performance may be configured to appear from the second winning game section (or for a while after entering the second winning game section). . Also, it appears for a while (for example, for n seconds or until the end of n symbol change display games) after the ending section ends, that is, after the high-accuracy or low-accuracy (normal) game starts. It may be configured as follows.

The set value suggestion performance is not executed as many times as compared to the jackpot suggestion performance. This is because the winning results of a jackpot lottery occur every time a jackpot lottery is held, and the frequency of notification inevitably increases, whereas the set value does not change during the course of a day's play. (or extremely small), and once the notification is made, there is a high possibility that further notifications will be meaningless.
However, if the player misses the suggestion of a setting value by one of the few setting value suggestion effects, the player will have to wait for the next setting value suggestion effect to appear, which is a significant disadvantage to the player. There is a possibility that this may occur. For this reason, it is desirable to perform the setting value suggestion presentation over a certain amount of time, that is, to present the suggestion content.

Furthermore, the timing at which the final round is played during a jackpot game (ie, the ending period) is also the timing at which the player's interest in the gaming machine temporarily fades. However, at this timing, an image production is being performed to warn people about getting hooked and forgetting to take out their IC cards. That is, even if such a warning is issued at a timing when the player's interest has waned, there is a risk that the effect will be diminished.
However, in the gaming machine 1 in this example, since an image effect as a setting value suggestion effect is executed during the ending period, an image effect is used to draw various attention while keeping the player's interest high. can be executed. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play and to improve the effectiveness of each warning.

(Direction 17)

As a specific example of the effect 17, during the ending of pattern A (ie timings 36 to 38), a suggestive effect using the sound generating device 46a is performed with a predetermined probability. For example, when performing the suggestive performance, one is further selected from a plurality of types of audio data (speech data) and output. There are, for example, five types of audio data, and the suggested content differs depending on each audio data.

FIG. 106A shows the correspondence between selected audio data and suggestion content.
As shown in the figure, when audio data 1 is output, it is determined that the set value Ve is 2 or more, and when audio data 2 is output, it is determined that the set value Ve is an even number. However, when audio data 3 is output, it is determined that the set value Ve is an odd number. Further, when audio data 4 is output, it is determined that the set value Ve is 3 or more, and when audio data 5 is output, it is determined that the set value Ve is 6.

A specific process flow will be described with reference to FIG. 106B.
First, in step S3271, the effect control unit 24 determines whether the timing is appropriate to execute the effect 17, and in step S3272, determines whether the execution flag is "0".
If the timing is not appropriate or if the execution flag is "1", the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 106B.

If the timing is appropriate and the execution flag is "0", the production control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3273, and executes production 17 as a suggested production in the subsequent step S3274. A lottery will be made to determine whether or not.

Subsequently, the performance control unit 24 determines whether or not the lottery has been won in step S3275. If the winning bidder has been unsuccessful (S3275: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processing shown in FIG. 106B. On the other hand, if it has been won (S3275: Y), the effect control unit 24 executes branch processing according to the set value Ve in step S3276.

If the set value Ve is 1, the performance control unit 24 selects audio data 3 in step S3277. When the set value Ve is 2, the performance control unit 24 selects either the audio data 1 or the audio data 2 in step S3278. If the set value Ve is 3 or 5, the performance control unit 24 selects any one of audio data 1, audio data 3, and audio data 4 in step S3279. If the set value Ve is 4, the performance control unit 24 selects any one of audio data 1, audio data 2, and audio data 4 in step S3280. When the set value Ve is 6, the performance control unit 24 selects any one of audio data 1, audio data 2, audio data 4, and audio data 5 in step S3281.
In each selection process in steps S3277 to S3281, a lottery process is performed based on a predetermined probability. That is, this is a process of selecting one of the options based on a predetermined probability. Note that each option does not need to have the same ease of selection. For example, if the setting value is 6, one will be selected from audio data 1, audio data 2, audio data 4, and audio data 5, but audio data 2 is more likely to be selected than audio data 1. It may be configured as follows.

The production control unit 24 performs scenario registration for outputting the selected audio data in step S3282. Thereby, the audio data corresponding to the set value Ve is selected and output, thereby making it possible for the player to guess the set value Ve.

In the gaming machine 1 that is configured to be able to perform the performance 17, even if the player's desire to play is likely to be diminished by winning a normal jackpot instead of a fixed-variable jackpot, the game machine 1 may perform the effect during the ending of pattern A. Since the player can have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the suggested performance will be executed, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

(Direction 18)

As a specific example of the production 18, for example, at timings 36 to 42 during a probability variable jackpot when the state changes to a probability variable state after a jackpot game, a production notifying the transition to a probability variable state is performed, and the production button 13 The sound effects that are performed vary depending on the operation of the device. For example, when performing a sound production in which a blessing voice is played to bless the transition to a variable state, four types of blessing voices are prepared (FIG. 107A).

When blessing voice 1 is used, it is not known which value the set value Ve is. In other words, it is considered to be a non-suggestive performance. For example, in most cases, blessing voice 1 is selected. Thereby, it is possible to give a feeling of exhilaration to the player when the following suggestion effect is performed without selecting the blessing voice 1.
When blessing voice 2 is used, it is determined that the set value Ve is 2 or more. When blessing voice 3 is used, it is determined that the set value Ve is 4 or more. Further, when blessing voice 4 is used, it is determined that the set value Ve is 6.

A flowchart is shown for specific processing (FIG. 107B). Note that FIG. 107B is an example (S2130h) of each command process (S2130) in the command correspondence process (S2106). Further, FIG. 107B shows only the processing related to the execution of the effect 18, and in reality, the effect control unit 24 also performs various processes not shown.
In step S3291, the production control unit 24 determines whether the mode to which the mode to be transferred after the end of the jackpot game is a probability variable state or not. The mode to which the game moves can be specified, for example, by the jackpot end command, as described above.
If the probability is not in the variable state (S3291: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processing shown in FIG. 107.
When the transition mode is in the variable probability state (S3291: Y), the production control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3292, and performs branch processing based on the set value Ve in the subsequent step S3293.

If the set value Ve is 1, the production control unit 24 selects the blessing voice 1 in step S3294. When the set value Ve is 2 or 3, the production control unit 24 selects either blessing voice 1 or blessing voice 2 in step S3295. If the set value Ve is 4 or 5, the effect control unit 24 selects one of blessing voice 1, blessing voice 2, and blessing voice 3 in step S3296. If the set value Ve is 6, the performance control unit 24 selects one of blessing voice 1, blessing voice 2, blessing voice 3, and blessing voice 4 in step S3297. Each selection process is synonymous with performing a lottery process based on a predetermined probability set in advance.

Subsequently, the production control unit 24 executes scenario registration for outputting the selected blessing voice in step S3298.
Note that the selection blessing voices do not need to have the same ease of selection.

(Direction 19)

As a specific example of the effect 19, at timings 36 to 42 when the jackpot is in progress, for example, when notifying the transition to the time saving state after the jackpot game, a light effect using the optical display device 45a or the liquid crystal display device 36 may be used. A suggestive effect is performed by performing an image effect using the image.
To give an example, if there is a movable accessory that is to be moved at any of timings 36 to 42 to notify that a transition to a time-saving state will be made, the movable accessory that is mounted on the movable accessory in the suggestion production is An effect is performed in which the light display device 45a (such as an LED) lights up. At this time, a suggestion effect is performed depending on what color the light source as the optical display device 45a should be illuminated.

For example, there are five colors of light: blue, green, yellow, red, and rainbow. "Rainbow" is a light emitting mode in which a plurality of light emitting colors are sequentially changed at fixed time intervals such as 0.2 seconds.
FIG. 108A shows an example in which the selection probability of each color differs depending on the setting value Ve. As shown in the figure, the issuance pattern that emits rainbow colors is the least likely to be selected regardless of the set value Ve, but the higher the set value Ve is, the more likely it is to be selected. Furthermore, the lower the set value Ve, the more likely blue is to be selected. As can be understood from the figure, the expected value of blue is the lowest, and the expected value of the high setting value is increased in the order of green, yellow, red, and rainbow. That is, for the player, the effects are such that the player's desire to play increases in the order of blue, green, yellow, red, and rainbow.
A flowchart is shown for specific processing (FIG. 108B). Note that FIG. 108B is an example (S2130h) of each command process (S2130) in the command correspondence process (S2106). Further, in FIG. 108B, only the processing related to the suggestive effect is extracted and shown.
In step S3301, the production control unit 24 determines whether the transition mode after the jackpot game is a time saving state.
If the time saving state is not to be entered (S3301: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processing shown in FIG. 108B. On the other hand, when shifting to the time saving state (S3301: Y), the production control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in the following step S3302, and performs a lottery according to the set value Ve in step S3303. In this lottery, a lottery is performed based on the table shown in FIG. 108A.

Subsequently, in step S3304, the production control unit 24 registers a scenario for realizing production 19 as a suggestive production.

(Direction 20)

Productions 20 and 21 are suggestive productions that are executed at timings not shown in FIG. The performance 20 is a performance executed during the decorative symbol variation display game in the time saving state. Specifically, while in the time saving state (that is, until the transition to the normal state or until the transition to the jackpot game), a specific character is made to appear on the liquid crystal display device 36. be. The character image once made to appear does not disappear during the game in the time-saving state, and remains superimposed on the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as another image effect.
Further, the number of the characters on the liquid crystal display device 36 can be increased as the time saving mode is played, and eventually the number of the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 increases. The setting value Ve can be estimated according to the following.

A specific process flow will be described with reference to FIG. 109A. The series of processes shown in FIG. 109A are executed as appropriate, for example, at the timing when the decorative symbol variation display game in the time saving state is started, the timing when all the symbols are stopped, etc. as shown in FIG. 109A. Further, it may be executed every special symbol variation display game in the time saving state, or may be executed every five special symbol variation display games.

First, in step S3311, the performance control unit 24 determines whether the timing is appropriate to execute the performance 20 as a suggested performance. If the timing is not appropriate (S3311: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processing shown in FIG. 109A.
If the timing is appropriate (S3311: Y), the effect control unit 24 determines whether the execution flag is 0 in the subsequent step S3312.

If the execution flag is 1 (S3312: N), the performance control unit 24 ends the process. If the execution flag is 0 (S3312: Y), the production control unit 24 sets the execution flag to 1 in the subsequent step S3313. The execution flag is reset to 0, for example, every time a special symbol variation display game is started. That is, the execution flag is a flag for preventing the performance 20 from being executed multiple times in one variable display game.

In step S3314, the effect control unit 24 performs a lottery according to the set value Ve and the appearance counter CNT. The appearance counter CNT is the number of characters to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and as mentioned above, while the time saving state continues (that is, until the transition to another game state), the appearance counter CNT is maintained as it is or only increases, and decreases. It is considered that there is nothing to do. Although not shown, the appearance counter CNT is cleared to "0" when transitioning from the time saving state to another state.
FIG. 109B is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to in the lottery process according to the set value Ve and the appearance counter CNT.

As shown in the figure, when the appearance counter CNT is 0, the probability of winning in one lottery opportunity is set to be low, but this means that lottery opportunities will occur many times during the time saving state. I was thinking about it.
Furthermore, as can be understood from the figure, when the appearance counter CNT is 3, the probability of winning is 0%, so the number of characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is three at most. Furthermore, for setting values 1 to 3, there are two bodies at most. That is, when three character images are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, the player can recognize that the set value Ve is 4 or more.

Returning to the description of FIG. 109A.
After the lottery is held based on the table, the performance control unit 24 determines whether or not the lottery has been won in step S3315. If the winning result is determined (S3315: Y), a process of adding 1 to the appearance counter CNT is performed (S3316), and a command for outputting an image according to the appearance counter CNT is sent to the liquid crystal control unit 40. (S3317).
On the other hand, if the selection is unsuccessful (S3315: N), the process proceeds to step S3317 with the appearance counter CNT unchanged, and a command for outputting an image according to the appearance counter CNT is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40.
Note that the command sent to step S3317 is a command based on the image effect that appears in the decorative symbol variation display game at that time, and is a different command if the image effect is different.

(Direction 21)

As a specific example of the effect 21, an image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 is performed as a suggestive effect during a predetermined time after the store opens, in the evening, or at a specific time just before closing.
When the gaming machine 1 is provided with an RTC function section, the time zones such as opening, evening, and just before closing are ascertained based on the current time obtained by the RTC function. Note that if the opening time and closing time differ depending on the store or region, the gaming machine 1 may be configured so that the opening time and closing time can be set.

Further, if the gaming machine 1 is not provided with an RTC function section, it may be configured to indirectly determine each time period from the number of game balls discharged from the outlet 49.
Specifically, if a jackpot lottery is won between the occurrence of the first out ball and the occurrence of the 1000th out ball after the power is turned on, a specific performance appears as a suggested performance at the time of store opening. Furthermore, if a jackpot lottery is won between the occurrence of the 25,000th out ball and the occurrence of the 26,000th out ball, a specific performance appears as a suggestion performance in the evening. Further, if a jackpot lottery is won between the occurrence of the 40,000th out ball and the occurrence of the 41,000th out ball, a specific performance appears as a suggestive performance just before closing.
In this case, the player may be informed that it is a time period in which a specific performance can appear as a suggested performance.

In other words, a specific effect that appears by lottery at a certain probability at other times will appear as a suggestive effect whose ease of appearance changes depending on the set value Ve in each of the above sections. Become. Note that it may be a special presentation for a suggestive presentation that does not appear outside of each of the above-mentioned time periods.
A specific production that appears as a suggestion production at the time of store opening, a specific production that appears as a suggestion production in the evening, and a specific production that appears as a suggestion production just before closing may be different productions, or may be the same production. It may be considered a performance.
Further, the liquid crystal display device 36 may display only an image for a specific effect as a suggestive effect, or an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as another image effect (unrelated to the suggestive effect). An image (such as a small image such as an icon) to be presented as the suggestive effect may be displayed superimposed on the object).

A specific process flow will be explained with reference to FIG. 110. Note that FIG. 110 is an example of a flowchart for the case where the RTC function section is provided in the gaming machine 1.
First, in step S3321, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the timing is appropriate to execute the effect 21. In this process, for example, only whether or not it is a predetermined timing in the special variable display game is determined. Specifically, if the effect 21 is to be performed at the timing of the start of variation in the special variation display game, it is determined whether the current timing is such a timing.

If the timing is appropriate (S3321: Y), the performance control unit 24 determines whether the execution flag is 0 in step S3322.
If the timing is not appropriate (S3321: N) or the execution flag is 1 (S3322: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processing shown in FIG. 110.

If the timing is appropriate and the execution flag is 0, the effect control unit 24 performs processing to set the execution flag to 1 in step S3323, and performs processing to obtain the RTC value in subsequent step S3324.
Next, in step S3325, the performance control unit 24 determines from the acquired RTC whether the current time is in a specific time zone, that is, in a time zone corresponding to the opening time as described above.
If the current time is a specific time (S3325: Y), the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3326, and performs a lottery according to the set value Ve in step S3327. Specifically, for example, the higher the set value Ve is, the higher the winning probability is.

On the other hand, if the current time is not a specific time (S3325: N), the performance control unit 24 performs a performance lottery in which the player wins with a certain probability in step S3328. That is, the winner has a fixed probability regardless of the set value Ve.

After step S3327 or S3328, the production control unit 24 branches depending on whether or not the lottery of production 21 has been won in step S3329.
If the winning result has been won (S3329: Y), the effect control unit 24 sends a command to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3330 to display an image effect as the effect 21.
On the other hand, if the winning bidder has been unsuccessful (S3329: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 110 without transmitting the command.

As can be understood from the explanation, the effect 21 will appear as an image effect, not a suggestive effect, if the lottery result in step S3328 is won with a certain probability. Further, if the lottery result in accordance with the set value Ve is won in step S3327, it will appear as an image effect as a suggestive effect.

As described above, by executing the image presentation as the suggestive presentation just before the opening of the store, it is possible to encourage players to play immediately after the opening of the store, and it is possible to improve the operating time of the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, by executing the image presentation as a suggestive presentation just before the store closes, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing until the store closes, and it is possible to improve the operating time of the gaming machine 1. Moreover, as a result, it is also possible to promote gaming when the store opens the next day.

(Summary of each performance)

If the above-mentioned 21 types of suggestion effects are not to appear at the same time, this can be achieved by devising the execution flag used in each suggestion effect. That is, each execution flag is configured such that "0" indicates that it has not been executed, "1" indicates that it has been executed, and "2" indicates that it is currently being executed. Then, when determining whether or not to execute each production, it is determined whether the other suggestion production is being executed by checking whether the execution flag for the other suggestion production is "2" or not. Since it is possible to grasp the information, it is possible to prevent multiple suggestive effects from being executed simultaneously.
In addition, suggestion effects that may be executed simultaneously can be realized by omitting the process of checking the execution flag for the suggestion effects.

Note that, as a matter of course, the gaming machine 1 does not have to include all of the above-mentioned 21 types of suggestion effects.
Further, FIG. 84 is just an example, and various suggestive effects may be performed at timings where the circle mark in FIG. 84 is not written.

[9-4. Other production examples]

Each of the above-mentioned production examples will be explained. First, the operation flow of the gaming machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 111. The series of operation flows shown in FIG. 111 are described including the processing of the main control section 20, the processing of the production control section 24, and operations by hall staff, players, and the like. Furthermore, the processing shown in FIG. 111 is an excerpt of the processing that is important for understanding the movement of the gaming machine 1 from among the processing executed by the gaming machine 1. considered to be a part of it.

When a power-on operation is performed by the hall staff or the like (step S4001), the main control unit 20 of the gaming machine 1 detects the operation and sends a command to the production control unit 24, thereby displaying a standby screen on the liquid crystal control unit 40. A command to do so is transmitted, and a standby screen (an image containing characters such as Please wait...) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (step S4002).

Subsequently, in step S4003, the main control unit 20 performs branch processing depending on whether or not the setting value change condition is satisfied (step S104 described above).
When the setting value change condition is satisfied, a command is issued from the main control unit 20 to the liquid crystal control unit 40 via the effect control unit 24 to notify the liquid crystal display device 36 that the setting is being changed. A screen is displayed (step S4004).

The main control unit 20 confirms whether the setting key switch is OFF in step S4006 while accepting the setting change operation in step S4005. That is, by accepting setting change operations until the setting key switch is turned off, it is possible to change the hall staff, etc.
After confirming that the setting key switch is OFF, the main control unit 20 sends a command via the production control unit 24 in step S4007 to display a screen on the liquid crystal display device 36 to notify the end of the setting change. . Furthermore, the effect control unit 24 performs processing to turn on the setting change flag in step S4008.
The setting change flag is changed to "ON" when a setting change is made, and is a flag that is referenced to determine whether or not to perform a setting value change suggestion effect. The setting change flag is stored, for example, in the RAM 243 included in the production control unit 24.
Note that steps S701 to S717 described above are executed at the same timing as steps S4005 and S4006. Further, the process corresponding to step S4007 is the process of step S722 described above.

Subsequently, the main control unit 20 performs RAM clear processing in step S4009, and executes a RAM clear notification mode in step S4010. The RAM clear notification mode is a mode of the gaming machine 1 that is realized by the main control unit 20, the performance control unit 24, the liquid crystal control unit 40, etc. This will be realized.

After completing the setting change, the main control unit 20 realizes a RAM clear notification mode using the performance control unit 24 etc. in step S4009, and executes RAM clear processing in step S4010.
Steps S4009 and S4010 correspond to each process of steps S116 to S118 described above.

If it is determined in step S4003 that the setting change condition is not satisfied, the main control unit 20 determines in step S4011 whether the RAM is abnormal or the backup flag is abnormal. If any abnormality has occurred, the main control unit 20 uses the effect control unit 24 to implement an error notification mode (step S4012). The hall staff who recognized the error notification mode performs an operation to turn off the power of the gaming machine 1, for example (step S4013).

If the set value change condition is not satisfied, the RAM is not abnormal, and the backup flag is not abnormal, the main control unit 20 determines whether the RAM clear switch is ON in step S4014. If the RAM clear switch is ON, the process moves to step S4009.
On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is OFF, the main control unit 20 determines in step S4015 whether the set value confirmation condition is satisfied (step S108 described above).

If the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the main control unit 20 executes the setting confirmation mode in step S4016. The setting confirmation mode includes processing such as displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 36 to notify that the settings are being confirmed, and displaying the setting value Ve on the setting/performance display 97. , which corresponds to step S109 described above.
The main control unit 20 displays the setting value Ve on the setting/performance display 97 until the setting key switch is turned OFF by performing the process of determining whether the setting key switch is OFF in step S4017. continue.
If the setting key switch is turned off, the main control unit 20 sends a command to display the normal screen in step S4018.

After executing either step S4010 or S4018, the process moves to the process shown in FIG. 112.
The main control unit 20 determines whether the jackpot lottery probability state is high (step S4019). If it is not highly accurate, that is, if it is low (S4019: N), the effect control unit 24 sets the setting value change suggestion effect lottery flag to ON in step S4020. The setting value change suggestion performance lottery flag is a flag indicating whether or not to perform a lottery process to determine whether or not to perform a setting value change suggestion performance, and if it is ON, the lottery process will be executed in the process described later. be done. This flag is stored, for example, in the RAM 243 included in the production control unit 24.

When the jackpot lottery probability state is high (S4019: Y), the performance control unit 24 turns off the setting value change suggestion performance lottery flag (step S4021), and turns off the setting change flag (step S4022).
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the set value is changed, the jackpot lottery probability state starts from a low probability state. That is, if it is highly accurate at step S4019, it means that the setting value has not been changed, so the processes of steps S4021 and S4022 are performed to prevent the setting value change suggestion effect from appearing.
Note that this process is a precautionary process, and even if the process of turning off both flags is omitted, the setting value change suggestion effect will not be executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 20 determines whether or not to start a jackpot game in step S4023. If the power is turned off during a jackpot game, the backup restoration process returns to the state where the jackpot game is being played after the power is turned on. In such a case, the determination result in step S4023 is Y, and the process advances to step S4024.
In step S4024, the main control unit 20 and the performance control unit 24 perform processing for displaying the jackpot screen on the liquid crystal display device 36.
If the jackpot game is started after the power is turned on, the performance control unit 24 executes a process of turning off both the setting value change suggestion performance lottery flag and the setting change flag (steps S4025 and S4026), and the process of step S4027. Move to. Also, when it is determined in step S4023 that the jackpot game is not to be started, the process moves to step S4027.

In step S4027, the main control unit 20 and the performance control unit 24 wait until the special symbol variation display game is started. When the special symbol fluctuation display game is started, or when the special symbol fluctuation display game is started from the middle of the special symbol fluctuation display game due to power failure recovery, the process advances to step S4028, and it is determined whether or not the setting value change suggestion effect lottery flag is ON. The performance control unit 24 executes the process determined.

If the setting value change suggestion performance lottery flag is ON, the performance control unit 24 performs a lottery process in step S4029 to determine whether or not to execute the setting value change suggestion performance.
If the lottery process is won, a setting value change suggestion performance based on the winning performance mode will be displayed in the subsequent process.
Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 turns off the set value change suggestion effect lottery flag in step S4030, and turns off the set value change flag in step S4031.

When the main control unit 20 and the production control unit 24 issue commands, the decorative symbol variation display game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in step S4032.

(Set value change suggestion effect 1)

The suggestion effect regarding whether or not to change the set value, which is the effect mode shown in the above effect 04, is executed, for example, between step S4031 and step S4032. In addition, in the explanation of Effect 04, an example was explained in which the button vibrates when Effect 04 as a suggestive effect is executed, but does not vibrate when it is not executed, but other effects are also possible. .
For example, at the start of the first decorative symbol fluctuation display game after the power is turned on, the button is set to vibrate at least a little, and when executing setting value change suggestion performance 1 as a suggestion performance, the button vibration is set to occur for the first time after the power is turned on. It may be configured to increase the vibration (increase the number of vibrations or increase the vibration time). Specifically, it can be realized using a PM type stepping motor or the like. For example, when performing set value change suggestion performance 1 as a suggestion performance, the stepping motor is operated in four steps, and when the button is simply vibrated instead of the suggestion performance, the stepping motor is operated in two steps.
As a result, even when the set value change suggestion performance 1 is not executed, the button vibrates, giving the player a sense of elation.

In addition, in the case where the gaming machine 1 is provided with the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, if the first special symbol variation display game after the power is turned on is related to the special symbol 2, the setting value change suggestion performance 1 It is not necessary to carry out. That is, the setting value change suggestion performance 1 may be configured to be executed when the first special symbol variation display game for the special symbol 1 after power-on is started.

(Setting value change suggestion effect 2)

The setting value change suggestion effect 2 is made to appear at the timing when the background image (effect mode) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched. The background image (performance mode) is, for example, the type of scene displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and is the performance mode identified by the player. For example, a "town mode" in which a scene in which the character is walking through town is displayed on the LCD display 36, a "car mode" in which a scene in which the character is riding in a car is displayed, and a "car mode" in which the character is resting at the seaside. ``Vacation mode,'' which displays the scenes in which you are playing, will be displayed as appropriate. When performing an image presentation using the liquid crystal display device 36 in each presentation mode, an image presentation corresponding to each scene can appear. Furthermore, a performance that occurs only in a specific performance mode may be provided.

The timing at which the background image (production mode) is switched may be, for example, after a certain number of special symbol variation display games, or a production mode transition lottery is held with a predetermined probability for each special symbol variation display game, and a lottery for switching to the production mode is held with a predetermined probability for each special symbol variation display game. The background image (rendering mode) may be configured to change depending on the situation.
That is, the setting value change suggestion performance 2 may occur at a timing different from the start of the first decorative symbol variation display game after the power is turned on.
Such a case can be realized, for example, by changing part of the processing shown in FIGS. 111 and 112 as shown in FIG. 113.

After the setting value change suggestion performance lottery flag is turned ON (S4028: Y) and the setting value change suggestion performance lottery is executed in step S4029, the performance control unit 24 determines whether or not the lottery has been won in step S4041. Branch by.
If the winning result has been won, the performance control unit 24 stores the performance mode of the winning setting value change suggestion performance in step S4042 in the RAM 243 or the like. From the stored information, it is possible to specify the timing and content of the performance. Note that the information stored here is erased after being used, for example, to execute a setting value change suggestion effect.

Setting value change suggestion production 2 is executed at the timing when the background image (production mode) is switched for the first time after the power is turned on. At that time, a background image dedicated to the setting value change suggestion effect 2 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. The dedicated background image is, for example, a "pool mode" in which a scene of characters playing in a pool is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.
The dedicated presentation mode is maintained until the next time the background image is switched. That is, it is difficult for the player to overlook the suggesting effect that suggests that the set value Ve has been changed, and it is possible to increase the player's desire to play.

Note that if the lottery in step S4029 is unsuccessful, the dedicated background image will not be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 even if the set value Ve is changed.

(Setting value change suggestion effect 3)

The setting value change suggestion performance 3 is a suggestion performance that displays a specific image on the liquid crystal display device 36 under specific conditions until before the end of the first jackpot game after the power is turned on. Further, in this example, the setting value change suggestion performance 3 also serves as a setting value suggestion performance.

Specifically, this will be explained with reference to FIG. 114.
FIG. 114A is a diagram schematically showing a specific image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 after the end of the jackpot game, for example, as a result screen for notifying the result of the jackpot game.
In the specific image, one character image is displayed in the left half area of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, and another character image is displayed in the right half area. Although not shown, it is assumed that result information such as the number of balls put out is displayed in this image.
In the following description, the character image displayed in the left half area will be referred to as a "left character," and the character image displayed in the right half area will be referred to as a "right character."

If the left character and right character appear at the same time, they are treated as different characters, and there are also patterns in which only one of the left and right characters appears, and patterns in which no character appears on either the left or right.
In this example, the suggestion effect differs depending on the combination of characters appearing on the left and right characters and the timing of their appearance.

FIG. 114B is a diagram showing an example of a combination of left and right characters and suggested contents. As shown in the figure, there are 14 types of character image appearance patterns (pattern Nos. 1 to 14). "ANY" in the figure means that it applies no matter which character appears, and if no character appears, it is not included. That is, the effect pattern whose pattern number is 1 corresponds to the case where no left character exists and some character image is displayed as the right character.

The specific image effect set as pattern No. 1 or 2 has a suggestion content of "none," and is a normal image effect that is not a suggestion effect. Further, the background color in this case is "blue".
That is, when only either the left character or the right character appears in a specific image performance after a jackpot game, the player can understand that this is a normal image performance and not a suggestive performance.
In addition, since the background color is set to "blue" only in the specific image effects of pattern Nos. 1 and 2, normal images that are recognized as having the background color as "blue" and are not suggestive effects. You can tell that it's a performance.

The specific image effects designated as patterns Nos. 3, 4, and 5 are combinations of main character A or main character B and pets C, D, and E. In addition, in any of the image performances, the suggestion content is "○○ suggestion." This is different from the content of the suggestion, which will be described later as "○○ confirmed," and indicates that although it is not certain that it is ○○, it is highly probable.
Specifically, the specific image effect designated as pattern No. 3 is said to be "4, 5, 6 suggestion", and is likely to be selected when the setting value Ve is 4 to 6, and is not selected when the setting value Ve is 1 to 3. This is a difficult (however, appearance rate is not 0%) production pattern.
The background color of each of the specific image effects designated as patterns Nos. 3, 4, and 5 is "green." That is, by the appearance of a specific image effect with a background color of "green", the player can obtain information to assist in estimating the set value Ve.

For the specific image effects of pattern Nos. 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10, the suggested content is "○○ confirmed." That is, it is an image effect that appears as a suggestion effect (determined suggestion effect) in which the set value Ve is determined to be one value or within a certain range. The background color is "gold" or "rainbow", and the player can understand that this is a final suggestion effect regarding the set value Ve just by looking at the background color.
In addition, the specific image effect shown in pattern No. 6 whose background color is "Rainbow" is a suggestive effect whose maximum setting value is 6, so it is possible to significantly improve the player's desire to play. Become.

In the specific image effects designated as patterns Nos. 11 and 12, the suggested content is "○○" negative. In other words, it is an image effect (negative suggestion effect) that suggests that the set value Ve is not a certain value. The background color of each image effect is "black," and it is possible to recognize that this is some kind of negative suggestion effect just by checking the background color.

Note that the specific image effects designated as patterns Nos. 13 and 14 are combinations that do not appear on the game result display screen that is displayed after the end of the jackpot game. The details will be described later.

As mentioned above, even if the player does not know the original work such as the work that is the theme of the gaming machine 1, that is, even if the player does not recognize the characters such as the main character A and the main character B, The system is configured such that it is possible to grasp what kind of suggestive effect is being performed simply by looking at the background color of a specific image effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from not being able to enjoy the image presentation and losing his or her desire to play the game due to not knowing the original work.

Further, the specific image effect using the table shown in FIG. 114B is configured so that it can be enjoyed even by players who are familiar with the original work. For example, if "Pet C" appears on the left or right character, it is suggested that the setting value Ve is likely to be between 4 and 6. In other words, when the effect with pattern No. 3 appears, the image effect informs that the setting value is likely to be 4 to 6, and when the effect with pattern No. 8 appears, the setting value is 4. It is announced that 6 to 6 is confirmed.
Furthermore, when "Pet D" appears, it is suggested that the setting value Ve is likely to be an odd number.
Furthermore, if "Pet D" appears on the left or right character, it is suggested that the setting value Ve is likely to be an even number.

In this way, even players who are familiar with the original work can roughly grasp the suggested contents according to the character images that appear. Therefore, even for players who do not know all the details of the table shown in FIG. 114B, it is possible to provide an image effect that increases the interest in the game.

A specific image effect that appears as a setting value suggestion effect appears after the end of the jackpot game (or after all round games), but some players may miss the suggestion effect. be. It is thought that this is easy to miss, especially when the acquired balls are being transferred to the box.

Therefore, the gaming machine 1 is configured to display the combination of character images that appeared in the previous specific image performance on the demo screen from the end of the jackpot game until the start of the next jackpot game.
The gaming machine 1 has a ball ranking screen displayed in the demo screen, and a character image is displayed on the ball ranking screen. Until the first jackpot of the day, the ranking of the previous day is displayed, and after the first jackpot, the ranking of the balls of the day is displayed.
After the first jackpot, the character image and background color that appeared in the previous specific image production (namely, the result screen of the jackpot game) are reproduced on the ball ranking screen. However, the postures (poses) of the character images may be different. That is, each time a jackpot game ends, the character image displayed on the ball ranking screen can be changed (pattern Nos. 1 to 12).

Here, an image will be described when the ball ranking screen is displayed before the first jackpot game.
In this example, character images of combinations with pattern numbers 13 and 14 are displayed on the ball ranking screen until the first jackpot game is started.
Patterns Nos. 13 and 14 are patterns in which the main character A and the main character B appear as character images, and only the appearance positions are different. Patterns Nos. 13 and 14 both appear only before the first jackpot game after the power is turned on, and basically do not appear after the first jackpot game unless the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off during the game. It is something.
When the image designated as pattern No. 13 is displayed on the ball ranking screen, the suggested content is "none". That is, even if the effect appears, the player cannot obtain any information regarding the set value Ve.
On the other hand, when the image designated as pattern No. 14 is displayed on the ball ranking screen, the suggestion content is "setting change confirmed." That is, when the effect appears, it is possible to understand that the setting value Ve has been changed, so it is considered as a setting value change suggestion effect. That is, the ball ranking screen performance in this case is set value change suggestion performance 3.
Note that the background color in both images is "white". This has a background color that is different from any of the specific images mentioned above, and the appearance of the ball ranking screen with the background color "white" gives the player a hint about changing the setting value. It is possible to understand the

As mentioned above, the demo screen is an image that is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 when a game ball does not enter the grand prize opening 50 etc. for a certain period of time, so it can be generated intentionally by the player. . Therefore, even a player who missed a specific image effect that appeared after the end of the jackpot game can confirm what kind of suggestive effect was performed. Then, before the first jackpot game, you can manually make the setting value change suggestion effect 3 that shows whether or not the setting value has been changed, and you can check it at any time you like. It is.

(Set value suggestion effect 1)

This production example is an example in which the appearance probability of the suggestive production differs depending on time, conditions, etc., like the aforementioned production 03 and production 21. Furthermore, in the presentation 21, an example using the RTC function was explained according to the flowchart, but here, an example using the total number of out pitches will be explained.
In addition, in this example, the number of jackpot games (a jackpot game of a predetermined number of rounds is counted as one game, hereinafter referred to as the number of jackpots) is also taken into consideration.

In this example, each time the decorative symbol variation display game is started, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to execute a suggestive effect, and if the game is won, a specific character is selected to be superimposed on other image effects displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. A suggestive effect is performed to display an image (which may be a person or something like a medal). Of course, the character images that are likely to appear (or the character images that appear) are set to differ depending on the setting value Ve.
In this example, a character image imitating a medal (hereinafter referred to as "medal character") appears.

Specifically, this will be explained with reference to FIG. 115.
FIG. 115A is a table showing the appearance probability of setting value suggestion performance 1 under the conditions that the number of jackpots is less than 20 and the total number of out pitches is 1000 or less. The medal characters that appear in the suggestion presentation as the setting value suggestion presentation 1 are available in a plurality of colors, for example, five types: copper, silver, gold, danger pattern, and rainbow.
As shown in the figure, when the setting value is 1, no medal character appears. In other words, if a medal character appears, it is determined that the set value Ve is 2 or more regardless of its color.
Similarly, with the setting value 2, there is a possibility that silver, gold, danger pattern, and rainbow medal characters will not appear, and only the bronze medal character will appear.
Also, with setting value 3, gold, danger pattern, and rainbow medal characters do not appear, with setting value 4, danger pattern and rainbow medal characters do not appear, and with setting value 5, rainbow medal characters do not appear. has been done. A combination whose appearance probability is 0% (for example, setting value 1, bronze medal character) is also set to have a 0% appearance probability at each subsequent table.

In FIG. 115A, since the total number of outs is 1 to 1000 and the number of jackpots is less than 20, this corresponds to the situation immediately after the hole opens. In such a state, the probability that a bronze medal character will appear is increased compared to during subsequent games. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's desire to play immediately after the hall opens.
When the number of jackpots is less than 20 and the total number of out balls exceeds 1000 and reaches 6000, the probability of appearance of a bronze medal character is reduced as shown in FIG. 115B. .
Furthermore, when the number of jackpots is less than 20 and the total number of out balls is between 6,001 and 12,000, the probability of appearance of silver, gold, danger pattern, and rainbow medal characters increases (FIG. 115C).
Then, when the number of jackpots is less than 20 and the total number of out balls is between 12,001 and 24,000, the probability of appearance of a bronze medal character increases compared to before (FIG. 116A).
Further, when the number of jackpots is less than 20 and the total number of out balls is 24001 or more, the probability of appearance of medal characters of each color increases (FIG. 116B).

In this way, except for FIG. 115A, which appears to be immediately after the opening of the hall, the configuration is such that the appearance probability of each medal character increases as the total number of out balls increases. In other words, as the game time elapses, suggestions for estimating the set value Ve are made more likely to appear, making it possible to maintain the player's desire to play.

Under conditions where the number of jackpots is 20 to 30, each appearance probability is set high. The fact that the jackpot game has been executed so many times means that the decorative symbol variation display game has been executed a certain number of times. Furthermore, there is a high possibility that the player has won a certain amount of balls. In such a situation, it is desirable to increase the appearance probability of a medal character and make the player aware of the appearance of the medal character, thereby maintaining the player's desire to continue playing the game.

If the number of jackpot hits is 31 or more, the number of balls won increases, and it is considered that the player is playing the game in a good mood. In such a case, the player's desire to play can be further improved by increasing the probability of appearance of medal characters.
It should be noted that if the number of winning balls increases, the player may become tempted to stop while the ball is hitting. Even in such a case, by increasing the appearance probability of medal characters as shown in the table of FIG. 117B, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game.

Further, in this example, although the probability of appearance of each effect differs depending on the conditions, the content suggested when the effect appears is the same. Specifically, according to FIG. 115A, when a medal character with a danger pattern appears, it is determined that the setting value is 5 or 6. The relationship between the "danger pattern medal character" and the "information that the set value is 5 or 6 confirmed (i.e., suggestion content)" is different under other conditions (i.e., FIGS. 115B, 115C, 116A, 116B, 117A, 117B). ) does not change. Therefore, the player does not know what condition the gaming machine 1 is currently under, and instead interprets ``the appearance of a medal character with a danger pattern'' as ``the set value Ve is confirmed to be 5 or 6.'' '', it is considered to be a suggestive effect that is easy for players to understand.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 118A and 118B, the appearance probability is changed so that the suggested contents are further narrowed down (that is, the options for the set value Ve estimated by the player are narrowed down). May be changed.
Specifically, in the gaming machine 1 under condition A, the "appearance of a medal character with a danger pattern" suggests that "the set value Ve is confirmed to be 5 or 6" as shown in FIG. 118A. It is said to be a performance. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 under condition B, as shown in FIG. 118B, there are cases where the appearance probability of medal characters increases and cases where it decreases to 0%. has been changed to an effect suggesting that "it is confirmed that the set value Ve is 6." That is, under condition B, when the set value Ve is 5, the appearance probability of the effect decreases to 0%, while when the set value Ve is 6, the appearance probability increases.
That is, by changing from condition A to condition B, the accuracy of the information of the notification content that is perceived by the player when the suggestive effect appears increases.

Furthermore, in a case where the accuracy of the information transmitted to the player is higher under condition B than under condition A, it is desirable that condition B is a condition that is less likely to appear (harder to achieve).
For example, if condition B is set as a normal state and condition A is set as a condition that rarely appears, the player will be able to see that a medal character with a danger pattern will appear under condition B, which is set as a normal state. After the setting value Ve is 6 is received as suggestion content, condition A, which is a specific condition, is satisfied, and there is a high possibility that information of suggestion content with reduced accuracy will be additionally received. This is undesirable because the suggestion content received under condition A becomes meaningless information for the player.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 118A and 118B, condition A is set to be during normal gaming, and condition B is set to be a specific condition that is rarely satisfied, so that the player can When the suggestion effect occurs below, we receive the information that ``the set value Ve is 5 or 6'', and then the suggestion effect that appears under specific conditions that occurs after that causes us to receive the information that ``the possibility that the set value Ve is 5 disappears''. There is a higher possibility of receiving upgraded information such as "Confirmed to be 6." Therefore, even if the player visually recognizes a similar production (i.e., a production in which a medal character with a danger pattern appears), it is possible to give meaning to both suggestion productions, and to reduce meaningless suggestion production. At the same time, it is possible to improve the player's desire to play.

Note that, for example, condition B as the specific condition may be established in the case where "the jackpot lottery is not won over 500 decorative symbol variation display games (=so-called 500-time hit)". In other words, if a player continues to lose a jackpot lottery for a long time, he or she may consider quitting the game, but in such a case, the player will not be upgraded until he or she has been unsuccessful more than 500 times and wins the next jackpot lottery. By making it easier to obtain information, it is possible to maintain the player's desire to play until the next jackpot game.

This effect is achieved not only by the configuration in which setting value suggestion performance 1 can be executed as a suggestion performance for each decorative symbol variation display game as in this example, but also by performing the setting value suggestion performance by a specific image performance that is displayed after the end of the jackpot. It can also be obtained by configuration.
In other words, after playing a jackpot game in which a player wins after being addicted to the game 500 times, the player's desire to play is stimulated by performing a setting value suggestion effect that allows the player to obtain (or easily obtain) the above-mentioned upgraded information. This can be maintained until the next jackpot game.

<10. Suggestive performance regarding jackpot>

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a suggestion performance regarding a jackpot (the above-mentioned preview performance) can be performed as appropriate. The suggestion performance regarding a jackpot is a performance that allows a player playing the gaming machine 1 to guess whether or not he or she has won a jackpot lottery performed on the gaming machine 1.

[10-1. Type of performance]

The types of the jackpot-related suggestion performances (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot suggestion performances") that can be executed in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be explained (FIG. 120).
First, as shown in FIG. 120, there are two types of jackpot suggestion effects: one based on "read ahead/applicable" and the other based on "presentation means."
The distinction between "pre-reading/applicable" indicates whether the jackpot suggestion performance is a "pre-reading preview performance" or a "pre-reading preview performance in the relevant variation." The variation indicates a decorative symbol variation display game currently being executed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36.

It should be noted that each jackpot suggestion presentation is performed using any one of presentation means such as "sound", "light", "liquid crystal", "movable body", and "button", similar to the suggestion presentation regarding the setting value described above. It may be executed using one presentation means, or may be executed using a plurality of presentation means.
The performance using "sound" as a performance means is a sound performance using a sound generating device 46a including a speaker 46. The presentation means using "light" as a presentation means is a light presentation using a light display device 45a including a decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs. The effect using "liquid crystal" as the effect means is an image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 or the like. A performance that uses a "movable body" as a performance means is considered to be a visual performance that uses a movable accessory or the like. The performance using the "button" as a performance means is an experiential performance using the performance button 13, a wind pressure device, etc.

[10-2. Performance timing]

The timing at which the jackpot suggestion performance is performed will be explained. As shown in FIG. 121, the timing at which the jackpot suggestion performance is performed is only during "change". Note that the jackpot suggestion performance is not performed during "waiting for customers" and "hitting the jackpot."

The jackpot suggestion performance performed during the “fluctuating” period is further divided into timings 10 to 25. Each timing has already been explained, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

[10-3. Example of production]

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing the relationship between the types of jackpot suggesting effects (effects 50 to 67) and the timing of execution. Each jackpot suggestion performance will be explained.

(Direction 50)

The performance 50 is a jackpot suggestion performance as a pre-read preview performance performed using a "liquid crystal" and a "button", and is, for example, a "pending change notice performance". The pending change notice performance is executed, for example, at the timing when a special symbol variation display game is started or at the timing when all decorative symbols are stopped.
Specifically, the operation hold balls (hold icons) displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 provided within the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 are changed from the normal color (for example, silver) to a different color (blue, red, yellow, etc.). ) or a special pending display mode (rainbow pattern, danger pattern, etc.), this is an effect that suggests the jackpot lottery result in a specific variable display game from the next time onwards. That is, in the variable display game targeted for the pending change notice effect, it is possible to suggest to the player that the jackpot lottery result is highly likely to be a win.

The specific flow of this performance will be explained.
First, the performance control unit 24 performs a lottery to determine whether or not the pending change notice performance can be executed. Setting value information is used in this lottery. That is, the appearance probability of the effect changes depending on the set value Ve.
If the player wins the lottery, the effect control unit 24 causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display an image for prompting the user to press the effect button 13 at a predetermined timing. At this time, an image effect such as a trembling pending icon may be performed at the same time. This allows the player to understand that the pending change notice effect may be executed.
Next, when the player presses the production button 13, an image production that changes the pending icon displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 from the normal color to a specific color, or if it is already a specific color, an An image effect that changes the display mode to a highly anticipated one, or an image effect that causes the pending icon to remain unchanged without causing any change is executed.

Whether or not the pending icon should change is determined, for example, by a lottery performed by the performance control unit 24 when drawing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the pending change notice performance. The lottery for execution of the pending change notice performance may be performed at the same time as the jackpot lottery regarding the corresponding operation pending ball, or may be conducted every time the special symbol variation display game is started.

On the other hand, if the player does not press the effect button 13, an image effect in which the pending icon changes at a predetermined timing is executed.

There are other concrete production examples that can be considered. For example, the colors and display modes of the pending icon are rainbow, red, orange, yellow, blue, and silver (normal color) in descending order of expectation.
When the hold change notice effect is executed, first, on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, an effect in which the hold icon changes from silver to blue is executed. Further, an image prompting the user to press the effect button 13 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36.
When the player presses the effect button 13, an image effect is performed showing a lottery to determine whether or not the pending icon will change to a color with higher expectations. This lottery may actually be performed at this timing, or an image effect may be performed based on a predetermined lottery result.

If the lottery is won, an image effect is performed in which the blue pending icon changes to yellow, and an image effect that prompts the player to press the effect button 13 is also performed. By repeating this process, it is possible to finally produce a change to a rainbow image icon.
Furthermore, if the lottery is unsuccessful, the pending icon will no longer change to a highly anticipated color/display mode, and the pending change preview performance will end.

Such a performance may be performed, for example, while changing the display position of the activated pending ball, which is the target of the pending change notice performance, as the special symbol variation display game ends. For example, after the color of the pending icon of the activated pending ball in the pending display section b1 in FIG. After the blue hold icon moves to a1, the hold change notice performance is performed again (or the previous hold change notice performance is continued), and the color of the hold icon of the operation hold ball in the hold display section a1 changes from blue. May change to yellow.

Note that the pending change notice performance may be executed using only the liquid crystal display device 36 without using the performance button 13 or the like.

(Direction 51)

The performance 51 is a jackpot suggestion performance as a look-ahead preview performance performed using "light", "liquid crystal", and "movable body", and is, for example, a "special zone entry preview performance".
The special zone entry preview performance is a performance that gives players a sense of anticipation by suggesting that there is a possibility of entering a special zone performance that will be executed over one or more special symbol change display games. It is.
The special zone entry preview performance is executed, for example, at the timing when a special symbol variation display game is started or at the timing when all decorative symbols are stopped.

In the special zone, for example, the background image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is different from the usual one, and there is a possibility of winning the jackpot lottery in the last special symbol variation display game of the zone. This is a period to suggest to the player that the number is high over the previous several special symbol variation display games (that is, while entering the special zone) while giving the player a sense of anticipation.
If the special zone is limited to only one special symbol fluctuation display game, for example, after an image effect with a different background color than usual is performed in the fluctuation display game, a message indicating that you have won the jackpot lottery will be displayed. A notification is given to the player. In addition, in one special symbol variation display game, a pseudo-continuous performance accompanied by a pseudo continuous variation display state of decorative symbols may be performed.

A plurality of types of performance patterns may be provided for the special zone entry preview performance. For example, it may be possible to execute a definite effect that always suggests entering a special zone, or it may be possible to perform a certain effect that can be selected both when entering a special zone and when not entering a special zone. good.
Further, a performance with a high possibility of entering the special zone or a performance with a low possibility of entering the special zone may be provided.
By making it possible to perform various special zone entry preview performances in this way, it is possible to provide performances that are highly entertaining to the game.

The specific flow of the performance will be explained. Here, an example will be described in which a special zone-related effect is performed over three special symbol variation display games.
First, based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, the performance control unit 24 performs a lottery process to determine whether or not the performance can be executed. In this lottery process, setting differences are set in appearance probabilities by referring to setting value information.
If you win the lottery to decide whether or not to execute the production, the variable display operation of the decorative symbols will start in the special symbol variation display game (first game: special zone entry preview production), and the light production means provided in each part of the gaming machine will be used. At the same time, an image effect is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in the form of a lottery to determine whether or not to enter a special zone.
In addition, as in this example, when entering a special zone, the movable accessory performs a highly entertaining performance for the player, and the light display means mounted on the movable accessory performs a light emitting performance. Further, an image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to suggest that the special zone has been successfully entered.
On the other hand, if the vehicle does not enter the special zone, an image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 indicating that the vehicle has failed to enter the special zone. At the same time, a light emission effect using a light effect means or an effect using a movable accessory may be produced.

After indicating that the special symbol has been successfully entered into the special zone or indicating that it has failed, the first round of the special symbol variation display game is completed, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it has been lost in the jackpot lottery. Ru. That is, the special symbol is stopped when the number is missed. At this time, on the liquid crystal display device 36, the decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed as a missed number.
In this way, the effect executed in the special symbol variation display game as the first game described above is the "special zone entry preview effect." In addition, when a performance is executed in which the player fails to enter the special zone, one special symbol variation display game is completed and a series of performances related to the special zone are terminated.

In the next variable display game (second game: entering the special zone), when the variable display operation of the decorative symbols starts, the LCD display device 36 creates a feeling of anticipation as to whether or not you have won the jackpot lottery. An image production (for example, a production to excite whether or not a battle will be won or a production to excite whether or not a specific mission can be accomplished) is executed. Then, an image including characters such as "NEXT" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed with a missed roll. While this variable display game (second game) and the next variable display game (third game) are being executed, a display is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 indicating that the special zone is being entered.

Furthermore, in the next variable display game (third game: jackpot suggestion game), after an image presentation is executed to enliven the presentation, a jackpot lottery suggestion is finally made by the stopping mode of the decorative symbols. For example, an image production that suggests that you have won a jackpot lottery by having the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol all stop and display decorative symbols representing “3,” or the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol both displaying the number “3”. By presenting a stopping mode in which the middle symbol is a decorative symbol representing "2", an image effect suggesting that the jackpot lottery has been lost is executed.

In addition, when executing a special zone-related effect over three special symbol variation display games, the execution of three special symbol variation display games including the variation must be confirmed at the start of the production. It is desirable that there be. That is, when executing the special zone effect based on the start of the special symbol variation display game regarding the next action-reserved ball, the performance is performed on the condition that the number of action-retained balls is 3 or more (3 or 4). Ru. In other words, when execution of a series of effects related to the special zone is started, it is sufficient that the game is the first game and the number of pending balls is 2 or more.
This is to pre-read the information related to the winning or losing of the jackpot lottery and to take into account that if the pre-read lottery result is a win, the special zone entry effect is likely to be executed. It is clear to the player that even if a series of performances starting from the special zone entry warning performance as described above are executed for the special symbol fluctuation display game where it is impossible to predict in advance that there is no winning, the expected value of winning is low. This is because it is not possible to create a performance that increases the interest of the game.

Note that the above example is just an example, and the series of effects may be realized by a pseudo continuous effect accompanied by a pseudo continuous variation display state of decorative symbols.

(Direction 52)

The performance 52 is a jackpot suggestion performance as a look-ahead preview performance performed using a "liquid crystal," and is, for example, a "countdown preview performance." The countdown preview performance is a preview performance that is executed over a plurality of special symbol change display games. Further, it may be executed in conjunction with a plurality of pseudo continuous variable displays that are executed during one special symbol variable display game. In this case, the countdown preview performance is completed in one special symbol variation display game.

When winning the lottery for execution of countdown preview performance, an image performance is performed in which a predetermined numerical value (for example, "2", etc.) is displayed as a count value on the liquid crystal display device 36 in a certain specific symbol variation display game. The count value is subtracted and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 each time the special symbol variation display game is executed, and at the timing when the count value reaches "0", an image production etc. that suggests a jackpot lottery result is executed. Ru.
In the specific symbol fluctuation display game where the count value is displayed as "0", in addition to the image production that suggests the jackpot lottery result, there are other productions such as the production that develops into the 1st type super reach and the 2nd type super reach. It may be configured so that it is performed.

Also, the countdown preview effect does not have to continue until the count value reaches "0"; for example, after the count value reaches "1", an image effect indicating that the countdown preview effect will not be continued is displayed on the LCD. It may be executed on the device 36 to end the countdown preview presentation.
By making such a performance possible, when a countdown preview performance occurs, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being focused only on the special symbol fluctuation display game where the count value becomes "0", Even in an intermediate state where the count value is "1" or "2", the player can play the game with the expectation that the performance will continue, and the player can improve his/her interest in the game.

The specific flow of the performance will be explained.
Upon receiving the pending addition command, the performance control unit 24 performs a lottery to determine whether or not the countdown preview performance can be executed. In this lottery, setting value information is not referred to. That is, the player wins the lottery with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.
After winning the lottery for whether or not to execute the countdown notice performance, the performance control unit 24 determines the initial value of the count value in consideration of the number of pending balls. For example, the number of pending balls including the newly increased number of pending balls is set to "3", and the initial value of the count value is determined to be "2".

With the start of the next special symbol variation display game, the number of pending balls becomes "2", and the character image and the countdown value of "2" are announced on the LCD display 36, and a countdown preview effect is displayed. An image effect is executed to notify the player that the execution has started.

Furthermore, with the start of the next special symbol variation display game, the number of pending balls becomes "1", the liquid crystal display device 36 notifies that the count value is "1", and the countdown preview effect continues. An image display showing what is being done is executed.

Then, with the start of the next special symbol variable display game, the number of pending balls becomes "0", the liquid crystal display device 36 notifies that the count value is "0", and a countdown preview effect is displayed. At the end of the lottery, the results of the jackpot lottery are announced on the liquid crystal display device 36. Specifically, along with the stop display of the special symbol variation display game, an image production in which the decorative symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in a stop mode indicating that the jackpot lottery has been won (or in a stop mode indicating that the lottery has been rejected). is executed.

In addition, as a variation of the performance, a plurality of types of initial values of the count value may be prepared. Further, each initial value of the count value may have a different winning expectation level.

(Direction 53)

The performance 53 is a jackpot suggestion performance as a look-ahead preview performance performed using a "liquid crystal" and a "button", and is, for example, a "chance preview performance".
The chance eye preview performance can be executed at the timing when the special symbol variation display game is started, at the time of low-speed variation, at the time of high-speed variation, or at the timing when all symbols are stopped.

Note that "during low-speed fluctuation" refers to the timing when a symbol fluctuation display game with a relatively long fluctuation time, such as the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation 12 seconds" or "normal fluctuation 8 seconds", is being executed, and the number of fluctuations per unit time is Refers to a state where the speed of game digestion is low. Such a change is likely to be carried out, for example, when the number of active pending balls is small.
In addition, "during high-speed fluctuation" refers to the timing when a symbol fluctuation display game with a relatively short fluctuation time, such as the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation 4s" or "normal fluctuation 6s", is being executed, and per unit time. Refers to a state where the speed of game digestion is high. Such a change is likely to be carried out, for example, when the number of active pending balls is large.

An example of a specific production flow will be explained.
With the start of the special symbol variation display game, the performance control section 24 executes a lottery for whether or not to execute the chance eye preview performance. If this lottery is won, the performance control unit 24 displays a chance preview performance.
Specifically, a decorative symbol variation display game in which decorative symbols vary on the liquid crystal display device 36 is started. On the liquid crystal display device 36, the left symbol (during fluctuating display), the middle symbol (during fluctuating display), and the right symbol (during fluctuating display) are displayed, as well as images such as letters and pictures urging the user to press the production button 13. displayed inside.

When the player presses the performance button 13, for example, the left symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. Furthermore, the images displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (left symbol (while being stopped), middle symbol (while being displayed fluctuating), right symbol (while being fluctuatingly displayed)) further include characters etc. that prompt the user to press the production button 13. included.

When the player further presses the performance button 13 in response to the suggestion by the image performance, the right symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.
Furthermore, on the liquid crystal display device 36, there is an image production including a left symbol (while being stopped and displayed), a middle symbol (while being displayed fluctuating), a right symbol (while being stopped and displayed), and characters that prompt the user to press the production button 13. executed.

When the player presses the performance button 13 for the third time based on the image performance, an image performance is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to stop displaying the middle symbol.
On the liquid crystal display device 36, the high or low probability of winning the jackpot lottery is suggested to the player by the color of each decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed.

For example, the left pattern is a decorative pattern that imitates the blue letter "2," the middle pattern is a decorative pattern that imitates the blue letter "8," and the right pattern is a decorative pattern that imitates the blue letter "6." In this case, the three decorative symbols that were stopped and displayed are all decorative symbols that imitate blue letters, so the level of expectation regarding the activated pending ball that will be used in the symbol variation display game after this is higher than usual. This is suggested to the player.

In addition, the left pattern is a decorative pattern imitating the red letter "5," the middle pattern is a decorative pattern imitating the red letter "1," and the right pattern is a decorative pattern imitating the red letter "7." In this case, the three decorative symbols that were stopped and displayed are all decorative symbols that imitate red letters, so the level of expectation regarding the operation pending ball that will be used in the symbol variation display game after this is higher than usual. This is suggested to the player. Note that, for example, a decorative pattern with red letters is considered to have higher expectations than a decorative pattern with blue letters.

Note that the order in which the decorative patterns stop may indicate the level of expectation. For example, in the above example, the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol are stopped and displayed in this order. A mode in which the right symbol, middle symbol, and left symbol are stopped and displayed in this order may be configured to have a higher expectation level than this stopping mode.

The chance preview performance is configured to appear with a constant probability regardless of the setting value.

(Direction 54)

The performance 54 is a jackpot suggestion performance in the fluctuation that is performed using "light", and is, for example, a "winning lamp preview performance".
The winning lamp preview performance is executed at the timing when the number of pending balls increases due to winning a prize.

The specific flow of the performance will be explained.
During execution of a special symbol variation display game for a certain winning ball, if the number of pending balls increases due to a new winning, the performance control section 24 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the winning lamp notice performance. In this lottery, the set value Ve is referred to. That is, the appearance probability of the effect differs depending on the set value Ve.

By winning the lottery, a winning lamp preview performance is executed. In this lottery process, information as to whether or not the special symbol variation display game currently being executed is a jackpot is referred to. That is, if the special symbol variation display game currently being executed is a jackpot, the winning lamp preview effect is likely to be executed.

When it is decided to execute the winning lamp preview effect, a light effect that lights up a specific light display device 45a is executed as the winning lamp preview effect.

In addition, when performing an effect in which the optical display device 45a lights up at the timing when the number of active pending balls increases due to winning, as described above, the winning lamp notice indicating the level of expectation for the special symbol fluctuation display game that is currently changing. In addition to performing the performance, it may also be possible to execute a pre-read preview performance that suggests that expectations regarding the increased number of pending pitches are high.

Further, those effects may be made to appear in a similar effect mode. In this case, the player who recognizes the light effect recognizes that there is a high expectation of winning in the special symbol fluctuation display game that is currently fluctuating, and even if the special symbol fluctuation display game that is currently fluctuating is not a jackpot. Even if it is a miss, it is possible to have a sense of expectation regarding the held ball that triggered the execution of the performance. That is, it is possible to obtain a feeling of anticipation twice with one performance, and to increase the interest in the game.

(Direction 55)

The performance 55 is a jackpot suggestion performance in the variation performed using "sound", "light", and "liquid crystal", and is, for example, "the pending change notice performance".
The pending change notice performance is performed at the start of the fluctuation, at the time of low-speed fluctuation, at the time of high-speed fluctuation, when the first symbol stops when one of the decorative symbols stops, at the second pseudo-sequence, the third pseudo-sequence, and the fourth pseudo-sequence. It is said that it can be executed in time.

If you win the execution lottery of the pending change notice performance, the color, design, shape, etc. of the icon of the pending game K currently being used for the game displayed on the icon of the receiving seat J shown in FIG. By changing, a performance is performed that suggests to the player that the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery in the change is higher than usual.

Here, the flow of the performance will be explained using an example in which the pending change notice performance is executed in conjunction with the pseudo-continuation performance. Note that the colors and display modes of the pending icon are rainbow, red, orange, yellow, blue, and silver (normal color) in descending order of expectation.
First, when the special symbol variation display game is started, the performance control section 24 performs a lottery to determine whether or not the performance can be executed. In this lottery, since the set value information is referred to, the probability of appearance of the pending change notice performance is in accordance with the value of the set value Ve.
When winning the performance execution possibility lottery, a decorative symbol variation display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and an image performance is performed in which the pending icon changes from silver (normal color) to blue. At the same time, an effect that causes a specific light display device 45a to shine in blue, which is the same color as the hold icon, is performed, and a sound effect that causes the sound generator 46a to output a sound effect that suggests that the hold icon has changed to one with a high expected value. is executed.

Next, an image effect in which the pending icon changes from blue to yellow when the decorative pattern fluctuatingly displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 temporarily stops and then changes again in a second pseudo continuous effect. is executed. At the same time, the optical display device 45a and the sound generator 46a perform effects.

After the decorative pattern fluctuatingly displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is displayed as a second pseudo stop display, when it changes again due to the third pseudo continuous display, the hold icon changes from yellow to red. Image rendering is executed. At the same time, the optical display device 45a and the sound generator 46a perform effects.

Furthermore, after the decorative pattern fluctuatingly displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is displayed as a pseudo stop display for the third time, when it changes again due to the fourth pseudo continuous effect, the hold icon changes from red to rainbow. A changing image effect is executed. At the same time, the optical display device 45a and the sound generator 46a perform effects.

By performing such a performance, the player can be made to expect that he will be notified that he has won the jackpot lottery after the fourth pseudo-continuous performance is executed.

(Direction 56)

The performance 56 is a jackpot suggestion performance in the variation performed using a "movable body" and a "button", and is, for example, a "button vibe preview performance".
The button vibe preview performance is, for example, a performance that is performed in parallel with the ready-to-reach performance that is performed when two of the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

The flow of the performance will be explained in detail.
With the start of the special symbol variation display game, the performance control section 24 refers to the set value information and performs a lottery on whether or not the button vibe preview performance can be executed. That is, the effect appears with a probability according to the set value.
After the special symbol variable display game is started, the first, second, and third symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display device 36. At this time, if there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot lottery of the variation, an effect may be performed while the three decorative symbols are displayed in variation.
For example, if you win the previous lottery to see whether or not you can do it, a button vibe preview effect will be executed.
Specifically, by vibrating the movable accessory, a sense of expectation is visually aroused, and by vibrating the performance button 13, a performance is performed that allows the user to experience the height of the expected value.

Further, on the liquid crystal display device 36, the first symbol and the second symbol are stopped and displayed while the button vibe preview performance is executed. At this time, two patterns are provided for the stopping manner of the first symbol and the second symbol. One is a pattern in which the decorative patterns of the first and second symbols are the same, and the ready-to-reach effect is continuously executed at the end of the button vibe preview effect.
The other is a pattern in which the first symbol and the second symbol are different from each other, and the fluctuation ends with the stop display of the third symbol without executing the ready-to-win effect.

Note that a plurality of types of vibration patterns of the movable accessory and the performance button 13 may be prepared, and the selection probability may be changed depending on whether or not the player has won the jackpot lottery. Specifically, vibration pattern A may be configured to be more likely to be selected in the event of winning, and vibration pattern B may be configured to be more likely to be selected in the event of loss. This makes it possible to provide highly entertaining performances.

(Direction 57)

The performance 57 is a jackpot suggestion performance in the fluctuation that is performed using a "liquid crystal" and a "movable body", and is, for example, a "movable body promotion preview performance".
For example, the movable body inciting preview performance is a highly reliable performance that suggests that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot lottery by moving the movable body. This is a performance that is performed before the performance. This performance may be executed together with, for example, a reach performance.
For example, the movable body agitation preview performance is a performance that causes the movable body to vibrate, and there are a pattern in which the above-mentioned highly reliable movable body performance is executed immediately after the execution of the movable body agitation notice performance, and a pattern in which it is not performed. . That is, the movable body inciting preview performance is a performance that suggests to the player that there is a possibility that the performance will develop into a highly reliable performance.

Specifically, the flow of the performance will be explained.
With the start of the special symbol variation display game, the performance control unit 24 performs a lottery to determine whether a movable body promotion notice performance can be executed and a lottery to determine whether a highly reliable movable body performance can be executed. In this lottery, by referring to the setting value information, the probability of winning is determined to vary depending on the setting value Ve.
The result of the lottery is Pattern A, which performs both performances and then informs the player that he has won the jackpot lottery result, and Pattern A, which performs both performances but notifies the player that he has not won the jackpot lottery result. The pattern is branched into a pattern B in which a notification performance is executed, a pattern C in which a movable body inciting advance notice performance is executed but it does not develop into a highly reliable movable body performance, and a pattern D in which neither of the two performances is executed.

Here, pattern A will be explained as an example.
After the special symbol variable display game is started, the first symbol, the second symbol, and the third symbol are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. At this time, an effect of vibrating the movable body accessory is executed, and an image effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as if a lottery is being performed to see whether or not the movable body effect will develop into a highly reliable movable body effect.

Subsequently, the first symbol and the second symbol are stopped and displayed as the same decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 36, and after reaching a reach state, an image production suggesting that the production will develop is executed, and the movable accessory is displayed. A highly reliable performance (for example, a performance in which two movable objects come together, a performance in which they separate, etc.) using An image display showing the image is executed.

Furthermore, on the liquid crystal display device 36, an image effect is executed in which all of the first to third symbols are stopped and displayed as decorative patterns imitating the same numbers, thereby indicating that the jackpot lottery has been won. A production that suggests winning will also be performed on objects.

(Direction 58)

The performance 58 is a jackpot suggestion performance in the variation performed using "light", and is, for example, an "illumination flash preview performance".
The illumination flash preview performance is a performance that causes the illumination panel installed in the gaming machine to emit light in a predetermined pattern. The illumination panel includes, for example, a rectangular light guide plate and a light emitting part arranged at the edge of the light guide plate, and the light emitted from the light guide passes through the inside of the light guide plate and is directed forward at a predetermined position. It is formed so that a predetermined pattern appears when it is reflected towards the target. That is, the illumination flash preview performance is a performance that causes the player to visually recognize a predetermined pattern by causing the light emitting unit to emit light.
The illumination flash preview performance can be executed together with the reach performance.

The flow of the performance will be explained in detail.
With the start of the special symbol variation display game, the performance control section 24 performs a lottery to determine whether or not the illumination flash preview performance can be executed. In this lottery, by referring to the setting value information, the probability of winning is determined to vary depending on the setting value Ve.

If you win the execution lottery, the first and second symbols stop on the liquid crystal display device 36, the reach effect is executed, and the light emitting part of the illumination panel is made to emit light, causing a predetermined pattern to appear on the illumination panel. An illumination flash preview performance will be performed. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than usual.

Note that the illumination panel can have a reflecting portion so as to reflect forward only light emitted from a specific direction. Therefore, the reflecting portions that reflect the light emitted from the left and right ends of the illumination panel forward are arranged to form pattern A, and the reflection portions that reflect the light emitted from the top and bottom ends of the illumination panel forward. By arranging the parts to form pattern B, it is possible to make a plurality of types of patterns appear on the illumination panel.
By using such an illumination panel, it is possible to distinguish between a highly reliable illumination flash preview effect and a less reliable illumination flash preview effect.

It is also possible to express the level of reliability by preparing multiple types of flash patterns. For example, by creating a flash pattern that causes the illumination panel to blink at a high frequency, it is possible to create a highly reliable performance, and by creating a flash pattern that causes the illumination panel to blink at a low frequency, it is possible to create a low reliability performance. It is.
Alternatively, the level of reliability may be expressed by changing the color of the light emitted from the light emitting section.

(Direction 59)

The performance 59 is a jackpot suggestion performance performed using "sound", "liquid crystal", and "button", and is, for example, a "telephone notice performance".
Note that here, a preview effect using a "telephone" which is an important item that appears in the theme of the gaming machine 1 is executed. Therefore, a preview effect using other important items in accordance with the theme of the gaming machine 1 may be used. For example, if the game machine 1 has a soccer theme, a "soccer ball preview effect" using a "soccer ball" may be executed.

The telephone preview performance may be executed together with the reach performance. For example, after the first symbol and the second symbol are stopped on the liquid crystal display device 36 and a reach effect is executed, an image effect representing an incoming telephone call is executed, and the sound generator 46a causes the telephone to be called. The ringtone is output as a sound effect, and furthermore, an image effect prompting the user to press the effect button 13 is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

The flow of production will be explained using a specific example.
First, based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, the performance control section 24 executes a lottery to determine whether or not the telephone notice performance can be executed.
If you win the lottery, the same decorative pattern is displayed as the first pattern and the second pattern on the liquid crystal display device 36, and after the reach effect is executed, the onomatopoeia of the ringtone converted into text is displayed. While performing the image production, the sound generation device 46a outputs a ringtone.
Thereafter, an image effect prompting the user to press the effect button 13 is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

When the player presses the performance button 13, the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and an image performance indicating whether or not the player has won the jackpot lottery is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

The performance 59 is such that the probability of winning the lottery for whether or not it can be executed varies depending on the set value Ve. For example, the higher the set value Ve is, the higher the probability of winning the lottery. Therefore, it can be inferred that the higher the appearance frequency of the effect 59, the higher the set value Ve.

(Direction 60)

The performance 60 is a jackpot suggestion performance performed using a "liquid crystal", and is, for example, a "background change preview performance".
The background change preview performance can be executed at timings such as when the special symbol variation display game starts, when the variation occurs at low speed, when the variation occurs at high speed, and when the first symbol stops when one of the decorative symbols stops.

Specifically, this is an image effect in which the background image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is different from normal.
This effect appears with a constant probability regardless of the set value Ve.

The specific flow of the performance will be explained.
At the start of the special symbol variation display game, a lottery is held to decide whether or not to execute the background change preview performance. If the winner is selected, an image effect is performed in which a decorative pattern is variably displayed on a specific background image. For example, the background image is normally set to represent a daytime background, but if a lottery is won to determine whether or not the background change notice effect can be executed, the background image is set to represent a background in the evening.

Other effects (for example, a reach effect) may be executed along with the stop display of the second symbol.
Furthermore, the degree of expectation may be configured to differ depending on the execution timing of the background change preview effect. For example, the expectation level may be higher if the background change preview performance is executed when the first symbol stops, rather than when the background change preview performance is executed when the special symbol variation display game starts.

(Direction 61)

The performance 61 is a jackpot suggestion performance performed using a "liquid crystal" and a "movable object", and is, for example, a "step-up preview performance".
The step-up notice performance can be executed, for example, at the start of the special symbol variation display game, at the time of low-speed variation, at the time of high-speed variation, and when the first symbol is stopped.

In the step-up preview effect, image effects up to a predetermined level among a plurality of image effects prepared are executed. Then, by executing the image production at the final stage, it is suggested that the player has won the jackpot lottery. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that it is suggested that there is a strong possibility that the player has won the jackpot lottery.

Such effects may be performed over the plurality of timings described above.
I will explain in detail.
First, based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the step-up notice performance. If the lottery is won, a lottery will also be conducted to determine what type of step-up preview performance will be performed. For example, first to fourth stage performances are provided as step-up preview performances.
At the timing when the variable display of decorative patterns actually starts on the liquid crystal display device 36, a step-up preview effect is executed, and a first stage image effect is executed.

Subsequently, after the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the second stage image effect is executed at the timing when the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36.
Further, at the timing when the third pseudo continuous effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36, the third stage image effect is executed, and at the timing when the fourth pseudo continuous effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36, the third stage image effect is executed. Four stages (final stage) of image rendering are executed.
As a result, the player is informed that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot lottery.
Thereafter, the first to third symbols are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to notify that the player has won the jackpot lottery.

The step-up preview performance has a constant probability of appearance (probability of winning the execution possibility lottery) regardless of the set value Ve.

(Direction 62)

The performance 62 is a jackpot suggestion performance performed using "light", "liquid crystal", and "button", and is, for example, a "symbol stop notice performance".
The symbol stop notice performance may be executed, for example, at the timing of the first symbol stop.

The specific flow of the performance will be explained.
Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the symbol stop notice performance can be executed. If you win the lottery, a preview effect will appear when the symbol stops. This effect is executed with a constant probability regardless of the set value Ve.

With the start of the special symbol variable display game, the decorative symbol variable display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the light emission control by the optical display device 45a is executed at the timing when the first symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, on the liquid crystal display device 36, an image effect is executed to prompt the user to press the effect button 13.

When the player presses the performance button 13, the second symbol stops on the liquid crystal display device 36, thereby performing an inciting performance as to whether or not a ready-to-win performance will be executed.
When execution of the ready-to-win effect is suggested to the user, a symbol similar to the first symbol is stopped and displayed as a second symbol on the liquid crystal display device 36, and one of the ready-to-reach effects appears.
On the other hand, when it is suggested to the user that the ready-to-win effect is not executed, a symbol different from the first symbol is stopped and displayed as a second symbol on the liquid crystal display device 36, and subsequently a third symbol is also stopped and displayed.

(Direction 63)

The performance 63 is a jackpot suggesting performance performed using "sound" and "light", and is, for example, a "roulette preview performance".
The roulette preview performance is a performance that can be performed in conjunction with the pseudo-continuation performance, and appears with a constant probability regardless of the set value Ve.
The flow of the roulette preview performance will be explained using an example.

Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, an execution possibility lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute the roulette preview performance.
Here, it is assumed that execution of the performance has been decided.
On the liquid crystal display device 36, a decorative symbol variable display game is started, and after a stop display of three decorative symbols is performed, a pseudo series is started by restarting the game. In response to the start of the pseudo-series, a roulette preview performance is started.
In the gaming machine 1, for example, a plurality of shaped objects having different shapes are formed around the gaming area 3a. Each shaped object is, for example, round, star-shaped, or flower-shaped, and each is formed to be able to emit light in a different color.

In the roulette preview performance, after round-shaped, star-shaped, and flower-shaped objects sequentially emit light, a performance is performed in which only a specific object (for example, a star-shaped object) emits light, and the sound generator 46a emits light. Sound effects are output.
It is configured so that only the objects that have a high probability of winning the jackpot lottery will eventually emit light; for example, if a flower-shaped object ultimately emits light, the highest expectations will be It is said to be a degree.

After the respective shaped objects are sequentially emitted with light at the start of the second pseudo-run, the star-shaped shaped objects are emitted with the stop display of the decorative pattern in the second pseudo-run.
After each of the shaped objects sequentially lights up with the start of the third pseudo-sequence, the star-shaped shaped objects are emitted again with the stop display of the decorative pattern in the third pseudo-sequence.
Furthermore, with the start of the fourth pseudo-sequence, the respective shaped objects are again sequentially emitted with light, and then the flower-shaped objects are emitted with the stop display of the decorative pattern in the fourth pseudo-sequence.
As a result, the player can experience the roulette preview performance that corresponds to the progress of the pseudo-sequence performance, and also enjoy the performance with a sense of anticipation as to which sculpture will be in the state of emitting light when the pseudo-sequence stop display is displayed. You can experience it. In other words, it is possible to provide a highly entertaining performance.

Other examples of roulette preview performance will also be described.
Each of the round, star-shaped, and flower-shaped objects has a corresponding reach effect.
Then, a reach effect corresponding to the modeled object that finally emitted light is executed. In other words, the reach effect that corresponds to the flower shape is considered to be a reach effect with high expectations, and when the roulette preview effect appears, the player will see the flower-shaped object emitting light, which will lead to a highly anticipated reach effect. It becomes possible to experience the performance while expecting the performance to be executed.

Note that a mode may be provided in which none of the shaped objects emits light and the reach effect is not executed.

(Direction 64)

The performance 64 is a jackpot suggesting performance performed using "light" and "liquid crystal", and is, for example, a "group preview performance".
The group preview performance may be executed, for example, at the timing of the second symbol stop. That is, there is a possibility that it will be executed together with the reach effect.

Specifically, the flow of the performance will be explained.
Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, a lottery is held to decide whether or not to execute the group preview performance. If the lottery is won, execution of the group preview performance is decided.

After the decorative symbol variable display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, the stop display of the second symbol is executed following the stop display of the first symbol. At this timing, a group preview effect in which a large number of specific characters are displayed is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the player is informed that the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than usual. Furthermore, as part of the group preview effect, light emission control is performed by the optical display device 45a.
After the group preview effect is executed, a ready-to-reach effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 and the like is executed.

Note that the level of expectation may be expressed by different characters displayed in large numbers on the liquid crystal display device 36 in the group preview presentation.

(Direction 65)

The performance 65 is a jackpot suggestion performance performed using a "liquid crystal" and a "button", and is, for example, a "SP development preview performance".
The SP development preview performance appears when executing a provocation performance that incites whether or not it will develop into the first type super reach.
This effect appears with a constant probability regardless of the set value Ve.

The flow of the performance will be explained in detail.
Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, the performance control unit 24 performs a lottery to determine whether or not the SP development notice performance can be executed.
Next, a decorative symbol variable display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the first symbol and the second symbol are stopped and displayed. Both the first symbol and the second symbol are the same decorative symbol, and a reach effect is developed on the liquid crystal display device 36. At this time, an SP development preview performance is also executed. Specifically, an image effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to encourage whether or not the game will develop into a type 1 super reach.

In this inciting effect, for example, an image effect in which a main character and an enemy character fight is executed, and at the same time, a notification urging the user to press the effect button 13 is executed as an image effect.
When the player presses the effect button 13 in accordance with this notification, an image effect in which either the main character or the enemy character wins is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36. Here, when the image effect in which the main character wins is executed, an image effect that develops into the first type super reach is further executed. This allows the player to understand that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot lottery.

(Direction 66)

The performance 66 is a jackpot suggestion performance performed using "sound" and "liquid crystal", and is, for example, a "SP title preview performance".
The SP title preview performance is a performance performed using the display format such as the color and pattern of the Super Reach title displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 when it develops into the 1st type Super Reach or the 2nd type Super Reach. be.
This effect appears with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

The flow of the performance will be explained in detail.
Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, the performance control unit 24 performs a lottery to determine whether or not the SP title preview performance can be executed.
Next, a decorative symbol variable display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the first symbol and the second symbol are stopped and displayed. After the reach effect is executed by stopping and displaying the first and second symbols with the same decorative pattern, if the reach effect develops into the highly anticipated 1st type super reach, the 1st type super reach A title image for is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

The title preview effect suggests the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery based on the appearance of the title image at this time.
For example, if the title is made up of gold letters, the expectation level is higher than if the title is made up of red letters. Additionally, rainbow or danger patterns are said to have higher expectations than gold.
Further, when the title image is displayed, a sound effect is output by the sound generating device 46a. A plurality of sound effects may be prepared, and the level of expectation may be indicated depending on which sound effect is output.

(Direction 67)

The performance 67 is a jackpot suggestion performance performed using "light", "liquid crystal", and "button", and is, for example, a "promotion performance promotion preview performance".
The promotion performance inciting preview performance is a performance (promotion performance) that suggests whether or not the player will be promoted from a jackpot type that is less advantageous to a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player after the jackpot type is notified to the player. .
It is advantageous for the player to execute the promotion performance after being notified that he has won the regular 4R or regular 6R jackpot. Further, when the promotion performance is executed, the jackpot type is changed (promoted) to a probability variable 6R or probability variation 10R, thereby making the situation even more advantageous for the player.

The flow of the performance will be explained in detail.
Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, the performance control unit 24 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the promotion performance inciting preview performance. After winning the lottery, a decorative symbol variation display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the first symbol, second symbol, and third symbol are stopped and displayed as the same decorative symbol. Various effects can be performed until the three decorative patterns are stopped and displayed.

After the three identical decorative patterns are stopped and displayed and the player is informed that he or she has won a jackpot lottery, a promotion performance inciting preview performance can be executed based on the previous execution possibility lottery. When this performance is executed, the player can expect to be promoted to a jackpot type with a higher advantage. Note that internally in the gaming machine 1, it is determined in advance whether the jackpot game to be executed from now on has a low or high advantage. The "promotion" here means that it becomes clear to the player that the type of jackpot game, which was uncertain to the player, is highly advantageous.

In the advance notice promotion performance, the player is informed that the promotion performance will be executed by lighting up a light emitting part provided on the performance button 13 as a light display device 45a, for example. In response to the player pressing the effect button 13, an image effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to create a sense of anticipation as to which decorative pattern with a high advantage or a decorative pattern with a low advantage will be stopped and displayed. . For example, on the liquid crystal display device 36, an effect (promotion effect) is executed that changes the decorative pattern again and incites whether or not the jackpot type that has already been announced will be changed to a more advantageous jackpot type. The results will be announced. Thereby, the jackpot type determined at the time of winning is correctly notified to the player.

The promotion performance inciting preview performance appears with a constant probability regardless of the set value Ve.

<11. Other performances＞

There may be performances provided in the gaming machine 1 in addition to the suggestive performances regarding set values and the suggestive performances regarding jackpots.
For example, although no suggestion is made regarding the set value Ve or the jackpot, a lively performance may be performed.

(Direction 80)
The presentation 80 is a lively presentation performed using a "liquid crystal." Specifically, this is an effect that can be executed at the timing (timing 10) when the number of active pending balls increases due to winning a prize.
Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the performance 80 can be executed, and if the lottery is won, an image production in which a passerby crosses from left to right is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36. .

Incidentally, a similar performance may be executed as a suggestion performance regarding a set value or a suggestion performance regarding a jackpot. For example, an image effect in which a passerby crosses from left to right may be an exciting effect, and an image effect in which a passerby crosses from right to left may be implemented as a suggestion effect regarding a jackpot.
In this way, by making the performance similar to the suggestive performance regarding the set value or the jackpot as the lively performance, the game interest can be improved even if the lively performance does not suggest the set value or the jackpot.

<12. Regarding effects that have different appearance probabilities depending on the setting value>

As described above, the effects installed in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment include those whose appearance probabilities differ depending on the set value Ve. There are several possible examples of performances in which the probability of appearance differs depending on the set value Ve. Here, each example will be explained.

[12-1. 1st example]

The first example of a production in which the probability of appearance differs depending on the setting value Ve (hereinafter simply referred to as the "first example of setting difference") is that the probability of appearance of the production differs depending on the setting value Ve. They have different probabilities.
For example, an example of the jackpot probability according to each setting value Ve is shown below.

・Setting value 1:1/180
・Setting value 2: 1/170
・Setting value 3: 1/160
・Setting value 4: 1/150
・Setting value 5: 1/140
・Setting value 6:1/120

Furthermore, an example of the winning probability of the execution possibility lottery for a certain performance X, that is, the probability that the performance X will be executed is shown below.

・Setting value 1: 1/8 when winning the jackpot lottery
・Setting value 2: 1/7 when winning the jackpot lottery
・Setting value 3: 1/6 when winning the jackpot lottery
・Setting value 4: 1/5 when winning the jackpot lottery
・Setting value 5: 1/4 when winning the jackpot lottery
・Setting value 6: 1/3 when winning the jackpot lottery

If the appearance probability of effect X per variation (one game) is calculated from these values, it will be as follows.

・Setting value 1:1/1440
・Setting value 2: 1/1190
・Setting value 3: 1/960
・Setting value 4: 1/750
・Setting value 5: 1/560
・Set value 6:1/360

Thereby, it can be estimated that the gaming machine 1 in which the effect X appears more often has a higher set value Ve.
Further, the player can also estimate the set value Ve by understanding the number of times the effect X has appeared relative to the number of times the player has won the jackpot lottery.

[12-2. Second example]

In the second example of a performance where the appearance probability differs depending on the setting value Ve (hereinafter simply referred to as the "second example of setting difference"), the winning probability of the execution possibility lottery for the performance is constant regardless of the setting value Ve, In the first place, since the winning probability in the jackpot lottery differs depending on the set value Ve, the appearance probability of the effect X differs.
For example, it is assumed that the jackpot probability according to each setting value Ve is the same as in the first example. Furthermore, it is assumed that the probability of winning the execution feasibility lottery for performance X is 1/5 when winning the jackpot lottery regardless of the set value Ve.
At this time, the appearance probability of effect X per variation (one game) can be calculated as follows.

・Setting value 1:1/900
・Setting value 2: 1/850
・Setting value 3: 1/800
・Setting value 4: 1/750
・Setting value 5: 1/700
・Setting value 6:1/600

As a result, it can be estimated that the gaming machine 1 in which the effect X appears more often has a higher set value Ve.
Note that, as in the first example, even if the number of times the effect X appears with respect to the number of times the player wins the jackpot lottery is known, the set value Ve cannot be estimated.

<13. Example of selective implementation in gaming machines>

The above-mentioned setting value-related suggestion effects and jackpot suggestion effects may all be implemented in one gaming machine, or some of them may be selected and implemented in one gaming machine.
Here, an example will be described in which a part of each of the above-mentioned suggestion effects is selected and implemented in one gaming machine.

In the gaming machine 1 in this example, each performance is selectively implemented from the above-mentioned performances 1 to 21, performances 50 to 67, and performance 80.
Specifically, the gaming machine 1 includes production 1, production 4, production 15, production 20, production 50, production 52, production 53, production 54, production 58, production 62, production 63, production 64, production 65, A presentation 66, a presentation 67, and a presentation 80 are implemented. In the following description, this gaming machine will be referred to as gaming machine 1A.
Regarding the effect 20, in the above-described example, the timings at which it can be executed are the various timings during the decorative symbol fluctuation display game in the time saving state. That is, as an example, it is configured to be executable at timings 10 to 25 in the time saving state among timings 01 to 42.
The gaming machine 1A in this example is configured so that the performance 20 can be executed only at timing 10 as a pre-read preview performance in the time saving state.

FIG. 122 shows each effect implemented in the gaming machine 1A.
The classification of the effects in Figure 122 is as follows: ``Set value change suggestion effect'', ``Setting value suggestion effect'', ``Jackpot suggestion effect (with setting difference)'', ``Jackpot suggestion effect (without setting difference)'', and ``Enjoyment effect''. .

Effects with different settings include those whose appearance probability differs depending on the setting value Ve, effects whose appearance differs depending on the setting value Ve, or effects whose effects tend to differ depending on the setting value Ve, etc. It is possible to estimate the setting value Ve. It's a great performance.
Performances with setting differences are referred to as "set value suggestion performance" and "jackpot suggestion performance (with setting difference)."
In addition, performances with no setting difference are ``set value change suggestion performance'', ``jackpot suggestion performance (no setting difference)'', and ``enjoyment performance''.
Note that the "set value change suggestion effect" may be a effect with a setting difference.

In addition, in the following explanation, the setting value change suggestion performance will be referred to as "performance A", the setting value suggestion performance as "performance B", the jackpot suggestion production (with setting difference) as "performance C", and the jackpot suggestion production (with no setting difference). ) is sometimes referred to as "effect D", and an exciting effect that is neither a jackpot suggestion effect nor a suggestion effect regarding a set value is sometimes described as "presentation E".

Here, the grouping of each performance category will be explained. Note that performances (performances 80) that are neither jackpot suggesting performances nor setting value-related performances are excluded here.
First, as one way of grouping, it is conceivable to distinguish between suggestive performances that do not suggest a jackpot and suggestive performances that do suggest a jackpot.
In this case, a "setting value change suggestion performance" and a "setting value suggestion performance" are provided as performances that do not suggest a jackpot but only suggest a setting value.
In addition, regarding the production that suggests a jackpot, there are "jackpot suggestion production (with setting difference)" and "jackpot suggestion production (with no setting difference)."

Furthermore, as another classification method, it is conceivable to distinguish between suggestive performances that include suggestions regarding set values and suggestive performances that do not include suggestions regarding set values.
In this case, "set value change suggestion performance", "setting value suggestion performance", and "jackpot suggestion performance (with setting difference)" are provided as suggestion performances including suggestions regarding setting values.
Furthermore, a "jackpot suggestion performance (no setting difference)" is provided as a suggestion performance that does not include any suggestion regarding the set value.

[13-1. Regarding the appearance timing of the production]

The classification of the appearance timings of various effects has been explained using the above-mentioned timings 01 to 42, but here, a different classification will be used.
Specifically, each timing at which the performance can appear is classified into ``waiting for customers'', ``while looking ahead'', ``during fluctuation (first half)'', ``during fluctuation (second half)'', and ``during jackpot''.

"Waiting for customers" is a period equivalent to timings 01 to 09 described above.
"During pre-reading" is the timing when a pre-read preview effect can appear, and the action-pending ball that has not yet been used for the execution of the symbol fluctuation display game (special symbol fluctuation display operation) (i.e., the unexploited action-pending ball) This is the timing at which the jackpot lottery for the symbol variation display game related to the operation-suspended ball can be executed as a pre-reading determination process.

"During variation (first half)", when focusing on decorative symbols, is the period from the start of the decorative symbol variable display game until the second symbol (for example, the right symbol) is stopped and displayed.
In terms of the timing mentioned above, this is a period equivalent to timings 10 to 16.
In the following explanation, "during fluctuation (first half)" may be described as the first period.

"Fluctuating (second half)" means a state in which the first symbol (for example, the left symbol) and the second symbol (for example, the right symbol) are statically displayed as the same decorative symbol, and the third symbol (for example, the middle symbol) is displayed in a fluctuating manner. This is the period from the state in which this occurs to the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed. In other words, the period is from when the decorative symbols are in the reach state until the three decorative symbols are finally stopped and displayed.
In terms of the timing mentioned above, this is a period equivalent to timings 17 to 25.
In the following explanation, "during fluctuation (second half)" may be described as the second period.

“During the jackpot” is a period from the start of the jackpot game until it ends, and corresponds to the period from timings 26 to 42 described above.

[13-2. Regarding waiting for customers]

Among the performances shown in FIG. 122, the performance that can be executed while the gaming machine 1A of this embodiment is waiting for a customer is performance 01 as a setting value suggestion performance.
Further, other performances are configured not to be executed while waiting for a customer. That is, the only performance that can be executed while waiting for a customer is performance 01.

While the set value suggestion performance can be executed while waiting for a customer, the suggestion performance that suggests a jackpot is not executed, so that the gaming machine 1A can be configured such that the performance is unlikely to be executed while waiting for a customer. .
Therefore, if performance 01 is executed while waiting for a customer, the player can be made aware that this is a relatively rare case, and the player may be interested in the gaming machine in which the performance 01 was executed. It becomes possible to arouse interest. Particularly, compared to gaming machines in which various performances are constantly displayed, it is possible to realize effective performances with fewer performances.
Note that such an effect can be further enhanced by not performing the lively performance while waiting for a customer.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
comprising a storage unit storing set values representing the probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player or not;
A setting value inferable performance in which it is possible to infer the set value based on the probability of appearance and/or the content of the performance, and a setting value in which it is impossible to infer the setting value based on the probability of appearance and/or the content of the performance. An impossible-to-guess production is set up so that it can be performed,
A gaming machine characterized in that, while waiting for a customer, the performance that allows the set value to be guessed is enabled to appear, and the performance that does not allow the set value to be guessed does not appear.

Moreover, such a configuration can also be rephrased as follows.
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and it is impossible to guess the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a first performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. A second performance that makes it possible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode, and a third performance that makes it impossible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and that makes it possible to guess the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. , comprising;
A gaming machine characterized in that the performance execution means is configured to enable execution of the first performance and disable execution of either the second performance or the third performance while waiting for a customer.

Further, the implementation mode of the performance may be different from that shown in FIG. 122, and the gaming machine 1A may be configured so that the setting value change suggestion performance can be executed while waiting for a customer. In that case, both the setting value change suggestion performance and the setting value suggestion performance can be executed while waiting for a customer.
If the gaming machine 1A has such a configuration, it is possible to estimate whether or not the setting value Ve has been changed even while waiting for a customer, or to estimate the setting value Ve set in the gaming machine 1A. This becomes possible due to the appearance of the effect, and it becomes possible to increase the player's desire to play the game machine.

In addition, since the performance executed here is not a suggestion performance about a jackpot, but is related to the set value Ve, an advantageous performance regarding the set value Ve for the player is performed on the gaming machine in which the player is not playing. If executed, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player will play the game machine for a long time.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A setting value change suggestion effect that can estimate whether or not the setting value has been changed after the last power-on operation based on the effect mode, and a setting value change suggestion effect that can estimate the level of the set value based on the effect mode and increase the expectation of winning a jackpot lottery. A first performance whose height cannot be guessed, a second performance in which it is possible to guess the height of the set value based on the performance mode, and a second performance that allows you to guess the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a second performance that allows you to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode. A third performance that makes it impossible to guess and that makes it possible to guess the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a performance execution means that can execute,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the performance means enables the setting value change suggestion performance and the first performance to be executed while waiting for a customer, and disables the execution of the second performance and the third performance. .

[13-3. About reading ahead]

Among the performances shown in FIG. 122, the performances that are executable during the look-ahead of the gaming machine 1A of this embodiment are the performance 20 as a setting value suggestion performance and the jackpot suggestion performance (with different settings). 50, and performances 52 and 53 as jackpot suggesting performances (no difference in setting).

Among the effects that may appear during pre-reading, the number of types of suggestion effects that suggest a jackpot is greater than the number of types of suggestion effects that do not suggest a jackpot.
The "number of types of performances" here refers to the number of performances of the same type as one. For example, in the case of effect 09 explained using FIG. 92, three types of titles are prepared to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, so at least three patterns are prepared as the effect mode. Become. If you take into account the appearance timing, the number of performance patterns will increase further. However, in the "number of types of effects", they are collectively counted as "one".
In addition, in the following explanation, when each performance pattern is counted as one when the performance patterns are different, it will be described as "total number of performance modes".

During look-ahead, expectations regarding the pending ball are high, and even if the setting value suggestion performance is executed in such a state, there is a high possibility that the player will have won the jackpot lottery regarding the pending ball. There is a risk of causing misunderstanding.
Therefore, in order to prevent such misunderstandings from occurring, the number of types of suggestion effects that suggest a jackpot is greater than the number of types of suggestion effects that do not suggest a jackpot, thereby making it easier for players to understand It is possible to increase the possibility that the performance will take place.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for deriving and displaying a display result by executing a variable display operation of the special symbol on the condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Decorative pattern display means for visually performing a variable display operation of a decorative pattern in conjunction with execution of a variable display operation of the special symbol;
acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information upon detection of a game ball by the starting means;
Specifying the storage order of the predetermined game information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined maximum number of stored pieces as an upper limit, until the special symbol display means executes a variable display operation of the special symbols. a retention memory means for retaining storage as an actuation retention ball capable of operating;
a number of held balls informing means for notifying the number of held balls, which is the number of active held balls, by displaying a holding icon for the number of held balls;
A look-ahead determination means that performs a look-ahead determination as to whether or not the action-reserved ball will win or lose a jackpot lottery at a predetermined timing before the action-reserved ball is subjected to the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol;
A look-ahead notice performance means for performing a look-ahead notice performance that changes a display mode of a hold icon for the operation hold ball that is subject to the look-ahead determination;
A storage means for storing a set value representing a probability level of whether or not a game state advantageous to the player will be won;
The pre-reading preview performance includes a first performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and in which it is impossible to guess the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery; At least one of a second performance that allows you to guess the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a third performance that makes it impossible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and that allows you to guess the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. Equipped with
The number of types of the first effects that are executable as the pre-read preview effects is a (a is 0 or more), and the number of types of the second effects that are executable as the pre-read preview effects is b ( b is 0 or more), and the number of types of the third performance that can be executed as the pre-read preview performance is c (c is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a smaller number than (b+c).

Further, another configuration example that achieves the above effects will be shown below.
a setting means capable of setting a setting value representing a stage of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
a display means capable of variably displaying performance symbols each composed of three symbol groups that vary depending on a lottery result as to whether or not to generate a profit state;
comprising a performance execution control means capable of controlling the execution of a first type performance that suggests the set value set in the gaming machine and a second type performance that suggests the lottery result;
Let s be the number of the first type effects that can be executed during the look-ahead period in which the look-ahead preview performance for the action-reserved ball is executed based on the winning or losing of the lottery result regarding the action-reserved ball before being subjected to the variable display;
Assuming that the number of the second type effects that can be executed in the look-ahead period is t,
A gaming machine characterized in that t>s≧0 holds true.

In a state where the above-mentioned relationship between the variable s and the variable t holds true, the first type of performance may include a performance (performance a) that mainly provides suggestions regarding setting values as the purpose of the performance. In addition, the second type of production is a production that mainly suggests the winning or losing of the lottery results as a production purpose and the selection ratio differs depending on the setting value (production b), and the production purpose that mainly suggests the winning or losing of the lottery results. It may also include an effect (effect c) that makes a suggestion and has the same selection ratio regardless of the setting value.
That is, when the variable s is the number of effects a, and the variable t is the sum of the numbers of effects b and c, t>s≧0 may hold true.

As a result, during pre-reading, more performances whose main purpose is suggestions about the jackpot lottery result can be executed than performances whose main purpose is suggestions about the set value. As a result, many presentations including hints about winning the jackpot appear while the player has high expectations regarding the activated ball, making it less likely to confuse the player and increasing the player's desire to play. It is possible to perform effective performances. Moreover, since the first type effect is difficult to appear, the processing load on the effect execution control means and the power consumption can be reduced.
Note that the variable t and the variable s herein may be the "number of types of presentations" or may be the "total number of presentation modes."

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
A performance that mainly suggests the setting value as a performance purpose is defined as a performance a,
The purpose of the performance is to mainly suggest the winning or losing of the lottery results, and a performance with different selection ratios depending on the set value is set as a performance b,
The purpose of the performance is to mainly suggest the winning or losing of the lottery results, and the selection ratio is the same regardless of the setting value, as the performance c,
The performance a is included in the first type performance,
The gaming machine characterized in that the performance b and the performance c are included in the second type performance.

In a state where the above variables s and t hold true, the first type of performance may be set to performance b, and the second type performance may be set to c.
That is, when the variable s is the number of effects b and the variable t is the number of effects c, t>s≧0 may hold true.

As a result, when focusing on a performance that suggests a jackpot that is executed during look-ahead, it is possible for the appearance to appear regardless of the setting value, compared to a performance in which it is possible to guess the setting value where the appearance frequency differs depending on the setting value. Since the effects that do not change in frequency appear more frequently, the player can enjoy the effects without considering whether the suggestion is about the set value or the jackpot. Further, by configuring the first type effect to be difficult to appear, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the effect execution control means and reduce power consumption.

In addition, with regard to performances whose main purpose is to suggest about set values, it is necessary to perform appropriate performances while avoiding confusion among players by making the performances different from those whose main purpose is to suggest about jackpots or by making them less confusing. I can do it. For example, a specific character image may be displayed in one corner of the liquid crystal display device 36 during execution of an effect suggesting a jackpot, thereby subtly suggesting a set value. In addition, if a display suggesting a jackpot is being executed on the liquid crystal display device 36 and the player is paying attention to the liquid crystal display device 36, a light emitting display using a decorative lamp 45 or the like is casually performed. This may appeal to players who have an advanced understanding of the gaming machine 1.

Note that the variable t and the variable s herein may be the "number of types of presentations" or may be the "total number of presentation modes."

An example of the configuration of a gaming machine 1 that achieves the above effects will be described.
A performance that mainly suggests the setting value as a performance purpose is defined as a performance a,
The purpose of the performance is to mainly suggest the winning or losing of the lottery results, and a performance with different selection ratios depending on the set value is set as a performance b,
The purpose of the performance is to mainly suggest the winning or losing of the lottery results, and the selection ratio is the same regardless of the setting value, as the performance c,
The performance b is included in the first type performance,
The gaming machine characterized in that the performance c is included in the second type performance.

In a state where the above variables s and t hold true, the first type of performance may be performance a and performance b, and the second type performance may be c.
That is, when the variable s is the sum of the number of performances a and the number of performances b, and the variable t is the number of performances c, t>s≧0 may be satisfied.

As a result, during look-ahead, the number of performances whose main purpose is to suggest the set value, that is, performances a and b, is reduced, so that the player can focus more on whether or not the activated ball is a jackpot. It becomes possible to experience the performance while doing so. In other words, it is possible to perform an appropriate performance without causing confusion for the players. Moreover, by adopting a configuration in which the appearance of performance a and performance b as the first type performance is refrained from, it is possible to reduce the processing load and power consumption of the performance execution control means.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that produces such effects is shown below.
A performance that mainly suggests the setting value as a performance purpose is defined as a performance a,
The purpose of the performance is to mainly suggest the winning or losing of the lottery results, and a performance with different selection ratios depending on the set value is set as a performance b,
The purpose of the performance is to mainly suggest the winning or losing of the lottery results, and the selection ratio is the same regardless of the setting value, as the performance c,
The performance a and the performance b are included in the first type performance,
The gaming machine characterized in that the performance c is included in the second type performance.

Several examples can be considered regarding the number of first type effects and the number of second type effects described above. One is to treat performances with different appearance timings and appearance opportunities as one performance. That is, in other words, similar performances that have the same appearance timing and appearance opportunity but slightly different performance modes, such as performances that only differ in the lines displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, are It is simply a variation, and it is considered to be a single performance that includes various variations.
As a result, the balance of each performance implemented in the gaming machine 1 can be adjusted in consideration of the number of types of performances that a player can essentially consider as the number of performances, that is, the number of performances that include multiple variations. I can do it. In other words, when the intention is to reduce the number of effects that suggest setting values so as not to confuse the player, by considering the number of types of effects excluding variations, it is possible to create a balance between effects that does not feel strange to the player. It is possible.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects will be described.
The number of performances that have different appearance timings and/or appearance opportunities is the number of production groups,
The number of production variations is the number of production variations whose appearance timing and/or appearance trigger are similar to each other,
A gaming machine characterized in that said t and said s are the number of performance groups.

Another example of the number of type 1 effects and the number of type 2 effects is that even if the effects have similar appearance timings and appearance triggers, they are each treated as one effect. That is, in other words, even if the appearance timing and appearance opportunity are the same, if the presentation mode is slightly different, it will be interpreted as a different presentation. That is, the more variations there are in performances, the greater the number of performances.
Parts of performances with different variations are stored internally in the gaming machine 1 as common information. Therefore, by treating performances with different variations as different performances (separate performances), it is possible to realize a variety of performance modes while improving the efficiency of using storage capacity.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
The number of performances that have different appearance timings and/or appearance opportunities is the number of production groups,
The number of production variations is the number of production variations whose appearance timing and/or appearance trigger are similar to each other,
A gaming machine characterized in that said t and said s are the number of presentation variations.

In addition, when executing the setting value suggestion effect, the gaming machine 1A is configured to always execute the jackpot suggestion effect (without setting difference) and the jackpot suggestion effect (with setting difference) to avoid misunderstandings. It is possible to

Next, consider the number of performance opportunities. The performance 20 in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment is executable during the decorative symbol variation display game in the time saving state, and, like the effects 50, 52, and 53, is executable in game states other than the time saving state. It has not been. That is, compared to performances 50, 52, and 53, performance 20 is set to have fewer execution opportunities.
Therefore, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 1A in which the above-mentioned misunderstanding is less likely to occur because there are more opportunities to execute a suggestion effect that suggests a jackpot than there are opportunities to execute a suggestion effect that does not suggest a jackpot. becomes.

Furthermore, considering the number of performance opportunities, it can be considered that the gaming machine 1A has more opportunities to execute a suggestion performance that does not include a suggestion regarding a setting value than a suggestion performance that includes a suggestion regarding a setting value. be. Specifically, there are more opportunities to perform effects 52 and 53 than effects 20 and 50.
As a result, it is possible to prevent players from becoming confused because they do not know what the effects are suggesting due to the appearance of many effects that purely suggest jackpot lottery results related to activated reserved balls. can.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for deriving and displaying a display result by executing a variable display operation of the special symbol on the condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Decorative pattern display means for visually performing a variable display operation of a decorative pattern in conjunction with execution of a variable display operation of the special symbol;
acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information upon detection of a game ball by the starting means;
Specifying the storage order of the predetermined game information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined maximum number of stored pieces as an upper limit, until the special symbol display means executes a variable display operation of the special symbols. a retention memory means for retaining storage as an actuation retention ball capable of operating;
a number of held balls informing means for notifying the number of held balls, which is the number of active held balls, by displaying a holding icon for the number of held balls;
A look-ahead determination means that performs a look-ahead determination as to whether or not the action-reserved ball will win or lose a jackpot lottery at a predetermined timing before the action-reserved ball is subjected to the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol;
A look-ahead notice performance means for performing a look-ahead notice performance that changes a display mode of a hold icon for the operation hold ball that is subject to the look-ahead determination;
A storage means for storing a set value representing a probability level of whether or not a game state advantageous to the player will be won;
The pre-reading preview performance includes a first performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and in which it is impossible to guess the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery; At least one of a second performance that allows you to guess the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a third performance that makes it impossible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and that allows you to guess the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. Equipped with
The number of types of the first effects that are executable as the pre-read preview effects is a (a is 0 or more), and the number of types of the second effects that are executable as the pre-read preview effects is b ( b is 0 or more), and the number of types of the third performance that can be executed as the pre-read preview performance is c (c is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that (a+b) is a number less than or equal to c.

Next, a suggestion performance that suggests a jackpot will be explained.
In the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, effects 50, 52, and 53 can be executed during pre-reading as suggestion effects that suggest a jackpot. Among them, there are more types of performances for jackpot suggesting performances (with no setting difference) than for jackpot suggesting performances (with setting differences).
As a result, it is possible to produce more jackpot suggestion effects (without setting differences) that do not confuse whether the suggestion is about the set value Ve or the jackpot lottery win, so it is possible to create effects that are easy for players to understand. It becomes possible to do so. In particular, as shown in FIG. 122, since the number of types of performances implemented in the gaming machine 1A as jackpot suggesting performances (with different settings) is one (50 performances), the player can By understanding that the performance 50) is a performance that includes a suggestion regarding the set value Ve, it can be understood that the other performances (performances 52 and 53) are performances that only suggest a jackpot. You can enjoy the performance without worrying.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for deriving and displaying a display result by executing a variable display operation of the special symbol on the condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Decorative pattern display means for visually performing a variable display operation of a decorative pattern in conjunction with execution of a variable display operation of the special symbol;
acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information upon detection of a game ball by the starting means;
Specifying the storage order of the predetermined game information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined maximum number of stored pieces as an upper limit, until the special symbol display means executes a variable display operation of the special symbols. a retention memory means for retaining storage as an actuation retention ball capable of operating;
a number of held balls informing means for notifying the number of held balls, which is the number of active held balls, by displaying a holding icon for the number of held balls;
A look-ahead determination means that performs a look-ahead determination as to whether or not the action-reserved ball will win or lose a jackpot lottery at a predetermined timing before the action-reserved ball is subjected to the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol;
A look-ahead notice performance means for performing a look-ahead notice performance that changes a display mode of a hold icon for the operation hold ball that is subject to the look-ahead determination;
A storage means for storing a set value representing a probability level of whether or not a game state advantageous to the player will be won;
The pre-read preview performance includes a second performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a second performance in which the level of the set value cannot be predicted based on the performance mode and Equipped with at least one third performance that allows you to guess the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery,
The number of types of the second effects that can be executed as the pre-read preview effect is b (b is 0 or more), and the number of types of the third effect that can be executed as the pre-read preview effect is c ( c is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that b is a smaller number than c.

[13-4. Regarding fluctuation (first half)]

Among the performances shown in FIG. 122, the performances that are executable during the fluctuation (first half) of the gaming machine 1A of this embodiment are the performance 04 as a setting value change suggestion performance and the jackpot suggestion performance (setting A production 54 as a jackpot suggestion production (with no difference in settings), productions 62 and 63 as a jackpot suggestion production (with no difference in settings), and a production 80 as a lively production.

Regarding the effects that may appear during the fluctuation (first half), the number of types of suggestion effects that suggest a jackpot is greater than the number of types of suggestion effects that do not suggest a jackpot.
Specifically, the number of types of suggestion presentations that do not suggest a jackpot is only one, which is the setting value change suggestion presentation. Further, the number of types of suggestion performances that suggest a jackpot is one, a jackpot suggestion production (with a setting difference), and two jackpot suggestion productions (without a setting difference), for a total of three. Note that, as described above, the presentation 80 that does not provide any suggestion regarding the set value or the jackpot is excluded here.

During the fluctuation (first half), players are in a state of heightened interest in whether or not each preview performance, such as a reach performance, will be executed. If a large number of settings value suggestion performances or setting value change suggestion performances are executed in such a state, it will become an undesirable performance for players who are highly interested in whether or not the change in question has won the jackpot lottery. There is a risk that the appeal of the gaming machine 1A may be reduced by half.

In the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, the number of types of suggestion effects that suggest a jackpot is greater than the number of types of suggestion effects that do not suggest a jackpot. It is said that many suggestive presentations regarding jackpots of interest can appear.

An example of the configuration of such a gaming machine 1 will be given.
special symbol display means for deriving and displaying a display result by executing a variable display operation of the special symbol on the condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
As the special symbol variable display operation is executed, a first symbol display area in which a first decorative symbol is variably displayed, a second symbol display area in which a second decorative symbol is variably displayed, and a third symbol display area in which a third decorative symbol is variably displayed. a decorative pattern display means for visually performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern using three pattern display areas;
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the setting value based on the performance mode and it is impossible to estimate the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. A second performance in which it is possible to guess the height of the setting value, a third performance in which it is impossible to guess the height of the set value based on the performance mode, and a third performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a set value is changed based on the performance mode. a performance execution means capable of executing at least one of the fourth performances capable of inferring the presence or absence of the fourth performance;
The performance execution means is executable during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until two decorative patterns among the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. The number of types of the first effects is a (a is 0 or more), the number of types of the second effects that can be executed in the specific period is b (b is 0 or more), and the number of types of the second effects that can be executed in the specific period is The number of possible types of the third performance is c (c is 0 or more), the number of types of the fourth performance that can be executed in the specific period is d (d is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that (a+d) is a smaller number than (b+c).

In particular, in the gaming machine 1A of this embodiment, the only suggestion performance that does not suggest a jackpot that appears during the fluctuation (first half) is production 04, which is a setting value change suggestion performance. It is sufficient for the player to confirm the setting value change suggestion performance once, and the setting value change suggestion performance becomes unnecessary while the player continues playing the game. Therefore, there is little need for the setting value change suggestion performance to appear many times while the game continues, and the appearance probability may be lowered compared to other suggestion performances. In fact, as mentioned above, the effect 04 can be executed only at the time of winning a prize, which is the first fluctuation start timing after the power is turned on. That is, it is determined whether or not it appears once after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, performances 54, 62, and 63 are configured so that they can appear many times a day, and the opportunities for execution of the production are to suggest a jackpot rather than a suggestion production that does not suggest a jackpot. There are more suggestive performances.
As a result, almost all of the effects experienced by the player during the fluctuation (first half) are suggestion effects that suggest a jackpot, so it is possible for the player to be confused as to what suggestion effects have appeared. has been lowered.

Although the setting value change suggestion effect (for example, effect 04) is a effect with extremely limited opportunities for effect, it is also an important effect for determining whether or not to continue playing the gaming machine on which this effect appears. be.
Since such performance can be performed even though there are few performance opportunities, it is possible to stimulate the player's desire to play for a long time.

It has been explained that in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, the only suggestion effect that does not suggest a jackpot that appears during fluctuation (first half) is the effect 04, which is a setting value change suggestion effect. For example, the setting value suggestion effect is configured not to appear during the fluctuation (first half).
This reduces the possibility that the player will be confused as to what suggestive effect has appeared.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects will be given.
special symbol display means for deriving and displaying a display result by executing a variable display operation of the special symbol on the condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
As the special symbol variable display operation is executed, a first symbol display area in which a first decorative symbol is variably displayed, a second symbol display area in which a second decorative symbol is variably displayed, and a third symbol display area in which a third decorative symbol is variably displayed. a decorative pattern display means for visually performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern using three pattern display areas;
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and it is impossible to guess the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a first performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. A second performance that allows you to guess the height of the set value based on the performance mode, a third performance that makes it impossible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and that allows you to guess the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a third performance that changes the set value based on the performance mode. a performance execution means capable of executing at least one of the fourth performances capable of inferring the presence or absence of the fourth performance;
The effect execution means is configured to perform the effect on the first decorative pattern during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until two of the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. A game machine characterized in that one performance cannot be executed.

In addition, since there are two or more types of suggestion performances that suggest jackpots (productions 54, 62, and 63), it is possible to suggest jackpots using a variety of productions without being monotonous. It becomes. In other words, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.
In particular, since multiple jackpot suggesting effects (with no setting differences) have been implemented, and the number of types of effects is the largest (two effects, 62 and 63), we are interested in the jackpot lottery results related to this variation. It is said that it is possible to perform effective performances for players who own the game.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects will be given.
special symbol display means for deriving and displaying a display result by executing a variable display operation of the special symbol on the condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
As the special symbol variable display operation is executed, a first symbol display area in which a first decorative symbol is variably displayed, a second symbol display area in which a second decorative symbol is variably displayed, and a third symbol display area in which a third decorative symbol is variably displayed. a decorative pattern display means for visually performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern using three pattern display areas;
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the setting value based on the performance mode and it is impossible to estimate the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. A second performance in which it is possible to guess the height of the setting value, a third performance in which it is impossible to guess the height of the set value based on the performance mode, and a third performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a set value is changed based on the performance mode. a performance execution means capable of executing at least one of the fourth performances capable of inferring the presence or absence of the fourth performance;
The performance execution means displays a plurality of types of decorative patterns during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until two of the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute the third performance.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, the jackpot suggestion is larger than the total number of types of setting value change suggestion production, setting value suggestion production, and lively production (1, 0, 1, total 2). The total number of types of presentations (with setting differences) and jackpot suggestion presentations (with no setting differences) is greater (1 and 2, total of 3), making it the jackpot lottery that is of most interest to players. It is said that there are many variations of presentations that suggest wins and losses, and it is possible to improve the game's interest.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects will be given.
special symbol display means for deriving and displaying a display result by executing a variable display operation of the special symbol on the condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
As the special symbol variable display operation is executed, a first symbol display area in which a first decorative symbol is variably displayed, a second symbol display area in which a second decorative symbol is variably displayed, and a third symbol display area in which a third decorative symbol is variably displayed. a decorative pattern display means for visually performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern using three pattern display areas;
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the setting value based on the performance mode and it is impossible to estimate the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. A second performance in which it is possible to guess the height of the setting value, a third performance in which it is impossible to guess the height of the set value based on the performance mode, and a third performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a set value is changed based on the performance mode. A fourth performance in which it is possible to guess the presence or absence of a winning lottery, and a fifth performance in which it is impossible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. comprising means for execution;
The performance execution means is executable during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until two decorative patterns among the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. The number of types of the first effects is a (a is 0 or more), the number of types of the second effects that can be executed in the specific period is b (b is 0 or more), and the number of types of the second effects that can be executed in the specific period is The number of possible types of the third effect is c (c is 0 or more), the number of types of the fourth effect that can be executed in the specific period is d (d is 0 or more), and the number of types of the fourth effect that can be executed in the specific period is d (d is 0 or more). The number of types of the fifth effects that can be executed in is e (e is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that (a+d+e) is a smaller number than (b+c).

[13-5. Regarding fluctuation (second half)]

Among the performances shown in FIG. 122, the performances that are executable during the fluctuation (second half) are performance 58 as a jackpot suggestion production (with setting difference), production 64 as a jackpot suggestion production (with no setting difference), production 65, production 66, production 67.
That is, the gaming machine 1A in this example is not provided with a set value change suggestion performance and a setting value suggestion performance that can be executed during fluctuation (second half), and has one jackpot suggestion performance (with setting difference) and one jackpot suggestion performance. There are four performances (no difference in settings).

During the fluctuation (second half), since the setting value change suggestion performance and the setting value suggestion performance are not provided, the performance executed by the gaming machine 1A is a performance suggesting a jackpot, so the player is not informed about the content suggested by the performance. This will not cause any confusion.
In particular, during the fluctuation (second half), the decorative pattern on the liquid crystal display device 36 is in a reach state, so the interest in whether or not the fluctuation is a jackpot is significantly increased, and the It is undesirable to execute an effect that only suggests setting values at such timing.

For example, if a flashy performance is executed to create a sense of expectation for a player who is playing the game without knowing the features of the gaming machine 1A well, the player may not be able to play the game even though the performance is a performance that suggests a high setting value. The player may expect that the decorative symbol variation display game being executed at that time has a high possibility of winning the jackpot. As a result, if the decorative symbol variation display game fails, there is a risk that the player will be confused, or the player may become disappointed and end the game.
According to this example, since a performance that only suggests the set value Ve during the fluctuation (second half) cannot be executed, if the performance is executed without the risk of causing such a situation. In this case, it becomes possible to enjoy the performance by focusing only on the results of the jackpot lottery.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for deriving and displaying a display result by executing a variable display operation of the special symbol on the condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
As the special symbol variable display operation is executed, a first symbol display area in which a first decorative symbol is variably displayed, a second symbol display area in which a second decorative symbol is variably displayed, and a third symbol display area in which a third decorative symbol is variably displayed. a decorative pattern display means for visually performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern using three pattern display areas;
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the setting value based on the performance mode and it is impossible to estimate the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. A second performance in which it is possible to guess the height of the setting value, a third performance in which it is impossible to guess the height of the set value based on the performance mode, and a third performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a set value is changed based on the performance mode. a performance execution means capable of executing at least one of the fourth performances capable of inferring the presence or absence of the fourth performance;
The performance execution means specifies a period from a ready-to-reach state in which two decorative patterns among the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern are stopped and displayed until three decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that during a period, neither the first performance nor the fourth performance can be performed.

Furthermore, since there are two or more types of suggestion presentations for suggesting jackpots, it is possible to suggest jackpots using a variety of presentations without being monotonous. In other words, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for deriving and displaying a display result by executing a variable display operation of the special symbol on the condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
As the special symbol variable display operation is executed, a first symbol display area in which a first decorative symbol is variably displayed, a second symbol display area in which a second decorative symbol is variably displayed, and a third symbol display area in which a third decorative symbol is variably displayed. a decorative pattern display means for visually performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern using three pattern display areas;
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the setting value based on the performance mode and it is impossible to estimate the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. A second performance in which it is possible to guess the height of the setting value, a third performance in which it is impossible to guess the height of the set value based on the performance mode, and a third performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a set value is changed based on the performance mode. a performance execution means capable of executing at least one of the fourth performances capable of inferring the presence or absence of the fourth performance;
The performance execution means specifies a period from a ready-to-reach state in which two decorative patterns among the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern are stopped and displayed until three decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of types of the second effect and the third effect can be executed during a period.

Note that the performance in the ready-to-reach state may take a long time to execute. In such a situation, if not only a suggestion performance that suggests a jackpot but also a suggestion performance that does not suggest a jackpot is executed, there is a risk that the performance time will become longer, and the player will be bothered. You may feel it.
According to this example, the suggestion performance that does not suggest a jackpot during the fluctuation (second half) is not executed, so the performance time is prevented from becoming unnecessarily long.

It should be noted that among the timings 17 to 25 during the fluctuation (second half), the number of suggestion performances that suggest possible jackpots at timing 17 is the largest.
Specifically, there are two types of suggestion presentations that suggest a jackpot that can be executed at timing 17: presentation 58 and presentation 64. There are two types of suggestion productions, production 65 and production 66, which suggest a jackpot that can be executed at timing 19. The suggestion production that suggests a jackpot that can be executed at timings 20, 22, and 23 is one type of production 66. The suggestion production that suggests a jackpot that can be executed at timings 24 and 25 is one type of production 67.
A suggestion performance that suggests a jackpot that can be executed at timings 18 and 21 is not implemented in the gaming machine 1A in this example.

Timing 17 is the timing when the second symbol stops, and is one of the timings that the player greets with great expectations. That is, the player has a great interest in whether or not the same decorative symbol as the first symbol will stop.
By implementing many suggestion presentations that suggest jackpots that can be executed at such timing 17 in the game machine 1A, it is possible to provide the game machine 1A with high game interest for players.

It should be noted that there may be other timings at which players have high expectations. For example, this may also apply to the execution of the win/loss promotion effect at timing 20, the execution of the win/loss promotion effect at timing 23, or the execution of the promotion effect at timing 19 to notify whether or not the effect will develop. A similar effect can also be obtained by providing a wide variety of suggestion performances that suggest jackpots that can appear at such timings.

Furthermore, various performances may be made possible at one timing out of a plurality of timings at which players' expectations are high, or various performances may be made possible at all timings.
If a variety of effects can be executed at a single timing, the player's expectations regarding whether or not the effects will be executed are heightened when the timing arrives. In other words, the player recognizes the timing as the timing when the gaming machine 1A is most interested in gaming, so the timing is perceived as a timing unique to the gaming machine 1A, and the timing is differentiated from other gaming machines. can be achieved.
In addition, by occasionally appearing a suggestion performance that suggests a jackpot in a manner that catches the player by surprise at a timing other than the relevant timing, it is possible to significantly improve the player's desire to play.

Note that these effects are not limited to the period during fluctuation (second half). That is, the same effect can be obtained by configuring the gaming machine 1A so as to be able to execute various effects at the timing when the player is looking forward to it.

[13-6. About hitting the jackpot]

Among the performances shown in FIG. 122, the performance that can be executed during a jackpot (during a jackpot game) in the gaming machine 1A of this embodiment is only performance 15 as a setting value suggestion performance.

During the jackpot, the gaming machine 1A is configured so that the jackpot suggestion effect does not appear, so that it is determined that the effect that appears during the jackpot period is an effect that suggests the set value. This allows the person to understand the content of the performance appropriately.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the setting value based on the performance mode and it is impossible to estimate the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. A second performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value, and a third performance in which it is impossible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode, and a third performance in which the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery can be inferred. equipped with the means and
A gaming machine, wherein the performance execution means is configured to make it impossible to execute the second performance and the third performance during a jackpot game.

Further, during the jackpot, it is a period in which the player enjoys an advantageous situation, and it is also a period in which it is judged whether or not to continue playing games on the gaming machine 1A.
Since the only effect that appears during such a period is the setting value suggestion effect, the player who visually recognizes or experiences the effect is able to make an appropriate judgment.

During the jackpot game, it is possible to win a predetermined number of prize balls by placing game balls into the opened jackpot 50, but since it is relatively easy to enter the jackpot 50, it is not so easy to win. It is possible to play the game without paying attention to the big prize opening 50. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's interest in the gaming machine 1A may fade during the jackpot game.
However, in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, in the performance 15 as the setting value suggestion performance, it is possible to perform a sound performance based on the occurrence of over winning. That is, by launching the game ball so as to encourage the occurrence of an over-win, it is possible to improve the probability of occurrence of the setting value suggestion performance. Thereby, the player can improve the accuracy of guessing about the setting value Ve of the gaming machine 1A. That is, since the player can concentrate on playing the jackpot game in order to generate an over-win, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A big winning means formed in a gaming area and configured to be able to execute a closed state in which it is difficult or impossible to enter a game ball, and an open state in which it is easy to enter a game ball;
Entering ball counting means for counting game balls that have entered the big winning means based on detection information by ball entering detection means that detects game balls that have entered the big winning means;
A lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not it is a win;
an opening control means capable of controlling the big prize winning means to the open state until the number of game balls counted by the entered ball number counting means reaches the specified number of entered balls within a predetermined time limit;
A first performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and it is impossible to guess the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a first performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. A second performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the setting value, and a third performance in which it is impossible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery can be inferred. equipped with the means and
The game machine, wherein the performance execution means is enabled to execute the first performance when the counted game balls exceed the specified number of entered balls.

In addition, during the jackpot, even if game balls are won in the upper starting hole 34 or the lower starting hole 35, the winnings exceeding the maximum pending storage number will not be subject to the jackpot lottery. That is, at the stage when the number of active pending balls reaches the maximum pending memory number, the player may lose interest in winning the game balls into the upper starting hole 34 or the lower starting hole 35.
Therefore, when a game ball enters the upper starting hole 34 or the lower starting hole 35 in a state where the number of active pending balls reaches the maximum during a jackpot game, some kind of sound effect to suggest the set value is played. The gaming machine 1A may be configured to be able to perform setting value suggestion effects. As a result, even after the number of balls on hold has reached the maximum number of balls on hold, the player can be made interested in the fact that the game ball has entered the upper starting hole 34 or the lower starting hole 35. , it is possible to improve the game's interest.

[13-7. Regarding fluctuation (overall)]

Among the performances shown in FIG. 122, the performances that can be executed during the fluctuation (the whole) of the gaming machine 1A of this embodiment, that is, the performances that can be executed during the fluctuation (first half) and during the fluctuation (second half). The performances shown are production 04 as a setting value change suggestion production, production 54, 58 as a jackpot suggestion production (with setting difference), production 62, 63, 64, 65 as a jackpot suggestion production (without setting difference), 66, 67.

In the gaming machine 1A of the embodiment, the setting value suggestion performance is not included in the performance that may appear during the fluctuation (overall). In addition, the only setting value change suggestion effect that may appear is effect 04, which is only at the time of winning a prize, which is the first fluctuation start timing after the power is turned on, as described above. Timing is extremely limited.
Therefore, among the effects that can appear during the fluctuation (overall), there is almost no suggestion effect regarding the set value.
As a result, the performances that appear during fluctuations (overall) are almost certainly considered to be jackpot-suggesting performances, with the exception of performance 80, which does not make any suggestions, so appropriate information is provided without confusing players. is suggested.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for deriving and displaying a display result by executing a variable display operation of the special symbol on the condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
As the special symbol variable display operation is executed, a first symbol display area in which a first decorative symbol is variably displayed, a second symbol display area in which a second decorative symbol is variably displayed, and a third symbol display area in which a third decorative symbol is variably displayed. a decorative pattern display means for visually performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern using three pattern display areas;
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the setting value based on the performance mode and it is impossible to estimate the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. A second performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value, and a third performance in which it is impossible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode, and a third performance in which the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery can be inferred. equipped with the means and
The game machine, wherein the performance execution means is configured to make it impossible to execute any of the first performances during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

Also, among the jackpot suggesting effects that can appear during fluctuation (overall), those with setting differences (effects 54, 58) are different from those without setting differences (effects 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67). The number of types is smaller in comparison.
During a fluctuation, the interest in winning or losing the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation is the highest. On the other hand, a production that only suggests the level of expectation of winning or losing a jackpot lottery without making any suggestion regarding the set value Ve (i.e., a jackpot suggestion production (no setting difference)) does not suggest the set value Ve and does not suggest the expectation of winning or losing the jackpot lottery. By providing a larger number of performances than those that suggest both success and success (i.e., jackpot suggestion performances (with different settings)), it is possible to provide performances that do not confuse players as to what kind of suggestion performance they are suggesting. .

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for deriving and displaying a display result by executing a variable display operation of the special symbol on the condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
As the special symbol variable display operation is executed, a first symbol display area in which a first decorative symbol is variably displayed, a second symbol display area in which a second decorative symbol is variably displayed, and a third symbol display area in which a third decorative symbol is variably displayed. a decorative pattern display means for visually performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern using three pattern display areas;
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the setting value based on the performance mode and it is impossible to estimate the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. A second performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value, and a third performance in which it is impossible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode, and a third performance in which the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery can be inferred. equipped with the means and
The performance execution means determines that the number of types of the second performance that can be executed during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is b (b is 0 or more). , the number of types of the third effects that are executable during the specific period is c (c is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that c is a larger number than b.

Furthermore, there are a plurality of types of jackpot suggesting effects (with different settings) as effects that can appear during the fluctuation (overall). This makes it possible to perform a variety of performances that suggest only the winning or losing results of the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation that the player is most interested in, thereby improving the interest in the game.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for deriving and displaying a display result by executing a variable display operation of the special symbol on the condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
As the special symbol variable display operation is executed, a first symbol display area in which a first decorative symbol is variably displayed, a second symbol display area in which a second decorative symbol is variably displayed, and a third symbol display area in which a third decorative symbol is variably displayed. a decorative pattern display means for visually performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern using three pattern display areas;
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the setting value based on the performance mode and it is impossible to estimate the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. A second performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value, and a third performance in which it is impossible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode, and a third performance in which the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery can be inferred. equipped with the means and
The game machine, wherein the performance execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of the third performance during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

It may be possible to obtain effects by differentiating the aspects of the performance (performance content, appearance probability, etc.) executed during the fluctuation (first half) and fluctuation (second half) that make up the fluctuation (whole). .
For example, the number (n) of performances that can suggest setting values that are executable in the first period (during fluctuation (first half)) is the same as the number (n) of performances that can suggest setting values that are executable during the second period (during fluctuation (second half)). It is conceivable to increase the number (m) of the first type effects that were made executable in .
In the second period, it is considered necessary for the enjoyment of the game to be able to perform a performance to suggest the winning or losing results of the jackpot lottery. In such a period, performing an effect in which setting values can be suggested increases the number of effects executed in the second period, and in some cases, multiple types of effects are executed simultaneously. This results in an increase in the length of time used for the performance and an increase in the processing load on the CPU related to the performance. According to this configuration, by avoiding such a situation, it is possible to contribute to a reduction in processing load and power consumption. Further, in the image presentation displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, it is possible to reduce the possibility that frames will be dropped.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
a setting means capable of setting a setting value representing a stage of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
a display means capable of variably displaying a production pattern according to a lottery result as to whether or not to generate a profit state;
and performance execution control means capable of controlling execution of a first type performance that suggests the setting value set in the gaming machine while the performance symbol is changing by the display means,
In a gaming machine, the performance symbols are composed of three symbol groups that vary, respectively.
The period from when three symbol groups start to fluctuate until two of them stop fluctuating in the display means is defined as a first period (during fluctuation (first half)), and the two symbol groups do not fluctuate. If the period from the time it stops until all the three symbol groups are stopped is the second period (during fluctuation (second half)),
The number of the first type performances that can be executed in the first period is n,
Assuming that the number of the first type effects that can be executed in the second period is m,
A gaming machine characterized in that n>m≧0 holds true.

In addition, by creating a difference in the effects that can be executed depending on the stopping mode when two of the three symbol groups (left symbol group, middle symbol group, right symbol group) are stopped and displayed, the effect can be improved. In some cases it is possible to obtain.
For example, if the stop mode when two symbol groups are stopped and displayed is not "reach state (reach mode)", the number of type 1 effects (m1 pieces) that can be executed in the second period is "reach state (reach mode)". It is conceivable to make the number larger than the number of type 1 effects (m2 pieces) that can be executed in the second period when the number of effects is ``ready-to-reach mode)''.
In the second period, it is essential to be able to execute a performance to suggest the winning or losing result of the jackpot lottery for the sake of game enjoyment, but if the state is not in a reach state, there is no problem even if the first type performance appears. do not have. Therefore, if it is in a non-reach state, there is a high possibility that the performance for indicating the winning or losing result of the jackpot lottery will not be executed, and there is a low possibility that the performance and the first type performance will be executed at the same time, so the processing burden on the CPU will be The first type of effect can be performed without causing an increase in the amount of energy or power consumption. In addition, by executing the first type effect instead of executing the effect to suggest the winning or losing result of the jackpot lottery, it is possible to efficiently suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play.
That is, in the second period, it is desirable to increase the number of executable type 1 effects in the non-reach state than in the reach state.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
In the display mode when the three symbol groups start to fluctuate and two of them stop fluctuating,
If the two symbol groups are not in a predetermined reach mode, the number of the first type effects that can be performed in the second period is m1,
When the two symbol groups are in a predetermined reach mode, the number of the first type performances that can be executed in the second period is m2,
A gaming machine characterized in that m1>m2≧0 holds true.

Several examples of the above-mentioned type 1 effects (effects in which setting values can be suggested) will be specifically explained.
In the following explanation, a performance whose main purpose is to suggest the set value will be referred to as "performance a", and a performance whose main purpose is to suggest the result of a jackpot lottery will be referred to as "performance b". Or let it be "performance c". Regarding "effects b" and "effects c," effects whose selection ratios differ depending on the set value are referred to as "effects b," and effects whose selection ratios do not vary depending on the set values are defined as "effects c."
In the first example, the first type performance includes performance a, but does not include performance b and performance c.
As a result, performances that are performed primarily to suggest the winning or losing results of the jackpot lottery are not included in the first type of performance, so it is preferable to perform the first type of performance at a desirable timing to suggest the winning or losing results of the jackpot lottery. By not performing seed effects, it is possible to obtain the various effects described above.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
A performance that mainly suggests the setting value as a performance purpose is defined as a performance a,
The purpose of the performance is to mainly suggest the winning or losing of the lottery results, and a performance with different selection ratios depending on the set value is set as a performance b,
The purpose of the performance is to mainly suggest the winning or losing of the lottery results, and the selection ratio is the same regardless of the setting value, as the performance c,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first type performance includes the performance a, but does not include the performance b and the performance c.

Furthermore, the second example of the above-mentioned first type performance is one in which the first type performance includes performance b but does not include performance a and performance c.
As a result, although the main purpose is to suggest the results of a jackpot lottery, it also includes suggestions regarding set values, so to speak, so that some players may be confused as to what is being suggested. Defined as type 1 performance.
By controlling such a first type effect so as not to execute it at a timing when it is desirable to execute a effect for suggesting the winning or losing result of a jackpot lottery, it is possible to create an effect that does not give the player a misunderstanding of the content of the suggestion. can be executed at the appropriate timing. In addition, even if the performance (performance a) whose main purpose is to suggest a setting value is not executed, the performance whose main purpose is a performance to suggest the winning or losing result of a jackpot lottery, and, By making it possible to execute effects with different selection ratios depending on the set value, it is possible to interpolate not performing effect a.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
A performance that mainly suggests the setting value as a performance purpose is defined as a performance a,
The purpose of the performance is to mainly suggest the winning or losing of the lottery results, and a performance with different selection ratios depending on the set value is set as a performance b,
The purpose of the performance is to mainly suggest the winning or losing of the lottery results, and the selection ratio is the same regardless of the setting value, as the performance c,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first type performance includes the performance b but does not include the performance a and the performance c.

Furthermore, in the third example of the above-mentioned first type performance, the first type performance includes performance a and performance b, but does not include performance c.
As a result, not only is there a performance (direction a) whose main purpose is not to suggest the winning or losing result of the jackpot lottery, but also a performance whose main purpose is to suggest the winning or losing result of the jackpot lottery, but since the selection ratio differs depending on the setting value, Performances that allow suggestion are also defined as type 1 performances.
By not executing such a first type effect at a timing when it is desirable to execute a effect to suggest the winning or losing result of the jackpot lottery, the player can reduce the setting value set on the gaming machine 1 that is currently playing. It becomes possible to enjoy the performance without worrying about how much Ve is. Further, at this timing, by mainly executing effects with the same selection ratio regardless of the setting value, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU and reduce power consumption.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
A performance that mainly suggests the setting value as a performance purpose is defined as a performance a,
The purpose of the performance is to mainly suggest the winning or losing of the lottery results, and a performance with different selection ratios depending on the set value is set as a performance b,
The purpose of the performance is to mainly suggest the winning or losing of the lottery results, and the selection ratio is the same regardless of the setting value, as the performance c,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first type performance includes the performance a and the performance b, but does not include the performance c.

Moreover, several examples can be considered regarding the number of first type effects. One is to treat performances with different appearance timings and appearance opportunities as one performance. In other words, similar performances that have the same appearance timing and appearance opportunity but slightly different performance formats, such as performances that only differ in the lines displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, are It is simply a variation, and it is considered to be a single production that includes various variations.
As a result, the balance of each performance implemented in the gaming machine 1 can be adjusted in consideration of the number of types of performances that a player can essentially consider as the number of performances, that is, the number of performances that include multiple variations. I can do it. In other words, when the intention is to reduce the number of effects that suggest setting values so as not to confuse the player, by considering the number of types of effects excluding variations, it is possible to create a balance between effects that does not feel strange to the player. It is possible.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
The number of performances that have different appearance timings and/or appearance opportunities is the number of production groups,
The number of production variations is the number of production variations whose appearance timing and/or appearance trigger are similar to each other,
A gaming machine characterized in that said n and said m are the number of presentation groups.

Another example of the number of type 1 effects is that even if the effects have similar appearance timings and appearance triggers, they are each treated as one effect. That is, in other words, even if the appearance timing and appearance opportunity are the same, if the presentation mode is slightly different, it will be interpreted as a different presentation. That is, the more variations there are in performances, the greater the number of performances.
Parts of performances with different variations are stored internally in the gaming machine 1 as common information. Therefore, by treating performances with different variations as different performances (separate performances), it is possible to realize a variety of performance modes while improving the efficiency of using storage capacity.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
The number of performances that have different appearance timings and/or appearance opportunities is the number of production groups,
The number of production variations is the number of production variations whose appearance timing and/or appearance trigger are similar to each other,
A gaming machine characterized in that said n and said m are the number of production variations.

[13-8. Setting value suggestion effect and appearance timing]

The setting value suggestion effects that can appear in this embodiment are effects 01, 15, and 20. The number of types of these effects that appear during other periods is greater than during the period of change (overall). Specifically, there are 0 types of setting value suggestion effects that can appear during the fluctuation (overall), and 3 types of setting value suggestion effects that can appear during other periods.
This makes it difficult for the setting value suggestion effect to appear during the fluctuation (overall) when the greatest interest is in winning or losing the jackpot lottery for the fluctuation, and at other times, the gaming machine 1A that is currently playing continues. A setting value suggestion performance that can be used as a basis for determining whether or not to play the game is likely to appear. Therefore, appropriate information will be provided.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for deriving and displaying a display result by executing a variable display operation of the special symbol on the condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
As the special symbol variable display operation is executed, a first symbol display area in which a first decorative symbol is variably displayed, a second symbol display area in which a second decorative symbol is variably displayed, and a third symbol display area in which a third decorative symbol is variably displayed. a decorative pattern display means for visually performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern using three pattern display areas;
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A performance execution means capable of executing at least one first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the set value based on the performance mode and in which it is impossible to estimate the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery,
The effect executing means is configured to set the number of types of the first effects that can be executed during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed to be a (a is 0 or more), and The number of types of the first effects that can be executed in a specific period is b (b is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a smaller number than b.

[13-9. Jackpot suggestion performance and appearance timing]

In this embodiment, the jackpot suggesting performances (with different settings) that can appear are performances 50, 54, and 58. The number of types of effects that can appear during the fluctuation (overall) is greater than the number of types of effects that can appear during other periods.
In other words, there are two types of jackpot suggestion performances (with different settings) that can appear during fluctuations (overall), and two types of jackpot suggestion performances (with different settings) that can appear during other periods. is considered to be one type.

Since the jackpot suggestion performance (with different settings) is a type of jackpot suggestion production, it is said that it can appear frequently during fluctuations, and as a result, it is possible to provide appropriate information to players who are interested in winning or losing the jackpot lottery of the relevant fluctuation. It is possible to perform a performance.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for deriving and displaying a display result by executing a variable display operation of the special symbol on the condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
As the special symbol variable display operation is executed, a first symbol display area in which a first decorative symbol is variably displayed, a second symbol display area in which a second decorative symbol is variably displayed, and a third symbol display area in which a third decorative symbol is variably displayed. a decorative pattern display means for visually performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern using three pattern display areas;
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A performance execution means capable of executing at least one second performance capable of estimating the level of the setting value based on the performance mode and the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery,
The effect executing means is configured to set the number of types of the second effects that can be executed during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed to be a (a is 0 or more), and The number of types of the second effects that can be executed in a specific period is b (b is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a larger number than b.

In addition, during the fluctuation, instead of making it possible to separately execute the setting value suggestion performance, the jackpot suggestion performance also serves as the setting value suggestion performance, that is, the jackpot suggestion performance (with setting difference) can appear. Because of this, many of the effects that appear during fluctuations are effects that suggest jackpots, so it is possible to provide appropriate suggestions to the player, and also to encourage players who are interested in the set value Ve. Appropriate suggestions regarding the set value Ve can also be made to the person. In addition, since the effect 54 and the like serve as a suggestion effect regarding the set value Ve and a suggestion effect regarding the jackpot, the number of effects implemented in the gaming machine 1A can be suppressed, so that the number of effects implemented in the gaming machine 1A used for the effect can be reduced. This can contribute to reducing storage space.

In this embodiment, the jackpot suggesting performances (with no setting difference) that can appear are performances 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, and 67. In the jackpot suggesting performance (no setting difference), the number of types of performances that can appear during the fluctuation (overall) is increased (6 types) compared to other periods. As a result, the jackpot suggestion effect (with no setting difference) is displayed at the timing when the player is most interested in winning or losing the jackpot lottery, so that an appropriate suggestion can be made to the player.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
special symbol display means for deriving and displaying a display result by executing a variable display operation of the special symbol on the condition that the starting means detects a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
As the special symbol variable display operation is executed, a first symbol display area in which a first decorative symbol is variably displayed, a second symbol display area in which a second decorative symbol is variably displayed, and a third symbol display area in which a third decorative symbol is variably displayed. a decorative pattern display means for visually performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern using three pattern display areas;
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A performance execution means capable of executing at least one third performance in which it is impossible to estimate the level of the setting value based on the performance mode and the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery.
The performance execution means is configured to set the number of types of the third performance that can be executed during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed to be a (a is 0 or more), and The number of types of the third effects that can be executed in a specific period is b (b is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a larger number than b.

In addition, the largest number of types of jackpot suggestion performances (with no setting difference) are those that can appear during the fluctuation (second half) among the fluctuations. The period during the fluctuation (second half) is considered to be a reach state, and is the period in which the player is most interested in the winning or losing of the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation. By providing a variety of jackpot suggesting effects (with no differences in settings) during such periods, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game without making him bored.

[13-10. Production buttons and each production]

Each performance implemented in the gaming machine 1A of this embodiment includes a performance that is displayed using an operator such as the performance button 13. Specifically, each of the performances 01, 50, 53, 62, 65, and 67 can be executed by operating the operator. The effects circled in FIG. 122 correspond to the effects.

A performance that appears using a manipulator is, for example, a performance that appears when the manipulator is operated, but the performance itself does not appear when the manipulator is not operated. Alternatively, the effects may appear immediately when the operator is operated, but the effect may appear (proceed) after a predetermined period of time if the operator is not operated.

Among the cases where the effect appears (proceeds) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed even if no operation is performed, there are cases where the effect time differs depending on whether or not the operation is performed.
A specific example will be explained.
First, image effect A is executed to display an image urging the user to press the effect button 13 on the liquid crystal display device 36. When the player presses the effect button 13, the effect progresses by executing image effect B on the liquid crystal display device 36, and finally, some kind of suggestion is made by performing image effect C. On the other hand, if the player does not press the effect button 13, after a predetermined period of time such as 5 seconds has elapsed, image effect C for presenting suggested content is performed.
That is, the flow of effects on the liquid crystal display device 36 when the effect button 13 is pressed is image effects A, B, and C, whereas the flow of effects on the liquid crystal display device 36 when the effect button 13 is not pressed is The flow of effects continues with image effects A and C.
Such a performance is considered to be a mode of a performance that appears (proceeds) in response to an operator.

Among the performances implemented in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, the performance that appears using the operator is compared to the setting value suggestion performance (performance 01), and the jackpot suggestion performance (performance 50). , 53, 62, 65, 67) have a larger number of types.
The setting value suggestion performance allows the player to obtain important information used to determine whether to continue playing the game on the gaming machine 1A or to start playing the game on the gaming machine 1A. This is a possible performance. Such an important effect may not appear depending on whether or not the operator is operated, and the presentation time of an important effect may be shortened depending on whether or not the operator is operated, resulting in insufficient confirmation of the suggested content. This can be extremely disadvantageous for players.

In the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, the setting value suggestion effect that is displayed using the operator such as the effect button 13 is only effect 01, so that many of the setting value suggestion effects are Suggestions can be transmitted equally regardless of the user's manipulation.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
A special symbol display means that performs a variable display operation of the special symbol and derives and displays a display result on the condition that the operating means and the starting means that can be operated by the player detect a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied. and,
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the setting value based on the performance mode and it is impossible to estimate the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. A second performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value, and a third performance in which it is impossible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode, and a third performance in which the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery can be inferred. equipped with the means and
The number of types of the first effects executed in response to the operation of the operation means is a (a is 0 or more), and the number of types of the second effects executed in response to the operation of the operation means is b. (b is 0 or more), and the number of types of the third effects executed in response to the operation of the operating means is c (c is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a smaller number than (b+c).

Furthermore, among the various suggested performances triggered by the operation of the performance button 13 implemented in the gaming machine 1A, for the setting value suggestion performance, the performance start timing and end timing are not changed by the operation.
For example, in presentation 01, after the setting value suggestion presentation is started by pressing the presentation button 13, the presentation ends at a predetermined timing after the presentation starts, regardless of whether the presentation button 13 is pressed. That is, the end timing of the performance is the timing when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the performance, regardless of whether the performance button 13 is pressed.

On the other hand, among the various suggestive performances triggered by the operation of the performance button 13, for the jackpot suggestive performance, the performance start timing and end timing are different depending on the operation.
For example, in the effect 50, a pending change notice effect is executed, but after an image effect for prompting the user to press the effect button 13, the next image effect (for example, An image effect (image rendering that changes the pending icon from its normal color to a specific color) is executed. That is, the image effect that changes the pending icon from the normal color to a specific color, which is started by pressing the effect button 13, is performed at different timings depending on the press of the effect button 13. Furthermore, if the presentation button 13 is pressed late, the end timing of the presentation will be delayed accordingly.

In addition, to put this in another way, it can be said that among the various suggestion performances triggered by the operation of the performance button 13 implemented in the gaming machine 1A, for the setting value suggestion performance, the performance time length is not changed by the operation. .
Furthermore, among the various suggestion presentations triggered by the operation of the presentation button 13, it can be said that the presentation time length of the jackpot suggestion presentation is variable depending on the operation.

As for setting value suggestion effects, as mentioned above, confirmation of the suggested contents may not be possible because the effect does not appear depending on whether or not the operator is operated, and the effect time is shortened depending on whether or not the operator is operated. Since it can be extremely disadvantageous for the player if the game is not enough, the end timing and performance time length are not changed.

On the other hand, the jackpot suggestion performance is a suggestion performance regarding the winning or losing of the jackpot lottery in the relevant fluctuation (or the fluctuation scheduled to be executed in the future for the balls on hold), and the player's desire to quickly obtain information about the winning or losing. There is also a desire to thoroughly enjoy the content of the performance. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment, by making the start timing, end timing, and performance time length variable depending on the operation timing of the operation button 13, etc., an appropriate performance can be performed in accordance with the player's playing style. It is said that it is possible to appear.

An example of the configuration of such a gaming machine 1 is shown below.
A special symbol display means that performs a variable display operation of the special symbol and derives and displays a display result on the condition that the operating means and the starting means that can be operated by the player detect a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied. and,
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the setting value based on the performance mode and it is impossible to estimate the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. A second performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value, and a third performance in which it is impossible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode, and a third performance in which the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery can be inferred. equipped with the means and
The end timing of the first performance executed in response to the operation of the operation means is unchanged regardless of the operation timing or presence or absence of the operation of the operation means,
The end timing of at least a part of the second performance or the third performance executed in response to the operation of the operation means is variable depending on the operation timing or presence or absence of the operation of the operation means. Characteristic gaming machines.

Further, the following configuration example of the gaming machine 1 can also be considered.
A special symbol display means that performs a variable display operation of the special symbol and derives and displays a display result on the condition that the operating means and the starting means that can be operated by the player detect a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied. and,
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the setting value based on the performance mode and it is impossible to estimate the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. A second performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value, and a third performance in which it is impossible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode, and a third performance in which the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery can be inferred. equipped with the means and
The performance time length of the first performance that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means remains unchanged depending on the operation timing or whether or not the operation means is operated,
The performance time length of at least a part of the second performance or the third performance that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means is variable depending on the operation timing or whether or not the operation means is operated. A gaming machine featuring:

Furthermore, performance 01 is a performance that is executed in response to the player pressing a certain operator while waiting for a customer, and is a kind of so-called hidden performance. Therefore, this is different from other performances in which execution is decided to appeal to the player with suggested contents, but the execution is canceled due to non-operation of the operator.
Therefore, with regard to the setting value suggestion performance executed during the game of the gaming machine 1A (during pre-reading, fluctuation, or jackpot), the suggestion content can be transmitted equally regardless of the player's operation.

In the gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, the jackpot suggesting performances that are displayed using the operators such as the performance button 13 are performances 50, 53, 62, 65, and 67. In addition, there are cases in which the effect does not appear or the effect time is shortened depending on the player's operation.
The jackpot suggesting performance is a performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot game will occur in the near future after the execution of the performance, and even if the performance is missed, it is unlikely to be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, many jackpot suggesting effects are implemented in which the effect appears (or develops) in response to the operation of the operator, for the purpose of improving the sense of realism and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

It should be noted that, as long as the value is being varied (overall), there is no setting value suggestion effect that is executed in response to the operation of the operator.
The performance executed in response to the operation of the operator is considered to be highly anticipated by the player. When such a performance is executed during a fluctuation, the player tends to assume that the performance is a suggestion about the jackpot of the fluctuation in which the player is most interested at the time. If a setting value suggestion performance is performed at such a timing, there is a risk that a performance that does not meet the player's expectations will be performed, or that the player will be confused by the content of the performance.
Therefore, the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment is configured so that when a performance accompanied by an operation of an operator is performed during fluctuation, the performance is always a jackpot suggesting performance.
With such a configuration, an appropriate performance that meets the expectations of the players is executed, and the players are not confused.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
A special symbol display means that performs a variable display operation of the special symbol and derives and displays a display result on the condition that the operating means and the starting means that can be operated by the player detect a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied. and,
As the special symbol variable display operation is executed, a first symbol display area in which a first decorative symbol is variably displayed, a second symbol display area in which a second decorative symbol is variably displayed, and a third symbol display area in which a third decorative symbol is variably displayed. a decorative pattern display means for visually performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern using three pattern display areas;
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the setting value based on the performance mode and it is impossible to estimate the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a first performance in which it is possible to estimate the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. A second performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value, and a third performance in which it is impossible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode, and a third performance in which the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery can be inferred. equipped with the means and
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance triggered by the operation of the operating means during a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific performance does not include the first performance.

Further, in the gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, the setting value suggestion performance triggered by the operation of an operator such as the performance button 13 is such that the content of the performance remains unchanged regardless of the operation mode of the operator. For example, performance 01 implemented in the gaming machine 1A is started by pressing the performance button 13. However, the performance content is based on performance content determined in advance by lottery, and is not variable depending on the operation mode (operation timing and presence or absence of operation) of the performance button 13.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, the content of the jackpot suggesting performance triggered by the operation of an operator such as the performance button 13 is variable depending on the operation mode of the operator. For example, the effect 50 implemented in the gaming machine 1A executes an image effect to prompt the user to press the effect button 13, and then determines whether or not the pending icon changes to a color with higher expectations when the effect button 13 is pressed. An image effect is executed that shows a lottery being held, and an image effect is executed in which the pending icon changes to one with a high expectation level.
However, if the effect button 13 is not pressed after executing the image effect to prompt the user to press the effect button 13, an image effect will be executed in which the pending icon changes to a highly anticipated one after a certain period of time has elapsed. be done. That is, the mode of image presentation differs depending on whether or not the presentation button 13 is pressed.

Since the setting value suggestion effect is an important effect for the player to decide whether to continue playing the game, etc., by presenting the same effect regardless of the operation mode of the operation elements such as the effect button 13, the game The purpose is to present appropriate suggestions to the person concerned.
The jackpot suggesting performance is a performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot game will occur in the near future after the execution of the performance, and even if the performance is missed, it is unlikely to be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, for the purpose of improving the player's interest in the game, the content of the performance is configured to change depending on the operation mode of the operator such as the performance button 13.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 is shown below.
A special symbol display means that performs a variable display operation of the special symbol and derives and displays a display result, on the condition that the operation means operable by the player and the starting means detect a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied. and,
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and it is impossible to guess the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a first performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. A second performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the setting value, and a third performance in which it is impossible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery can be inferred. equipped with the means and
In the first performance executed in response to the operation of the operating means, the performance mode is the same regardless of the difference in the mode of the operation,
At least a part of the second performance or the third performance executed in response to the operation of the operating means is characterized in that the performance mode is different depending on the mode of the operation. Game machine.

The gaming machine 1 described above may further include the following features.
A gaming machine characterized in that the different performance modes have different performance times.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may have the following features.
A gaming machine characterized in that the different presentation modes are different image presentations.

In the performance that appears using the manipulators (hereinafter referred to as operation performance), the difference between fluctuating (first half) and fluctuating (second half) may be considered.
For example, the period from when three symbol groups start to fluctuate until two of them stop fluctuating is the first period (during fluctuating (first half)), and when two symbol groups stop fluctuating, If the period from 1 to 3 until all three symbol groups are stopped is defined as the second period (during fluctuation (second half)), a production that can suggest a set value for the operation production that can be executed in the second period (first It is conceivable that it does not include seed production).
In the second period, it is considered necessary for the enjoyment of the game to be able to perform a performance to suggest the winning or losing results of the jackpot lottery. In such a period, if a performance that allows setting values to be suggested is performed as an operation performance, the number of performances executed during the second period increases, and in some cases, multiple types of performances may be executed at the same time. This results in an increase in the length of time used for the performance and an increase in the processing load on the CPU related to the performance. According to this configuration, by avoiding such a situation, it is possible to contribute to a reduction in processing load and power consumption. Further, in the image presentation displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, it is possible to reduce the possibility that frames will be dropped.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
a setting means capable of setting a setting value representing a stage of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
a display means capable of variably displaying a production pattern according to a lottery result as to whether or not to generate a profit state;
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
An operation performance using the operation means,
A first type effect that suggests the setting value set in the gaming machine, and a effect execution control means capable of controlling the execution,
The production pattern is composed of three pattern groups that each vary,
A period from when three symbol groups start to fluctuate until two of them stop fluctuating in the display means is defined as a first period, and from when the two symbol groups stop fluctuating to when the three symbol groups stop fluctuating. If the period until all symbol groups are stopped is the second period,
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation performance that can be executed at least in the second period does not include the first type performance.

Some examples of the above-mentioned type 1 effects will be explained.
In addition, a performance that is an operation performance and whose main purpose is to suggest the set value is referred to as "performance Ba", and a performance that is an operation performance whose main purpose is to suggest the winning or losing result of a jackpot lottery. The performance is set as "performance Bb" or "performance Bc." Regarding "performance Bb" and "performance Bc", a performance whose selection ratio differs depending on the setting value is "performance Bb", and a performance whose selection ratio does not differ according to the setting value is "performance Bc".
Further, a performance that is an operation performance and a first type performance is defined as a "specific performance", and a performance that is an operation performance but is not a first type performance is defined as a "non-specific performance".

In the first example, the specific performance includes performance Ba and does not include performance Bb and performance Bc. As a result, since the operation performance that is performed mainly to suggest the winning or losing result of the jackpot lottery is not included in the specific performance, it is preferable to perform the performance to suggest the winning or losing result of the jackpot lottery at a desirable timing. By not performing the performance, it becomes possible to perform an appropriate operation performance without causing confusion for the player. Further, by not executing the effect Bb or the effect Bc at the timing of executing the specific effect, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU and the power consumption.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
The performance that is the operation performance and the first type performance is a specific performance,
The operation performance that is other than the first type performance is considered as a non-specific performance,
The operation performance is a performance that mainly suggests the setting value as the purpose of the performance, and
The operation performance is mainly a suggestion regarding the winning or losing of the lottery result as the purpose of the performance, and further, the performance with different selection ratios depending on the set value is set as performance Bb,
The operation performance is mainly a suggestion regarding the winning or losing of the lottery result as the purpose of the performance, and furthermore, the performance with the same selection ratio regardless of the setting value is set as performance Bc,
The gaming machine according to the description, wherein the specific performance includes the performance Ba and does not include the performance Bb and the performance Bc.

In the second example, the specific performance includes performance Bb and does not include performance Ba and performance Bc. As a result, although the main purpose is to suggest the winning or losing results of the jackpot lottery, the operation effects that also include suggestions regarding setting values, so to speak, may leave some players confused as to what is being suggested. A sexual performance is defined as a specific performance.
By controlling so as not to execute a specific performance at a timing when it is desirable to execute a performance to suggest the winning or losing result of a jackpot lottery, it is possible to perform a performance at an appropriate timing that does not give the player a misunderstanding of the suggested content. It becomes possible to execute. Furthermore, by not executing the specific effect, even if the effect Ba whose main purpose is to provide suggestions regarding the set value does not appear, the effect Bb having a different selection ratio depending on the set value can appear. It is possible to display an effect that replaces the suggestion regarding the set value. Therefore, depending on the player, information regarding setting values can be appropriately transmitted, and a variety of information can be provided with less performance.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
The performance that is the operation performance and the first type performance is a specific performance,
The operation performance that is other than the first type performance is considered as a non-specific performance,
The operation performance is a performance that mainly suggests the setting value as the purpose of the performance, and
The operation performance is mainly a suggestion regarding the winning or losing of the lottery result as the purpose of the performance, and further, the performance with different selection ratios depending on the set value is set as performance Bb,
The operation performance is mainly a suggestion regarding the winning or losing of the lottery result as the purpose of the performance, and furthermore, the performance with the same selection ratio regardless of the setting value is set as performance Bc,
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific performance includes the performance Bb and does not include the performance Ba and the performance Bc.

In the third example, the specific performance includes performance Ba and performance Bb, and does not include performance Bc. Thereby, a performance that can suggest a setting value is defined as a specific performance. Therefore, when performing an operation performance at a timing that does not cause a specific performance to appear, the player can grasp the suggested content of the winning or losing result for the jackpot lottery without causing confusion about the content of the production (or the content suggested in the production). be able to. That is, the content suggested by the performance is made easier to understand.
In addition, since the effects Ba and Bb are not executed at the timing when the specific effect is not to be displayed, the processing load on the CPU is reduced, the power consumption is reduced, or the processing of the display means (liquid crystal display device 36, etc.) used for the effect is reduced. It becomes possible to reduce the burden. In particular, in the liquid crystal display device 36, since the frequency of performing processing for simultaneously displaying a plurality of effects is reduced, it is possible to reduce the possibility of dropped frames and the like.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
The performance that is the operation performance and the first type performance is a specific performance,
The operation performance that is other than the first type performance is considered as a non-specific performance,
The operation performance is a performance that mainly suggests the setting value as the purpose of the performance, and
The operation performance is mainly a suggestion regarding the winning or losing of the lottery result as the purpose of the performance, and further, the performance with different selection ratios depending on the set value is set as performance Bb,
The operation performance is mainly a suggestion regarding the winning or losing of the lottery result as the purpose of the performance, and furthermore, the performance with the same selection ratio regardless of the setting value is set as performance Bc,
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific performance includes the performance Ba and the performance Bb, but does not include the performance Bc.

Furthermore, in the performances executed during the fluctuation, it is conceivable to make the number of non-specific performances larger than the number of specific performances.
The specific effects include effects that can give suggestions regarding set values. By reducing the possibility that such a performance will appear during fluctuations, the number of performances that suggest the winning or losing results of the jackpot lottery will be relatively increased. That is, by increasing the number of non-specific performances during fluctuations in which the player's interest is focused on whether or not he or she has won the jackpot lottery, an appropriate performance that matches the player's interests can be performed. I can do it.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
During the variation of the effect pattern by the display means,
The number of the specific performances that can be executed by the performance execution control means is i,
The number of non-specific performances that can be executed by the performance execution control means is j,
A gaming machine characterized in that j>i≧0 holds true.

Both the specific effect and the non-specific effect use the operation of the operating means, but the effect can be produced without operating the operating means. The difference between the specific performance and the non-specific performance depending on whether or not the operating means is operated will be explained.
First, the end timing of each performance and the operation of the operating means are determined in a specific performance that includes a performance that can suggest a set value, and a non-specific performance that includes a performance that can suggest the winning or losing result of a jackpot lottery. Explain the relationship between presence and absence.

For example, the end timing of a specific performance remains unchanged regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, but the end timing of a non-specific performance may change depending on whether or not the operating means is operated.
As described above, the specific effects include effects that can provide suggestions regarding setting values. The set value is often left unchanged during the game, and is important information for the player that influences whether or not to continue playing the game. Therefore, it is possible to cancel the performance by operating the operating means, and the time during which suggestive information regarding the set value is presented to the player becomes shorter, which may be extremely disadvantageous to the player. expensive. Furthermore, because the operating means is operated quickly, the suggestion information is presented quickly, and because the operation is slow, the presentation of the suggestion information is delayed and the presentation time of the suggestion information is shortened. It is also possible.
It is highly likely that a specific performance that presents suggestive information regarding a set value appears less often than a non-specific performance that suggests the result of a jackpot lottery. Therefore, shortening the presentation time of suggested information regarding set values is likely to be extremely disadvantageous to the player, so the end timing of the performance should remain unchanged regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated. It is desirable to do so. Similarly, it is desirable that the start timing of the performance remains unchanged regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated.

Regarding the suggestion of winning or losing results for jackpot drawings, for example, even if the player misses the jackpot drawing, if he has won the jackpot drawing, the jackpot game will automatically start, so there is a possibility that the player will be disadvantaged. is low. Therefore, with regard to the performance that suggests the winning or losing result of the jackpot lottery, by starting, developing, and developing the performance in synchronization with the player's operations, it is possible to perform a highly entertaining performance.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
In the specific performance, there is no change in the end timing of the performance depending on whether or not the operation means is operated;
A gaming machine characterized in that in at least some of the performances in the non-specific performance, the end timing of the performance changes depending on whether or not the operation means is operated.

Furthermore, in a specific performance, the length of time required for the performance remains unchanged regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, but in a non-specific performance, the length of time required for the performance changes depending on whether or not the operating means is operated. It will be done.
With such a configuration, it is also possible to reduce the risk of causing a disadvantage to the player as described above.

A specific example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 is shown below.
In the specific performance, there is no change in the performance time length required for the performance depending on whether or not the operation means is operated;
A gaming machine characterized in that in at least some of the performances in the non-specific performance, the length of performance time required for the performance changes depending on whether or not the operation means is operated.

Furthermore, in a specific performance, the content of the performance remains unchanged regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, but in a non-specific performance, the content of the performance may change depending on whether or not the operating means is operated.
Since the specific effects include those that give suggestions regarding set values, if the structure is configured such that the effects will not appear and suggestions based on the content of the effects cannot be made by not operating the operating means, the above-mentioned reasons will arise. Therefore, it may be extremely disadvantageous for the player.
On the other hand, the non-specific performance includes a suggestion of the winning or losing result of the jackpot lottery, and even if the performance does not appear without operating the operating means, it is unlikely that the player will be disadvantaged.
Therefore, regarding the specific performance, it is desirable that the end timing of the performance remains unchanged regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated. Regarding non-specific effects, it is desirable to prevent the effect from appearing or to start the effect with a delay depending on whether or not the operating means is operated. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform a performance that is synchronized with the player's operations, and it becomes possible to perform a performance that is highly effective in appealing to the suggested contents.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
In the specific performance, the content of the performance does not change depending on whether or not the operating means is operated,
A gaming machine characterized in that in at least some of the non-specific performances, the content of the performance changes depending on whether or not the operating means is operated.

Furthermore, several examples can be considered regarding the number of specific effects and non-specific effects. One is to treat performances with different appearance timings and appearance opportunities as one performance. In other words, similar performances that have the same appearance timing and appearance opportunity but slightly different performance formats, such as performances that only differ in the lines displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, are It is simply a variation, and it is considered to be a single production that includes various variations.
As a result, the balance of each performance implemented in the gaming machine 1 can be adjusted in consideration of the number of types of performances that a player can essentially consider as the number of performances, that is, the number of performances that include multiple variations. I can do it. In other words, when the intention is to reduce the number of effects that suggest setting values so as not to confuse the player, by considering the number of types of effects excluding variations, it is possible to create a balance between effects that does not feel strange to the player. It is possible.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
The number of performances that have different appearance timings and/or appearance opportunities is the number of production groups,
The number of performances that have similar appearance timing and/or appearance opportunity is counted separately as the number of production variations,
A gaming machine characterized in that said i and said j are the number of effect groups.

Another example of the number of specific performances and non-specific performances is that even performances with similar appearance timings and appearance opportunities are treated as one performance. That is, in other words, even if the appearance timing and appearance opportunity are the same, if the presentation mode is slightly different, it will be interpreted as a different presentation. That is, the more variations there are in performances, the greater the number of performances.
Parts of performances with different variations are stored internally in the gaming machine 1 as common information. Therefore, by treating performances with different variations as different performances (separate performances), it is possible to realize a variety of performance modes while improving the efficiency of using storage capacity.

An example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 that can obtain such effects is shown below.
The number of performances that have different appearance timings and/or appearance opportunities is the number of production groups,
The number of performances that have similar appearance timing and/or appearance opportunity is counted separately as the number of production variations,
A gaming machine characterized in that said i and said j are the number of production variations.

<14. Example 2 of selective implementation on gaming machines>

Here, a gaming machine 1B in which each performance is selectively implemented from the above-mentioned performances 1 to 21, performances 50 to 67, and performance 80 will be explained.
The effects selectively implemented in the gaming machine 1B are effect 01, effect 04, effect 15, effect 20, effect 51, effect 52, effect 54, effect 58, effect 62, effect 63, effect 64, effect 65, effect. 66, production 67.

Note that in the gaming machine 1B, the performance 20 is a pre-read preview performance in a time-saving state that can be executed only at timing 10.

In the gaming machine 1B, there are four types of performances that appear (develop) in response to the operation of an operator such as the performance button 13: a performance 01, a performance 62, a performance 65, and a performance 67.
Moreover, among them, only performance 01 can be executed while the fluctuation is stopped. It should be noted that the state that the fluctuation is stopped is a state in which all of the first symbol, the second symbol, and the third symbol are displayed in a stopped state on the liquid crystal display device 36.

In the gaming machine 1B, the only performance triggered by an operator that can appear while fluctuation is stopped is performance 01, which is one of the setting value suggestion performances. The number of types of setting value suggestion presentations (i.e., 1) is greater than the number of types of jackpot suggestion presentations (i.e., 0) that are triggered by operators that can appear while fluctuation is stopped.
While fluctuations are in progress, there is a growing interest in winning or losing the jackpot lottery in the fluctuations, while fluctuations are stopped, which means that the fluctuations in question are not taking place. It also includes situations where the person is bored.
At such timing, the player may wonder whether or not to continue playing the game on the gaming machine he or she is currently playing.
According to the gaming machine 1B of the present embodiment, the number of types of suggestion presentations triggered by the operation of the operator performed at such timing is greater in the number of types of setting value suggestion presentations than in jackpot suggestion presentations. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's desire to play.

Further, aspects of the gaming machine 1 that are different from the gaming machine 1B will be explained. Figure 125 summarizes the type of performance (setting value change suggestion performance, setting value suggestion performance, etc.) and execution timing (waiting for a customer, pre-reading, etc.) for each performance implemented in the gaming machine 1. This is the table shown in
Figure 125 shows the types of performances: a setting value change suggestion performance (performance d), a setting value suggestion performance (performance a), a jackpot suggestion performance with a setting difference (performance b), a jackpot suggestion performance without a setting difference (performance c), a lively effect (effect e) is shown. Further, it is shown to which type of performance each performance implemented in the gaming machine 1 belongs, and at which performance execution timing it is executed.
Furthermore, the table shows the number of variations for each performance and information indicating whether or not the performance involves pressing a button. The button press indicates that the player operates not only the production button 13 but also any of the various operators provided on the gaming machine 1.
For example, production no. The performance in which the number is 01, that is, the performance 01, is a performance that involves pressing a button, and there is only one type of variation. Furthermore, the presentation 20 is a presentation that does not involve pressing a button and has three variations. As an example of variations of the presentation 20, the number of specific characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is set to three patterns, from 1 to 3.

The summary column in FIG. 125 shows aggregated information about effects that can be executed at each execution timing. For example, it is shown that there is only one performance executed while waiting for a customer, and that is a setting value suggestion performance. Furthermore, there is only one performance that involves pressing a button.

An example of the configuration of such a gaming machine 1 is shown below.
A special symbol display means that performs a variable display operation of the special symbol and derives and displays a display result, on the condition that the operation means operable by the player and the starting means detect a game ball and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied. and,
As the special symbol variable display operation is executed, a first symbol display area in which a first decorative symbol is variably displayed, a second symbol display area in which a second decorative symbol is variably displayed, and a third symbol display area in which a third decorative symbol is variably displayed. a decorative pattern display means for visually performing a variable display operation of each decorative pattern using three pattern display areas;
a storage means for storing set values representing stages of probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A first performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and it is impossible to guess the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, and a first performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. A second performance in which it is possible to guess the level of the setting value, and a third performance in which it is impossible to guess the level of the set value based on the performance mode and the level of the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery can be inferred. equipped with the means and
The performance execution means is configured such that the number of types of the first performance that can be executed in response to an operation of the operation means in a specific state in which three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is a (a is 0 or more); The number of types of the second effects that can be executed in response to the operation of the operation means in the specific state is b (b is 0 or more), and the number of types of the second effects that can be executed in response to the operation of the operation means in the specific state is 3 The number of types of performances is c (c is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a larger number than (b+c).

<15. About the definition＞

(About "Type 1 performance" and "Type 2 performance")
As already mentioned, one of the features of the present invention is that in scenes where the player particularly expects a jackpot (words such as scene, timing, production part, etc. , notice, display, pronunciation, luminescence, etc. are synonymous, and the same applies hereinafter), giving priority to performances that suggest a jackpot (words such as notice, notice, notice, display, pronunciation, luminescence, etc. are synonymous, and the same shall apply hereinafter). Things to do include:

However, in gaming machines, it is not easy to clearly draw a line between the two performances (set value suggestion performance and jackpot suggestion performance). This is because the effect suggesting a jackpot (for example, when a "group notice" appears, the jackpot expectation is about 50%) is different from the effect suggesting a set value (for example, when a "group notice" appears, setting 2 or higher). This is because it is assumed that it also serves as a function (such as confirming a certain thing).

Therefore, below, we will refer to the setting value suggestion performance as a "first type performance" and the jackpot suggestion performance as a "second type performance", and provide some examples of definitions when drawing the line, with reference to FIG. 125 etc. shows.

First, the effects performed during the game will be explained by dividing them into three types, effects a to c, as follows. Note that this may be the only effect, or effects with different purposes (for example, effect d and effect e as shown in FIG. 125) may be provided.

(Performance a) Setting value suggestion presentation The main purpose of this presentation is to suggest the setting value. In other words, the suggestion of the winning or losing results of the jackpot lottery is considered to be a bonus. For example, with regard to the suggestion of a jackpot, there are cases in which the player does not have high expectations even if this effect appears.
Specifically, even if the expectation level of the jackpot lottery is less than 50%, less than 30%, or less than 10%, the player has won the jackpot lottery. This may be the case when you have little hope for something.
Moreover, a performance that does not suggest a jackpot at all may be included in the set value suggestion performance.
Alternatively, the effect a may be defined by focusing on the part that the user pays attention to. For example, when a movable accessory moves with a sound effect and a character image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to suggest a setting value, the player's attention is focused on the movement of the movable accessory and the liquid crystal display device 36. It is poured into the image (image change). At this time, if a movable accessory or a location other than the liquid crystal display device 36 casually suggests a jackpot (for example, a light-emitting effect using a part of the housing, etc.), the attention of the player who is experiencing the effect may be reduced. Since the information obtained from the location is only information regarding setting value suggestion, such effects may be classified as setting value suggestion effects.
In addition, when performing similar effects using movable objects or the liquid crystal display device 36, if the jackpot suggestion is made in less than 50% of the display area on the liquid crystal display device, the player's attention level will be reduced. It can be assumed that this is aimed at setting value suggestion. Therefore, such a performance can also be classified as performance a.
Furthermore, the classification may be performed by focusing on the information that the player receives first. For example, out of the two pieces of information: suggestion information about setting values and suggestion information about jackpots, a performance in which the first information the player receives after the start of the performance is the setting value suggestion information may be classified as performance a.

As an example, if the performances belonging to the performance a are specifically classified using FIG. 125, the performances corresponding to the performance a are performance 01, performance 20, and performance 15. Furthermore, the effect 04 may be included in the effect a.

(Production b) Jackpot suggestion presentation with different settings The purpose of this presentation is to suggest the outcome of the jackpot lottery. However, since there is a setting difference in appearance frequency, it is also possible to suggest a setting value.
Defining a performance classified as performance b, it is a performance that has a relatively higher expectation level than other performances, for example, when the expectation level of the jackpot lottery is 50% or more, or 30% or more.
Furthermore, a part of the effect that not only has a setting difference in appearance frequency but also provides a suggestion regarding the setting value may be classified as effect b.
For example, as defined in the effect a, the effect b may be defined by focusing on the part that the user pays attention to. When a movable accessory moves with sound effects and a character image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 36 to suggest a jackpot, the player's attention is focused on the movement of the movable accessory and the image on the liquid crystal display 36 ( image change). At this time, even if a suggestion regarding the set value is casually made in a place other than the movable accessory or the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, a light emitting effect using a part of the casing), it is difficult to experience the effect. Since the information obtained from the player's attention point is only suggestive information regarding a jackpot, such a performance may be classified as performance b.
In addition, when performing similar effects using movable accessories or the liquid crystal display device 36, if setting values are suggested in an area that is less than 50% of the display area on the liquid crystal display device, the player's attention level It can be inferred that this is aimed at suggesting a jackpot from the large area occupied by the liquid crystal display device 36. Therefore, such a performance can also be classified as performance b.
Furthermore, even if there is no difference based on setting values on the table that is referred to when executing the process of selecting an effect, that is, the effect will be selected with a certain probability regardless of the setting value. Even in the case of the above, effects with substantially different appearance frequencies (details will be described later) may be classified as effects b, since there are realistic setting differences.
Alternatively, classification may be performed by focusing on the information that the player receives first. For example, a performance in which the first information received by the player after the start of the performance is the jackpot suggestion information among the two pieces of information, that is, the suggestion information regarding the setting value and the suggestion information regarding the jackpot, may be classified as performance b.

As an example, when the performances belonging to the performance b are specifically classified using FIG. 125, the performances corresponding to the performance b are the performance 50, the performance 54, and the performance 58.

(Performance c) Jackpot suggestion presentation with no setting difference The purpose of this presentation, like presentation b, is to suggest the winning or losing result of the jackpot lottery. In particular, unlike performance b, there is no setting difference, so it can be said that this is a performance that purely suggests the outcome of the jackpot lottery.
Furthermore, even if the effect explained in effect b, that is, the effect that does not have a difference based on the setting value on the table that is referred to when executing the process of selecting the effect, the appearance frequency is substantially different. Since there is no setting difference in the selection rate on the table, this effect is not intended to intentionally create a setting difference, so it may be classified as effect c.

As an example, if we specifically classify performances belonging to performance c using FIG. It is 67.

Next, the above-mentioned first type performance and second type performance will be explained using these performance classifications.
(Example 1)
The first type production includes production a, but does not include production b and production c.
As a result, performances that are performed primarily to suggest the winning or losing results of a jackpot lottery are not included in the first type of performance, so it is preferable to perform a performance that suggests the winning or losing results of a jackpot lottery at a desirable timing. By not executing seed effects, the chances of multiple types of effects being executed at the same time are reduced, the length of time used for the effects is shortened, and an increase in the processing load on the CPU related to the effects can be suppressed. can.

(Example 2)
The first type production includes production b, but does not include production a and production c.
For example, at a timing when the first type effect is not executed, only effects a and c can appear. That is, there are only a performance a whose main purpose is to suggest a setting value and a jackpot suggestion performance c with no difference in setting. As a result, the player does not have to worry about whether the performance suggests a set value or a jackpot, so it is possible to create an effective performance without causing confusion. It is possible to issue.

(Example 3)
The first type production includes production a and production b, but does not include production c.
For example, at a timing when the first type effect is not executed, only effect c can appear. That is, since there are fewer performances that can be produced, there are fewer opportunities for multiple performances to be executed simultaneously, and the processing load is reduced and the production time is suppressed.

(Example 4)
The second type of performance includes performance b and performance c, but does not include performance a.
For example, at a time when the second type of effect is more likely to be executed than the first type of effect, it is difficult for the effect such as effect a whose main purpose is to suggest a setting value to appear, thereby making it difficult for the player to This can reduce confusion.

(Example 5)
The second type of performance includes performance c and does not include performance a and performance b.
For example, at a time when the second type of effect is more likely to be executed than the first type of effect, there are not only effects whose main purpose is to suggest setting values, such as effect a, but also jackpots with different settings, such as effect b. Since the suggestive effect is also made difficult to appear, it is possible to make it more difficult to cause confusion for the player.

(About "frequency of appearance" and "selection rate")
In each of the above explanations, the terms "frequency of appearance" and "selection ratio" are used, but the definitions of these terms will be explained here.
"Frequency of appearance" refers to "the frequency at which the target performance appears per hour (for example, once per hour)", "the frequency at which it appears per variable number of times (for example, once every 100 times)", or "the frequency at which the target performance appears per hour (for example, once per hour)" It refers to the frequency of appearance when a specific condition is met (for example, once in 10 times when a normal reach is met).
That is, the fact that the appearance frequency differs depending on the setting value means that the selection percentage of the target effect differs for each setting value (or only one or more specific setting values) in the effect selection table. Therefore, "frequency of appearance" and "selection ratio" have approximately the same meaning and can be replaced with each other.

As mentioned above, if there are performances P that are selected with the same performance selection ratio (for example, 1/100 when the loss fluctuates) on the performance selection table, the meaning will be determined by the respective terms of appearance frequency and selection ratio. Different cases also exist.
The jackpot probability differs depending on the setting value (it is not necessary that the jackpot probability is different for all setting values, but if the jackpot probability is the same for all setting values, there is no point in setting the setting value in the first place). This means that the probability of failure differs depending on the setting value. Therefore, in the above example, the performance P (the performance that appears at 1/100 when the loss fluctuates) has no difference in the selection rate between the setting values, but the loss frequency differs depending on the setting value, so as a result, the appearance frequency is (the appearance frequency is higher when the effect P is set lower).

However, if all of these are taken into account, there will be no effects that belong to the category of "no setting difference," so unless two terms are used differently in the same claim, basically which term should be used? Even if they are used, the case where the selection ratio in the selection table is the same is defined as "no setting difference", and the case where the selection ratio in the selection table is different is defined as "setting difference".

In addition, "no setting difference" can be further subdivided to mean that there is no setting difference between specific setting values, such as no setting difference among specific setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3). Good too.
Similarly, "with setting differences" may be further subdivided to mean that only a specific setting value (for example, setting value 6) has a different selection ratio from other setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 5). .

<16.1 Regarding CPU configuration>
[16-1. Control configuration of pachinko machine]

Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1A as another embodiment will be described.
The pachinko game machine 1A is a computer device for performance control integrated into one CPU.
Note that the external appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is substantially the same as that described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2, so a description thereof will be omitted. In the following description, parts that are similar to parts that have already been explained will be given the same reference numerals and the description will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is a schematic block diagram of the internal configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1A.
As can be seen by comparing with FIG. 3 above, the pachinko game machine 1A differs from the pachinko game machine 1 in that the liquid crystal control section 40 is not provided.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1A, a production control section 24A is provided in place of the production control section 24. The performance control unit 24A is a so-called 1 CPU, and is designed to realize the functions performed by the performance control unit 24 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 3 as well as the functions performed by the liquid crystal control unit 40 (the liquid crystal control CPU described above). It is configured.
Furthermore, the effect control section 24A in this example is configured to realize not only the function of the liquid crystal control CPU but also the function corresponding to the above-mentioned sound control section (sound controller 280 to be described later).

Note that in this example, the liquid crystal display device 36 is configured to include a main LCD 36M and a sub LCD 36S, but as in the case of FIG. You can also do that.
In the main LCD 36M, under the control of the performance control section 24A, for example, three decorative patterns on the left, middle, and right are displayed in a variable manner on the background image. Various performance images such as normal performance, reach performance, and super reach performance are also displayed. Similarly, the sub LCD 36S displays displays according to various effects.
The main LCD 36M displays decorative symbols based on images in temporal synchronization with the variable display of the first and second special symbols by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b.

Since the effect control section 24A also has a function as a control device for the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S, it also has functions as a VDP, image ROM, and VRAM.
VDP refers to a function that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing.
The image ROM refers to a memory in which image data (effect image data) on which the VDP performs image development processing is stored.
The VRAM is an image memory area that temporarily stores image data developed by the VDP.

With these configurations, the effect control section 24A generates various image data based on commands (effect control commands) from the main control section 20, and outputs it to the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S. As a result, various effects images are displayed on the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S.

[16-2. Configuration of production control section]

A specific example of the configuration of the production control section 24A is shown in FIG. 128.
Note that the memory 244 is not shown in FIG. 128.
The effect control unit 24A in the example of FIG. 128 is configured by, for example, a ROM 242, a CGROM 260 (CG: Computer Graphics, equivalent to the above-mentioned image ROM), and a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) 278 externally connected to a composite chip 250. There is.
The composite chip 250 includes a CPU circuit 250a with a built-in CPU 241, and a VDP circuit 250b that functions as a VDP, and each part shown in the figure performs functions such as the VDP and VRAM described above, as well as optical display control, It has functions to perform motor control and sound control.
We will explain each component.

In the composite chip 250, a CPU circuit 250a and a VDP circuit 250b are connected through a CPU interface circuit 258. The CPU interface circuit 258 is a circuit that relays transmitted and received data between the CPU circuit 250a and the VDP circuit 250b.
In this composite chip 250, regarding image production control, the CPU circuit 250a issues a display list DL (described in detail later) at predetermined intervals, and the VDP circuit 250b issues image data based on the issued display list DL. It generates and drives the main LCD 36M and sub LCD 36S.

A ROM 242 and a work memory 259 are connected to the CPU interface circuit 258 . The work memory 259 is, for example, a RAM having a storage capacity of about 2 Mbytes, and is configured to be accessible from the CPU circuit 250a. The work memory 259 has a DL buffer BUF that temporarily stores a display list DL in which a series of instruction commands for specifying one frame each of the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S are written.

In this example, the series of instruction commands in the display list DL includes texture loading commands such as the TXLOAD command for reading and decoding (expanding) image materials (textures) from the CGROM 260, and the VRAM to be decoded (expanded). A texture setting command such as the SETINDEX command, which has the function of specifying an area (index space) in advance, and a decoded (expanded) image material are placed at a predetermined position in the virtual drawing space (details will be described later in Figure 143, etc.). Primitive drawing commands such as the SPRITE command for placement, and SETDAVR and SETDAVF commands for specifying the drawing area to actually draw on the display device among images drawn in the virtual drawing space by drawing commands. Contains environment setting commands and index table control commands (WRIDXTBL) related to the index table 268 that manages the index space.

The CPU circuit 250a is a circuit that has the same performance as a general-purpose one-chip microcomputer, and includes a CPU 241 that centrally controls image production based on the control program in the ROM 242, and a WDT (WDT) that forcibly resets the CPU 241 when the program goes out of control. a watchdog timer) circuit 251, a RAM 243 having a storage capacity of about 16 kbytes and used as a work area for the CPU 241, and a DMAC (Direct Memory Access Controller) 252 that realizes data transfer without going through the CPU 241. For controlling the operation of a serial input/output port (SIO) 253 having a plurality of input ports Si and an output port So, a parallel input/output port (PIO) 254 having a plurality of input ports Pi and an output port Po, and the CPU circuit 250a. and various control registers 255 into which various values are written.

For convenience, the expression "input/output port" is used, but in the production control section 24A, the input/output port includes an input port and an output port that operate independently. Note that this point also applies to the input/output circuit 256 and input/output circuit 257 described below.

The parallel input/output port 254 is connected to external equipment such as the main control unit 20 through the input/output circuit 256, and the CPU 241 receives control commands (production control commands) CMD and strobe signals via the input/output circuit 256. (interrupt signal) STB.
The received control command CMD is supplied to a parallel input/output port (PIO) 254 via an input/output circuit 256. Furthermore, the strobe signal STB is supplied to the interrupt terminal of the CPU 241 via the input/output circuit 256, thereby activating the reception interrupt process. Therefore, the CPU 241, which has grasped the control command CMD based on the reception interrupt processing, can uniformly control the sound production, light production, motor production, and image production corresponding to this control command CMD through a production lottery or the like. become.

Although not particularly limited, in this example, the SMC section (Serial Management Controller) 276 of the VDP circuit 250b is used for light effects and motor effects. The SMC unit 276 is a composite controller that includes a lamp controller 276a and a motor controller 276b, and is configured to output serial signals in a clock synchronous manner. Further, the motor controller 276b is configured to be able to output a latch pulse at any timing based on a setting value to a predetermined control register in various registers 265, which will be described later, provided in the VDP circuit 250b. is configured so that it can be input.

Therefore, in this example, while outputting a motor drive signal (a drive signal for the movable object motor 80c) and a lamp drive signal (a drive signal for the optical display device 45a) from the SMC unit 276 in synchronization with the clock signal, The latch pulse is output as the operation control signal ENABLE at the appropriate timing.

Further, in this example, a parallel/serial conversion section 277 is connected to the SMC section 276. A position detection sensor 82a is arranged corresponding to the movable accessory motor 80c shown in FIG. 127, and a signal from the position detection sensor 82a is input to the parallel/serial conversion section 277.
Further, FIG. 128 shows an example in which user operation information from the operation unit 17 is also input to the parallel/serial conversion unit 277. The user operation information is a signal corresponding to the operation of the production button 13, cross key 16, etc.
The parallel/serial converter 277 is mounted on the production control section 24A as an IC built into a composite chip, for example, but may be mounted on the production control section 24A as an IC separate from the composite chip 250.
The parallel/serial converter 277 inputs, for example, 32 systems of signals, converts the input data into serial data, and supplies the serial data to the motor controller 276b. The operation of the parallel/serial converter 277 is controlled by a control signal from the motor controller 276b. Further, the parallel/serial converter 277 performs serial data transfer using a clock signal.
With this configuration, the SMC 276 can efficiently detect the operating state of the movable accessory motor 80c and the user's operations on the operation unit 17 such as the performance button 13, that is, the inputs necessary for performance control. Therefore, the CPU 241 can efficiently grasp the performance state.

Note that it is not essential to use the SMC unit 276 for controlling the light effects and motor effects. That is, since the CPU circuit 250a has a built-in general-purpose serial input/output port (SIO) 253, these can be used to control the light effects and motor effects.
Specifically, it is as shown by the broken line in FIG. 128. In the configuration shown by the broken line, the clock signal CK and the drive signal SDATA are outputted via the input/output circuit 257 connected to the serial input/output port 253. , an operation control signal ENABLE is output via an input/output circuit 256 connected to a parallel input/output port 254. For convenience, it is expressed as an input/output port or an input/output circuit, but what actually functions is an output port or an output circuit.

Here, in the serial input/output port 253, the serial output port SO is configured to include a 16-stage FIFO register. When controlling the light effects and motor effects using the serial input/output port 253, the DMAC circuit 252 is activated upon receiving an operation start instruction from the CPU 241, and reads the drive data table ( Necessary drive data is sequentially read from the "lamp/motor drive table" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "lamp/motor drive table") and transferred by DMA to the FIFO register of the serial output port SO. The drive data accumulated in the FIFO register is serially output from the serial output port SO in a clock synchronous manner. Note that the DMAC circuit 252 has a plurality of (for example, four) DMA channels, and the first DMA channel transfers lamp drive data by DMA, and the second DMA channel transfers motor drive data by DMA.

In the CPU circuit 250a, the WDT circuit 251 performs a down-count operation based on the set value of a predetermined control register (WDT control register, etc.) among a plurality of control registers provided as a control register 255 accessible from the CPU 241. It is configured with a WDT counter. This WDT counter starts from a predetermined initial value and counts down toward zero at a predetermined operation cycle, and when the down count value reaches zero, an internal interrupt (WDT interrupt) is generated.

After executing the WDT interrupt processing program, the CPU 241 is brought into a reset state by software reset processing.

The DMAC circuit 252 performs data transfer from a transfer source (Source) to a transfer destination (Destination) in a predetermined DMA transfer mode for each predetermined data transfer unit based on the set value to a predetermined control register in the control register 255. , is a circuit that repeats data transfer a predetermined number of times.

For example, in an embodiment in which the serial output port SO functions (see the broken line in FIG. 128), a predetermined control register of the control registers 255 contains the start address of the lamp/motor drive table (the start value of the transfer source address). , the address of the input register of the serial output port SO (fixed value of the transfer destination address), the data transfer unit (8 bits), and the number of transfers are specified. Then, the DMAC circuit 252, which receives an operation start instruction from a predetermined control register, updates the transfer source address and DMA transfers the drive data to a predetermined transfer destination address.

This point is almost the same in the case of the embodiment described later (for example, FIG. 150, etc.) in which the DMAC circuit 252 issues the display list DL. That is, the CPU 241 stores the start address of the transfer source (DL buffer BUF), the address of the transfer destination (transfer port TR_PORT), the DMA transfer mode, the data transfer unit, and the number of transfers in a predetermined control register of the CPU circuit 250a. , and other conditions will be set. Note that these points will be described later in FIG. 151 and the like.

In general, DMA transfer modes include a "cycle steal transfer mode" in which the DMA operation does not occupy the memory bus, such as releasing bus control right in the middle of a DMA transfer unit operation (R operation/W operation), and a "cycle steal transfer mode" in which the DMA operation does not occupy the memory bus. "Burst transfer (pipeline transfer) mode" does not release bus control until a specified number of transfers are completed, such as by continuously performing DMA or W operations, and when DMA transfer requests (demands) received from other devices are active. A possible option is a "demand transfer mode" in which DMA operation is continued during this period.
The DMAC circuit 252 of this example functions in a cycle-steal transfer mode in which a memory release period of at least one cycle is provided between read access activation (R operation) and write access activation (W operation) during DMA transfer. , so as not to interfere with the operation of the CPU 241. Specifically, by adopting the cycle-steal transfer mode, the CPU 241 can use the bus during the one-cycle memory release period described above, and the bus is released to the CPU 241 every time a read access is made, so the operation of the CPU 241 is significantly delayed. There is no.

For example, in an embodiment in which the DMAC circuit 252 is used when issuing the display list DL to the VDP circuit 250b, the data transfer unit of one cycle (one operand) is set to 32 x 2 bits, and the display list DL is stored. While increasing the source address of the RAM 243 as appropriate (+8 for each operand transfer), execute a DMA transfer operation for the transfer port register TR_PORT (see Figure 140) of the data transfer circuit 267 specified by the fixed address. are doing.
As described later, in the above embodiment, by adding the required number of NOP (no operation) commands to the display list DL, the total data size is set to a fixed value (for example, 4 x 64 = 256 bytes, or By repeating one operand transfer of 32 bits x 2 times 32 times (or an integer multiple thereof), issuing the display list DL is completed. Note that even if the drawing circuit 274 executes the NOP command, virtually no change occurs.

Next, the VDP circuit 250b will be explained.
Connected to the VDP circuit 250b are a CGROM 260 that stores compressed data that is a component of still images and moving images that make up image production, and a DRAM 278 that has a storage capacity of approximately 4 Gbit, as well as a main LCD 36M and a sub-LCD 36S. are connected. Note that the DRAM 278 is preferably configured with DDR (Double-Data-Rate SDRAM).

Although not particularly limited, the CGROM 260 in this example is composed of a flash SSD (Solid State Drive) composed of a NAND flash memory with a storage capacity of about 62 Gbit, and acquires the necessary compressed data through serial transmission. is configured to do so. Therefore, the problem of skew (difference in transmission speed between bit data) that inevitably occurs in parallel transmission is eliminated, and extremely high-speed transmission operation becomes possible. Although not particularly limited, in this example, the CGROM 260 is accessed at high speed using the HSS (High Speed Serial) method based on SATA (Serial ATA).

Note that regardless of whether or not an HSS method that is compliant with Serial ATA is adopted, NAND flash memory is mechanically more stable than hard disks and can be accessed at high speed, but because it is a sequential access memory. , compared to DRAM and SRAM, it has difficulty in random access. Therefore, by performing a preload operation in which a group of compressed data (CG data) is read into the DRAM 278 prior to the drawing operation, smooth random access of the CG data during the drawing operation can be realized. Incidentally, the access speed decreases in the order of VRAM 261 > DRAM 278 > CGROM 260.

Specifically, the VDP circuit 250b includes various registers 265 in which various operating parameters that define the operation of the VDP can be set by the CPU 241, and about 48 Mbytes used when generating image data to be displayed on the main LCD 36M and the sub-LCD 36S. , a data transfer circuit 267 that executes data transmission and reception between each part inside the chip and data transmission and reception with the outside of the chip, an index table 268 that can specify source and destination address information regarding the VRAM 261, and a A preloader 269 that can perform a preload operation to read and access the CGROM 260, a GDEC (graphics decoder) 273 that decodes (decodes and expands/expands) compressed data read from the CGROM 260, and still image data after decoding (expansion). a drawing circuit 274 that generates one frame worth of image data for each of the main LCD 36M and sub-LCD 36S by appropriately combining video data and video data; and a geometry that generates a three-dimensional image by appropriate coordinate transformation as part of the operation of the drawing circuit 274. A three-system (A/B/C) display circuit that can read the image data generated by the engine 275 and the drawing circuit 274 and held in the frame buffers FBa and FBb of the VRAM 261 and execute appropriate image processing in parallel. 270 and three systems (A/B/C) of the output of the display circuit 270, it is configured to enable output of up to three systems: two systems of LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) outputs and one system of digital RGB output. an LCD interface 271, an output selection unit 272 that appropriately selects and outputs the outputs of the display circuits 270 of three systems (A/B/C), the aforementioned SMC unit 276, and a sound controller 280 that functions as a sound source IC. have.
Here, in the VRAM 261, the frame buffer FBa is used as a frame buffer for the main LCD 36M, and the frame buffer FBb is used as a frame buffer for the sub LCD 36S.
The VDP circuit 250b also includes a CPU interface unit 264 that relays data transmission and reception with the aforementioned CPU interface circuit 258, a CG bus interface unit 263 that relays data reception from the CGROM 260, and a DRAM that relays data transmission and reception with the DRAM 278. It has an interface section 266 and a VRAM interface section 262 that relays data transmission and reception with the VRAM 261.

FIG. 129 shows the relationship between the CPU interface section 264, CG bus interface section 263, DRAM interface section 266, and VRAM interface section 262, and various registers 265, CGROM 260, DRAM 278, and VRAM 261.
In the case of the embodiment that performs a preload operation, the CG data acquired from the CGROM 260 is transferred as preload data to the preload area of the DRAM 278 via the data transfer circuit 267 and the DRAM interface section 266.
Note that the preload operation is not an essential operation, and embodiments in which the preload operation is not performed are also possible. Furthermore, the data transfer destination is not limited to the DRAM 278, but may also be the VRAM 261.
In an embodiment in which no preload operation is performed, CG data is transferred to the VRAM via the data transfer circuit 267 and the VRAM interface unit 262.

By the way, in this example, the VRAM 261 has an image specifying the expansion area of the compressed data read from the CGROM 260 and each ARGB information (32 bits = 8 x 4) of W x H display pixels of the LCD (liquid crystal display) 36. A frame buffer area for storing data, a Z buffer area for storing depth information of each display pixel, etc. are required. Note that in the ARGB information, A means 8-bit α plane data, and RGB means 8-bit data of three primary colors.

Here, each of the above-mentioned areas of the VRAM 261 is indirectly accessed based on various instruction commands (the above-mentioned texture, SPRITE, etc.) written in the display list DL by the CPU 241, but in the READ/WRITE access, each area is , it is troublesome to specify the destination address and source address of the VRAM 261.
Therefore, in this example, in the initial processing after resetting the CPU, a one-dimensional or two-dimensional logical memory space (hereinafter referred to as "index space") required for drawing operations is secured, and an index is added to each index space. Assigning a number allows access based on the index number.
Specifically, after the CPU is reset, the VRAM 261 is roughly divided into three types of memory areas, and a required number of index spaces are secured in each memory area. Then, by constructing an index table 268 (see FIG. 141) that stores index spaces and index numbers in a linked manner, subsequent operations based on the index numbers are realized.
Note that a specific example of the method of using the VRAM 261 using the index space in this example and a specific method of the drawing operation in the VRAM 261 will be explained later.

In FIG. 128, the data transfer circuit 276 performs a data transfer operation using DMA (Direct Memory Access) between the resources (storage medium) inside the VDP circuit 250b and the external storage medium as a transfer source port or a transfer destination port. This is a circuit that executes the following.
Note that details of the data transfer circuit 276 will be explained later.

The preloader 269 executes a necessary preload operation based on the display list DL issued by the CPU 241 and transferred by the data transfer circuit 267. Specifically, the preloader 269 analyzes the display list DL and transfers the image material referenced therein, that is, the CG data on the CGROM 2260, to a designated area on the DRAM 278, that is, the preload area.
At this time, the preloader 269 outputs a display list DL (hereinafter referred to as "rewritten list DL'") in which the reference destination of the CG data is rewritten to the address on the DRAM 278 after the transfer. This rewrite list DL' is stored in the DL buffer area BUF' secured on the DRAM 278. The rewrite list DL' stored in the DL buffer area BUF' is transferred to the drawing circuit 274 by the data transfer circuit 267.
Note that the above preload area and DL buffer area BUF' are secured in advance during initial processing after resetting the CPU (ST3 in FIG. 145).

The drawing circuit 274 sequentially analyzes the instruction command strings of the display list DL and rewrite list DL' transferred via the data transfer circuit 267, and cooperates with the GDEC 273, the geometry engine 275, etc. to form them in the VRAM 261. This circuit draws one frame worth of images on the main LCD 36M and sub LCD 36S in the frame buffers (FBa, FBb).

As described above, in the embodiment in which the preloader 269 functions, the reference destination of the CG data in the rewrite list DL' is not the CGROM 260 but the preload area set in the DRAM 278. Therefore, sequential access to CG data generated during execution of drawing by the drawing circuit 274 can be quickly executed, and even high-resolution moving images with rapid movement can be drawn without problems. That is, according to this example, it is possible to perform complex and sophisticated image rendering while utilizing an inexpensive serial ATA module as the CGROM 260.

Here, the frame buffer FB in the VRAM 261 is a double buffer divided into a drawing area Ad and a reading area Ar, and these two areas are used by alternately switching purposes. Furthermore, in this example, two LCDs 36M and 36S are connected, so two frame buffers FBa/FBb are secured. Therefore, the drawing circuit 274 draws one frame of image data in the drawing area Ad (writing area) of the frame buffer FBa for the main LCD 36M, and also draws the image data for one frame in the drawing area Ad (writing area) of the frame buffer FBa for the sub LCD 36S. One frame worth of image data will be drawn in the area). Note that when image data is written in the drawing area Ad, the display circuit 270 reads out the image data in the other reading area Ar (display area) and outputs it to the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S.

The display circuit 270 is a circuit that reads image data from the frame buffer FB, performs final image processing, and outputs the image data. The final image processing includes, for example, a scaling process to enlarge/reduce the image, a subtle color correction process, and a dithering process to minimize the quantization error of the entire image.

FIG. 130 shows a block diagram of the three systems of display circuits 270 and LCD interface 226.
The display circuits 270 of each A/B/C system have a synchronization signal generation section 285, and each performs processing in synchronization with the image frame. The synchronization signal generation unit 285 generates, for example, a V blank signal indicating a vertical blank period (ineffective line scanning period), a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal as synchronization signals. These synchronization signals can be used for control processing within the composite chip 250, and are also used for display data transfer and display control operations to the main LCD 36M and sub-LCD 36S.
Note that the synchronization signals used in each display circuit 270 can be synchronized with each other. For example, each display circuit 270 can be forcibly synchronized by using the fall of a vertical synchronization signal of an external display such as the main LCD 36M as a trigger.

Each display circuit 270 obtains frame data read from the frame buffer FB of the VRAM 261 by the VRAM reading unit 281.
Regarding the display circuits 270 of each A/B system, it is possible to perform scaling processing in a scaler 282, color correction processing in a color correction section 283, and dithering processing in a ditherer 284 on the acquired frame data. Then, digital RGB output and LVDS output are performed as outputs after processing by the ditherer 284. The same applies to the display circuit 270 of the C system, but in this example, the C system display circuit 270 is not equipped with the function of the scaler 282.
In this example, since there are two LCDs 36, only two display circuits 270, A and B, are operated. Specifically, the A-system display circuit 270 reads data from the frame buffer FBa, and the B-system display circuit 270 reads data from the frame buffer FBb, and each performs the final image processing described above.

The LCD interface 271 has a digital RGB output section 271a and an LVDS output section 271b.
Display data as digital RGB output from the display circuits 270 of each A/B/C system is supplied to the digital RGB output section 271a. The digital RGB output section 271a is capable of selecting one digital RGB output of each display circuit 270 and outputting it to the connected display device.
Further, display data as LVDS output from each display circuit 270 is supplied to the LVDS output section 271b. The LVDS output unit 271b is capable of selecting two LVDS outputs from each display circuit 270 and outputting them to the connected display device.
In the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1A of this example, the LVDS output of the A-system display circuit 270 of each display circuit 270 is output to the main LCD 36M, and the LVDS output of the B-system display circuit 270 is output to the sub-LCD 36S. There is.
Of course, this is just an example, and it is also possible to output the digital RGB output to the main LCD 36M or the sub LCD 36S.
The selection of which display circuit 270 outputs the output to which system is realized by controlling the LCD interface unit 271 by the output selection unit 272 described above.

In FIG. 128, a sound controller 280 is provided in the VDP circuit 250b.
The sound controller 280 has, for example, a sound data storage section that stores compressed audio data, and under the control of the CPU 241 decodes the compressed audio data to generate an output audio signal and outputs it to the external amplifier section 46d.
Note that regardless of whether or not the sound controller 280 is installed, the CPU 241 may control a sound source IC provided outside the composite chip 250 to output the audio signal to the amplifier section 46d.

The SMC section 276 is a composite control controller incorporating a lamp controller 276a and a motor controller 276b. Then, it outputs an LED drive signal and a motor drive signal in synchronization with the clock signal to a lamp driver section 45d and a motor driver section 80d (driver IC with a built-in shift register) mounted on an external board, while also outputting an appropriate signal. It is configured to be able to output latch pulses depending on the timing.

Regarding the internal circuit of the VDP circuit 250b and its operation, the operation contents that the internal circuit should execute are defined by the operation parameters (setting values) set in various registers 265 by the CPU 241 in the CPU circuit 250a, and The execution state can be specified by reading the operation status values of various registers 265. The various registers 265 refer to a large number of VDP registers RGij mapped to a memory space of about 1 Mbyte (0 to FFFFFH) on the memory map of the CPU 241, and the CPU 241 writes the operating parameters via the CPU interface section 258. (setting) operation and a READ operation of the operation status value (see FIG. 129).

As shown in FIG. 129, the various registers 265 (VDP register RGij) include a "system control register" in which initial setting values related to system operations such as interrupt operations are written, and various area settings for the VRAM 261 (for example, the AAC area described later). (a), page area (b), etc.), the "index table register" regarding construction or modification of the index table 268, etc., and settings regarding data transfer processing by the data transfer circuit 267 between the CPU 241 and the internal circuit of the VDP circuit 250b. A “data transfer register” in which values are written, a “GDEC register” that specifies the execution status of the GDEC 273, a “drawing register” in which setting values related to instruction commands and the drawing circuit 274 are written, and a register related to the operation of the preloader 269. A "preloader register" in which setting values are written, a "display register" in which setting values related to the operation of the display circuit 270 are written, a "lamp control register" in which setting values related to the lamp controller 276a are written, and a motor controller. A "motor control register" in which setting values related to 276b are written is included.

In the following explanation, one or more registers RGij included in the various registers 265 may be referred to by the above-mentioned individual names or may be collectively referred to as VDP registers RGij, but in either case, the CPU 241 is The internal operation of the VDP circuit 250b is controlled by writing an appropriate setting value to the register RGij. Specifically, the CPU 241 realizes a predetermined image effect based on a display list DL that is updated at appropriate time intervals and a set value to a predetermined VDP register RGij. In this example, since the CPU 241 is in charge of the lamp effects and motor effects, the VDP register RGij also includes a lamp control register and a motor control register.

[16-3. Comparison of functions of production control section]

FIG. 131 shows a configuration (hereinafter referred to as "liquid crystal control section 40") in which a computer device for liquid crystal control (liquid crystal control section 40) is provided separately from the computer device as the effect control section 24 like the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a functional block diagram schematically representing each functional configuration of the production control section 24 and the liquid crystal control section 40 in the case of a 2-CPU configuration.
As understood from the above explanation, the production control unit 24 receives and analyzes production control commands from the main control unit 20, and controls production other than image production such as lamps, sounds, and motors based on the analysis results. Generate scenario data (performance progress data: specifically, various types of registered information as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38), and generate and output driving data for lamps, sounds, and motors based on the scenario data. The desired performance movement is realized.
Regarding the liquid crystal, a liquid crystal control command obtained based on the analysis result of the production control command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side.

The production control unit 24 has a production control command buffer F11 (the above-mentioned “command reception buffer”) which is a buffer area (storage area) for holding production control commands transmitted by the main control unit 20, and also A production control command analysis processing section F12 analyzes the production control commands held in the buffer F11, and a production control command analysis processing section F12 generates and generates scenario data regarding lamps, sounds, and motors based on the command analysis results. It has an effect control scenario execution processing section F13 that executes processing based on scenario data, and a command output buffer F14 that is an output buffer for liquid crystal control commands.

The production control command analysis processing unit F12 performs the process shown in FIG. 42 as the production control command analysis process to identify the type of command. The processing to be executed for each type of production control command is determined in advance. Depending on the type of production control command, it may be determined that a predetermined liquid crystal control command is sent to the liquid crystal control unit 40. For example, this is the "command set" processing illustrated in FIGS. 43D and 43E. In this case, a predetermined liquid crystal control command is set in the command output buffer F14 as a result of the analysis process by the production control command analysis processing section F12.
In addition, as the production control command, there is also one in which it is determined that the same command as the production control command should be transmitted to the liquid crystal control board F12 (that is, through-transmission). Also in this case, as a result of the analysis process of the production control command analysis processing section F12, a liquid crystal control command (the data is the same as the received production control command) is set in the command output buffer F14.
Note that through transmission of commands will also be explained later in FIGS. 135 to 137.

In the performance control scenario execution processing unit F13, generation of scenario data based on the command analysis result is realized by a scenario registration process provided as part of the command corresponding process (S2106), for example, as in step S2141 of FIG. 43D. .
Further, specific processes based on the scenario data executed by the production control scenario execution processing unit F13 include the process related to updating the scenario (S2004) described in FIG. 41, and the scheduler execution process for sounds, lamps, and motors. and output processing (S2032, S2033, S2034, S2042, S2202 and S2203 in FIG. 44).

Here, some production control commands specify that a predetermined liquid crystal control command should be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reception of the production control command (hereinafter, liquid crystal control command (Also referred to as "time difference transmission").
In this example, when performing such time difference transmission, scenario data (hereinafter also referred to as "command transmission scenario data") is used to manage the command to be transmitted and the transmission timing for the liquid crystal control command.
If such command transmission scenario data is generated as a result of command analysis by the production control command analysis processing section F12, the production control scenario execution processing section F13 executes processing according to the command transmission scenario data. , a liquid crystal control command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40. That is, in this case, a predetermined liquid crystal control command is set in the command output buffer F14 as the scenario is executed by the production control scenario execution processing section F13.
The time difference transmission of liquid crystal control commands will also be explained later in FIGS. 135 to 137.

The liquid crystal control unit 40 includes a liquid crystal control command buffer F21, which is a buffer area for holding the liquid crystal control commands transmitted by the production control unit 24, and a liquid crystal control command buffer F21, which is a buffer area for holding the liquid crystal control commands sent by the production control unit 24, and a liquid crystal control unit that analyzes the liquid crystal control commands held in the liquid crystal control command buffer F11. Based on the command analysis results by the control command analysis processing unit F22 and the liquid crystal control command analysis processing unit F22, scenario data (hereinafter also referred to as "liquid crystal scenario data") regarding the liquid crystal presentation is generated, and processing based on the generated scenario data is performed. It has a liquid crystal control scenario execution processing section F23 to execute.
By the liquid crystal control scenario execution processing unit F23 performing processing based on the liquid crystal scenario data, the above-mentioned display list creation and drawing are performed, and image data necessary for realizing image production is appropriately generated, and the image data is is output to the liquid crystal display device 36. As a result, various effects images are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

Here, in the case where the control function for image effects of the liquid crystal control unit 40 as described above is implemented in the effect control unit 24 to achieve 1 CPU, programs for effect control other than image effects (main control A new program is created that integrates the image production control program (analysis of production control commands sent from the unit 20, generation of scenario data regarding lamps, sounds, motors, etc.), and the program is integrated into one CPU. It is conceivable to have a computer device (CPU 241 of the performance control section 24A in the pachinko gaming machine 1A) execute it.
At this time, if one CPU is used, there is no need to send liquid crystal control commands to the liquid crystal control unit 40, so the liquid crystal scenario data is generated without intervening commands separate from the commands from the main control unit 20. It is conceivable to configure a program like this.

However, according to this, the image production control program executed by one CPU requires a relatively large change from the program executed by the liquid crystal control unit 40 (liquid crystal control CPU), which increases the workload of creating the program. There is a risk that this will increase.
In particular, under circumstances such as having different companies create the program for the effect control section 24 and the program for the liquid crystal control section 40, the burden of creating the program to be executed by one CPU increases.

Therefore, in this example, a control configuration as shown in FIG. 132 is adopted for the effect control section 24A as one CPU.
As illustrated, the production control section 24A, like the production control section 24, includes a production control command buffer F11, a production control command analysis processing section F12, and a production control scenario execution processing section F13. In this case, the command output buffer F14 is omitted and a liquid crystal control command buffer F15 is provided. Furthermore, the production control section 24A includes a liquid crystal control command analysis processing section F16 and a liquid crystal control scenario execution processing section F17.
The processing contents of the liquid crystal control command analysis processing section F16 and the liquid crystal control scenario execution processing section F17 are the same as those of the liquid crystal control command analysis processing section F22 and the liquid crystal control scenario execution processing section F23 in the liquid crystal control section 40, respectively. That is, the liquid crystal control command analysis processing section F16 analyzes the liquid crystal control commands held in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15, and the liquid crystal control scenario execution processing section F17 analyzes the results of the command analysis by the liquid crystal control command analysis processing section F16. By generating liquid crystal scenario data based on the generated liquid crystal scenario data and executing processing based on the generated liquid crystal scenario data, image data necessary for realizing liquid crystal effects is generated and displayed on a liquid crystal display device (LCD) 36.

In the production control unit 24A, the production control command buffer F11 is set as a storage area of a part of the RAM 243, for example. Further, the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 is also set as, for example, a part of the storage area of the RAM 243.
When it is determined that a liquid crystal control command should be transmitted due to the processing of the production control command analysis processing unit F12 or the production control scenario execution processing unit F13, the CPU 241 of the production control unit 24A converts the target liquid crystal control command into a liquid crystal control command. Set in buffer F15.

As in the above configuration, the production control unit 24A includes a production control command buffer F11 that holds production control commands transmitted by the main control unit 20, and a liquid crystal control command buffer F11 that holds the production control commands obtained by analyzing the production control commands. It has a command buffer F15.
As a result, the production control unit 24A analyzes the production control command and sets the liquid crystal control command obtained by the analysis in a predetermined storage area. It is now possible to follow the process of setting .
Also, regarding the control processing of image production, the liquid crystal control command set in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 is acquired, the liquid crystal scenario data is generated based on the liquid crystal control command, and the liquid crystal display device 36 is controlled based on the liquid crystal scenario data. It is possible to follow the same process as that of the liquid crystal control unit 40, which is control (in the configuration of FIG. 127, control of the main LCD 36M and sub LCD 36S).
As a result, the programs that should be executed by the production control unit 24A as 1 CPU include the program that was being executed by the production control unit 24 when it was 2 CPUs, and the program that was being executed by the liquid crystal control unit 40 (liquid crystal control CPU) almost unchanged. It is possible to follow the same. The specific change is mainly that the liquid crystal control command is set in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 instead of the command output buffer F14.
Therefore, it is almost unnecessary to rewrite existing programs when realizing one CPU, and it is possible to reduce the workload associated with program creation.

The production control unit 24A also includes a first production progress management unit (production control scenario execution processing unit F13) that manages the progress of production other than image display based on the analysis result of the production control command transmitted from the main control unit 20. ), and an image display instruction information generation means (performance control scenario execution processing unit F13) that generates image display instruction information (liquid crystal control command) regarding image display according to the progress of the performance by the first performance progress management means. and a second effect progress management means (liquid crystal control command analysis processing section F16 and liquid crystal control scenario execution processing part F17).
The processing by the first performance progress management means and the image display instruction information generation means is similar to the processing of the performance control scenario execution processing unit F13 included in the performance control unit 24. The processing by the second performance progress management means is similar to the processing by the liquid crystal control command analysis processing section F22 and the liquid crystal control scenario execution processing section F23 included in the liquid crystal control section 40.
As a result, the programs that should be executed by the production control unit 24A as 1 CPU include the program that was being executed by the production control unit 24 when it was 2 CPUs, and the program that was being executed by the liquid crystal control unit 40 (liquid crystal control CPU) almost unchanged. It is possible to follow the same.
Therefore, it is almost unnecessary to rewrite existing programs when realizing one CPU, and it is possible to reduce the workload associated with program creation.

Here, the program for realizing the processing of the first presentation progress management means and the image display instruction information generation means and the program for realizing the processing of the second presentation progress management means are each implemented as independent program modules. Can be configured.

[16-4. Production control unit processing]

Next, the processing of the performance control section 24A will be explained.
The CPU 241 of the performance control unit 24A executes the same process as in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the timer interrupt process (FIG. 44). The CPU 241 of the production control section 24A mainly executes processing different from the CPU 241 of the production control section 24 regarding production control main processing (FIG. 41).

The flowchart in FIG. 133 shows the production control main process executed by the CPU 241 of the production control unit 24A.
In addition, below, only the different processes will be explained in comparison with the CPU 241 of the production control unit 24, and the same reference numerals will be given to the overlapping processes, and the explanation will be omitted.

The major difference from the main processing shown in FIG. 41 is that steps S2060 and S2061 and steps S2025 to S2028 are added because the CPU 241 in this case executes processing according to the liquid crystal control command.
In this case, instead of the various initial setting processes in step S2000, various initial setting processes in step S2000' are performed, but the processes in step S2000' include the WDT initialization, Necessary initial setting processing is performed before the start of the game operation, such as initialization of object return to origin and control, initialization of sound source control, and initialization of schedulers (scenario scheduler, device scheduler, lamp scheduler, and sound scheduler). However, in the initial setting process of step S2000', various processes shown in FIG. 145 are performed, which is different from step S2000. Note that the process in FIG. 145 will be described later.

In this case, if the CPU 241 determines in step S2003 that the frame update flag is OFF, the CPU 241 advances the process to step S2060 and executes the liquid crystal control frame update process. This liquid crystal control frame updating process corresponds to the process of advancing the scenario for image production, whose progress is managed by the liquid crystal scenario data described above, by one frame.
In the LCD scenario data, values such as timer values that manage the progress timing of the scenario are registered, such as the "wait time (delay)" and "sub-scenario timer (scTm)" in the scenario registration information shown in FIG. 37A. Included in the information. Therefore, in the liquid crystal control frame update process in step S2060, the image rendering scenario is advanced by one frame by updating this value.

In step S2061 following step S2060, the CPU 241 performs a drawing update process. That is, based on the liquid crystal scenario data, for example, the display list DL, which is a group of drawing commands listed in the order of drawing as described above, is created, and the drawing circuit 274 is controlled to start drawing. Further, in an embodiment in which the preloader 269 is made to function, preload execution start control is performed.
Note that in the drawing update process in step S2060, processing for switching between the drawing area Ad and the reading area Ar for the double buffer as the frame buffer FB is also performed. Details of the drawing update process in this example will be explained later.

In response to executing the drawing update process in step S2061, the CPU 241 proceeds to scenario scheduler frame update process in step S2004. As a result, the timer of the production scenario is advanced by one timing at the start of the frame.

Further, in this case, the CPU 241 is enabled to perform analysis processing for the liquid crystal control command when the V blank interrupt counter is 0, that is, in the first half period of the frame, through the processing in steps S2025 to S2028.
Specifically, in this case, if there is no received command in step S2022, or if the scheduler update flag is turned OFF in step S2024 after the command analysis process in step S2023, the CPU 241 advances the process to step S2025, Check whether the V blank interrupt counter is 1 or 0. In addition, here, it is clearly stated that the received command confirmed in step S2022 is an effect control command from the main control unit 20.

If the V blank interrupt counter is 1 in step S2025, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2026 and confirms reception of the liquid crystal control command. Specifically, it is checked whether one or more liquid crystal control commands are stored in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 described above. If there is no liquid crystal control command, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2030.
If one or more liquid crystal control commands are stored in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15, the CPU 241 performs analysis processing on the commands stored in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 as liquid crystal control command analysis processing in step S2027. In the liquid crystal control command analysis process, a predetermined process is executed in accordance with the received command, as in the case of the production control command analysis process described above. Some of the liquid crystal control commands have a corresponding process that involves registering a scenario in the liquid crystal scenario data, and in that case, a new scenario is added to the liquid crystal scenario data.
For example, in this way, liquid crystal scenario data is generated based on the analysis results of liquid crystal control commands.

In the drawing update process of step S2061 described above, the display list DL is created based on the liquid crystal scenario data generated based on the analysis result of the liquid crystal control command as described above, and the preload execution start control is performed, and the VDP Image data necessary for presentation is obtained in the circuit 250b.

In response to executing the command analysis process in step S2027, the CPU 241 turns off the scheduler update flag in step S2028, and proceeds to step S2030.

Up to this point, the performance control main processing executed by the CPU 241 in the performance control unit 24A has been described, but in the above processing example, the CPU 241 performs various processes in accordance with the frame period of display data.

FIG. 134 shows various timings within the frame period of display data.
The drawing process by the drawing circuit 274 is executed for the display data of the next frame within the frame period. For example, drawing of the display data of frame FR1 is executed during the display period of frame FR0. Specifically, since drawing is started in step S2061, drawing for the next frame is started at the beginning of the frame. This drawing is normally completed within a frame period.

In an embodiment in which the preloader 269 is functional, preloading is performed one additional frame in advance in preparation for drawing. For example, preloading for drawing display data of frame FR2 is executed within the frame period of frame FR0. Specifically, since it starts in step S2061, preloading for the next frame starts at the beginning of the frame. Even preloading is normally completed within a frame period.

At the start timing of each frame, the CPU 241 first performs a process of updating the liquid crystal control frame through the process of step S2060. Then, through the process of step S2061, the area to be newly drawn in the frame buffer FB is switched (drawing area Ad<=>reading area Ar in the figure), and the display list DL is created and the drawing circuit 274 is changed. Controls the start of drawing and the start of preload execution. Further, the CPU 241 updates the scheduler frame (scenario, lamp, sound) in step S2004.
After this scheduler frame update processing is performed once, the performance control command analysis processing of step S2022, the liquid crystal control command analysis processing of step S2027, and the various scheduler execution processing of steps S2032 to S2034 are performed as necessary. Scenarios, sounds, lights, and in this example a scheduler update of the command sending scenario) are performed.
Further, lamp drive data update and output processing in steps S2041 and S2042 and key event processing in step S2043 are executed.

If the above processing is completed within the first half of the frame period (within 16ms), it is possible to perform analysis processing for the production control commands and liquid crystal control commands again, and once the analysis processing is performed, Furthermore, various scheduler execution processing, lamp drive data update/output processing, and key event processing are performed.

[16-5. Operation example of production control]

Next, with reference to FIGS. 135 to 137, an example of the operation of the production control realized by the processing of the production control unit 24A (CPU 241) described above will be described.
In the following example of operation, an example of operation of production control performed in response to the end of a jackpot will be described.

FIG. 135A shows an example of the types of production control commands transmitted by the main control unit 20.
As the production control command, various commands are defined as shown in the figure, depending on the value of the upper 1 byte. A process (corresponding process) to be executed correspondingly to each command is predetermined (in this example, it is defined as a "function").
What we will focus on in this example is the performance control command ("0xF3") as the jackpot end designation command.

FIG. 135B illustrates a list of liquid crystal control commands that are determined to be transmitted in the corresponding process of the jackpot end designation command.
For the jackpot end specification command, through transmission of the jackpot end specification command (F301H) is specified, as well as the selection character command (02xxH), the number of consecutive hits command (03xxH), the capture flag command (05xxH), the jackpot The transmission of a symbol command (0AxxH), a jackpot basic command (88xxH), a character command at the time of determination (9FxxH), and a background designation command (01xxH) is defined.

The selected character command is a command that indicates the character selected by the player (for example, a favorite character), and the consecutive winning number command is a command that indicates the number of consecutive jackpots. The capture flag command is a command that indicates whether or not the player was able to capture the selected character, the jackpot symbol command is a command that indicates the symbol that was the current win, and the jackpot root command is a command that indicates the type of jackpot this time, such as big or small. This is a command that indicates the jackpot or how many rounds of the jackpot.

The character command and the background designation command at the time of determination are commands that are designated to be transmitted a predetermined time after receiving the jackpot end designation command (that is, the time difference transmission described above). The pachinko game machine 1A of this example allows the player to select a character in response to the end of a jackpot. For example, it allows the player to select a specific character from among the characters displayed on the main LCD 36M, etc., and the performance control unit 24A accepts an operation on a predetermined operator such as the performance button 13 as a decision operation for character selection by the player. .
The character command at the time of determination is a command representing the type of character determined by the player's operation.
The background designation command is, for example, a command that designates the type of background image in the display image of the main LCD 36M (for example, a background image corresponding to the determined character is designated).
In this example, the character command and background designation command at the time of determination are determined as commands to be transmitted with a time difference of approximately 9 seconds (270 frames) from the reception of the jackpot end designation command. In other words, in the performance at the end of the jackpot in this case, the character selection (determination) operation by the player is accepted within 9 seconds from the end of the jackpot, and then the character command at the time of decision according to the decided character is accepted. And a background designation command is transmitted (set to the liquid crystal control command buffer F15).

In this example, the above-described command transmission scenario data is used to manage the transmission of character commands and background specification commands at the time of determination for which staggered transmission is determined.
Specifically, in the command analysis process (step S2023) when the received production control command is a jackpot end specification command, the production control unit 24A of this example executes a jackpot finish specification command (throughput) that is not subject to time difference transmission. Transmission), selected character command, number of consecutive games command, capture flag command, jackpot symbol command, and jackpot basic command are set in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15.
In the command analysis process (S2023) in this case, a process is performed to register the main scenario number (mcNo) determined in response to the received jackpot end designation command in the scenario registration information. In the main scenario, a scenario for lamps, sounds, and motors corresponding to the end of the jackpot is defined, and a scenario is defined for transmitting a character command and a background designation command at the time of determination after 9 seconds. In other words, by registering the main scenario number (mcNo) corresponding to the jackpot end specification command as described above, the lamps, sounds, and motors corresponding to the end of the jackpot are Registration of scenarios (sub-scenarios) for each performance and registration of command transmission scenarios are performed. Note that, as described above, the scheduler execution process for the command transmission scenario data can be executed as part of the scenario scheduler execution process in step S2032, for example.

FIG. 136 schematically represents each scenario data regarding the sound, lamp, motor, button, and command transmission determined in response to the jackpot end designation command.
Note that time (f) in the figure represents the progress time of the performance, and the unit is "frame" (frame of display data). In this case, the performance scenario at the end of the jackpot is said to have a time length of 300 frames. Regarding time (f), the numerical value in parentheses represents the scenario execution time of the corresponding line. This corresponds to the execution time for the lamp and sound/motor described above (see FIGS. 40A and 40B).

As shown in the figure, in the scenario data in this case, sub-scenario data for sound, lamp, and motor are set respectively on the line of time = 0, and sub-scenario data of the button lamp is set as sub-scenario data of the lamp on the line of time = 120. It is stipulated that data representing lighting should be set. The button here means an operator used for the above-described character determination operation, and the button lamp means a lamp for causing the operator to emit light. The button here is assumed to be the effect button 13 in this example.
Further, in the line of time=123 and the line of time=144, it is determined that information indicating the start and end of validity of the button is set. Valid/invalid here means valid/invalid of operation acceptance.
Furthermore, in the line of time = 270, data representing turning off the button lamp is set as lamp sub-scenario data, and data representing sending a character command at the time of determination and a background specification command is set as command transmission scenario data. It is determined that
In the line of time=300, a code indicating the end of the scenario is written (see the above-mentioned end codes D_LSEND and D_SEEND).

Note that although an example has been shown in which the validity/invalidity of buttons is managed based on scenario data, the method of managing validity/invalidity of buttons is not necessarily limited to a method using scenario data.

FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining the flow of processing executed by the production control unit 24A in response to reception of the jackpot end designation command.
In FIG. 137, the horizontal axis represents elapsed time within one frame period, and the vertical axis represents elapsed time in frame units. For reference, the flow of each process within one frame period is shown in the same way as FIG. 134 at the top.

Assume that a jackpot end designation command is received from the main control unit 20 in a certain n-th frame. It is assumed that the command was received at a time when each scheduler frame update process (S2004) was being executed as shown in the figure. Note that the command reception process is executed in the external interrupt process as described above.

In this case, in the first performance control command analysis process (S2023) of the n-th frame, a process corresponding to the received jackpot end designation command is executed. That is, the process of setting the above-mentioned jackpot end designation command (through transmission), selected character command, number of consecutive games command, capture flag command, jackpot symbol command, and jackpot basic command in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 (command to liquid crystal control) (transmission processing), and the main scenario number (mcNo) determined in response to the jackpot end designation command is registered in the scenario registration information.

Then, in the subsequent liquid crystal control command analysis process (S2027), the jackpot end designation command, selected character command, number of consecutive hits command, capture flag command, jackpot symbol command, and jackpot root command set in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 are analyzed. Analysis processing is performed.

As described above, depending on the liquid crystal control command analysis process, the scenario is registered in the liquid crystal scenario data. Then, in the drawing update process in step S2061, a display list DL is created based on the liquid crystal scenario data, and preload execution start control is performed to obtain image data necessary for the effect.
The liquid crystal scenario based on the liquid crystal scenario data updated in the nth frame is started by updating the value that manages the scenario progress timing by the liquid crystal control frame update process (S2060) of the n+1th frame, and the drawing immediately after that is In the update process (S2061), a process for updating the drawing according to the started scenario is performed.

In the n-th frame, depending on the various scheduler execution processes (S2032 to S2034) executed immediately after the above-mentioned liquid crystal control command analysis process, a sub-scenario for lamps and sounds corresponding to the registered main scenario number is registered and started. be done. Furthermore, in the immediately subsequent lamp drive data update/output process (S2041, S2042), update/output of drive data (LED drive data) for performing lamp control according to the registered lamp sub-scenario is started. That is, a corresponding lamp effect is started.

Further, when the received performance control command is a jackpot end designation command, a scenario related to time difference transmission (after 270 frames) of the character command and background designation command at the time of determination is registered as the command transmission scenario.
Therefore, depending on various scheduler execution processes in the n+270th frame, liquid crystal control commands are transmitted as character commands and background designation commands at the time of these determinations, according to the command transmission scenario data. In addition, in the line of time = 270, a sub-scenario related to turning off the button lamp is registered, and depending on the various scheduler execution processes in this case, the sub-scenario related to turning off the button lamp is started, and the lamp drive to be performed immediately after that. The data update/output starts outputting the corresponding lamp drive data.
At the n+270th frame, the determined character command and background designation command transmitted by the various scheduler execution processes described above may be analyzed in the liquid crystal control command analysis process executed at the n+270th frame. In the example of FIG. 137, since the lamp drive data output process was completed at a timing sufficiently earlier than 16 ms from the start of the frame period, these commands were analyzed by the liquid crystal control command analysis process in the n+270th frame. It shows. As described above, the liquid crystal control command analysis process can be executed within 16 ms from the start of the frame period.

Although not shown, the character command and background specification command at the time of determination are also converted into new scenarios to the LCD scenario data based on the command analysis results, similar to the various commands that are not subject to time difference transmission (selected character commands, etc.). is registered, the new scenario is started by the liquid crystal control frame update process in the next frame, and the process for updating the drawing according to the started scenario is performed by the drawing update process immediately thereafter.

Here, the analysis process of the production control command and the liquid crystal control command is a process with a relatively heavy processing load, and the number of processes increases depending on the number of received commands. Depending on the type of command, it may be necessary to perform a lottery for presentation.
In this example, such processing is performed only in the first half of the frame.
This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which subsequent various scheduler execution processes and lamp drive data update/output processes are not completed within the frame period.

On the other hand, in this example, analysis processing of effect control commands and liquid crystal control commands is allowed to be performed multiple times during the first half of the frame. This makes it possible to efficiently analyze received commands within a limited processing period.

[16-6.1 Summary and modifications of CPU configuration]

According to the pachinko game machine 1A described above, the processing for performance control can be made more efficient, and appropriate performance control can be realized.
Moreover, the production control processing load can be reduced.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1A has, as a first configuration, a main control means (main control unit 20) that controls the progress of game operations, and performs performance control based on instruction information (performance control command) from the main control means. A production control means (production control section 24A), the production control means includes a first means (production control scenario execution processing section F13) for managing the execution of production other than image display, and a production control means for managing the execution of production related to image display. It has second means for managing (liquid crystal control command analysis processing section F16 and liquid crystal control scenario execution processing section F17), and instruction information storage means (effect control command buffer F11) for storing instruction information from the main control means. , an analysis means (production control command analysis processing section F12) that analyzes the instruction information stored in the instruction information storage means, and second instruction information (which is instruction information about the second means obtained from the analysis result of the analysis means). The display device further includes a second instruction information storage means (liquid crystal control command buffer F15) for storing liquid crystal control commands).

Since the effect control means has the second instruction information storage means as described above, when the effect control means is configured as a so-called 1 CPU, the instruction information from the main control means is analyzed and the information obtained by the analysis is obtained. Regarding the process of setting the second instruction information in a predetermined storage area, it is possible to follow the process of the performance control means (performance control unit 24) in the case of 2 CPUs.
Furthermore, regarding the image production control process, the image production in the case of two CPUs involves acquiring second instruction information set in the second instruction information storage means and controlling the image display device based on the second instruction information. It is possible to follow the same processing as that of the control means (liquid crystal control CPU of the liquid crystal control section 40).
In this way, by having the second instruction information storage means, the program to be executed by the effect control means as 1 CPU is the program executed by the effect control means at the time of 2 CPUs and the image effect control means. It is said that it is possible to follow the program that was being executed almost exactly as it is.
Therefore, it is almost unnecessary to rewrite existing programs to realize one CPU, which reduces the workload of creating programs and reduces costs.
Further, the program for controlling the image effect can be made almost the same for both the case of one CPU and the case of two CPUs, thus increasing the versatility of the program. Similarly, programs for controls other than image effect control can be made almost the same for both 1 CPU and 2 CPUs, increasing versatility.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine having the first configuration described above, the second instruction information is command information.
This makes it possible to further reduce changes from the existing program in response to the case where the second instruction information is command information in the existing 2-CPU configuration.
Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the work load of creating a program to realize one CPU, and further reduce costs. Furthermore, the versatility of the program can be further improved.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1A has a second configuration that includes a main control means (main control unit 20) that controls the progress of game operations, and performs performance control based on instruction information (performance control command) from the main control means. A production control means (production control section 24A), the production control means includes a first means (production control scenario execution processing section F13) for managing the execution of production other than image display, and a production control means for managing the execution of production related to image display. It has a second means for managing (liquid crystal control command analysis processing section F16 and liquid crystal control scenario execution processing section F17), and an analysis means (production control command analysis processing section F12) for analyzing instruction information from the main control means. , the first means includes a first performance progress management means (performance control scenario execution processing unit F13) that manages the progress of performances other than image display based on the analysis result by the analysis means; and an image display instruction information generation means (production control scenario execution processing unit F13) that generates image display instruction information (liquid crystal control command) regarding image display according to the progress of the image display instruction. a second performance progress management means (liquid crystal control command analysis processing section F16 and liquid crystal control scenario execution processing section F17) for managing the progress of presentation regarding image display based on the image display instruction information generated by the information generation means; have.

In the case of a 2-CPU configuration, the image presentation control means (the liquid crystal control CPU of the liquid crystal control section 40) acquires the image display instruction information obtained by the presentation control means (the presentation control section 24) analyzing the instruction information from the main control means. The image display device is then controlled based on the image display instruction information to realize a desired image presentation operation.
Therefore, by having the second means (second presentation progress management means) as described above, it is possible to follow almost the program of the image presentation control means as is for control related to image presentation. Ru.
Moreover, since the processing by the first means is almost the same as the processing executed by the effect control means in the 2-CPU configuration, it is possible to follow almost the same program used in the 2-CPU configuration.
In this way, the programs to be executed by the effect control means as 1 CPU can follow almost the same as the programs executed by the effect control means in the case of 2 CPUs and the programs executed by the image effect control means. Ru.
Therefore, it is almost unnecessary to rewrite existing programs when realizing one CPU, and costs can be reduced.
Further, the programs for realizing the first means and the second means can be almost the same as those for two CPUs, and therefore the versatility of the program can be increased.

Further, in the gaming machine having the second configuration described above, the image display instruction information is used as command information.

This makes it possible to further reduce changes from the existing program in response to the case where the image display instruction information in the existing 2-CPU configuration is command information.
Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the work load of creating a program to realize one CPU, and further reduce costs. Furthermore, the versatility of the program can be further improved.

<17. About image production control＞
[17-1. Comparison with and without preload]

Next, details of image production control in the pachinko gaming machine 1A will be explained.
First, with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139, a case where the preloader 269 does not function and a case where it functions will be compared.
Here, as a premise, the CPU circuit 250a and the VDP circuit 250b repeat predetermined operations at a cycle corresponding to the frame cycle of display data. Hereinafter, the operation cycle corresponding to such a frame cycle (in this example, coincident with the frame cycle) will be referred to as "operation cycle δ".

In an embodiment in which the preloader 269 is not activated, as shown in FIG. The drawing circuit 274 completes the image data in the frame buffers FBa and FBb by a drawing operation based on the display list DLi. Then, the image data completed in the frame buffers FBa and FBb is output by the display circuit 270 to the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S in the next frame period, so that the player can sense it by the subsequent display operation of the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S. The display screen will appear.

On the other hand, in an embodiment in which the preloader 269 functions, as shown in FIG. 139, the display list DLi completed by the CPU 241 is issued to the preloader 269, and the preloader 269 interprets the display list DLi and executes the necessary prefetch operation. At the same time, a part of the display list DLi is rewritten to complete the rewritten list DL'. Note that the prefetched CG data and rewrite list DL' are stored at appropriate locations in the DRAM 278.
Next, the drawing circuit 274 obtains the rewrite list DL' from the DRAM 278 in the next frame period (+δ), and completes the image data in the frame buffers FBa and FBb by a drawing operation based on the rewrite list DL'. Then, the image data completed in the frame buffers FBa and FBb is outputted by the display circuit 270 to the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S in the next frame period (+2δ), so that the image data is displayed on the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S thereafter. The movement becomes a display screen that the player senses.

[17-2. About the data transfer circuit]

FIG. 140 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the data transfer circuit 267 together with related circuit configurations.
As shown in FIG. 140, the data transfer circuit 267 is configured to transmit and receive data to and from the CGROM 260, DRAM 278, and VRAM 261 via an integrated connection bus ICM having a router function. Note that the CGROM 260 and DRAM 278 are accessed via the CG bus interface section 263 and the DMAM interface section 266.

On the other hand, the CPU circuit 250a issues the display list DL to the drawing circuit 274 and the preloader 269 via the transfer port register TR_PORT included in the data transfer circuit 267. Note that the CPU circuit 250a and the data transfer circuit 267 are bidirectionally connected, but when the display list DL is issued, the transfer port register TR_PORT functions as a data write port that accepts one unit of data that constitutes the display list DL. do. Note that the writing unit (one unit data length) of the transfer port register TR_PORT is 32 bits, corresponding to the FIFO structure of the CPU bus control unit 267d.

As shown in the figure, the CPU 241 can write access to the transfer port register TR_PORT via the CPU interface circuit 258, while when utilizing the DMAC circuit 252, the DMAC circuit 252 directly accesses the transfer port register TR_PORT via write access. It turns out. Then, a series of instruction commands written to the transfer port register TR_PORT (in other words, instruction command strings that make up the display list DL) are transferred in 32-bit units to a CPU bus that has a built-in FIFO buffer with a FIFO structure (32 bits x 130 stages). The information is configured to be automatically stored in the control unit 267d.

In addition, the data transfer circuit 267 executes data transmission and reception operations on the transmission path of 3 channels ChA to ChC, and the ChA control circuit 267a (N = 130 stages) has a FIFO buffer with a FIFO structure (64 bits x N stages). ), a ChB control circuit 267b (N=1026 stages), and a ChC control circuit 267c (N=130 stages).

Then, the instruction command string (display list DL) accumulated in the CPU bus control unit 267d is transferred to the drawing circuit 274 or the preloader 269 based on the set value to the data transfer register RGij (a type of various registers 265) by the CPU 241. be done.
In the embodiment in which the preloader 269 is not activated, the display list DL is transferred from the CPU bus control unit 267d to the drawing circuit 274 via the FIFO buffer of the ChB control circuit 267b, as indicated by the arrow. In the embodiment in which the preloader 269 functions, the display list DL is transferred to the preloader 269 via the FIFO buffer of the ChC control circuit 267c.

In this example, the ChB control circuit 267b and the ChC control circuit 267b are specialized for the transfer operation of the display list DL, and the data accumulated in the FIFO buffer of the CPU bus control unit 267d is transferred to the ChB control circuit 267b. Alternatively, they are transferred to the drawing circuit 274 or the display list analyzer of the preloader 269 as part of the display list DL via the FIFO buffer of the ChC control circuit 267c.

Then, the drawing circuit 274 starts a drawing operation based on the transferred display list DL. On the other hand, the preloader 269 executes a necessary preload operation based on the transferred display list DL. Through the preload operation, the CG data in the CGROM 260 is read in advance into the preload area secured in the DRAM 266, and the display list DL in which the source address of the texture has been changed in relation to the TXLOAD command, that is, the above-mentioned rewriting list DL' is secured in the DRAM 266. It is saved in the DL buffer area BUF'.

On the other hand, a ChA control circuit 267a and a connection bus access arbitration circuit 267e function for data transfer between storage media such as the CGROM 260, DRAM 266, and VRAM 261. Further, when accessing the VRAM 261 where address information of the index table 268 is required, the index table access arbitration circuit 267f functions. Specifically, the ChA control circuit 267a performs, for example, (a) when transferring the compressed data of the CGROM 260 to the VRAM 261, (b) when preloading (reading ahead) the compressed data of the CGROM 260 and transferring it to the DRAM 278, (c) Functions when transferring pre-read data in the preload area to the VRAM 261.

Here, the ChA control circuit 267a is configured to be able to operate in parallel with the ChB control circuit 267b and the ChC control circuit 267c, and the operations (a) to (c) described above are the display list DL issuing operation ( This can be executed in parallel with ST8 in FIG. 146, PT11 in FIG. 154) and the transfer operation of the rewrite list DL' (PT10 in FIG. 154). Furthermore, the ChB control circuit 267b and the ChC control circuit 267c can also be executed simultaneously; for example, the process of step PT10 in FIG. 154 where the ChB control circuit 267b functions and the process of step PT11 where the ChC control circuit 267c functions are parallel. It is possible to do this by However, since there is only one transfer port register TR_PORT, when either one (267b/267c) is using transfer port register TR_PORT, the other (267c/267b) cannot access transfer port register TR_PORT. I can't.

Note that during the operation of the ChA control circuit 267a, the connection bus access arbitration circuit 267e arbitrates data transmission with each storage element (CGROM 260, DRAM 266) via the integrated connection bus ICM. On the other hand, the index table access arbitration circuit 267f arbitrates data communication with the VRAM 261 by controlling the ChA control circuit 267a based on the index table 268. In the case of the embodiment in which the preloader 269 functions, the rewrite list DL' stored in the DL buffer area BUF' of the DRAM 278 is transferred to the drawing circuit 274 via the connection bus access arbitration circuit 267e and the ChB control circuit 267b. (See Figure 156).

As described above, the data transfer circuit 267 of this example is configured to transfer data between a data transfer source arbitrarily selected from various storage resources (Resource) and a data transfer destination arbitrarily selected from various storage resources (Resource). This enables high-speed data transfer. As confirmed from FIG. 140, the storage resources on which the data transfer circuit 267 functions include not only the VRAM 261 but also external devices via the CPU interface section 258, CG bus interface section 263, and DRAM interface section 266.

The amount of data transferred to and from an external device where the ChA control circuit 267a functions, such as the amount of data to be acquired at one time from the CGROM 260 (memory sequential read), is determined by the amount of data transferred to and from an external device where the ChB control circuit 267b or ChC control circuit 267c functions. This is huge compared to the list DL, and the amount of data transferred is greatly different from each other.

Here, regarding these various data transfers, it may be possible to configure the unit data amount and the total transfer data amount to be finely settable, but this would complicate the control operation inside the VDP circuit 250b and prevent smooth transfer. Movement is inhibited. Therefore, in this example, by uniquely specifying the minimum data amount Dmin for data transfer and limiting the total transfer data amount to be an integral multiple of the minimum data amount DTmin, high-speed and smooth data transfer operation is achieved. are doing. Although not particularly limited, in the data transfer circuit 267 of the embodiment, the minimum data amount Dmin (unit data amount) is 256 bytes, and the total transfer data amount is limited to an integral multiple of this.

Therefore, the instruction command string of the display list DL stored in the FIFO buffer of the CPU bus control unit 267d for every 32 bits is sent to the ChB control circuit 267b or the ChC control circuit 267b at the timing when the total amount reaches the minimum data amount Dmin. The data will be transferred and stored in each FIFO buffer.

The display list DL consists of a series of instruction commands. In this example, the display list DL has a command length of 32 bits multiplied by an integer N times (N >0) consists only of instruction commands. Therefore, the drawing circuit 274 and preloader 269 that receive the instruction command of the display list DL via the data transfer circuit 267 can quickly and smoothly start the command analysis process (DL analyze). Note that the command length of 32 bits, which is an integer N times, does not necessarily mean that all of the bits are significant bits, but also includes non-significant bits (don't care bits).

[17-3. About preload data cache]

Here, as explained above, the rewrite list DL' is transmitted to the drawing circuit 274 via the connection bus access arbitration circuit 267e of the data transfer circuit 267 and the ChB control circuit 267b at the start of the drawing operation of the drawing circuit 274. Transferred to display list analyzer. Then, the drawing circuit 274 executes a drawing operation based on the rewriting list DL'. Therefore, based on the TXLOAD command or the like, the CG data that should originally be acquired from the CGROM 260 is acquired from the preload area of the DRAM 278 as preload data that has been read in advance into the preload area. In this case, the preload data can be used repeatedly unless overwritten and erased, and the preload data that hits the cache in the preload area is repeatedly reused.

In this example, the preload area is set in the external DRAM 278 having sufficient storage capacity, so the cache hit function described above functions effectively. Furthermore, since the storage capacity of the DRAM 278 is large, multiple preloading, in which multiple frames of CG data are preloaded at once, is possible, for example. That is, regarding the operating period of the preloader 269, multiple preloading can be achieved by appropriately setting the operating period of a series of preloading operations including the pre-reading operation of CG data within the range of an integral multiple of the operating period δ of the VDP circuit 250b. Realized.

However, for convenience of explanation, an example without multiple preload is assumed here. In this case, the preloader 269 completes the preload operation for one frame during one operation cycle (δ).

[17-4. Regarding the use of VRAM during drawing]

As described above, in this example, the index space is defined by the index table 268, and the VRAM 261 is used during drawing.
This index space needs to be (1) added after initial processing, or conversely (2) released. Therefore, during the operation of the CPU 241 for addition/release, it is possible to determine whether or not the timing for addition/release processing is possible, and whether or not processing such as addition/release has actually been completed. is provided in the index table 268. The VRAM 261 is roughly divided into three types of memory areas: two AAC areas (a1, a2), a page area (b), and an arbitrary area (c), which will be explained below. The index table 268 is divided into three sections corresponding to a1, a2), (b), and (c). The details are as shown in FIGS. 141 and 142.

As shown in FIG. 142, in this example, the first AAC area (a1) and the second AAC area (a2) are secured as the AAC area (a), but this is not particularly limited; It's fine just by itself. In addition, in the following description, when the first and second AAC areas (a1, a2) are collectively referred to, they may be referred to as the AAC area (a).

In the case of this example, the VRAM 261 has (a) an index space and an AAC area to which index numbers are automatically assigned by internal processing and has a memory cache function, and (b) a two-dimensional space of, for example, 4096 bits x 128 lines as a unit space. (c) an arbitrary area where the start address STx and horizontal size Hx can be arbitrarily set (see Figure 142). . However, in order to smooth the internal operation of the VDP circuit 250b, the start address STx of the index space arbitrarily set in the arbitrary area (c) has its lower 11 bits set to 0, and is set in units of a predetermined bit (2048 bits = 256 bytes). It is necessary to do so.

After the CPU is reset, the maximum value of the memory space required for each and the start address (lower 11 bits = 0) are defined, and the first AAC area (a1), the second AAC area (a2), and the page area are created. (b) is secured, and the remaining memory area becomes the arbitrary area (c). In order to smooth the internal operation of the VDP circuit 250b, the maximum value of the memory space of the AAC area (a) is specified in units of 2048 bits, and the maximum value of the memory space of the page area (b) is defined as the above-mentioned 4096 bits x 128 lines. It is assumed to be an integer multiple of the unit space of .

Next, a required number of index spaces are set in each of the areas (a1, a2), (b), and (c) thus secured. Note that when using the arbitrary area (c), in order to smooth the internal operation of the VDP circuit 250b, the horizontal size Hx of the index space that handles two-dimensional data can be arbitrarily set as a multiple of 256 bits; Its vertical size is a fixed value (for example, 2048 lines).

In any case, the first and second AAC areas (a1, a2) are automatically assigned an index space and an index number by the VDP circuit 250b, so they can be decoded by, for example, the SETINDEX command, which is a texture setting command. If you specify the AAC area (a) as the destination, in the TXLOAD (texture load) command that reads CG data from the CGROM 260, it is sufficient to specify the Source address of the CGROM 260 and the horizontal and vertical sizes after expansion (decoding). become. Therefore, in this example, still images (textures) such as characters that appear temporarily during preview performances and I-stream videos are decoded to the AAC area (a).

This AAC area (a) is all provided with a memory cache function, so for example, if the same texture from the CGROM 260 is read out to the AAC area (a) multiple times, from the second time onwards, The decoded data cached in the AAC area (a) can be utilized, and redundant READ access and decoding processing can be suppressed. However, if the AAC area (a) is used up, old data will be automatically destroyed, so in this example, when using the AAC area (a), the first AAC area (a1) is used as a general rule. Therefore, only a specific texture that is used repeatedly is acquired in the second AAC area (a2).

Examples of textures that are repeatedly used include, for example, characters that repeatedly appear during predetermined preview performances, background images when a background screen is constructed from still images, and the like. In such a case, use the SETINDEX texture setting command to set the decoding destination to the second AAC area (a2), and use the TXLOAD command to decode the textures such as characters and background images to the second AAC area (a2). After that, the decoding results are protected by not using the second AAC area (a2).

Then, if you use the SETINDEX command to specify the decoding destination as the second AAC area (a2) and execute the same TXLOAD command that re-acquires the acquired textures, the acquired textures will hit the cache. , the time required for read access to the CGROM 260 and decoding processing can be eliminated.
As mentioned above, this type of cache hit function is also exhibited by preload data pre-read in the preload area of the DRAM 278, but the preload data that hits the cache in the preload area is compressed data before decoding. , it is significant that the cache hit in the AAC area (a) is the expanded data after decoding.

By the way, texture is a concept that generally refers to the texture and feel of the surface of an object, but in this specification, it refers to sprite image data that makes up a still image or image data that makes up one frame of a moving image. It is used as a concept that includes not only image data pasted onto drawing primitives such as triangles and rectangles, but also image data after decoding. When copying image data within the VRAM 261 (hereinafter referred to as moving for convenience), set the source image data as a texture using the SETINDEX command, which is a texture setting command, and then use the SPRITE command. will be executed.

Note that by executing the SPRITE command, the source image data of the movement source is formally drawn in the virtual drawing space shown in FIG. 143, but the drawing area in the virtual drawing space that is actually drawn on the liquid crystal display device If you set the correspondence between the index space and the frame buffer FB in advance using environment setting commands (SETDAVR, SETDAVF) or texture setting commands (SETINDEX), for example, you can use the SPRITE command to access the virtual drawing space. By drawing, the source image data of the movement source is drawn in a predetermined index space (frame buffer FB) (see FIG. 143).

In any case, in this example, the VRAM 261 is roughly divided into an AAC area (a1, a2), a page area (b), and an arbitrary area (c), and an appropriate number of index spaces can be secured for each. , each index space is specified by an independent index number for each region (a), (b), and (c). The index number is, for example, 1 byte long, and for the page area (b) (excluding the AAC area (a) that is automatically assigned by the internal circuit) and the arbitrary area (c), it is set in the range of 0 to 255 by the CPU 241. can freely assign index numbers.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 141, a pair of frame buffers FBa are secured in the arbitrary area (c) for the main LCD 36M, and index numbers 255 and 254 are assigned to both of the double buffer structures. There is. That is, as a frame buffer FBa for the main LCD 36M, an index space 255 and an index space 254, which are used in a toggle manner, are secured. Although not particularly limited, the index spaces 255 and 254 have a horizontal size of 1280, corresponding to the number of pixels in the horizontal direction of the main LCD 36M. Note that since each pixel is specified by 32 bits of ARGB information, the horizontal size 1280 means 32×1280=40960 bits (a multiple of 256 bits).

Further, another pair of frame buffers FBb are secured in the arbitrary area (c) for the sub LCD 36S, and index numbers 252 and 251 are given to both of the double buffer structures. That is, the index space 252 and the index space 251 are secured as the frame buffer FBb for the sub LCD 36S. The index spaces 252 and 251 have a horizontal size of 480, corresponding to the number of pixels in the horizontal direction of the sub LCD 36S. In this case as well, each pixel is specified by 32 bits of ARGB information, so the horizontal size 480 means 32×480=15360 bits (a multiple of 256 bits).

Note that frame buffers FBa and FBb are secured in the arbitrary area (c) because they can be set to any horizontal size as a multiple of 32 bytes (=256 bits=8 pixels). This is because if the number of horizontal pixels is made equal to the number of horizontal pixels of the main LCD 36M and the sub-LCD 36S as described above, the secured area will not be wasted. On the other hand, the page area (b) can only be set in a horizontal/vertical size that is an integral multiple of the unit space of 128 pixels x 128 lines.

However, the two-dimensional index space secured in the arbitrary area (c) has a fixed vertical size (for example, 2048 lines). Therefore, in the frame buffer FBa, only an area of horizontal size 1280×vertical size 1024 becomes a valid data area for the main LCD 36M. The same applies to the sub LCD 36S, and in the frame buffer FBb, only an area of horizontal size 480×vertical size 800 is an effective data area for the sub LCD 36S (see FIG. 143).
Here, FIG. 144 shows the relationship between the entire frame buffers FBa and FBb and their respective valid data areas.

The effective data areas of the frame buffers FBa and FBb as described above will be described further later, but in any case, the frame buffers FBa and FBb are used as drawing areas for the drawing circuit 274, and are used for each double buffer (255/254, 252 /251) are used alternately, and each double buffer (255/254, 252/251) is used alternately as a display area for the A/B display circuit 270. Note that in this example, a missing number (253) occurs because the Z buffer that stores the depth information of display pixels is not used, but if the Z buffer is used, the index numbers 253 and 250 in the arbitrary area (c) Spaces 253 and 250 serve as Z buffers for the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S.

Furthermore, in this example, when an additional index space (memory area) is secured in the arbitrary area (c) where frame buffers FBa and FBb are secured, an index number starting from 0 is assigned. Although not limited in any way, in this example, a production image composed of characters and other still images is arbitrarily used as a work area for a preview production in which a production image composed of characters and other still images appears on a part of the display screen in an appropriate rotational posture as necessary. Index space (0) is secured in area (c).

However, the use of the work area is not essential, and an index space as a work area may be secured in the page area (b) instead of the arbitrary area (c). By using the page area (b), it is possible to secure an index space with a size that is a multiple of the square unit space of horizontal size 128 (=4096 bits) x vertical size 128, which is suitable for handling small-sized performance images.

By the way, in this example, the image including the background image is composed of moving images, and the image presentation is realized almost only by moving images. In particular, during variable performance, a large number (usually 10 or more) of moving images are being drawn at the same time. All of these videos are stored in the CGROM 260 in a compressed state as a series of video frames, but there are two types of videos: I-stream video consisting of only I-frames, and IP-stream video consisting of I-frames and P-frames. It is divided into Here, the I frame (Intra coded frame) means a frame in which an input image is compressed as it is, independent of other screens. On the other hand, a P frame (Predictive coded frame) means a frame that performs forward predictive coding, and requires an I frame or a P frame located in the temporal past.

Therefore, in this example, the IP stream video is expanded to the page area (b) instead of the AAC area (a) where old data may be destroyed. In other words, a large number of index spaces (IDX0 to IDXN) are secured in the page area (b) where index spaces with dimensions that are multiples of horizontal size 128 x vertical size 128 can be secured, and a series of video frames are stored in each video MVi. The corresponding index space IDXi, which is always the same, is used for decoding. That is, the moving image MV1 is expanded into the index space IDX1, the moving image MV2 is expanded into the index space IDX2, and the moving image MVi is expanded into the index space IDXi in the same manner.

To explain the video MVi more specifically, after specifying in advance with the SETINDEX command that "the decoding destination of the IP stream video MVi is the index space (i) of the index number i in the page area (b)", A TXLOAD command is executed to acquire one frame of the IP stream video MVi.

Then, one frame (any of a series of video frames) of the video on the CGROM 260 specified by the TXLOAD command is first acquired in the AAC area (a), and then the page area (b) is acquired by the automatically activated GDEC 273. ), one frame of the acquired video will be decoded and developed in the index space (i).

On the other hand, in this example, I-stream videos are treated the same as still images, and the SETINDEX command specifies that "the decoding destination of the I-stream video MVj is the first AAC area (a1)", and the TXLOAD Execute the command. As a result, the video frame is acquired in the first AAC area (a1), and then the automatically activated GDEC 273 develops decoded data in the first ACC area (a1). As explained above, the index space for the AAC area (a) is automatically generated, so there is no need to specify an index number. Note that the expansion volume required for the index space, that is, the horizontal size and vertical size of the decoded texture (video frame), is determined by the TXLOAD regardless of whether the expansion destination is the AAC area (a) or the page area (b). Specified by command.

By the way, the IP stream video MVi and the I stream video MVj are generally composed of N video frames (I frames and P frames). Therefore, the TXLOAD command specifies, for example, the Source address of the CGROM 260 in which the k-th (1≦k≦N) video frame is stored, and the horizontal and vertical sizes after expansion. Although not limited in any way, in an embodiment in which still images are hardly used, most of the 48 Mbytes of memory space of the VRAM 261 (approximately 30 Mbytes) is allocated to the page area (b). In an example in which still images are hardly used, only the first AAC area (a1) is secured as the AAC area (a), the second AAC area (a2) is not secured, and the above-mentioned AAC area ( The cache hit function in a) is also not utilized.

Note that in order to speed up the decoding process of compressed video data, it is also possible to provide a dedicated GDEC circuit. If a dedicated GDEC circuit is built into the VDP circuit 250b, in decoding compressed video data composed of N compressed video frames, it is sufficient to instruct the GDEC circuit to specify the start address of the compressed video data. There is no need to specify the start address for each of the N compressed video frames.

However, if a plurality of such dedicated GDEC circuits are built in for each compression algorithm, the internal configuration of the VDP circuit 250b becomes even more complicated. Therefore, it is also possible to configure the software GDEC so that data such as IP stream videos, I-stream videos, still images, and other α values are decoded by software processing corresponding to each compression algorithm. Note that the processing time difference between hardware processing and software processing does not matter much, and the processing time that becomes a problem is exclusively the access (READ) time from the CGROM 260.

[17-5. CPU processing related to image production control]

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 145 to 159, details of the processing related to image effect control executed by the CPU 241 of the effect control section 24A will be described.
The flowchart in FIG. 145 shows the processes executed in the various initial setting processes (S2000') shown in FIG. 133 above.
In the various initial setting processes of step S2000', the CPU 241 of the production control unit 24A stores the VRAM 261 with a storage capacity of 48 Mbytes into an ACC area (a) having an appropriate storage capacity, a page area (b), and an arbitrary area (c). ) and cut as appropriate (ST1). Specifically, for the ACC area (a1, a2) and the page area (b), the respective start addresses and required total data size are set in a predetermined index table register RGij (ST1). Then, the remaining area not included in the secured ACC area (a1, a2) and page area (b) becomes an arbitrary area (c).

Here, the lower 11 bits of the first and second ACC areas (a1, a2) and the page area (b) must be 0, but they can be arbitrarily selected in units of 2048 bits ( (Selection for every 256 addresses, assuming 1 address = 1 byte). Further, the total data size is also arbitrarily selected within the range of an integral multiple of the unit size. Although not particularly limited, the unit size of the ACC area (a) is 2048 bits, and the unit size of the page area (b) is 512 kbits.

In this way, in this example, certain conditions are set for the area settings of the ACC area (a1, a2) and the page area (b). This is to eliminate the problem while smoothing the internal operation of the VDP circuit 250b. In other words, if the storage capacity of the VRAM 261 is increased recklessly, there are concerns that manufacturing costs will soar and the chip area becomes larger. On the other hand, if free area setting is allowed to completely eliminate waste areas, internal processing will become complicated. This is because the processing time for VRAM access cannot be shortened. Note that it is for the same reason that certain restrictions are placed on securing the index space, which will be explained below.

Following the process of step ST1, the CPU 241 secures the necessary index space IDXi for the page area (b) and arbitrary area (c) (ST2). Specifically, by setting necessary information in a predetermined index table register RGij, the index space IDXi of each area (b) and (c) is secured.

For example, when providing an index space IDXi in the page area (b), corresponding to an arbitrary index number i, an arbitrary horizontal size Hx and multiple information of an arbitrary vertical size Wx (vertical and horizontal multiple information for the unit space ) is set in a predetermined index table register RGij (ST2).

As explained earlier, the index space IDXi of page area (b) has a unit space of 128 lines in horizontal size x 128 lines in vertical size, and since 1 pixel is specified by 32 bits of information, horizontal size Hx and vertical size Based on the setting of the size Wx, an index space IDXi of data size (bit length)=32×128×Hx×128×Wx is secured. Note that the start address of the index space IDXi in the page area (b) is automatically assigned internally.

Furthermore, when an index space IDXi is provided in an arbitrary area (c), an arbitrary start address STx and multiple information of an arbitrary horizontal size Hx are stored in a predetermined index table register RGij corresponding to an arbitrary index number i. (ST2). Note that "arbitrary" here is based on a predetermined condition, and the horizontal size Hx is arbitrarily determined in units of 256 bits, the lower 11 bits of the start address STx are 0, and arbitrarily determined in units of 2048 bits. As explained earlier, the vertical size of the arbitrary area is fixed to 2048 lines, so based on the setting of the horizontal size Hx, an index of data size (bit length) = 2048 x Hx is created after the start address STx. This means that space has been secured.

Specifically, as the frame buffer FBa for the main LCD 36M, a pair of index spaces with a horizontal size of 1280 x 2048 vertical lines are set in one or more predetermined index table registers RGij with each index number specified, As the frame buffer FBb for the sub LCD 36S, a pair of index spaces with a horizontal size of 480×2048 vertical lines are set in one or more predetermined index table registers RGij, with each index number specified. If the number of horizontal pixels of the LCD 36 does not match an integral multiple of 256 bits/32 bits, the horizontal size of each index space should be larger than the number of horizontal pixels of the LCD 36 and an integral multiple of 256/32=8. Set this value to a value that minimizes wasted memory space.

As described above, by setting the necessary size information and address information in the predetermined index table register RGij for the page area (b) and arbitrary area (c), the required number of index spaces IDXi is generated. (ST2). Corresponding to this setting process (ST2), an index table 268 that specifies address information and size information of each index space IDXi is automatically constructed.
As shown in FIG. 141, the index table 268 stores the start address of each index space IDXi along with other necessary information, and is used when transferring data within the VDP circuit 250b or from an external storage resource (Resource). Referenced when data is acquired (see FIG. 140). Note that the index space IDXi in the AAC area (a) is automatically generated when necessary and automatically disappears, so the setting process in step ST2 is not necessary.

As shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, a pair of frame buffers FBa and FBb are secured in the arbitrary area (c), and index numbers are assigned to each pair. In an embodiment that does not use the Z buffer, a pair of index spaces 255 and 254 assigned index numbers 255 and 254 are secured as the frame buffer FBa. Furthermore, a pair of index spaces 252 and 251 to which index numbers 252 and 251 are assigned are secured as the frame buffer FBb. In this example, a work area with index number 0 (index space 0) is also secured in the arbitrary area (c).

Furthermore, in this example, a necessary number of index spaces IDXi that serve as decoding areas for IP stream videos are secured in the page area (a), and an index number i is assigned. However, initially, only the index space IDX0 for the background video (IP stream video) is secured. Then, depending on the need for image production (fluctuation production and preview production), the index space IDXj of the page area (a) is increased based on the setting process to the index table register RGij and the instruction command of the display list DL, Thereafter, when it is no longer needed, the index space IDXj is released.

Note that the index space of the ACC area (a) is automatically generated when necessary based on the instruction command written in the display list DL, and the index table 268 contains the start address of the automatically generated index space IDXj. and other necessary information will be automatically set. In this example, this AAC area (a) is used as a decoding area for still images and other textures.

The above operation of securing the index space is realized exclusively by setting the index table register RGij included in the various registers 265. However, following the processing of steps ST1 and ST2, necessary information is set in the other VDP register RGij. By executing the setting operation, the operation of the VDP circuit 250b explained in FIGS. 138 and 139 is enabled.

For example, by writing predetermined operating parameters (number of lines and number of pixels) to a predetermined display register RGij that defines the operation of the display circuit 270, the number of display lines and the number of horizontal pixels can be set for the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S. (SS30). As a result, in each frame buffer FBa, FBb, the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the valid data area (the broken line portion in FIG. 144) to be accessed by the display circuit 270 for READ are specified.

Next, a predetermined operating parameter (address value) is written into a predetermined display register RGij, and the vertical display start position and horizontal display start position are specified for each frame buffer FBa, FBb (SS31). As a result, the valid data area whose vertical and horizontal dimensions were specified in the process of step SS30 is determined on the frame buffers FBa and FBb. Here, the vertical display start position and the horizontal display start position are relative address values in each index space, and in this example, the display start position is (0, 0).

Subsequently, the display register RGij (DSPAINDEX) related to the display circuit 270 (A) that drives the main LCD 36M and the display register RGij (DSPBINDEX) related to the display circuit 270 (B) that drives the sub LCD 36S are each set to display area (0). )" and "display area (1)" to define each display area (SS32).

Here, the "display area" means an index space (frame buffer FBa, FBb) from which image data is to be read by each A/B display circuit 270 in order to drive the main LCD 36M and sub LCD 36S. This means either one of the double buffers in the frame buffers FBa and FBb, which have a double buffer structure (see the above-mentioned "reading area Ar"). However, display circuits 74A and 74B actually read image data only from the "valid data area" specified in steps SS30 to SS31 in display area (0) or display area (1).

Although not limited in any way, as a definition of the display area at the time of initial setting, in this example, for frame buffer FBa, index space 254 with index number 254 in arbitrary area (c) is defined as "display area (0)", Index space 255 with index number 255 in arbitrary area (c) is defined as "display area (1)" (SS32). Regarding frame buffer FBb, index space 251 with index number 251 in arbitrary area (c) is set as "display area (0)", and index space 252 with index number 252 in arbitrary area (c) is set as "display area (1)". )” (SS32).
Note that there is no particular limitation on defining the "display area" in the initial processing (SS3), and the display circuit 270 can toggle the index space (display area) to which the image data should be accessed at each operation cycle δ. You may switch.

In this example, after the above initial processing (SS30 to SS32) is completed, next, the set value of the predetermined system control register RGij is set to the first type inhibition setting register to prevent it from being changed due to the influence of noise etc. A predetermined prohibited value is set in RGij (first prohibited setting SS33).

Here, the setting values for which writing is prohibited include (1) setting values related to the display clock of the main LCD 36M and sub LCD 36S, (2) setting values related to the LVDS sampling clock, and (3) settings related to the selection operation of the output selection circuit 272. Setting values, (4) synchronization relationship between the plurality of main LCDs 36M and sub-LCDs 36S (display circuit 270(B) being dependent on the operating cycle of display circuit 270(A)), etc. are included. Note that although there is a software process for canceling the first prohibition setting, it is not used in this example. However, it is also suitable to use it as needed.

Next, by setting a predetermined prohibition value in the second type of prohibition setting register RGij, writing is prohibited for the initial setting type VDP register RGij (second prohibition setting SS34). Here, the prohibited registers include the VDP register RGij related to steps SS30 to SS32.

On the other hand, by setting a predetermined prohibition value in the third type prohibition setting register RGij, it is also possible to prohibit settings for a large number of VDP registers, including the VDP registers related to the setting processing of steps ST1 to ST3. 3 prohibition setting). However, in this example, it is not used in principle. In any case, the second prohibition setting and the third prohibition setting can be canceled arbitrarily by writing a cancellation value into a predetermined cancellation register RGij, and the setting value can also be changed after the initial setting. It becomes possible.

(Example of not making the preloader work)

Next, details of the drawing update process in step S2061 in FIG. 133 will be described, but the content of this drawing update process differs depending on whether the preloader 269 is made to function or not.
In the following, first, a case will be described in which the preloader 269 is not made to function.

FIG. 146 is a flowchart of the drawing update process (S2061) when the preloader 269 is not activated.
First, the CPU 241 of the performance control unit 24A determines whether or not the processing start conditions are satisfied (ST5). Note that, as can be seen with reference to FIG. 133, this determination timing corresponds to the start of the frame period. Note that the display timing of the sub LCD 36S is set at the time of initial setting (S2000') so as to be subordinate to the display timing of the main LCD 36M.

The starting conditions of step ST5 will be explained.
When the preloader 269 is to function, the circuit configuration and program are originally designed so that the internal operation of the VDP circuit 250b proceeds as shown in the time chart of FIG. 138. That is, based on the display list DL completed at the start of a certain frame period, the drawing circuit 274 should finish the drawing operation within the frame period. However, for example, as in the display list DL3 completed at the start of the frame period of the third frame (T1+2δ) in FIG. 138, the drawing operation cannot be completed during the corresponding frame period (T1+2δ to T1+3δ). I cannot say that there are cases where it is not possible.

The determination process in step ST5 takes such a situation into consideration, and the CPU 241 accesses the status register RGij (a type of various registers 265) indicating the operating state of the drawing circuit 274, and at the timing of step ST5, the CPU 241 Determine whether or not the required action has been completed. For example, at timing T1+δ in FIG. 138, read access is made to the status information of the drawing register regarding the drawing circuit 274, and it is determined whether the drawing operation based on the display list DL1 has been completed.

In step ST5, if the start condition is not satisfied (nonconformity), an abnormality flag ER that counts the number of abnormalities is incremented, and steps ST6 to ST8 are skipped. The abnormality flag ER is determined together with other serious abnormality flags ABN in the processing of steps ST9 and ST10, and on the premise that the serious abnormality flag ABN is in the reset state, if the number of consecutive abnormalities is not large (ER≦2), Similar to the normal time, processing for analyzing the production control command is executed (S2022 to S2024).
Here, as shown in the figure, if it is determined in step S2022 that no production control command has been received, or the received production control command is subjected to command analysis processing in step S2023, and the scheduler update flag is turned OFF in step S2024. If so, the CPU 241 returns to step S2002 in FIG. 133.

In the above, a case has been described in which the processing start condition is not met and the abnormality flag ER is ER≦2. The process of toggling the area (ST6) and the process of creating the display list DL (ST7) are skipped, and the production scenario does not proceed (the frame update flag is not turned on in step S2005 of FIG. 133, (This is because the process does not proceed from step S2003 to step S2020). This is to prevent image data from incomplete frame buffers FBa and FBb from being output. Therefore, for example, in the frame period starting from the timing (T1+3δ) in FIG. 138, the image effect does not proceed and a frame drop occurs in which the original screen (screen based on DL2) is redisplayed.

Here, in order to avoid frame drops, a configuration may be considered in which the process waits until the start condition of step ST5 is satisfied. However, there are many control processes to be executed by the CPU 241, and it is necessary to secure time for each process, so in this example, if the start condition is not satisfied, frames are dropped.

However, even if a frame drop occurs, it only delays the progress of the image presentation by about 1/30 to 2/30 seconds, and it is rare for the player to notice this. Moreover, when a frame is dropped, the progress of effects other than image effects such as sounds and lamps is also skipped (steps S2032 to S2042 in FIG. 133 are skipped), so the reach effect, preview effect, and role play that will be started later are also skipped. In the object presentation, there is no possibility that the start timings of image presentation, audio presentation, lamp presentation, motor presentation, etc. will be shifted.
In other words, in the production scenario, the start timing of image production, audio production, lamp production, and motor production, as well as the content of production to be executed after that, are centrally managed, and by allowing progress only in normal times, various The production never goes out of sync. For example, if there is a performance action that combines an explosion sound, an explosion image, a moving object, and a lamp flash action, each of the above performance actions will start correctly in synchronization even after a frame drop occurs. Ru.

Although relatively minor abnormalities have been explained above, when the serious abnormality flag ABN is set or when the number of consecutive abnormalities is large (ER>2), after the determination in step ST10, an infinite loop state is established. There is. As a result, the down-counting operation of the WDT timer progresses, and the composite chip 250 including the CPU 241 is abnormally reset. After that, the initial processing (ST1 to ST3) is re-executed, which is the root cause of the abnormal situation. is expected to be resolved.

Although abnormal situations have been explained above, in reality, the above-mentioned abnormalities almost never occur, even in minor cases, and after the processing in step ST5, the settings in the predetermined display register RGij (DSPACTL /DSPBCTL) Based on the display circuit 270(A) and the display circuit 270(B), the "display areas" of the frame buffers FBa and FBb storing the image data to be read out are toggled (ST6). As explained earlier, "display area (0)" and "display area (1)" are defined in advance in the initial process (ST3), so in the process of step ST6, frame buffers FBa and FBb are Specify whether the "display area" is display area (0) or display area (1).

By executing this step ST6, the display circuit 270(A) alternately displays the data from the index space 254 (display area (0)) and the index space 255 (display area (1)) every operation period δ. The image data is read out and the main LCD 36M is driven. Similarly, the display circuit 270(B) alternately reads out image data from the index space 251 (display area (0)) and the index space 252 (display area (1)) every operation period δ, and displays the image data on the sub LCD 36S. will be driven. Note that, as described above, the actual READ access by the display circuit 270 is limited to the valid data area in the display area (0)/display area (1) (see FIG. 144).

In any case, in this example, since the "display area" (readout area Ar) is switched every operation cycle δ, the display circuits 270 (A) and 274 (B) are completed in the immediately preceding frame period. Output processing to the main LCD 36M and sub-LCD 36S will be started for the image data thus created. However, since the process of step ST5 is started from the start of the vertical blanking period (V blank) of the main LCD 36M, the image data output process is actually started after the vertical blanking period is completed. It turns out. In FIG. 138, the arrow shown in the display circuit column indicates the operation cycle of this output processing.

When the process of step ST6, which has the above significance, is completed, the CPU 241 then completes the display list DL specifying the image data that the display circuit 270 should output to the LCD 36 (ST7). Although not particularly limited, in this example, a list buffer area (DL buffer BUF) of the RAM 243 is secured, and the display list DL is completed there (see FIG. 140).

The display list DL is configured by listing a series of instruction commands in an appropriate order, and is configured to end with an EODL (End Of DL) command. When the drawing circuit 274 recognizes this EODL command in the display list DL, it ends the process of generating image data instructed by the display list DL.
In this example, in order to realize smooth operation of the data transfer circuit 267, drawing circuit 274, and preloader 269, all instruction commands including the EODL command are written as an integer N times the command length of 32 bits (N>0). It is limited to instruction commands only. Note that, as described above, the instruction command composed of a 32-bit integer N times may also include a don't care bit.

In this way, the display list DL of this example is composed only of instruction commands whose command length is an integer N times (N>0) of 32 bits, so the data volume value (total amount of data) of the entire display list DL is: It is always an integral multiple of the minimum unit of command length (32 bits = 4 bytes). Furthermore, in this example, in consideration of the minimum data amount Dmin of the data transfer circuit 267, the data volume value of the display list DL is set to be an integral multiple (1 or more) of the minimum data amount Dmin, and the minimum data amount of the instruction command. It is adjusted to be an integral multiple of the unit (4 bytes). For example, if Dmin=256 bytes, the data volume value of the display list DL is adjusted to either 256 bytes, 512 bytes, etc.

Here, it is preferable to adjust the value to 256 bytes or 512 bytes depending on the complexity of the production content, but in this example, there are two LCDs 36, and the sub LCD 36S is used for images with less complexity. In consideration of not executing the effect, the data volume value of the display list DL is always adjusted to 256 bytes.
However, this method is not limited in any way, and is adjusted to 512 bytes or 768 bytes in the case of three or more LCDs 36 or in the case of a gaming machine that executes complex image effects including the sub-LCD 36S. Also, during normal performances, the data volume value of the display list DL is adjusted to 256 bytes, and only when performing special performances, the data volume value of the display list DL is adjusted to 512 bytes or 768 bytes. is also suitable.

As a method for adjusting the data volume value of the display list DL, there is a simple method (A) in which a 32-bit long EODL command is followed by a 32-bit long NOP (No Operation) command to fill in the missing area, or a simple method (A) is used to fill in the missing area with a 32-bit long NOP (No Operation) command. A standard method (B) is to fill in a long NOP command and then write a 32-bit long EODL command at the end. Note that the data volume value (total amount of data) of the display list DL is terminated with the EODL command without any adjustment, and when the data transfer circuit 267 operates, dummy data is additionally transferred and the data volume value (total amount of data) of the display list DL is terminated by an integer multiple of the minimum data amount Dmin. A non-adjustment method (C) is also conceivable to ensure the transfer amount of .

Here, when adopting the standard method (B), the command counter CNT is first initialized to the specified value (64-1 corresponding to 256 bytes), and each time a significant instruction command is written to the DL buffer area BUF. Next, a method can be considered in which the command counter CNT is appropriately decremented, and once a series of significant instruction commands have been written, NOP commands are written until the command counter CNT reaches zero, and finally the EODL command is written. In this example, the instruction command is limited to a command length of 32 bits, which is an integer N times (N>0), so the above process is easy, and the subtraction process of the command counter CNT is an integer N times 32 bits (N>0). The subtraction process corresponds to .

On the other hand, when adopting the simple method (A), it is sufficient to first fill the entire list buffer area (DL buffer BUF) with NOP commands when creating the display list DL, so at first glance it seems easier than the standard method (B). Seems to be excellent. In addition, from the viewpoint of simplicity, the no-adjustment method (C) also seems to be superior. However, in this example, the standard method (B) is basically adopted, and the actual data amount from the beginning of the display list DL to the EODL command, that is, the data amount up to the EODL command is always the lowest in the data transfer circuit 267. It is adjusted to be an integral multiple of the data amount Dmin.

This takes into consideration an example that utilizes the preloader 269, and if the simple method (A) or non-adjustment method (C) is adopted, the actual data amount of the display list DL up to the EODL command will be random. This is because a problem occurs when the rewriting list DL' rewritten by the preloader 269 is transferred to the DRAM 278 or when the rewriting list DL' is transferred from the DRAM 278 to the drawing circuit 274. Note that the ChA control circuit 267a of the data transfer circuit 267 functions when the rewriting list DL' is transferred to the DRAM 278, and the ChB control circuit 267b functions when transferring the rewriting list DL' to the drawing circuit 274 (as shown in FIG. ), in either case, only the rewrite list DL' up to the EODL command is transferred.

The advantages of the standard method (B) for adjusting the data volume value of the display list DL have been explained above, but in an embodiment in which the preloader 269 does not function, the issued display list DL is only processed by the drawing circuit 274. Therefore, the use of the simple method (A) and the no-adjustment method (C) is not prohibited in any way.

However, in the following explanation, the details of the display list DL will be explained based on FIG. 147 on the premise that the standard method (B) is adopted in principle regardless of whether or not the preloader 269 is used.

Although not particularly limited, in this example, the display list DL first describes the instruction command sequence (L11 to L16) regarding the main LCD 36M, and then describes the instruction command sequence (L17 to L20) regarding the sub LCD 36S. . Further, standard method (B) is adopted to adjust the data volume value of the display list DL to a fixed length (256 bytes). Note that FIG. 147 actually shows the procedure for the CPU 241 to write an instruction command into the list buffer area of the RAM 243 and the operation of the drawing circuit 274 based on the display list DL.

As shown in FIG. 147, at the beginning of the display list DL, an environment setting instruction command (SETDAVR) is written to specify the upper left base point address (X, Y) on the index space IDX for the frame buffer FBa of the main LCD 36M. (L11). As explained with reference to FIG. 141, in this example, a pair of frame buffers FBa are secured in the arbitrary area (c) for the main LCD 36M. Then, normally, by setting the base point address (X, Y) = (0, 0) corresponding to the effective data area for the display circuit 270, the drawing circuit 274 uses it from the beginning position of the frame buffer FBa. .

In FIG. 143A, the actual drawing area on the lower left side is labeled L11, which means that the actual drawing area on the frame buffer FBa is moved to the base address (0,0) of the frame buffer FBa by the instruction command L11. Starting with means that it has been specified. However, the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the actual drawing area and the index number specifically specifying the actual drawing area are still undetermined, and are determined by an instruction command (SETINDEX) L13, which will be described later. Note that the instruction command L11 also specifies whether or not to use the Z buffer.

Next, use the environment setting command (SETDAVF) to set the upper left base point coordinates (Xs, Ys) and lower right diagonal point coordinates (Xe, Ye) on the virtual drawing space, and set the W x H dimension. A drawing area is defined (L12). Here, the virtual drawing space is a virtual two-dimensional space of ±8192 in the X direction and ±8192 in the Y direction, which can be drawn by a drawing instruction command (such as a SPRITE command) (see FIG. 143A).

By this instruction command L12 (SETDAVF), the virtual drawing space is divided into a drawing area where the drawing content is actually reflected on the main LCD 36M and other non-drawing areas. Further, the instruction command L12 (SETDAVF) associates the actual drawing area whose start position (base point address) is defined by the instruction command L11 with the drawing area in the virtual drawing space.

In other words, the instruction command L12 defines a W×H actual drawing area starting from the base address, which corresponds to the drawing area in the virtual drawing space, in the frame buffer FBa (the index space is undetermined). That will happen. Therefore, the drawing area specified by the instruction command L12 needs to be equal to or smaller than the horizontal size of the frame buffer FBa. Usually, the drawing area and the actual drawing area are defined to have the same dimensions as the effective data area (FIG. 144) for the display circuit 270.

After the drawing circuit 274 executes the instruction commands L11 and L12, of the drawing contents drawn in the virtual drawing space, only those included in the drawing area are reflected in the actual drawing area of the frame buffer FBa. become. Therefore, the drawing contents of the portion protruding from the drawing area or the portion described as a work area in FIG. 143A are not reflected in the frame buffer FBa as they are. Note that when securing a work area in the virtual drawing space, a non-drawing area of the virtual drawing space is used.

Next, in the current operation cycle, the drawing circuit 274 defines where the drawing content to be drawn should be drawn based on the display list DL to be completed from now on (L13). Specifically, for the double-buffered frame buffer FBa, an index space IDX that is a "writing area" (drawing area Ad) of drawing content based on the current display list DL is specified (L13). Specifically, the SETINDEX command, which is a texture setting command, confirms that (1) the frame buffer FBa is secured in an arbitrary area, and (2) that the frame buffer FBa is secured in an arbitrary area in the index space IDXN, which is the "write area". The upper index number N is specified.

For example, when N=255 is specified by this instruction command L13, the actual drawing area corresponding to the drawing area defined on the virtual drawing space is specified in the frame buffer FBa with a double buffer structure. This means that the index space IDX255 is defined.

In the case of this example, the index number of frame buffer FBa is 255 or 254 (FIG. 141), and either one is specified by toggling (L13). Note that this index number is the index number of the display area other than (0)/(1) specified in step ST6 described above. For example, in the process of step ST6, if the display area (0) is specified for the display circuit 270, the display area (1) becomes the "writing area" for the drawing circuit 274.

As described above, after the correspondence between the actual drawing area (W×H logical space) and the drawing area (W×H virtual space) is generally defined by the instruction command L11 and the instruction command L12, By the instruction command L13 (SETINDEX) that specifically specifies the index space IDX, the W×H virtual space is associated with the W×H logical space in the specific index space IDX.

In other words, the content that will be virtually drawn in the W×H virtual space based on a series of instruction commands will be determined by the VDP circuit 250b that defines the correspondence between the virtual space and the real address of the VRAM 261. Based on the internal conversion table, the image data is stored in the VRAM 261 (frame buffer).

Subsequently, an instruction command is written to execute a frame buffer clearing process to fill in the index space IDX specified as the "write area" with black, for example (ST14, ST15). This is nothing but a process of erasing image data written to the frame buffer FBa two frame periods ago.

Specifically, the SETFCOLOR command, which is a type of environment setting command, is used to select, for example, black color, and the RECTANGLE command, which is a primitive drawing command, is used to specify that a rectangular area is to be filled. Note that the RECTANGLE command specifies the XY coordinates of the upper left end point and lower right end point of the drawing area set in the virtual drawing space (virtual space corresponding to the frame buffer FBa) (see FIG. 143A).

The drawing preparation process is completed by the above processing, so next, instruction commands for drawing an appropriate texture, such as a still image or one frame of a moving image, in the virtual drawing space will be listed. Typically, first, the index space IDX to which the texture is to be expanded is specified using a texture setting SETINDEX command, and then a TXLOAD command, which is a texture loading instruction command, is written to specify a predetermined value to be read from the CGROM 260. The texture is written in the display list DL so as to be developed in a predetermined index space IDX.

As explained above, in this example, the background video is composed of an IP stream video. Therefore, for example, for a background video, specify the index space IDX in which it should be developed as the index space IDX0 of page area (b) using the texture setting SETINDEX command, and then write the texture loading TXLOAD command. . Note that in the TXLOAD command, it is necessary to specify the start address of the CGROM 260 (texture source address) and the data size (horizontal x vertical) after expansion for the video frame to be loaded this time.

When the above-mentioned TXLOAD command is executed in the VDP circuit 250b, one frame (texture) of the background video is first acquired in the AAC area (a), and then transferred to the page area (b) by the automatically activated GDEC 273. ) is expanded to index space IDX0. Next, one frame of this moving image will be drawn in the virtual drawing space. In this case, you can use the SETINDEX command (texture setting system) to set "index space IDX0 of page area (b) is the texture to be processed later", but it is not necessary to process it consecutively to the TXLOAD command. In some cases, the description of this SETINDEX command can be omitted.

In any case, in a state where it is specified that "index space IDX0 of page area (b) is the texture to be processed later," next, set parameters for α blend processing, etc. as appropriate. This section describes the instruction commands for the inter-render calculation system. Note that the α blend process is related to the process of making an image already written in the drawing area (frame buffer FBa) transparent/semi-transparent with an image that will be overwritten from now on. Therefore, in the drawing operation of the first image, as in the moving image frame of the background moving image, it is not necessary to use the instruction command of the inter-drawing calculation system.

Next, use the SPRITE command, which is a primitive drawing instruction command, to draw the "texture in index space IDX0 of page area (b) (one frame of the background video)" at the appropriate location in the virtual drawing space (rectangular Destination area). Write the SPRITE command to do so. Note that the SPRITE command requires specifying the upper left end point and lower right end point of the Destination area of the virtual drawing space.

This Destination area is the whole or part of the drawing area (virtual space defined on the virtual drawing space) that is previously associated with the actual drawing area (FBa) by the instruction commands L11 and L12. However, since a background moving image is normally drawn on the entire display screen, the destination area in such a case is the entire drawing area or more. Note that the case where the destination area is larger than the entire drawing area is, for example, when the background video is zoomed in.

With the above processing, the drawing of the video frames of the background video has been completed.Next, list the instruction commands such as texture loading type, texture setting type, inter-rendering calculation type, and primitive drawing type commands in the appropriate order. A display list DL is configured to draw various textures over the background video. As explained earlier, a large number of moving images are required during variable production, so in that case, in order to increase the index space IDX for the page area (b) of the VRAM 261, an instruction command for the index table control system is used. (NEWPIX) will be described.

For example, regarding the second IP stream video, after securing an additional index space IDX1 in the page area (b) using the NEWPIX command, specifying this index space IDX1 (SETINDEX), and Instructs to develop one frame (TXLOAD) and places the developed texture at the appropriate location in the drawing area (SPRITE). Normally, the destination area in this case becomes part of the drawing area.

The same goes for the rest. After securing the index space IDXk one after another using the NEWPIX command, if multiple IP streams are drawn in the drawing area while executing the appropriate α blending process, the content drawn in the drawing area is as follows: The image data will be sequentially accumulated in the frame buffer FBa, which is the actual drawing area. When a plurality of N IP stream videos are rendered, a plurality of N index spaces are functioning in the page area (b).

Then, when a series of variable effects has been completed, use the DELPIX command to release the index space IDX that is deemed unnecessary among the large number of index spaces IDX1 to IDXk secured in the page area (b). All you have to do is delete the index space IDX.

When drawing still images or I-stream videos, specify that these textures are to be decoded in the AAC area (a) using the SETINDEX command, and then execute the TXLOAD command to decode the AAC area. The texture acquired in (a) is then expanded into the ACC area (a) by the automatically activated GDEC 273. The expanded texture can then be drawn at the appropriate location in the drawing area using the SPRITE command. Note that the first AAC area (a1) or the second AAC area (a2) is used depending on whether or not to utilize the cache hit function.

In the explanation so far, each texture is directly drawn in the drawing area of the main LCD 36M, but the operation is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if an appropriate drawing area is provided without overlapping the drawing area already reserved for the main LCD 36M (FIG. 143A) and this drawing area is associated with the work area of the VRAM 261, an intermediate drawing area can be constructed. In this way, an appropriate effect image can be completed. Here, the reason why the drawing area does not overlap with the drawing area for the main LCD 36M is that for the overlapping area, the later association setting takes precedence, and the drawing content for that area is not reflected in the frame buffer FBa.

As shown in FIG. 143A, the work area in this example is index space IDX0 in arbitrary area (c). Then, at the production timing using this work area, an instruction command string (SETDAVR, SETDAVF, SETINDEX). As shown in FIG. 143A, the rendering area for the effect image is secured in an area that is not included in the rendering area for the main LCD 36M.

Thereafter, it is sufficient to list instruction commands similar to the instruction command string L16 regarding the frame buffer FBa to complete an appropriate effect image in the index space IDX0. In this example, since the effect image is composed of a still image, an instruction command (SETINDEX) is written so that the decoded data is developed in the first AAC area (a1), and then the drawing area of index space IDX0 is written. A primitive drawing instruction command (SPRITE) with the appropriate location as the Destination will be used. Note that such an operation is repeated once or multiple times depending on the content of the performance.

Then, after positioning the index space IDX0 in which the effect image has been completed as a texture (SETINDEX), the effect image (texture) of the index space IDX0 may be drawn at an appropriate location in the drawing area of the main LCD 36M using the SPRITE command. In such a case, it is conceivable to decompose the effect image in the index space IDX0 into triangular drawing primitives, rotate them at an appropriate angle, and then draw them in the drawing area. Note that the rotation angle of the texture is associated with, for example, the reliability of the preview performance.

The instruction command sequence (L11 to L16) for completing one frame of the main LCD 36M has been described above, but the same applies to the instruction command sequence (L17 to L12) for completing one frame of the sub LCD 36S. That is, the starting XY coordinates of the frame buffer FBb are defined (L17: normally X=0, Y=0), and a drawing area for the sub LCD 36S is defined on the virtual drawing space shown in FIG. 143B (L18).

By the way, in this example, after the generation of image data for the main LCD 36M is completed, the process shifts to generation processing for the sub-LCD 36S, so there is no problem even if the drawing area for the sub-LCD 36S overlaps with the drawing area for the main LCD 36M. You can freely set the drawing area without any problems. Therefore, when developing a display list DL generation program, for example, when pasting an appropriate texture to a newly set drawing area with the SPRITE command, settings such as the operation parameters (Destination area) of the SPRITE command, etc. It can be standardized to some extent.

When the definition of such an arbitrary drawing area is completed (L18), next, for the frame buffer FBb of the double-buffered sub LCD 36S, the index space IDX which becomes the "writing area" of the drawing content based on the current display list DL is created. (L19). The index number of this index space IDX is the index number of the frame buffer FBb that does not correspond to the display area (0)/(1) specified in step ST6 of the main process.

Thereafter, the instruction command strings L20 to L22 for the sub LCD 36S are listed in the same way as the instruction command strings L14 to L16 for the main LCD 36M. Furthermore, it is also possible to use the completed effect image in the index space IDX0.

As described above, in this example, the instruction commands L11 to L22 that make up the display list DL are all limited to those whose command length is an integral multiple of 32 bits. As explained earlier, the data volume value (total amount of data) of the display list DL in this example is adjusted to a fixed length (256 bytes), and the required number of NOP commands (L23) as dummy commands are added. Above, the process is terminated with the EODL command (L24). That is, the embodiment shown in FIG. 147 adopts the standard method (B) described above.

However, even when using the standard method (B), it is not always essential to fix the total amount of data in the display list DL to 256 bytes in all operation cycles. That is, in another embodiment, if the total amount of data in the display list DL excluding the NOP command exceeds 256 bytes (for example, during a special performance period), the total amount of data in the display list DL may be increased by adding the NOP command. and adjusted to 512 bytes or more N×256 bytes. As described above, when standard method (B) is adopted, the last of N×256 bytes is terminated with the EODL command.

The configuration of the display list DL has been described in detail above, and the CPU 241 issues the completed display list DL of fixed byte length to the VDP circuit 250b (ST7 to ST8).

FIG. 148 is a flowchart illustrating DL issuing processing (ST8 in FIG. 147) in which the CPU 241 directly accesses the transfer port register TR_PORT of the data transfer circuit 267 to issue the display list DL to the drawing circuit 274.
Note that the transfer port register TR_PORT is a type of data transfer register RGij that defines the operation contents of the data transfer circuit 267.

In order to implement the DL issuing process, it is first necessary to set necessary setting values in a plurality of data transfer registers RGij that define the operation contents of the data transfer circuit 267. Specifically, the transfer operation mode of the data transfer circuit 267 and the transmission route inside the data transfer circuit 267 are specified to a predetermined data transfer register RGij. Although the setting contents are not particularly limited, here, data is transferred from the CPU interface unit 264 via the ChB control circuit 267b (FIG. 140) and the CPU bus control unit 267d while checking the remaining capacity of the FIFO buffer. It is set to execute the transfer operation (ST20). Note that in the following description, the ChB control circuit 267b may be abbreviated as "transfer circuit ChB" for convenience.

Next, the total transfer size is set in a predetermined data transfer register RGij. As explained above, in this example, the total amount of data in the display list DL is adjusted to an integral multiple of 256 bytes, so that value is set. Note that the total data amount=256×N is also an integer N times the minimum data amount Dmin of the data transfer circuit 267. Usually, the multiple N is 1 or 2, but in the following explanation, it will be assumed that N=1.

Here, since the transfer port register TR_PORT (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as transfer port) is a 32-bit register, the CPU 241 executes a register write operation for the transfer port TR_PORT every 32 bits. Become. Therefore, the value of the management counter CN that manages the number of register writes is initialized to 64 (ST21). Note that when adopting the non-adjustment method (C), at this timing, a data transfer amount that is an integral multiple of the minimum data amount Dmin is determined and the management counter CN is set.

Since the initial settings are completed through the above processing, next, the data transfer operation via the transfer circuit ChB is set to the start state (ST22), and the settings are made to the predetermined drawing register RGij that defines the operation of the drawing circuit 274. Based on the value, a drawing operation is started (ST23). As a result, the rendering circuit 274 (display list analyzer) can quickly and smoothly analyze the instruction command string for which the CPU 241 performs a register write operation on the transfer port TR_PORT.

Note that the fact that the instruction commands listed in the display list DL are limited to instruction commands whose command length is an integral multiple of 32 bits also contributes effectively to the quick and smooth Analyze processing. Timings t1, t2, t3, and t4 in FIG. 138 indicate the operation timings of step ST23. Note that since the display list DL issuing process (ST8) ends quickly, the time span required for the issuing process is not shown in FIGS. 138 to 139.

Subsequently, it is confirmed whether the settings in step ST22 worked (ST24). This is because the initial setting of each part of the data transfer circuit 267 takes more processing time than the register write operation (setting operation) by the CPU 241, so subsequent instructions are not given to the data transfer circuit 267 in an incomplete state. It is. If the operation does not start even after waiting for a predetermined period of time, the serious abnormality flag ABN is set and the DL issuing process ends (ST25). As a result, the WDT circuit 251 then functions and the composite chip 250 is abnormally reset (see ST10 in FIG. 146).

However, normally, the setting in step ST22 is completed quickly, so next, after confirming that the FIFO buffer (32 bits x 130 stages) of the CPU bus control unit 267d is not full (ST26) , writes instruction commands to the transfer port TR_PORT line by line in order from the first line configuring the display list DL (ST28).
Then, while decrementing the management counter CN (ST29), the processes of steps ST26 to ST29 are repeated until the management counter CN becomes zero (ST30). In this example, since the minimum data amount Dmin is specified in the data transfer circuit 267, the data transfer operation is executed at the timing when the minimum data amount Dmin is accumulated in the FIFO buffer, and the data transfer operation is performed intermittently. This is a transfer operation.

In any case, in this example, the DL issuing process (ST28) is quickly completed, but in the unlikely event that the settings in the VDP register RGij become inconsistent due to the influence of noise, etc., the determination in step ST26 is performed. In some cases, the FIFO buffer full state may not be resolved even after waiting for a predetermined period of time. In such a case, initialization data is set in a predetermined VDP register RGij to initialize the drawing circuit 274 and data transfer circuit 267, and then the serious abnormality flag ABN is set and the DL issuing process is started. Finish (ST27).

By the way, at this timing, the data transfer circuit 267 and the drawing circuit 274 have already started operating and have completed some processing, so the contents of the drawing register RGij are used for the initialization process of the drawing circuit 274. In the maintained state, (1) all internal parameters that may be set by display list DL are set to initial values, (2) all internal control circuits are set to initial states, (3) This includes initializing the GDEC 273 and (4) initializing the cache state of the AAC area. Similarly, the initialization processing of the data transfer circuit 267 includes initialization processing of the entire data transfer up to that point, such as clearing the FIFO buffer. As a result, the status information indicating the operating state of the data transfer circuit 267 changes to a predetermined value (a value indicating that the entire data transfer is being initialized).

Note that in the initialization process of step ST27 described above, the contents of the drawing register RGij are maintained, but the contents of a predetermined drawing register may be initialized. The predetermined drawing registers that are cleared to initial values include (a) an execution control register that sets the start of drawing execution (see ST23), (b) a status register that indicates the execution status of the drawing circuit 274, and (c) a current Contains a status register that identifies the location of the display list being processed.

In any case, as a result of setting the serious abnormality flag ABN, the WDT circuit 251 will function and the composite chip 250 will be abnormally reset (ST10), so the process of initializing the drawing circuit 274 and data transfer circuit 267 will be performed. is not necessarily required. On the other hand, when the drawing circuit 274 and data transfer circuit 267 are initialized, abnormality recovery can be expected as a result, so the process returns to step ST20 and the DL issuing process is restarted without setting the serious abnormality flag ABN. It is also suitable to carry out.

This point is the same in the process of step ST25, and it is preferable to initialize the data transfer circuit 276 and the drawing circuit 274 and then return to the process of step ST20 without setting the serious abnormality flag ABN. However, in such a case, the number of times the DL issuing process is re-executed is counted, and if the number of re-executing times exceeds the limit value, the serious abnormality flag ABN is set and the DL issuing process is ended.

FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating a normal operating state for confirmation. As shown in the figure, the issued display list DL is analyzed by the drawing circuit 274 (display list analyzer) in the order of the listed instruction commands, and operations based on each instruction command are executed. This operation is executed in parallel with the display list DL issuance process and the data transfer operation of the data transfer circuit 267 (ST26 to ST30).

For example, by executing the instruction command (TXLOAD), the necessary texture is read from the CGROM 260 and acquired in the AAC area (a), and then the GDEC 273 is automatically started to perform the decoding operation, and the texture is decoded. The subsequent data is developed into a predetermined index space. Also, depending on the instruction command, the geometry engine 275 and others function, but in any case, the image data corresponding to the display list DL is completed in the frame buffers FBa and FBb by the cooperation of each part of the drawing circuit 274. That will happen.

Next, a case will be described in which the display list DL is issued via the DMAC circuit 252.
The flowchart in FIG. 150 shows the process that should be executed by the CPU 241 of the production control unit 24A when the display list DL is issued via the DMAC circuit 252. Specifically, this is the process to be executed as step ST8.
Although not limited in any way, of the first to fourth DMA channels built into the DMAC circuit 60, the third DMA channel will be used.

In FIG. 150, the CPU 241 first sets clear values in a predetermined data transfer register RGij and a predetermined drawing register RGij, respectively, and initializes the data transfer circuit 267 and the drawing circuit 274 (ST20). This process is the same as the error process in step ST27 in FIG. 148, and the internal circuit of the data transfer circuit 267 including the FIFO buffer is initialized, and the status bit of the data transfer register indicating the progress state of data transfer is set to the initial value. The bit indicating that the entire data transfer is being initialized becomes a predetermined value.
The same applies to the drawing circuit 274, which includes (1) setting the internal parameters to initial values, (2) setting the internal control circuit to the initial state, (3) initializing the GDEC 273, and (4) ) Includes processing to initialize the cache state of the AAC area. Also, in the initialization process of the drawing circuit 274 (ST20 in FIG. 150), the above-described predetermined drawing register RGij may be initialized. Note that in the process of FIG. 148, such initialization process may be executed first.

In the process of FIG. 150, next, it is confirmed that the initialization process has been completed normally by reading a predetermined status register RGij that specifies the operating states of the data transfer circuit 267 and the drawing circuit 274 (ST21). If initialization is not possible, a serious abnormality flag ABN is set and the process ends (ST22). However, such a situation almost never occurs in reality.

Next, the transfer operation mode of the data transfer circuit 267 and the transmission route within the data transfer circuit 267 are set in a predetermined data transfer register RGij (ST23). Although the setting contents are not particularly limited, here, it is set that the transfer protocol from the CPU interface section 264 to the ChB control circuit 267b and the transfer protocol to the CPU bus control section 267d follows the settings for the DMAC circuit 252 ( ST23).

Next, the total transfer size is set in a predetermined data transfer register RGij (ST24). As in the case of FIG. 148, the total amount of data=256. Note that when adopting the non-adjustment method (C), the total transfer size that is an integral multiple of the minimum data amount Dmin is determined and set at this timing.
Next, the drawing operation of the drawing circuit 274 is started based on the set value to a predetermined drawing register RGij (ST25). Timings t1, t2, t3, and t4 in FIG. 138 are also the operation timings of step ST25. Then, after starting the operation of the DMAC circuit 252 (ST26), the data transfer circuit 267 starts the data transfer operation (ST27).

The process for starting the operation of the DMAC circuit 252 is as shown in FIG. 151. First, DMAC transfer is prohibited and the transfer of one cycle of data transfer unit (one operand) is waited for completion (ST40). The detailed operation is the same as the process shown in FIG. 152, and is divided into a process for prohibiting DMAC transfer (ST53) and a subsequent standby process (ST54).

The reason for providing such processing is that (1) in other embodiments, the DMAC circuit 252 (third DMA channel) may be used in main processing or timer interrupt processing; and (2) In other embodiments in which the process of step ST5 in FIG. 146 is not provided, the DMAC circuit 252 that has started issuing the display list DL may not be able to complete the DL issuing operation within its operation cycle (δ). This has been taken into consideration.

In the above-mentioned exceptional situation, if a new setting value (such as a contradictory setting value) is additionally set to the DMAC circuit 252 while it is operating, normal DMA operation will not be guaranteed at all, and serious troubles may occur. Although this is a concern, by providing the process in step ST40, normal operation based on the subsequent set values is ensured. In other words, even in the modified embodiment in which the present embodiment is partially modified, normal DMA operation can be realized thereafter regardless of the preceding trouble.

After executing the process of step ST40 having the above-mentioned significance, next, the operating conditions of the DMAC circuit 252 are set (ST41). Specifically, the cycle steal transfer mode is selected, and one operand transfer is 32 bit transfer x 2 times. In addition, the Source address is the address of the list buffer area (DL buffer BUF) of the RAM 243, so it should be recognized as increasing sequentially, while the Destination address is the transfer port TR_PORT, so it should be a fixed value. .

Next, the start address of the DL buffer BUF in the RAM 243 is set in a predetermined operation control register that defines the operation of the DMAC circuit 252 (ST42), and the address of the transfer port TR_PORT, which is the transfer destination address, is set (ST43). . Further, after setting the total transfer size, that is, the total amount of data in the display list DL to 256 bytes (ST44), the DMA operation of the DMAC circuit 252 is started (ST45).

By the way, the explanation so far has been based on the assumption that the actual bit lengths of the instruction commands are all integral multiples of 32 bits. However, since the structure of the display list DL and the instruction command is not necessarily limited, such a case will be described below.

For example, when the total data amount X of the display list DL is an arbitrary value X that is not an integral multiple of 32 bits, including the case where the above-described non-adjustment method (C) is adopted, in the process of step ST44, this arbitrary value , after adjusting the transfer amount MOD to an appropriate transfer amount MOD, executes the setting process of the total transfer size. Here, the appropriate transfer amount MOD is defined based on the settings for one-operand transfer and the minimum data amount Dmin (bytes) of the data transfer circuit 267.

Specifically, if the 1-operand transfer setting is N bytes x M times, the transfer amount MOD is adjusted to a value that is an integral multiple of N x M (bytes) and an integral multiple of Dmin (bytes). be done. For example, if N×M=8×4 and Dmin=256, the arbitrary value X (=300) bytes is adjusted to the transfer amount MOD (=512) bytes.

As explained above, including the general theory, in the DMA operation of the DMAC circuit 252, the cycle steal transfer operation is started, and the display list DL is changed every 32 bits in the case of the embodiment without particularly interfering with the operation of the CPU 241. is transferred to the transfer port TR_PORT. The transferred data is then transferred to the drawing circuit 274 via the transfer circuit ChB.

In order to realize such an operation, in this example, following the process in step ST45, the data transfer circuit 267 starts a transfer operation and ends the process (ST27). Thereafter, the data transfer circuit 267 receives the instruction command sequence of the display list DL from the DMAC circuit 252 using the minimum data amount Dmin as one unit, and transfers this to the drawing circuit 274. Then, the drawing circuit 274 executes a drawing operation based on the instruction command of the display list DL. Therefore, after the process in step ST27, the CPU 241 can start the process from step S2004 in FIG. 133 through step ST9 in FIG. In parallel, it is possible to control the effects of sounds, lamps, and motors.

FIG. 153 illustrates the contents of this operation. Prior to DMA transfer, the operation of the drawing circuit 274 is started (ST25), and the display list analyzer of the drawing circuit 274 quickly and smoothly executes Analyze processing, and other operations such as the GDEC 273 and the geometry engine 275 are performed. Based on this, one frame worth of image data is generated in the frame buffers FBa and FBb for each of the LCDs 36M and 36S.

By the way, the method of FIG. 150 in which the DL issuing process ends with the process of step ST27 is not necessarily limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 162, which will be described later, when the production control of sounds, lamps, and motors is controlled by another CPU provided separately from the CPU 241, after the process of step ST27, the DMAC circuit 252 and data transfer It is preferable to confirm the normal operation of circuit 267.

FIG. 152 is an operation following step ST27 in FIG. 150, and is a flowchart illustrating normal operation confirmation processing.
First, referring to a predetermined status register, it is confirmed that the transfer operation of the DMAC circuit 252 has been completed normally (ST50). Also, it is confirmed that the data transfer circuit 267 has finished the transfer operation (ST51). Normally, the DL issuing process in FIG. 150 is completed through such a route.

On the other hand, even if you wait for a certain period of time. If the operation of the DMAC circuit 252 has not been completed, or if the data transfer circuit 267 has not completed its transfer operation, a clear value is set in a predetermined VDP register RGij for the drawing circuit 274 and the data transfer circuit 267. Then, the DL issuing process is initialized (ST52). This is an operation based on the fact that the display list DL issuance processing has not been completed normally, and specifically, the content is the same as the error processing in step ST27 in FIG. 148 and the initial processing in step ST20 in FIG. 150. be.

That is, in this case as well, since the drawing circuit 274 has already started operating and has completed some processing, the initialization process of the drawing circuit 274 includes (1) the possibilities set by the display list DL; (2) Setting all internal control circuits to their initial states; (3) Initializing the GDEC 273; (4) Initializing the cache state of the AAC area. It includes becoming

Next, a new DMA transfer operation is prohibited (ST53), and the process waits for the transfer operation of one operand in progress to be completed (ST54). As described above, in this example, two 32-bit transfers are used as one operand, in order to avoid sudden initialization of the DMAC circuit 252 in operation.

When this preparatory work is completed, a clear value is set in a predetermined operation control register that defines the operation of the DMAC circuit 252, and the DMAC circuit 252 is initialized (ST52). Then, the serious abnormality flag ABN is set and the DL issuing process is completed. In this case, since abnormality recovery can be expected through the processing in steps ST52 and ST55, it is also preferable to return to step ST20 in FIG. 150 and re-execute the DL issuing process without setting the serious abnormality flag ABN. be. However, it is necessary to count the number of times the DL issuance process (ST23 to ST27) is re-executed, and if the number of re-executions exceeds the limit value, it is necessary to set the serious abnormality flag ABN and finish the DL issuance process.

(Example of making the preloader work)

Next, the process for making the preloader 269 function will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 159.
FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the drawing update process (S2061) to be executed by the CPU 241 when the preloader 269 is made to function.
The process in FIG. 154 is similar to the process in FIG. 146, but first, the content of start condition determination (ST5') is different. That is, in the embodiment using the preloader 269, at the start of each operation cycle, read access is made to the status information of the drawing circuit 274 and the preloader 269 to confirm that the drawing operation based on the display list DL1 has been completed and that the display list It is confirmed that the preload operation based on DL2 has been completed (ST5').

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 139, the preloader 269 should have finished the prefetch operation (preload operation) during the frame period (T1 to T1+δ), for example, based on the display list DL1 issued at timing T1. It is. Further, the drawing circuit 274 should have finished the drawing operation based on the display list DL1 during the frame period (T1+δ to T1+2δ), for example, based on the operation start command instructed in the frame period starting from timing T1+δ. It is.

Therefore, in step ST5', read access is made to the status information of the VDP register RGij regarding the drawing circuit 274 and the preloader 269 to confirm the above-mentioned normal operation. In FIG. 139, normal operation is confirmed in the determination of the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 5th frame periods, but in the determination of the 4th frame (frame period starting from timing T1+3δ), the preload operation is completed. It is shown that it is not in use.

When such an abnormality occurs, the abnormality flag ER is incremented (ER=ER+1) and the process proceeds to step ST9. Therefore, frames are dropped as in the case of FIG. 146. That is, since the display area switching process (ST6) is skipped, the same screen is displayed again. The frame period (T1+3δ to T1+4δ) shown in FIGS. 138 and 139 shows the operating state.

In addition, in the determination of step ST5', if the start condition is not satisfied, the drawing circuit 274 is not instructed to start the drawing operation based on the rewrite list DL' (PT10), so the drawing circuit 274 is inactive. Also, no new display list is generated. In FIG. 139, timings t0, t2, and t4 indicate the operation timings of the drawing operation start instruction (PT10), more precisely, the timings of step ST26 in FIG. 155, which will be described later.

The case where the determination in step ST5' is nonconformity has been described above, but in a normal case, after the display areas of frame buffers FBa and FBb are toggled (ST6), the rewriting list DL is sent to the drawing circuit 274. A drawing operation based on ' is started (PT10). The specific contents are as shown in FIG. 155, and the drawing circuit 274 reads the rewriting list DL' from the DL buffer BUF' of the DRAM 278 via the data transfer circuit 267 (transfer circuit ChB) under the control of the CPU 241. will be obtained and the drawing operation will be executed.

Prior to explaining the flowchart of FIG. 155 that realizes this operation, the operation of the preloader 269 is confirmed. The preloader 269 performs a prefetch operation (preload) of the CGROM 260 based on the display list DL acquired one frame before. The pre-read data has already been stored in the preload area secured in the DRAM 278. In addition, for the texture load command (TXLOAD) listed in the display list DL, its Source address is rewritten to the address of the preload area, and the DL buffer BUF' of the DRAM 278 is written as the rewritten list DL' (see Figure 140). is stored in.

Note that in this rewriting process, there is no change in the total amount of data in the display list DL, and the total amount of data in the rewriting list DL' is the same as that in the display list DL. Further, the display list DL is created using the standard method (B), and the last of the rewrite list DL' is an EODL command, as in the case of the display list DL.

Based on the above, referring to FIG. 155, the CPU 241 first sets clear values in a predetermined data transfer register RGij and a predetermined drawing register RGij, and initializes the data transfer circuit 267 and the drawing circuit 274. (ST20). This process has the same content as the process of ST20 in FIG. 150. Next, it is confirmed that this initialization process has been completed normally (ST21), and if the initialization is not completed even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the serious abnormality flag ABN is set and the process is terminated (ST21). ST22).

Normally, the initialization of the data transfer circuit 267 and the drawing circuit 274 is completed normally, so next, the transmission route inside the data transfer circuit 267 is set to a predetermined data transfer register RGij (ST23). Specifically, data is set to be transferred from the DRAM 278 to the drawing circuit 274 via the ChB control circuit 267b (ST23). Next, the start address of the DL buffer BUF' of the DRAM 278 in which the rewrite list DL' is stored is set in a predetermined data transfer register RGij (ST24).

Further, for this rewrite list DL', the total transfer size is set in a predetermined data transfer register RGij (ST25). As explained above, the total amount of data in the rewriting list DL' is the same as the total amount of data in the display list DL, and specifically, for example, 256 bytes.

Next, the drawing operation of the drawing circuit 274 is started based on the set value to a predetermined drawing register RGij (ST26). Timings t1, t2, t3, and t4 in FIG. 138 are also the operation timings of step ST26. Then, the operation of the data transfer circuit 267 is started based on the set value to a predetermined data transfer register RGij, and the process ends (ST27). Thereafter, the CPU 241 is not particularly involved in the operations of the data transfer circuit 267 and the drawing circuit 274, and proceeds to display list generation processing (ST7) to be executed in the next operation cycle.

On the other hand, the drawing circuit 274, which starts operating at the timing of step ST26, executes a drawing operation based on the rewrite list DL' and generates image data based on the rewrite list DL' in the frame buffers FBa and FBb. Note that in this operation, the drawing circuit 274 does not read the CGROM 260 but exclusively reads the preload area, so that the series of drawing operations can be quickly completed.

The processing content of step PT10 has been explained above, so to continue the explanation by returning to FIG. 154, in the embodiment in which the preloader 269 is activated after the processing of step PT11, the display list DL to be implemented in the next cycle is It is created based on the standard method (B) (ST7). For example, in a frame period starting from timing T1 shown in FIG. 19, a display list DL is created that is referred to by the drawing circuit 274 in the next frame period (T1+δ to T1+2δ).

Next, the CPU 241 issues the created display list DL to the preloader 269 instead of the drawing circuit 274 (PT11). The specific contents of the operation are as shown in FIGS. 157 to 159. First, regarding the embodiment in which the preloader 269 is not functioned (FIG. 146), there are cases where the CPU 241 issues the display list DL directly to the drawing circuit 274 (FIG. 149), and cases where the CPU 241 issues the display list DL via the DMAC circuit 252 (FIG. 149). 153), FIGS. 158 and 159 show almost the same operations as these, except that the issue destination is the preloader 269.

FIG. 157 is a flowchart explaining the operation of FIG. 158, and is almost the same as the flowchart of FIG. 148. However, the process from the CPU interface unit 264 via the ChC control circuit 267c and the setting to execute the data transfer operation while checking the remaining capacity of the FIFO buffer (ST20) regarding the CPU bus control unit 267d are different. . Note that in the following description, the ChC control circuit 267c may be abbreviated as "transfer circuit ChC" for convenience.

Next, the total transfer size (for example, 256 bytes adjusted by the standard method (B)) is set in a predetermined data transfer register RGij, and the management counter CN is initialized to 64 (ST21). Furthermore, the data transfer operation via the transfer circuit ChC is set to the start state (ST22), and the preload operation is started based on the set value to the preload register RGij that defines the operation of the preloader 269 (ST23).

As a result, the preloader 269 then executes the necessary analysis processing for each instruction command that the CPU 241 writes to the transfer port TR_PORT, and when it detects an instruction command (TXLOAD) to read access the CGROM 260, the preloader 269 reads the texture. It is preloaded and saved in the preload area of the DRAM 278. Furthermore, the rewrite list DL' in which the source address of the texture has been changed is stored in the DL buffer area BUF' of the DRAM 278.

Note that timings t1, t3, and t5 in FIG. 139 actually indicate the operation timings of step ST23 in FIG. 157. However, also in this embodiment, if some abnormality occurs during the display list DL issuance process, the process of step ST25 or step ST27 is executed. Specifically, the operations of the data transfer circuit 267 and the preloader 269 are initialized, and the display list DL issuing process (ST20 to ST30) is re-executed to the extent possible. The initialization process of the preloader 269 includes erasing the incomplete rewrite list DL' and clearing the preload area in which newly preload data is stored.

[17-5. Modifications related to image production control and other modifications]

Although the case in which the preloader 269 is not made to function and the case in which it is made to be made to function have been described above in detail, the specific operation content is not particularly limited.
FIG. 160 shows an example in which the display list DL generated by the CPU 241 is issued to the drawing circuit 274 with a delay of one operation cycle rather than the generated operation cycle (frame period). In such an embodiment, the rendering circuit 274 can use almost the entire time of one frame period, reducing the possibility of frame drops.

Further, FIG. 161 shows an embodiment in which the display list DL generated by the CPU 241 is issued to the preloader 269 with a delay of one operation cycle rather than the generated operation cycle. In this case, the preloader 7269 can use almost the entire time of one frame period to perform the predoze operation, so the possibility of dropping frames is reduced in this case as well.

In addition, although the composite chip 250 is used in the description so far, it is not necessarily necessary to integrate the CPU 241 and the VDP circuit 250b into one element.
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the entire production control is controlled by a single CPU (CPU241), but the upstream CPU and the downstream production control CPU cooperate with each other to perform production control operations. may be executed.

FIG. 162 is a block diagram showing a schematic internal configuration of the production control section 24A' corresponding to such an embodiment. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the upstream CPU 241' (CPU in the chip 250c in the performance control section 24A') controls the sound performance, lamp performance, and motor performance. On the other hand, the CPU 300 on the downstream side (the CPU in the chip as the image control unit 250d that is included in the effect control unit 24A' and on which the VDP circuit 250 is mounted) controls only the image effect based on the control of the CPU 241'. There is.

In the case of adopting such a configuration, the CPU 300 does not need to execute the processing for effect control regarding sounds and lamps (particularly S2032 to S2042, etc.) explained with reference to FIG. It is possible to generate a display list DL, and it is possible to realize more complex and advanced image effects such as 3D (Dimension). In such a case, the display list DL becomes large, but in that case, the total amount of data in the display list DL can be adjusted to 512 bytes or more (N x 256 bytes) by adding a dummy command. Ru.

Further, since the operation of the downstream side CPU 300 is specialized for image production control, it is also possible to confirm that the drawing operation is completed after the display list DL is issued. The lower part of FIG. 148 shows an example of operation control in this case, and if the drawing operation is not completed even after the limit time is exceeded, the serious abnormality flag ABN is set and the process ends (ST32). In addition, since the processing of the downstream side CPU 300 is only image rendering control, it is possible to simply wait for the completion of the drawing operation in an endless loop.

When adopting such a configuration, the start condition determination (ST5) in FIG. 146 can be repeated for a predetermined period of time. Even with this configuration, if the delay in completing the drawing operation is not too long, the only problem that occurs is that there is a delay in switching between the display area (0) and the display area (1). That is, as in the frame period starting from timing T1+3δ shown in FIG. 163, when the display operation is repeated twice, a frame is dropped only in the first half, and a normal frame is displayed in the second half.

This point is the same when using a preloader, and the start condition determination (ST5') in FIG. 154 can be repeated for a predetermined period of time. If there is a slight delay, as in the frame period starting from timing T1+3δ shown in FIG. 164, frames will be dropped only in the first half, and normal frames will be displayed in the second half. However, if the completion of the drawing operation is significantly delayed, a complete frame drop will occur, similar to the frame period (T1+3δ to T1+4δ) in FIG. 138, and if this situation continues, the WDT circuit 251 will start. Therefore, after that, all or part of the effect control operation (only the image effect) may be abnormally reset. This point is the same even when the preloader is not used.

Furthermore, when the control operation of the CPU 300 is specialized for image production control, in an embodiment that employs DMA transfer, as shown in FIG. , it is determined whether the operation of the DMAC circuit 252 is completed (ST50' to ST52'). If any of the operations does not end normally, the operations of the data transfer circuit 267 and the drawing circuit 274 are initialized, and the same processes as steps ST53 to ST55 (ST55' to ST57') are executed. Ru. Note that in this case as well, it is preferable to re-execute the DL issuing process a predetermined number of times.

Incidentally, in the above, an embodiment has been described in which an index space having a horizontal size completely matching the number of horizontal pixels of each LCD 36 is constructed as the frame buffers FBa and FBb of the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S.
FIG. 166 illustrates this relationship for confirmation, and shows that the drawing area (W x H) on the virtual drawing space and the effective data area (actual drawing area W x H) on the index space are both , which corresponds to the number of horizontal/vertical pixels of the display device.

In such a correspondence relationship, the drawing operation in the virtual drawing space by the display list DL is not necessarily limited to the drawing area (W×H). By temporally moving the drawing position of the drawn image (W'×H') exceeding (W×H), the drawn content in the actual drawing area W×H shown by the downward diagonal line at the bottom of FIG. 167 can be adjusted. , it becomes possible to move it vertically/horizontally/diagonally as appropriate.

Further, in order to perform such an effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 167, an index space with a horizontal size W larger than the number of horizontal pixels of the LCD 36 may be provided. In this case, the drawing area W×H in the virtual drawing space defined by the instruction command L12 (SETDAVF) of the display list DL is set to be larger than the actual drawing area W×H corresponding to the number of horizontal/vertical pixels of the LCD 36. be done. Note that in the lower part of FIG. 167, the actual drawing area w×h is indicated by a diagonal line downward to the left.
The vertical and horizontal dimensions of the actual drawing area w×h are specified as the number of display lines and the number of horizontal pixels of the LCD 36 in the process of step SS30 in FIG. 145, and the upper left end point of the actual drawing area w×h is In step SS31, the vertical/horizontal display start position is set in a predetermined display register.

On the other hand, the base point address (X, Y) in the index space is set in a predetermined drawing register by the instruction command L11 of the display list DL. As explained above, specifically, the upper left base point address on the index space IDX is defined as (0,0), for example, by the environment setting instruction command L11 (SETDAVR). If the upper left end point of the actual drawing area w×h is moved appropriately, the drawing content of the actual drawing area W×H indicated by the downward diagonal line at the bottom of FIG. 167 can be moved vertically/horizontally/diagonally as appropriate. become.

As mentioned above, the VDP register RGij related to steps SS30 to SS32 is set to be write-protected at the time of initial setting (second prohibition setting SS34), but at the timing of executing the above effect, the predetermined VDP register RGij is This prohibition setting is canceled by writing a cancellation value to register RGij.

Although various embodiments have been described in detail above, the specific contents of the description do not limit the present invention in any way. Although the pinball game machine is described for convenience, the present invention is suitably applicable to other game machines such as a spinning drum game machine.

The various examples described above can be combined as appropriate unless combinations are impossible.

Further, in the above example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) is used as the image display means, but other image display means such as an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display can also be used.

Here, the CPU 241 performs the history display process of step S2050, as shown in FIG. 133.
As described above, in the history display process of step S2050, the CPU 241 generates a liquid crystal control command for displaying the setting operation history (see FIGS. 54 and 55 and their explanations). In the case of a 1-CPU configuration, this liquid crystal control command is analyzed in the command analysis process in step S2027 (FIG. 133), and the CPU 241 creates a display list DL in step S2061 or updates the created display list DL according to the analysis result. Issue is performed to the VDP circuit 250b.
The VDP circuit 250b performs necessary drawing processing based on the issued display list DL, and the display circuit 270 displays the image instructed by the display list DL on the main LCD 36M.
Through this process flow, information on the setting operation history is displayed on the display screen of the main LDC 36M.

1, 1A Pachinko game machine 13 Performance button 16 Cross key 20 Main control board (main control unit)
201 CPU
202 ROM
203 RAM
24 Production control board (production control section)
241 CPU
242 ROM
243 RAM
36 Liquid crystal display device 38a, 38b Special symbol display device 40 Liquid crystal control unit 45 Decorative lamp 45a Optical display device 46 Speaker 46a Sound generator 61 Front door open sensor 94 Setting key switch 97 Setting/performance indicator 98 RAM clear switch Gs Setting history confirmation screen

Claims (1)

A control means for performing control processing regarding the game;
a storage means from which information can be read and written by the control means;
Storage information clearing means capable of executing a clearing process to clear information in the storage means;
Display means for displaying predetermined information calculated based on gaming results;
Display control means for controlling the display of the display means;
an image control means that issues a display list that specifies display content to be displayed on a display device that performs image display;
image generating means for completing predetermined image data in a predetermined first memory by a drawing circuit based on the display list issued by the image control means;
a second memory that stores various compressed data serving as basic data of the image data;
In the first memory, a configurable expansion space for expanding compressed data for a moving image is secured,
The expansion destination of the compressed data can be designated as the expansion space by a predetermined instruction command written in the display list,
The expansion space necessary for expansion of the compressed data is automatically generated as necessary,
The image generating means includes:
comprising a data transfer circuit that transfers configuration data of the display list received from the image control means in units of predetermined acquired bits to the drawing circuit in units of predetermined transfer bits;
The bit length of all instruction commands listed in the display list is configured to be an integer N (N≧1) times the acquired bit unit,
The display control means includes:
The gaming machine causes the display means to display an operation confirmation display for a predetermined period of time after the clearing process is completed.

Images